CivilGEOCivilGEO
GeoSTORMGeoHECRASGeoHECHMSCustomer StoriesKnowledge BaseProduct TutorialsEngineering Resources
Customer ReviewsCustomer StoriesCustomer VideosCase StudiesWall of LoveProductsKnowledge BaseProduct Tutorials
Training ClassesTraining WebinarsProduct TutorialsProductsKnowledge BaseAbout Us
Get SupportKnowledge BaseFeature RequestsEngineering ResourcesProductsCustomer StoriesAbout Us
About UsPrivacy CenterNewsBlogProductsCustomer StoriesKnowledge Base
Contact
Free Trial
CivilGEO Knowledge Base

GeoHECHMS

Watershed hydrology, rainfall-runoff, and basin modeling powered by HEC-HMS, integrated with ArcGIS.

118 articles · Generated August 16, 2026

Contents

  1. Getting Started & Project Workflow › GeoHECHMS Overview & Comparisons
  2. How is GeoHECHMS different than HEC-HMS?
  3. Getting Started & Project Workflow › Common Workflows
  4. Common HEC-HMS Workflows
  5. Getting Started & Project Workflow › Importing / Exporting Models
  6. Exporting a HEC-HMS Model to HydroCAD
  7. Importing a HydroCAD Project
  8. Importing a HEC-HMS Model
  9. Importing a HEC-1 Model in HEC-HMS
  10. Exporting Your Project to HEC-HMS
  11. Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans
  12. Current Plan Analysis (HEC-HMS)
  13. Multiple Plan Analysis (HEC-HMS)
  14. Scenario Summary (HEC-HMS)
  15. Delete Scenarios (HEC-HMS)
  16. Duplicate Current Scenario (HEC-HMS)
  17. Understanding HEC-HMS Scenarios
  18. Global Copy Command
  19. Getting Started & Project Workflow › Display & Element Properties
  20. HEC-HMS Element Display Properties
  21. Watershed & Subbasin Modeling
  22. Compute Slopes Command
  23. Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Watershed Delineation
  24. Delineate Catch Basins Command
  25. Subbasin Delineation
  26. Delineate Subbasins Command
  27. Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Subbasin Drawing & Assignment
  28. Georeferencing Subbasins
  29. Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Subbasin Editing
  30. Subbasin Table Edit Command
  31. Reshape Subbasins Command
  32. Split Subbasins Command
  33. Merge Subbasins Command
  34. Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Subbasin Properties
  35. Subbasin Data Command
  36. Hydrologic Properties
  37. Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Subbasin Computations
  38. Recompute Properties Command
  39. Compute Reach Parameters Command
  40. Compute Subbasin Areas Command
  41. Compute % Impervious Command
  42. Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Curve Numbers & Land Use
  43. Curve Numbers for Urban Impervious Areas
  44. Automated Curve Number Computation
  45. Loss/Runoff Methods › Canopy Methods
  46. Subbasin Data - Selecting a Canopy Method
  47. Loss/Runoff Methods › Surface Storage Methods
  48. Subbasin Data – Selecting a Surface Storage Method
  49. Loss/Runoff Methods › Infiltration / Loss Methods
  50. Subbasin Data – Selecting an Infiltration Method
  51. Compute Green Ampt Command
  52. Loss/Runoff Methods › Baseflow Methods
  53. Subbasin Data – Selecting a Baseflow Method
  54. Loss/Runoff Methods › Double Counting Impervious Areas
  55. Double Counting Impervious Areas
  56. Transform Methods (Unit Hydrograph) › Runoff Method Selection
  57. Subbasin Data - Selecting a Runoff Method
  58. Transform Methods (Unit Hydrograph) › SCS Unit Hydrograph & Peaking Factor
  59. SCS Hydrograph Peaking Factor
  60. Transform Methods (Unit Hydrograph) › Time of Concentration (TOC)
  61. Subbasin TOC Data - Selecting FAA TOC Method
  62. Subbasin TOC Data Command
  63. Subbasin TOC Data - Selecting SCS Watershed Lag Method
  64. Subbasin TOC Data Table Edit Command
  65. Reach Routing › Reach Drawing & Assignment
  66. Georeferencing Reaches
  67. Merge Reaches Command
  68. Automated Draw Reaches Command
  69. Reverse Reaches Command
  70. Draw and Assign Reaches Command
  71. Reach Routing › Reach Properties & Editing
  72. Reach Table Edit Command
  73. Reach Data Command
  74. Renumber Interconnected Reaches Command
  75. Reach Routing › Routing Method Selection
  76. Reach Data - Selecting a Routing Method
  77. Reach Routing › Loss/Gain Methods
  78. Reach Data - Selecting a Loss/Gain Method
  79. Reach Routing › Connect Downstream
  80. Connect Downstream Command
  81. Hydrologic Elements › Junctions
  82. Junction Data Command
  83. Renumber Interconnected Junctions Command
  84. Georeference Junctions Command
  85. Draw and Assign Junctions Command
  86. Hydrologic Elements › Sources
  87. Source Data Command
  88. Georeferencing Sources
  89. Draw and Assign Sources Command
  90. Hydrologic Elements › Sinks
  91. Sink Data Command
  92. Georeferencing Sinks
  93. Draw and Assign Sinks Command
  94. Hydrologic Elements › Diversions
  95. Diversion Data - Selecting a Diversion Method
  96. Renumber Interconnected Diversions Command
  97. Georeferencing Diversions
  98. Draw and Assign Diversions Command
  99. Hydrologic Elements › Reservoirs / Storage Areas
  100. Storage Area Data Command (HEC-HMS)
  101. Defining Spillways for HEC-HMS Storage Areas
  102. Defining Dam Crest Geometry for HEC-HMS Storage Areas
  103. Defining Dam Breach for HEC-HMS Storage Areas
  104. Defining Culverts for HEC-HMS Storage Areas
  105. Defining Outflow Routing for HEC-HMS Storage Areas
  106. Defining HEC-HMS Storage Areas
  107. Assigning HEC-HMS Storage Areas
  108. Drawing HEC-HMS Storage Areas
  109. Meteorology & Precipitation › Rain Gages
  110. Rain Gage Data Command (GeoHECHMS)
  111. Precipitation Type - Rain Gage
  112. Meteorology & Precipitation › Precipitation Methods
  113. Precipitation Type - Rainfall Distribution
  114. Precipitation Type - Standard Project Storm
  115. Precipitation Type - Specified Hyetograph
  116. Precipitation Type - SCS Storm
  117. Precipitation Type - Inverse Distance Weighted
  118. Precipitation Type - HMR52 Storm
  119. Precipitation Type - Frequency Storm
  120. Meteorology & Precipitation › Rainfall Lookup & Critical Storm
  121. Compute Critical Storm Command
  122. Lookup Rainfall Command (GeoHECHMS)
  123. Meteorology & Precipitation › Meteorology Data
  124. Meteorology Data Command
  125. HEC-HMS Model Components
  126. HEC-HMS Hydrology Methods
  127. Cross Sections (HEC-HMS context) › Creation & Drawing
  128. Draw and Assign Cross Sections Command (HEC-HMS)
  129. Automated Draw Cross Sections Command (HEC-HMS)
  130. HEC-HMS Cross Sections
  131. Cross Sections (HEC-HMS context) › Editing & Extraction
  132. Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (HEC-HMS)
  133. Cross Sections (HEC-HMS context) › Georeferencing & Renumbering
  134. Georeference Cross Sections Command (HEC-HMS)
  135. Computational Analysis & Output › Computational Options
  136. Computational Options Command
  137. Computational Analysis & Output › Control Specifications
  138. Control Specifications Command
  139. Computational Analysis & Output › Plot Hydrographs
  140. Plot Hydrographs Command
  141. Computational Analysis & Output › DSS Data
  142. Data Storage Descriptors in HEC-DSS
  143. DSS Data File & Path
  144. Computational Analysis & Output › Result Summary
  145. Result Summary Command
  146. Computational Analysis & Output › Reports
  147. Generate Report Command
  148. Generate Report - Editing Project Map
  149. Integration & Imports › Linking to HEC-RAS
  150. Linking Flow Data from HEC-HMS to RAS
  151. Integration & Imports › Flow Paths
  152. Upstream Flow Paths Command
  153. Draw and Assign Flow Paths Command
  154. Manning's Data & Roughness › Manning's Editing
  155. Assign Manning's Data (HEC-HMS)
  156. Editing Manning’s Data
  157. Troubleshooting & Editing › Restricted Web Services
  158. Troubleshooting Restricted Web Services
  159. Troubleshooting & Editing › Global Editing
  160. Global Edit Command
  161. Global Find Command
  162. Global Editing Command
  163. Troubleshooting & Editing › Elevation Assignment
  164. Assign Elevations Command
  165. Other › Pipe Network
  166. Export Pipe Network Command
  167. Import Pipe Network Command
  168. Other › Conflate Point Data
  169. Conflate Point Data Command (HEC-HMS)
Getting Started & Project Workflow › GeoHECHMS Overview & Comparisons

How is GeoHECHMS different than HEC-HMS?

GeoHECHMS is an easy-to-use 2D/3D graphical user interface data wrapper to the US Army Corps of Engineers HEC-HMS. It builds upon the HEC-HMS software and provides a single platform to rapidly construct and visualize a HEC-HMS stormwater model, saving engineer's time by finishing their work.

US Army Corps of Engineers HEC-HMS

GeoHECHMS is 100% compatible with the Army Corps of Engineers HEC-HMS. It provides advanced modeling and visualization, such as ability to work and visualize results on a live 2D or 3D map of your choice (Google Maps, Bing Maps, and many more) by using CAD technology licensed from Autodesk while also providing GIS features and functionality.

The Army Corps of Engineers HEC-HMS provides you with essential stormwater modeling capabilities, but lacks an easy-to-use graphical interface, CAD and GIS capabilities, 2D/3D capabilities, support for live maps, undo/redo, multiple document interface (MDI), and many other capabilities that are quite common today in other computer software. Earlier, engineers needed at least three separate applications—HEC-HMS, HEC-GeoHMS, and ArcGIS—to get even close to what GeoHECHMS provides with ease.

Following is the list of additional functionalities that GeoHECHMS provides to the Army Corps of Engineers HEC-HMS software:

  • Import a variety of different data quickly and easily – Import existing Army Corps HEC-HMS models and quickly georeference them to real-world maps using included georeferencing tools.
  • CAD & GIS Integration – Integrate HEC-HMS directly with AutoCAD (including AutoCAD Civil 3D), Bentley MicroStation and ESRI ArcGIS terrain data. Export completed HEC-HMS models and results to AutoCAD, MicroStation and ArcGIS.
  • Work Directly on the Map – Blend Google or Microsoft Bing online maps and high-resolution aerial imagery files directly into the HEC-HMS model. Quickly and easily georeference existing HEC-HMS models to background maps, AutoCAD and MicroStation drawings, or ArcGIS map data.
  • Automated HEC-HMS Workflows – Speed up stormwater projects with automated workflows to automatically delineate watersheds, compute curve numbers (CN), compute TOC & lag times, compute % impervious, assign design storms, size detention ponds, and generate engineering reports.
  • Purpose-Built Stormwater Design Tools – Integrated stormwater design tools offer more efficient ways to create and analyze a stormwater project, size and design detention ponds, analyze dam failures and more. Update subbasin catchment boundaries dynamically as terrain data is changed. Quickly define detention ponds and outlet structures using specialized stormwater tools.
  • Automated Watershed Delineation – Automatically delineate subbasins and watersheds from digital terrain models, such as AutoCAD Civil 3D surfaces, MicroStation surfaces, contours, TINs, DTMs, DEMs, survey points, LiDAR, and other external digital elevation terrain data.
  • Automated CN & Green Ampt Computations – Quickly compute composite SCS curve numbers (CN), Green Ampt and percent imperviousness based upon aerial mapping, GIS polygon land use, or just by painting regions of land use on the screen. The software will automatically compute a weighted average of the different land uses and assign it to each subbasin.
  • Automated TOC & Lag Time – Rapidly compute SCS time of concentration and lag time using flow segments of sheet flow, shallow concentrated flow and channel flow. The software will automatically compute overland flow lengths, slopes and travel times based upon digital terrain surfaces and land use coverages.
  • Complete Land Use Coverage – Complete land use coverage is provided for USA, Canada, Europe, Australia and many other parts of the world. This makes it extremely easy to compute composite curve numbers, time of concentrations, lag times and more.
  • Complete Imperviousness Coverage – Complete percent imperviousness coverage is provided for the USA, Europe, Australia and many other parts of the world. This allows a more accurate stormwater model to be developed, allowing urbanization effects to be directly incorporated into the stormwater model.
  • Integrated Cloud-Based Mapping – Utilize world-wide high-resolution 3D digital elevation terrain data from map services for automated watershed delineation, computation of time of concentration and lag time. Utilize web-based mapping services for aerial orthophotos, FEMA flood maps, watershed delineation, river centerline alignment, and more.
  • Digital Terrain Cross Section Cutting – Extract HEC-HMS routing reach cross sections from 3D digital elevation terrain data. Utilize AutoCAD Civil 3D surfaces, MicroStation surfaces, contours, TINs, DTMs, DEMs, survey points, LiDAR, and other external digital elevation terrain data. Automatically convert the extracted cross section to an equivalent 8-point cross section.
  • Semi-Automated Detention Pond Design – Quickly size and design detention and retention ponds for different design storms and engineering criteria. Develop outlet structures for different scenarios, considering both water quality and design storm requirements.
  • Automated Design Storm Assignment – The software will automatically determine the design storm and corresponding precipitation based upon the project location anywhere within the USA, parts of Canada, Germany, Austria and other parts of the world. It will determine the design rainfall for the 1, 2, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, and 500-year storms by querying the associated Precipitation Frequency Data Server.
  • Automated Sequential Naming – For large models with numerous subbasins, routing reaches, junctions and other stormwater elements, the software will automatically name the elements based upon user-specified guidelines. The elements are named sequentially, by routing distance or incrementally.
  • Powerful Report Generation – Comprehensive, easy-to-read input data and output analysis reports are automatically generated using provided drainage report templates. Reports can be customized to meet reviewing agency requirements.
  • What-If Scenario Manager Analysis – Compare different engineering models, such as existing and proposed development, different detention pond designs and more. This allows stakeholders to evaluate alternatives, allowing you to consider more innovative and environmentally sensitive designs.
  • 2D & 3D Viewing and Editing – Shift seamlessly between 2D and 3D viewing perspectives to clearly identify modeling issues and make changes. Freely rotate, pan, zoom, and fly through the model to any perspective to review subbasins, detention ponds, routing reaches and more.
  • MDI Multiple Model Editing – Load, edit, and run multiple HEC-HMS models simultaneously. The Multiple Document Interface (MDI) allows easy copying and pasting between models, quick comparisons of input data and results between scenarios, and other modeling efficiencies. Models can be displayed in tiled windows or tabbed views, providing greater productivity.
  • Unlimited Undo and Redo – Correct mistakes easily with unlimited Undo and Redo capability. Experiment with different engineering and management decisions. Rollback changes one at a time or select a group of changes from a visual selection list.
  • Seamlessly Share Data with HEC-RAS – To improve productivity, the HEC‑HMS stormwater results computed within GeoHECHMS will seamlessly migrate to HEC-RAS. This greatly increases the speed at which users can perform HEC‑RAS flood studies, design bridge and culvert roadway crossings, compute dam failures, and complete stream restoration and alignment projects.
  • Powerful 64-bit, Multi-Core Support – Handle larger projects with powerful 64-bit, multi-core, parallel processing support. This improves performance and stability for memory-intensive tasks—including running HEC-HMS simulations faster.
  • Expert Technical Support – Toll-free unlimited technical support by experienced HEC-HMS stormwater modelers is just a phone call away. Quickly resolve your stormwater modeling questions and complete your engineering project—our skilled, professional engineers are here to assist you. Our technical support team is available 24-hours/day Monday-Friday, and by email on weekends
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Common Workflows

Common HEC-HMS Workflows

GeoHECHMS can simulate and analyze the hydrologic processes of a watershed. The common HEC-HMS workflows performed in GeoHECHMS are flexible and can be adapted to address specific hydrologic modeling needs based on the characteristics of the study area and the objectives of the analysis.

Following are some common workflows that can be performed using GeoHECHMS:

  • Watershed Delineation
    Based on topographic data and digital elevation models (DEMs), GeoHECHMS can delineate the boundaries of a watershed. This process helps in defining the spatial extents of the study area.
  • Rainfall-Runoff Modeling
    GeoHECHMS allows users to develop rainfall-runoff models to simulate the response of a watershed to precipitation events. It can incorporate various methods such as the Soil Conservation Service (SCS) Curve Number method, Unit Hydrograph theory, etc., to estimate runoff volumes and hydrographs.
  • Flood Routing
    GeoHECHMS offers flood routing capabilities to simulate the movement of water through river channels and reservoirs. It can utilize different routing methods like Muskingum-Cunge, Muskingum, and Lag routing to analyze the propagation of flood waves.
  • Reservoir Operations
    GeoHECHMS allows for the simulation of reservoir operations, including storage routing, flood control analysis, and determination of release patterns based on inflow forecasts, operating rules, and constraints.
  • Design Storm Analysis
    GeoHECHMS automatically determines the design storm and corresponding precipitation based upon the project location anywhere within the USA, Canada, Austria, and Germany. It will determine the design rainfall for the 1, 2, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, and 500-year storms by querying the Precipitation Frequency Data Server based on the project location.
  • Scenario Analysis
    GeoHECHMS facilitates scenario-based analysis by allowing users to evaluate the effects of various factors on the hydrologic response. This may involve investigating the impacts of land use changes, infrastructure development, etc.

In GeoHECHMS, different types of outputs help users to understand watershed behavior, evaluate the performance of hydrologic models, support decision-making processes related to water management and infrastructure design, etc.

Following is the list of common outputs that GeoHECHMS can generate:

  1. Hydrographs
    • Time series hydrographs of streamflow or discharge at specified locations within the watershed.
    • Peak flow rates and timing.
    • Rising and falling limb characteristics of the hydrographs.
    • Hydrograph comparison plots for multiple scenarios.
  2. Storage-Discharge Curves
    • Relationship between reservoir storage levels and corresponding outflow or discharge rates.
    • Spillway discharge rates and corresponding water levels.
  3. Infiltration Losses
    • Quantification of infiltration losses from rainfall.
    • Depth of water infiltrated into the soil.
    • Infiltration rates and their variation over time.
  4. Runoff Hydrographs
    • Simulated hydrographs representing the flow of water in rivers or channels.
    • Peak flow rates, timing, and duration.
    • Baseflow and direct runoff separation.
  5. Reservoir Operations
    • Reservoir storage levels and variations over time.
    • Reservoir releases and outflow rates.
    • Spillway discharges and flood routing through the reservoir.
  6. Project Summaries
    • Summary statistics (i.e., Generated Report) of simulated results, such as peak flows, volumes, durations, and lag times.
    • Error measures for comparing simulated and observed data.
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Importing / Exporting Models

Exporting a HEC-HMS Model to HydroCAD

The Export HEC-HMS to HydroCAD command of GeoHECHMS allows the user to export the current HEC-HMS project to HydroCAD input data files.

The following table details the conversions that will occur when exporting a HEC-HMS model to HydroCAD:

unknown node

Follow the steps below to export a HEC-HMS model to HydroCAD:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Export Data dropdown menu and then select the Export HEC-HMS to HydroCAD command.
    Export HEC-HMS to HydroCAD ribbon menu command
  2. The Export HydroCAD Project dialog box will be displayed.
    Export HydroCAD Project dialog box
  3. From the Select HydroCAD File Type to Export section, select either of the following options:
    • HydroCAD input data files: After selecting this option, click the [...] browse button to specify the directory and the file name for the HydroCAD data to be exported. By default, this option is selected.
    • HydroCAD archive (Zip) file: After selecting this option, click the [...] browse button to specify the directory and the file name. All the HydroCAD project input data files will be archived into a single ZIP file.
  4. From the Select Scenario (Plans) to Export section, select either of the following options:
    • All scenarios: Select this option to export all the scenarios contained within the model. By default, this option is selected.
    • Select scenarios: Select this option to export a specific scenario. Click the dropdown combo box adjacent to this option to select the corresponding scenarios to be exported.
      Select Scenarios (Plans) to Export - Select Scenarios dropdown
  5. When all the options have been properly defined, click the [Export] button to export the HEC-HMS project to HydroCAD input data files.
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Importing / Exporting Models

Importing a HydroCAD Project

The Import HydroCAD Project command allows the user to import HydroCAD input data files to a GeoHECHMS project. This is useful when an existing hydrologic model has already been developed in HydroCAD and needs to be transitioned into GeoHECHMS for further analysis, editing, or reporting. This eliminates the need to manually re-enter the model data from scratch.

unknown node

A HydroCAD model is represented by a network of the following types of nodes:

  • Subcatchment: A relatively homogenous area of land that typically drains into a reach or pond. Each subcatchment generates a runoff hydrograph.
  • Pond: A pond, swamp, dam, catch basin, manhole, drywell, or other impoundment that fills with water from one or more sources and empties in a manner determined by a weir, culvert, or other outlet device(s).
  • Catch Basin: A special type of pond that provides an insignificant amount of storage but otherwise has all the properties and capabilities of a pond.
  • Reach: A uniform stream, channel, or pipe that conveys water from one point to another and operates under open channel flow.
  • Link: A link may be used to 1) enter a hydrograph generated outside HydroCAD, 2) interconnect several routing diagrams, 3) scale a hydrograph, 4) split a hydrograph into two components for independent routing, or 5) define a fixed or tidal tailwater elevation.

The following table details the conversions that will occur when importing HydroCAD input data files to a GeoHECHMS project.

unknown node

Follow the steps below to use the Import HydroCAD Project command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Import Data dropdown menu and choose the Import HydroCAD Project command.
    unknown node
  2. The Import HydroCAD Project dialog box will be displayed.
    unknown node
  3. From the Select HydroCAD Project section, click the […] browse button to select the HydroCAD project file.
  4. The software will display the Import HydroCAD Project File dialog box. From the displayed dialog box, browse to the folder where the HydroCAD project file is located and select it. Click the [Open] button.
    unknown node
  5. The user will be returned to the Import HydroCAD Project dialog box, and the complete directory path and the file name will be shown in the HydroCAD Project File entry.
    unknown node
  6. Click the [Import] button to import the HydroCAD input data files.
  7. The imported HydroCAD model elements will be shown on the Map View, as shown below.
    unknown node
unknown node
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Importing / Exporting Models

Importing a HEC-HMS Model

The Import HEC-HMS Project command allows a preexisting HEC-HMS stormwater model to be imported and then displayed on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to use the Import HEC-HMS Project command.

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Import Data menu item and choose the Import HEC-HMS Project command.click the Import Data menu item
  2. The Import HEC-HMS Project dialog box will be displayed.Import HEC-HMS Project dialog box
  3. From the Select HEC-HMS Project section, click the […] browse button to select the HEC-HMS project file.
  4. The software will display the Import HEC-HMS Project File dialog box. From the displayed dialog box, browse to the folder where the HEC-HMS project file is located and select it. Click the [Open] button.Import HEC-HMS project file open dialog box
  5. After selecting the HEC‑HMS project file, you will be returned to the Import HEC‑HMS Project dialog box, and the complete directory path and the file name will be shown in the HEC-HMS project file entry.File name will be shown in the HEC-HMS project file entry
  6. From the Select Scenario (Plans) to Import section, select either of the following options:
    • All scenarios: Select this option to import all the scenarios contained within the model. (Note that by default, this option is selected.)
    • Select scenarios: Select this option to import the desired scenarios by selecting them from the Select scenarios dropdown combo box.Select scenarios dropdown combo box
  7. After specifying all the required details, click the [Import] button to import the HEC-HMS project.
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Importing / Exporting Models

Importing a HEC-1 Model in HEC-HMS

The Import HEC-1 Project command allows a preexisting HEC-1 data file to be imported and converted into a HEC-HMS model, and then displayed on the Map View.

Follow the steps given below to use the Import HEC-1 Project command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Import Data menu item and choose the Import HEC-1 Project command.Import HEC-1 Project - Input Ribbon Menu Command
  2. The Import HEC-1 Project dialog box will be displayed.Import HEC-1 Project dialog box

The below sections describe the Import HEC-1 Project command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting HEC-1 Data Files

This section allows the user to select a HEC-1 data file and a DSS file to be imported. The following options are provided:

  • HEC-1 data file: This field is used to select the HEC-1 data file to import. Clicking on the […] browse button displays the Import HEC-1 Project File dialog box. The user can select the HEC-1 data file. After selecting the file, the user will be returned to the Import HEC-1 Project dialog box, and the complete directory path and the file name will be shown in the HEC-1 data file field.
  • Associated DSS file: If the HEC-1 file includes ZR records for loading time-series data from a HEC-DSS file, then the user should specify the DSS file that contains the data. Clicking on the […] browse button displays the Import HEC DSS File dialog box. The user can select the DSS file. After selecting the file, the user will be returned to the Import HEC-1 Project dialog box, and the complete directory path and the file name will be shown in the Associated DSS file field.

    Note that without specifying the file, the user will have to manually connect to the time-series data.

Defining Associated HEC-HMS Component Names

This section allows the user to enter the name of the basin model, meteorologic model, and control specifications imported from the HEC-1 model.

Importing a HEC-1 Model

Once the user has specified the HEC-1 file name to import, and the names of the three components, click the [Import] button. The software will read the HEC-1 file and create the appropriate parts of the three components.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Importing / Exporting Models

Exporting Your Project to HEC-HMS

GeoHECHMS is a data wrapper to the HEC-HMS software. It is quite easy to export the HEC‑HMS project that the software generates. The Export HEC-HMS Project command allows a HEC-HMS project to be exported to HEC-HMS input data files. This allows the HEC-HMS project to be used with the US Army Corps HEC-HMS software.

unknown node


Follow the steps below to export a HEC‑HMS project:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Export Data dropdown menu and then choose the Export HEC-HMS Project command.Input Ribbon Menu - Export HEC-HMS Project Command
  2. The Export HEC-HMS Project dialog box will be displayed.Export HEC-HMS Project Dialog Box

The following sections describe the Export HEC-HMS Project command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting HEC-HMS File Type to Export

The Select HEC-HMS File Type to Export section allows the user to select the HEC-HMS file type to export. The following options are available in this section:

  • HEC-HMS input data files: Selecting this radio button option allows the user to specify the directory and the file name for the HEC‑HMS data to be exported. Clicking the [...] browse button displays the Export HEC-HMS Input Data Files dialog box where the available file types are “HEC-HMS Project Files (*.hms)”. After the user defines the HEC-HMS file name, the complete directory path and HEC-HMS project file name is shown in the adjacent string field.
  • HEC-HMS archive (ZIP) file: Selecting this radio button option allows the user to archive all the HEC-HMS project input data files into a single ZIP file. Clicking the [...] browse button displays the Export HEC-HMS Archive (ZIP) File dialog box where the available file types are “Archive File (*.zip)”. After the user defines the archive file name, the complete directory path and ZIP file name is shown in the adjacent string field.

Archive (ZIP) Export Options

This section is only enabled when the HEC-HMS archive (Zip) file radio button option is selected. The following options are available in this section:

  • Include associated elevation DEM files
    This checkbox option moves all the elevation DEM files that are contained in the Map Data Layers panel into the archive ZIP file.
  • Include output results
    This checkbox option moves all the HEC-HMS project analysis output files into the archived ZIP file.

Selecting Scenarios (Plans) to Export

The Select Scenarios (Plans) to Export section contains a radio button group that controls what plan data from the current HEC-HMS project file is to be exported. The following options are provided:

  • All scenarios: Selecting this radio button option causes all scenarios (or plans) contained within the current HEC-HMS project to be exported to equivalent scenarios.
  • Select scenarios: Selecting this radio button option allows the user to select a single scenario (or plan) contained within the current HEC-HMS project to be exported to an equivalent scenario.Select Scenarios Dropdown Menu

After specifying all the required details, click the [Export] button to export the HEC-HMS project.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Current Plan Analysis (HEC-HMS)

In order to create a HEC-HMS model and compute a model analysis, the following project modeling stages must be completed:

  1. Collect and organize data
    The first step is to collect and organize the required data for analysis, such as rainfall data, stream gauge data, land use data, soil data, and topographical data. It is important to ensure that the data is accurate, consistent, and in the correct format.
  2. Project setup
    Next, the user needs to set up the project in HEC-HMS by defining the watershed boundary, specifying the units of measurement, and setting the time interval for the simulation.
  3. Define basin characteristics
    The user then needs to define the physical characteristics of the watershed, such as land use, soil type, and topography. This information is used to calculate the runoff, which is a critical input for the model.
  4. Create hydrologic model
    The next step is to create the hydrologic model, which involves selecting the appropriate hydrologic method and defining the parameters of the model. Some of the supported hydrologic methods are SCS Curve Number, Green-Ampt, etc.
  5. Model calibration
    After creating the hydrologic model, it is important to calibrate the model using observed streamflow data.

Once the model has been calibrated, the user can compute the model analysis to generate the predicted hydrological response of the watershed. The output of the model includes a range of hydrological variables, such as rainfall, runoff, etc.

In GeoHECHMS, the Compute Analysis command is used to simulate the analysis for single or multiple scenarios (plan) of the model.

unknown node


Follow the steps below to compute the analysis of the current scenario:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, click the Compute Analysis dropdown menu and then select the Current Scenario option. Alternatively, press the [F5] key.
    Current Scenario command
  2. The Compute Analysis - Current Scenario dialog box will be displayed.
    Compute Analysis - Current Scenario dialog box
  3. The name of the scenario selected for analysis is displayed in the Scenario being analyzed read-only field. Once the analysis is performed, the elapsed analysis time will be displayed in the Elapsed analysis time read-only field.
  4. Click the [Compute] button to start the analysis.
  5. Once the analysis is done, the completion status will be displayed in the Analysis Progress read-only field as the Exit status.
    Analysis Progress
    Note: If the Exit status is equal to 0, it means the analysis is successful. If the Exit status is equal to -1, it means the analysis has failed, and the corresponding modeling error(s)/warning(s) will be displayed under the Analysis Progress read-only field.
  6. The user can click the [Copy to Clipboard] button to copy the computed analysis progress into the clipboard.

Similarly, the Multiple Scenarios command can be used to perform computations of multiple plans sequentially (one immediately after the other). Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about multiple plan analysis.

Once the analysis is computed successfully, the user can evaluate the results of the simulation to ensure that they are reasonable and consistent with the observed hydrological conditions.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Multiple Plan Analysis (HEC-HMS)

GeoHECHMS can perform analysis on multiple scenarios at the same time. This is useful, for example, when comparing 100-year or 500-year storm events.

The Multiple Scenarios command can be used to perform computations on multiple plans sequentially (one immediately after the other). The user can specify which scenarios to compute, and the order in which they should be computed.

Follow the steps below to use the Multiple Scenarios command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, click the Compute Analysis dropdown menu and select the Multiple Scenarios command.
    Input ribbon menu
  2. The Compute Analysis – Multiple Scenarios dialog box will be displayed. The user can select the scenarios to be analyzed and click the [Compute] button to allow the HEC‑HMS engine to perform the multiple scenario analysis.
    Compute Analysis - Multiple Scenarios dialog box
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Scenario Summary (HEC-HMS)

The Scenario Summary command in GeoHECHMS displays model information for all scenarios (plans) contained within the project. The current scenario plan and the corresponding basin model, meteorological model, and controls specifications are highlighted.

Follow the steps given below to use the Scenario Summary command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Scenario Manager dropdown combo box and select the Scenario Summary command.
    Scenario-Summary-HEC-HMS-image-1.png
  2. The Scenario Summary dialog box will be displayed.
    Scenario-Summary-HEC-HMS-image-2.png

Note that the above dialog box can also be displayed by clicking the [Summary] button of the Scenario Manager dialog box.

The following sections describe the model information presented in the Scenario Summary dialog box.

General Information

This section displays the project name (Project name), the project run file name (Project file name), and the directory path for the project (Project directory). The text area on the right displays the project description added by the user.

Scenario (Simulation Run)

This section displays Plan Name of all the scenarios within the project, including the associated Basin Models, Meteorologic Models, and Control Specifications in a tabular form. The current scenario of the project is highlighted.

Meteorologic Models

This section displays meteorologic models associated with the project. It consists of meteorological data (i.e., rainfall, distribution, etc.) that define the boundary conditions applied to the model.

Control Specifications

This section displays Control Specifications (i.e., start and stop times, time steps, etc.) associated with the project that are used in running the stormwater analysis for the defined model.

Current Plan Detailed Information

This section provides detailed information on the current scenarios, such as Element Details, Modeling Specifications, and Meteorology Data contained within the model.

Element Details

The Element Details panel lists all the elements (i.e., subbasins, reaches, junctions, storage areas, diversions, sources, sinks, etc.) that make up the HEC-HMS model.

Scenario-Summary-HEC-HMS-image-3.png

Modeling Specifications

The Modeling Specifications panel describes how the HEC-HMS model is setup.

Scenario-Summary-HEC-HMS-image-4.png

Meteorology Data

The Meteorology Data panel lists rainfall and other related boundary conditions that make up the HEC-HMS model.

Scenario-Summary-HEC-HMS-image-5.png
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Delete Scenarios (HEC-HMS)

The Delete Scenarios command in GeoHECHMS is useful for deleting data that is no longer relevant to a project and should not be included in a project submittal. Additionally, the function helps to compress the database by deleting data that is no longer in use, resulting in a smaller profile file size.

Follow the steps given below to use the Delete Scenarios command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Scenario Manager dropdown combo box and select the Delete Scenarios command.
    Delete-Scenarios-HEC-HMS-img-1.png
  2. The Delete Scenarios dialog box will be displayed. It comprises Scenario (Run) Data, Basin Data, Meteorology Data, and Control Specification Data of the HEC-HMS project.
    Delete Scenarios Dialog Box
  3. The user can select the checkbox(es) corresponding to the plan(s), basin model(s), meteorological model(s), and control specification(s) that need(s) to be removed from the HEC‑HMS project and then click the [Delete] button.
    Delete-Scenarios-HEC-HMS-img-3.png

Note that after the scenario data has been deleted from the HEC‑HMS project, it cannot be recovered with the Undo command. However, if the project is not saved, then the user can reload the project and the scenario data will still be present. Alternatively, if the project has been saved, then the project backup file can be used to recover the previous state of scenario data.

Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Duplicate Current Scenario (HEC-HMS)

The Duplicate Current Scenario command in GeoHECHMS allows the user to make an identical copy of the current scenario (plan). This copy is independent of and does not interact with the original after it has been made. The user also has the option to make a copy of the current basin, meteorological, and control specification data.

Follow the steps given below to use the Duplicate Current Scenario command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Scenario Manager dropdown menu and select the Duplicate Current Scenario command.
    Duplicate Current Scenario command
  2. The Duplicate Current Scenario dialog box will be displayed.
    Duplicate Current Scenario dialog box
  3. Enter the scenario name in the Scenario (run) checkbox entry field to create an identical copy of the current scenario (run). By default, the Scenario (run) checkbox is checked. If unchecked, then the Scenario (run) entry and Description fields are disabled.
  4. Enter the description in the Description field to describe the scenario.
  5. By default, the software utilizes the current scenario’s basin model, meteorological data, and control specifications for the duplicated scenario.
  6. Additionally, the user can check the Basin model, Meteorology data, and Control specification checkboxes to make identical copies of the current scenario’s basin, meteorological, and control specification data. Note that this is useful when creating alternative designs for comparison, such as when comparing detention and retention pond designs for different storm events.
  7. Click the [Apply] button, and a copy of the current scenario will be created.
    Click the [Apply] button

Note: When the Basin model checkbox is selected, the software creates copies of any paired data associated with the basin model and assigns each duplicated scenario its own unique paired-data references.

This behavior ensures that the original and duplicated scenarios remain completely independent. As a result, any changes made to the basin model or its associated data in the duplicated scenario do not affect the original scenario.

For example, as shown in the Storage Area Data dialog box, a storage area using the Elevation–Area storage method references an Elevation–Area curve (Elevation Area 01). When the current scenario is duplicated with the Basin model checkbox selected, the referenced elevation–area curve is also duplicated. The Elevation–Area curve dropdown list then displays both the original curve (Elevation Area 01) and a copied version (Elevation Area 01 – Copy (1)). The duplicated storage area is linked to the copied elevation–area curve, allowing users to modify storage characteristics in the new scenario without impacting the original scenario.

Data dialog box with duplicated paired data
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Understanding HEC-HMS Scenarios

GeoHECHMS provides the ability to work with multiple scenarios (or plans) within a single project. Each scenario associates a specific basin model, meteorological model, and set of control specifications with a specific condition or circumstance, such as pre-developed and post-developed phases of a project.

Elements of a HEC-HMS Project

A HEC‑HMS project is comprised of one or more scenarios (plans). Scenarios are formulated by selecting particular basin data, meteorological data, and control specifications.
HEC-HMS uses the following data (separate files) to construct a complete model within a scenario:

  • Basin data – Defines the geometry representation of the model.
  • Meteorology data – Defines the precipitation data.
  • Control data – Defines the configuration for start time, end time, and time interval.
  • Run data – References the above files when performing an analysis.

Elements of HEC-HMS Scenario

The Input ribbon menu shows the currently selected scenario and a description of the scenario.

Input ribbon menu

The ribbon menu dropdown combo box allows the user to quickly switch between scenarios. Moving from one scenario to another will cause the contents of the Map View to change to represent the geometry of the selected scenario.

Scenario Manager dropdown combo box

From the Input ribbon menu, expand the Scenario Manager dropdown combo box. It will display four commands: Scenario Manager, Duplicate Current Scenario, Delete Scenarios, and Scenario Summary.

Scenario Manager command

Scenario Manager

Selecting the Scenario Manager command will display the below dialog box. This dialog box displays the details of the currently selected scenario in the project.

Scenario Manager dialog box


The Scenario Manager dialog box is segmented into the following sections:

  • Scenario (Simulation Run)
  • Basin Model, Meteorologic Model, Control Specifications, and Model Calibration panels
  • Scenario Options

Each of these sections contains individual elements that are used to define the corresponding section data. The Scenario Manager dialog box is used to manage the basin data, meteorological data, and control specifications (i.e., basin, meteorological, and control files) associated with the current scenario. In addition, a new scenario, basin model, meteorological model, and control specification can be created, as well as copied from the existing one.

Scenario (Simulation Run)

The Scenario (Simulation Run) section allows you to create new scenarios as well as manage existing scenarios. The Scenario (run data) dropdown combo box lists all the scenarios in the project. The user can select the preferred scenario to view or modify its related data. The remaining sections of the dialog box will be updated based on the user’s selection.

Scenario (run data)

To create a new scenario, the user can select the Add New Scenario option from the Scenario (run data) dropdown combo box. Alternatively, the user can click the [New] button under the Scenario (Simulation Run) section. The default settings will be applied to the remaining sections of the Scenario Manager dialog box. The user can then specify the details for the basin model, meteorologic model, control specifications, model calibration, and other scenario options in their respective sections.

The user can click the [Copy] button to copy the current scenario plan to be further used in another scenario plan. The [Delete] button can be used to delete the currently selected scenario plan.

Scenario (Simulation Run) section

Basin Model

The Basin Model panel defines the network element data (i.e., subbasins, reaches, junctions, etc.) that define the physical model.

Basin Model data panel

The Basin data dropdown combo box lists all the existing basin models in the current project. Similarly, the Terrain surface and Map layers dropdown combo boxes list the existing terrain surfaces in the project and the corresponding map layers related to the selected terrain surface.

Note that the user can select the blank entry from the Terrain surface dropdown combo box to dissociate a terrain from the project.

Terrain surface and Map layers dropdown combo boxes

Any descriptive information about the basin model can be included in the Description text box area.

The user can select from the already existing basin models to apply to the scenario plan or click the [New] button to define a new basin model. The user can also copy the details of existing basin models by clicking the [Copy] button and later using this information in another basin model. To delete the selected basin model, the user can click the [Delete] button.

Meteorologic Model

The Meteorologic Model panel defines the meteorological data (i.e., rainfall, distribution, etc.) that defines the boundary conditions applied to the model.

Meteorologic Model panel

The Rainfall data dropdown combo box lists all the existing meteorological models in the current project. Any descriptive information about the meteorological model can be included in the Description text box area.

The user can define a new meteorological model, copy the details of an existing meteorological model to use in another meteorological model, and delete the selected meteorological model using the [New], [Copy], and [Delete] buttons, respectively.

Control Specifications

The Control Specifications panel defines the control specifications (i.e., start and stop times, time steps, etc.) that are used in running the stormwater analysis for the defined model.

Control Specifications panel

The Analysis data dropdown combo box lists all the existing control specifications in the current project. Any descriptive information about the control specification can be included in the Description text box area.

The user can define a new control specification, copy the details of an existing control specification to use in another control specification, and delete the selected control specification using the [New], [Copy], and [Delete] buttons, respectively.

Model Calibration

The following panel is used to define the model calibration data.

Model Calibration panel

This section describes the calibration data used for the HEC-HMS model:

  • Calibration type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the type of calibration to aid the simulation run. The following options are provided:

    1. None (default)
    2. Flow
    3. Precipitation
  • Calibration multiplier (ratio)
    The spin control defines the multiplication ratio to be applied to the data. By default, this entry is listed as 1.000. The spin control will go up and down in increments of 0.010.

  • Apply to subbasins
    This checkbox is enabled for both Flow and Precipitation calibration types. Checking this checkbox will apply the defined calibration multiplier to the subbasins.
  • Apply to sources
    This checkbox is enabled for only the Flow calibration type. Checking this checkbox will apply the defined calibration multiplier to the sources.

If the Flow option is selected, then the ratio will be applied to the outflow computed from the subbasin and source elements contained within the basin model before routing the flows downstream through the routing reaches. The same ratio is applied to each basin and source element throughout the basin model.

If the Precipitation option is selected, then the ratio is applied to the precipitation computed by the meteorologic model before the precipitation is applied to the basin model.

Scenario Options

The Scenario Options section allows the user to replace the missing time series data.

Scenario Options section

Checking the Replace missing time series data checkbox causes the software to substitute a zero value for the missing data values in the time series data during the simulation run. Note that if this option is left unchecked, any missing data will cause the simulation to stop, and an error message to be displayed.

Duplicate Current Scenario

The Duplicate Current Scenario command allows the user to make an identical copy of the current scenario (plan). Once the copy has been made, it is independent of the original and they do not interact.

To learn more about the Duplicate Current Scenario command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Delete Scenarios

The Delete Scenarios command allows the user to delete data that no longer applies to the project and should not be submitted as part of the project. The following types of data can be removed: Scenario (Run), Basin, Meteorology, and Control Specification.

To learn more about the Delete Scenarios command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Scenario Summary

In the Scenario Manager dialog box, clicking on the [Summary] button will display an informational dialog box that provides information for all scenarios (plans) contained in a project. It includes a complete summary of all the scenarios, basin models, meteorologic models, control specifications, and other details of the current plan.

Summary button

Alternatively, the user can view the scenario summary by selecting the Scenario Summary command from the list of Scenario Manager dropdown commands.

Scenario Summary command

To learn more about the Scenario Summary command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Multiple Plan Analysis

GeoHECHMS can perform analysis on multiple scenarios (plans) at the same time. It is useful, for instance, when comparing storms that occur once every 100 years or 500 years. Computations on the multiple plans can then be performed sequentially (one immediately after the other) using the Multiple Scenarios command.

To learn more about the Multiple Scenarios command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Displaying Multiple Scenario Results

After the computations have been performed, the software can display the results from multiple scenarios for all the HEC-HMS elements (i.e., subbasins, reaches, junctions, etc).

To view the output results, select the Plot Hydrographs command from the Results ribbon menu.

Plot Hydrographs command

The Plot Hydrographs window will be displayed.

Plot Hydrographs dialog box

The above window has separate panels (i.e., Subbasins, Storage Areas, Junctions, Reaches, etc.) to show output results for each HEC-HMS element type present in the project. Within each element type panel, the user can select the preferred scenario from the Scenarios dropdown combo box of the Select Items panel.

Subbasins data panel

The Variables dropdown combo box allows the user to select the desired output variables associated with an element type whose results are to be displayed.

Variables dropdown combo box

Note that the Variables dropdown combo box is not available in the Result Summary panel. The Result Summary panel displays the summary of the current HEC-HMS analysis results for each element (Subbasins, Storage Areas, Junctions, etc.) in tabular form.

All the elements (corresponding to the element type) present in the HEC-HMS model of the selected scenario will be displayed under the Elements section. The user can check the checkbox corresponding to the preferred element(s) from the Elements section to see output results associated with them. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick Elements] button to select the element(s) from the Map View. The user can click the [Clear Elements] button to clear the selected element(s). The output results related to the selected element(s) will be displayed under the Plots, Data Tables and Data Summary panels.

Plot Hydrographs dialog box
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Scenarios & Plans

Global Copy Command

The Global Copy command can be used to copy project elements from one scenario to other existing scenarios of the same project or between two separate (loaded) projects as long as the two projects have the same coordinate reference system (CRS).

This allows the user to quickly copy elements to other scenarios and create new models based on existing ones. This is particularly useful for engineers who want to study and visualize the effects of modifications made to a model. This helps an engineer make faster and better design decisions.

Using Global Copy Command in GeoSTORM

You can use the Global Copy command to copy these stormwater elements:

  • Cross sections
  • Manholes
  • Pipes
  • Roadway crossings
  • Roadway segments
  • Routing junctions
  • Routing reaches
  • Storage areas
  • Subbasins
  • Terminal outfalls

Using Global Copy Command in GeoHECHMS

You can use the Global Copy command to copy these HEC-HMS elements:

  • Cross sections
  • Diversions
  • Junctions
  • Reaches
  • Sinks
  • Sources
  • Storage areas
  • Subbasins

Note that when any of the above elements are copied, then the sub-elements associated with that element are also copied automatically. Hence, the tally for copied elements in the status panel might differ from selected elements.

This article describes the Global Copy command in GeoHECHMS. This command works similarly for the GeoSTORM software.

Follow the steps below to use the Global Copy command in GeoHECHMS:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Global Editing dropdown menu and select the Global Copy command. Global Copy command
  2. The Global Copy dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box allows the user to copy the selected elements to a target project. The target project can be the current project or any other stormwater project currently loaded. HEC-HMS Global Copy dialog boxNote that if there are no elements preselected on the Map View, then the Copy panel is disabled. However, the user can switch to the Find panel to select elements to be copied. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Find panel.
  3. From the GeoHECHMS (loaded) project dropdown combo box, select the target project where elements will be copied. GeoHECHMS (loaded) project dropdown combo box
  4. From the Basin model dropdown combo box, select the preferred basin model geometry of the target project. Basin model dropdown combo boxNote that if the current project is selected, then the current basin model geometry is excluded from the listing. However, when a different project is selected, then this entry defaults to the current basin model geometry for the loaded project.
  5. Optionally, check the Overwrite existing geometry elements checkbox option to overwrite existing geometry elements with the new geometry elements.
  6. Click the [Copy]. [Copy] button
  7. The copy element process will start. Once the process is complete, the Status panel will display the number of copied elements. Status pane
  8. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.
Getting Started & Project Workflow › Display & Element Properties

HEC-HMS Element Display Properties

In GeoHECHMS, you can change the display properties of the following HEC-HMS elements shown on the Map View:

  • Cross Sections
  • Diversions
  • Junctions
  • Reaches
  • Sinks
  • Sources
  • Storage Areas
  • Subbasin TOC / Lag Time Flow Paths
  • Subbasins
  • and more…

To view or edit the display properties of different HEC-HMS elements, follow these steps:

  1. In the Map Data Layers panel, click the […] Properties button next to the HEC-HMS layer.
    […] Properties button of the HEC-HMS layer
  2. The HEC-HMS Properties dialog box will be displayed.
    HEC-HMS Properties dialog box
  3. In the General Options tab, scroll down through the dialog box to see all the available display options. The following sections are available:
    • Subbasin Display Properties
      Use this section to configure the display properties of subbasin elements. A subbasin represents the drainage catchment that receives rainfall during a storm event.
      Subbasin Display Properties section
      You can configure display properties of these items:
      1. Subbasin: Turn display on/off.
      2. Subbasin symbol: Turn display on/off, change the size.
      3. Subbasin connection line: Turn display on/off, change the thickness, color and style.
      4. Subbasin border: Turn display on/off, change color, change line thickness and style.
      5. Subbasin IDs: Turn display on/off and change color.
      6. Filled-in subbasin: Turn display on/off, change color and transparency.
    • Subbasin TOC / Lag Time Flow Path Display Properties
      Use this section to configure the display properties of the subbasin TOC (time of concentration) and lag time flow paths. Typically, this flow path is the path that a drop of water would follow when travelling from the most hydrologically remote point to the outlet point of a catchment.
      Subbasin TOC / Lag Time Flow Path Display Properties section
      You can configure display properties of these items:
      1. Flow path: Turn display on/off, change line thickness and style.
      2. Flow path IDs: Turn display on/off, change color and location of the label.
      3. Flow path direction arrow: Turn display on/off and change color.
      4. Sheet flow segment color: Change color.
      5. Shallow concentrated flow segment color: Change color.
      6. Channel flow segment color: Change color.
      7. Zero travel time segment color: Change flow segments color through a reservoir, lake, pond, or other structure that has a zero travel time.
    • Junction Display Properties
      Use this section to configure the display properties of junction elements. Junctions function to combine stream flow from multiple upstream hydrologic elements.
      Junction Display Properties section
      You can configure display properties of these items:
      1. Junction: Turn display on/off, change color, change icon’s size, type, border, and border color.
      2. Junction IDs: Turn display on/off and change color.
    • Reach Display Properties
      Use this section to configure the display properties of the routing reaches. Reaches are used for defining conveyance links, such as pipes, ditches, streams, rivers, etc.
      Reach Display Properties section
      You can configure display properties of these items:
      1. Reach: Turn display on/off, change line color, thickness, and style.
      2. Reach IDs: Turn display on/off and change color.
      3. Reach direction arrow: Turn display on/off and change color.
    • Cross Section Display Properties
      Use this section to configure the display properties of routing reach cross sections. A cross section represents the geometry of the underlying terrain surface for the corresponding reach.
      Cross Section Display Properties section
      You can configure display properties of these items:
      1. Cross section: Turn display on/off, change color and location of the label.
      2. Cross section IDs: Turn display on/off and change color.
      3. Cross section direction arrow: Turn display on/off and change color.
      4. Roughness segments: Turn display on/off and change line thickness.
      5. Bank stations: Turn display on/off, change color, change icon’s size, type, border, and border color.
    • Storage Area Display Properties
      Use this section to configure the display properties of storage area elements. A storage area element is used to model the detention and attenuation of a hydrograph caused by a reservoir or detention pond.
      Storage Area Display Properties section
      You can configure display properties of these items:
      1. Storage area: Turn display on/off.
      2. Storage area symbol: Turn display on/off, change the size.
      3. Storage area connection line: Turn display on/off, change the thickness, color and style.
      4. Storage area border: Turn display on/off, change color, change line thickness and style.
      5. Storage area IDs: Turn display on/off and change color.
      6. Filled-in storage areas: Turn display on/off, change color and transparency.
    • Diversion Display Properties
      Use this section to configure the display properties of diversion elements. Diversion elements are used to model stream flow leaving (or diverted from) the main channel.
      Diversion Display Properties section
      You can configure display properties of these items:
      1. Diversion: Turn display on/off, change icon’s size, type, border, and border color.
      2. Diversion IDs: Turn display on/off and change color.
    • Source Display Properties
      Use this section to configure the display properties of source elements. Source elements are used to introduce flow into a basin model.
      Source Display Properties section
      You can configure the display properties of these items:
      1. Source: Turn display on/off, change icon’s size, type, border, and border color.
      2. Source IDs: Turn display on/off and change color.
    • Sink Display Properties
      Use this section to configure the display properties of sink elements. Sink elements are used to represent an outlet from the basin model—such as a discharge point into a HEC-RAS river model.
      Sink Display Properties section
      You can configure display properties of these items:
      1. Sink: Turn display on/off, change icon’s size, type, border, and border color.
      2. Sink IDs: Turn display on/off and change color.
    • Other Display Properties
      Use this section to configure the following display properties of text labels:
      Other Display Properties section
      1. Label auto scaling: Change the scaling of label size based on the zoom level.
      2. Text label size: Change size of text labels.
      3. Text label offset: Change distance of text labels from the item.
      4. Text label alignment: Change alignment of text labels with respect to the item.
      5. Stamp geometry polylines: Turn display on/off.
  4. After configuring the above display settings, click the [OK] button to apply them on the Map View.

Notes:

  • To restore the HEC-HMS elements to their default display settings, click the [Default] button.
  • To restore the HEC-HMS element labels to their default locations, click the [Reset Label Locations] button.

Modifying HEC-HMS Element Properties From the Ribbon Menu

HEC-HMS element properties can also be modified directly from the ribbon menu. Selecting a HEC-HMS layer in the Map Data Layers panel displays a dedicated Display Options ribbon menu, enabling quick and precise customization of its element properties.

HEC-HMS Display Options ribbon menu
Watershed & Subbasin Modeling

Compute Slopes Command

Computing subbasin slopes is a critical aspect of hydrologic modeling and watershed analysis. Some of the runoff methods being used in the stormwater project utilize the computed subbasin slope.

This article describes the computational method used to compute the subbasin slope and how the Compute Slopes command works in the CivilGEO software.

unknown node

Subbasin Slope Computational Method

When calculating the slope for subbasins, the software uses an elevation grid, or Digital Elevation Model (DEM), and applies an algorithm that divides the subbasin area into smaller grid cells. The slope of each grid cell is then calculated based on the rate of change in both the horizontal and vertical directions from the center of the neighboring grid cells.

The illustration below demonstrates how the algorithm computes the slope of a subbasin on a cell-by-cell basis, analyzing the cells from left to right and top to bottom.

Compute Slopes Command Algorithm
  • The algorithm of the software does not store the slope for every grid cell. Instead, a slope accumulator keeps track of the total slope, and a cell count accumulator counts how many cells have had their slope calculated.
  • The slope is only calculated in four directions (shown as blue lines in the illustration). The other four directions (grey lines) do not need to be calculated again because they were already processed in the previous row of cells.
  • Only the cells within the subbasin boundary are considered. Cells outside the boundary are skipped.
  • For each cell, the slope is calculated in all four directions, and the absolute value of each slope is determined. The slope can represent either an upward or downward gradient, but by taking the absolute value, the algorithm is only concerned with the steepness or rate of change, not the direction (up or down). For example, a slope of -5 (downward) and a slope of +5 (upward) both have an absolute value of 5, focusing purely on the steepness.
  • The direction with the steepest slope is assigned to the cell whose slope is being computed. This maximum slope value is added to the slope accumulator, and the cell count accumulator is increased by one.
  • The above algorithm is repeated for every cell in the subbasin.

For the above illustration, the following equations are used to compute the cell slopes:

Equations for Compute Slopes Command

Where, abs = Absolute slope value

Note: The subbasin slope is equal to the slope accumulator divided by the cell count accumulator.

Compute Slopes Command

Follow these steps to use the Compute Slopes command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Compute Slopes command.
    Compute Slopes Command
  2. The Compute Slopes dialog box will be displayed.
    Compute Slopes Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Compute Slopes command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Subbasins

The Select Subbasins section includes a table that lists all the subbasins contained within the current scenario.

This section is used to manually select subbasins from the Map View. If a subbasin is already selected on the Map View prior to running this command, the same subbasin will be shown selected within the table.

Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to interactively select subbasins from the Map View. Clicking on the [Pick] button will cause the dialog box to temporarily disappear, allowing the user to select subbasins from the Map View. Upon returning to the Compute Slopes dialog box, the total number of selected subbasins will be displayed in the Total selected entry.

Selecting Terrain Surface

The Terrain surface dropdown combo box lists all the elevation grids (i.e., DEMs) loaded in the project. Select the elevation grid to be used in computing the subbasin slope.

Computing Subbasin Slopes

Once the data have been defined in the Compute Slopes dialog box, click the [Compute] button. The software will then look at each subbasin selected and compute the average overland flow slope for each subbasin.

After the slopes are computed, the values will be shown in the Computed Slope (ft/ft) editable column, as shown below. The software also allows the user to modify these computed values.

Computing Subbasin Slopes

Once the slope is computed, all stormwater runoff methods that require a subbasin slope will have the data populated into the appropriate fields.

Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Watershed Delineation

Delineate Catch Basins Command

The Delineate Catch Basins command allows the user to delineate the drainage areas corresponding to selected catch basin inlets for the defined terrain surface.

Follow the steps given below to use the Delineate Catch Basins command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Delineate Catch Basins command.
    Delineate Catch Basins Command
  2. The Delineate Catch Basins dialog box will be displayed.
    Delineate Catch Basins Dialog Box

The following sections describe the Delineate Catch Basins command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Elevation Data

This section allows the user to select the elevation terrain surface. The Terrain surface dropdown combo box lists all the terrain surfaces that are already added to the project.

Terrain Surface Dropdown Combo Box

Defining Drainage Right-of-Way Using Roadway Centerline

This section allows the user to define the drainage right-of-way using the roadway centerline. The user can define the drainage right-of-way by manually drawing the roadway centerline or selecting the already drawn roadway centerline from the Map View.

To draw the roadway centerline on the Map View, follow the steps below:

  1. Select Define Drainage Right-of-Way Using Roadway Centerline radio button. Note that this radio button option is selected by default.
  2. Select the Draw roadway centerline radio button option and click the [Draw] button.
    Draw Roadway Centerline Radio Button Option
  3. The Delineate Catch Basins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  4. Draw the roadway centerline on the Map View. While drawing the roadway centerline, the user can use the [Ctrl] key for the straight segment.
  5. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  6. The Delineate Catch Basins dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Draw roadway centerline read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Draw Roadway Centerline Read-only Field
  7. The [Clear] button can be used to remove any previously defined roadway centerline in order to redo the process.

To assign the roadway centerline from the Map View, follow the steps below:

  1. Select the Assign roadway centerline radio button option and then click the [Pick] button.
    Assign Roadway Centerline Radio Button Option
  2. The Delineate Catch Basins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  3. Select the roadway centerline from the Map View.
  4. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The Delineate Catch Basins dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Assign roadway centerline read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.
    Assign Roadway Centerline Read-only Field
  6. The [Clear] button can be used to remove any previously selected roadway centerline in order to redo the process.

The Drainage right-of-way width input field allows the user to define the buffer value for the width of the roadways to compute the drainage area. Using this value, the software can detect the roadway centerline and maintain the correct drainage network. The following image represents a typical “Right-of-Way”.

Typical “Right-of-Way”

By default, the software uses a value of 200 ft. The user can enter the buffer value manually or click the […] button to measure the approximate right-of-way width that would be encountered from the Map View.

Defining Drainage Right-of-Way Boundary

This section allows the user to define the drainage right-of-way boundary. The user can define the drainage right-of-way boundary by manually drawing the polygon or selecting the already drawn polygon from the Map View.

To draw the drainage right of way boundary on the Map View, follow the steps below:

  1. Select the Define Drainage Right-of-Way Using Boundary radio button to enable this section.
  2. Select the Draw boundary radio button option and then click the [Draw] button.
    Draw Boundary Radio Button Option
  3. The Delineate Catch Basins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  4. Draw the drainage boundary on the Map View. While drawing the drainage boundary, the user can use the [Ctrl] key for the straight segment.
  5. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  6. The Delineate Catch Basins dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Draw boundary read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Draw Boundary Read-only Field
  7. The [Clear] button can be used to remove any previously defined right-of-way polygon in order to redo the process.

To assign a drainage right of way boundary from the Map View, follow the steps below:

  1. Select the Assign boundary radio button option and then click the [Pick] button.
    Assign Boundary Radio Button Option
  2. The Delineate Catch Basins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  3. Select the polygon from the Map View.
  4. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The Delineate Catch Basins dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Assign boundary read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.
    Assign Boundary Read-only Field
  6. The [Clear] button can be used to remove any previously selected right-of-way polygon in order to redo the process.

Defining Drainage Catch Basin Nodes

This section allows the user to define the catch basin nodes. The user can define the catch basin nodes by manually drawing the nodes or selecting the already drawn nodes from the Map View to assign them as catch basin nodes.

To draw the catch basin nodes on the Map View, follow the steps below:

  1. Select the Draw nodes radio button option and then click the [Draw] button.
    Draw Nodes Radio Button
  2. The Delineate Catch Basins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  3. Draw the catch basin nodes on the Map View.
  4. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The Delineate Catch Basins dialog box will be redisplayed, and the count of drawn inlet points will be shown in the Draw nodes read-only field.
    Draw Nodes Read-only Field
  6. The [Clear] button can be used to remove any previously defined catch basin nodes in order to redo the process.

To assign catch basin nodes from the Map View, follow the steps below:

  1. Select the Assign nodes radio button option and then click the [Pick] button.
    Assign Nodes Radio Button Option
  2. The Delineate Catch Basins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  3. Select the inlet points from the Map View.
  4. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The Delineate Catch Basins dialog box will be redisplayed, and the count of selected inlet points will be shown in the Assign nodes read-only field.
    Assign Nodes Read-only Field
  6. The [Clear] button can be used to remove any previously selected catch basin nodes in order to redo the process.

Computational Options

This section provides multiple options that affect the catch basin’s appearance and delineation process.

Computational Options Section

The following options are provided under the Computational Options section:

  • The Drainage contributing area entry field allows the user to define the extent of the drainage accumulation area. This is the area that must be amassed for runoff to be considered as gutter flow. By default, the software uses a value of 5000 square feet. The user can enter a different value for the drainage accumulation area or click the […] button to interactively measure the catch basin contributing area threshold from the Map View.
  • Checking the Computed drainage layer group checkbox allows the user to group the catch basin, drainage, and gutter flow layers into one layer group in the Map Data Layers panel. If this checkbox is left unchecked, the software will put the catch basin, drainage, and gutter flow layers separately in the Map Data Layers panel. The user can define the names of these layers by clicking the corresponding pen icons next to the layer name.
  • Checking the Delete previously computed layers checkbox causes the software to delete any previously computed drainage layers. By default, this checkbox is checked.
  • Checking the Smooth drainage boundaries checkbox causes the software to smooth the boundaries of delineated catch basins. By default, this checkbox is checked.
  • Checking the Smooth gutter flow alignments checkbox causes the software to smooth the gutter flow alignment network. By default, this checkbox is checked.
  • Checking the Merge adjacent drainage area checkbox causes the software to merge smaller adjacent drainage areas into a larger drainage area.

Computing Catch Basin Delineation

When all the options in the Delineate Catch Basins dialog box have been defined, click the [Compute] button. The delineation process will begin. On completion, the delineated catch basin network will be displayed in the Map View, as shown below.

Delineated Catch Basin Network Displayed on the Map View
Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Watershed Delineation

Subbasin Delineation

A subbasin represents the drainage catchment that receives rainfall during a storm event. In hydrology, a subbasin is used to represent the physical watershed.

A watershed could be defined as an area of land that drains all the streams and rainfall to a common outlet such as the outflow of a reservoir, mouth of a bay, or any point along a stream channel. The word "watershed" is sometimes used interchangeably with drainage basin or catchment.

Commands for Generating Subbasins

There are several commands available in CivilGEO software which allow the user to draw subbasins manually or automatically on the Map View. Some of the commands work only in the US.

Delineate Subbasins Command

This command uses the project’s local DEM gridded elevation data for the delineation process. It works globally and allows the user to automate the subbasin delineation process. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about how to use this command.

Delineate Watershed Command

This command uses the USGS WMS (Web Map Service) service and the NED (National Elevation Data) to automate the watershed delineation process. It computes the contributing watershed drainage network that drains to a selected map location (outlet point) on the Map View. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about how to use this command.

USGS StreamStats Command

This command works only in the US. It allows the user to click on a stream location in the Map View, prompting the software to delineate the watershed basin boundary, compute the basin characteristics, and provide estimates for flow based upon site-specific USGS regression equations. The software will generate GIS shapefiles containing the determined watershed boundary and basin characteristics, stream flow path, as well as PDF results report for the selected site. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about how to use this command.

Draw Subbasins Command

This command allows the user to interactively draw polygons on the Map View as subbasins. After drawing subbasins, the user can name individual subbasins with a unique ID. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about how to use this command.

Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Watershed Delineation

Delineate Subbasins Command

In CivilGEO's software, the Delineate Subbasins command delineates upstream drainage subbasins from user-selected locations, detailing the subbasin boundaries and upstream drainage tributaries that contribute runoff to the selected locations. If the selected locations are not on an existing stream, the locations are automatically "snapped" to the nearest stream, and then the corresponding subbasin is delineated.

unknown node

Note that this command is similar to the Delineate Watershed command of the Watershed ribbon menu. These commands are different, however, in that the Delineate Subbasins command uses the user's local elevation terrain surface while the Delineate Watershed command relies on the USGS WMS (Web Map Service) service and NED (National Elevation Data). To learn more about the Delineate Watershed command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

To use the Delineate Subbasins command, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Delineate Subbasins command.Select the Delineate Subbasins command
  2. The Delineate Subbasins dialog box will be displayed.Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-2.png

The Delineate Subbasins command operates in three stages, as illustrated below. At each stage, the Delineate Subbasins dialog box provides the user with different options.

Delineate Subbasins command stages

The below sections explain the above three stages and describe how to interact with the Delineate Subbasins dialog box.

Clip and Smooth Surface

At this stage, the software performs clipping, thinning, and smoothing of the terrain surface. The following Delineate Subbasins dialog box will be displayed at this stage.

Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-4.png


In the above dialog box, the user needs to specify the following:

Terrain Elevation Source

This section allows the user to select the elevation terrain surface. The Terrain surface dropdown combo box lists all the terrain surfaces that are already added to the project.

Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-5.png

Terrain Surface Processing Limits

This section allows the user to define the area extent of the terrain surface that will be used to process terrain data.

Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-6.png


The user can select from three available options, as described below:

  • Selecting the Elevation source extents option causes the software to process the entire terrain data.
  • Selecting the User-defined limits option allows the user to select a rectangular region of the terrain surface for processing terrain data.To select a rectangular region, follow the steps below:
    1. Click the [Pick] button.
    2. The Delineate Subbasins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select a rectangular region for processing the terrain data.
    3. Select a rectangular region from the terrain surface in the Map View. The Delineate Subbasins dialog box will be redisplayed. The status of the User-defined limits read-only field will change to Defined.Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-9.png
    4. The software will consider the selected rectangular region for processing terrain data.
  • Selecting the Assign clipping polygon option allows the user to select polygon shape regions from the terrain surface for processing terrain data.To select polygon shape regions, follow the steps below:
    1. Click the [Pick] button.
    2. The Delineate Subbasins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the clipping polygons.
    3. Select the clipping polygons on the terrain surface from the Map View. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
    4. The Delineate Subbasins dialog box will be redisplayed. The status of the Assign clipping polygons read-only field will change to Selected.Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-13.png
    5. The area underneath selected clipping polygons will be considered by the software for processing terrain data.

Terrain Surface Thinning Options

This section allows the user to define the cell size that will be used for thinning the terrain surface. The smaller the cell size value, the longer the processing time.

Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-14.png


The user can select from three available options to define the cell size, as described below:

  • Selecting the Compute optimal cell size option causes the software to use the default cell size value computed by the software. By default, the software selects this option.
  • Selecting the Define cell size option allows the user to manually define the cell size value. The user can use the spin control button to define the cell size value.
  • Selecting the Use terrain surface cell size option causes the software to use the default cell size value of the terrain surface.

Once all the options in the Delineate Subbasins dialog box are configured, click the [Next] button. The processing of the Clip and Smooth Surface stage will begin. On completion, the control will automatically pass to the Stream Delineation stage.

Stream Delineation

At this stage, the software analyzes possible pits, filters, and extracts dissolved pits, as well as locates possible trenches, and performs stream network delineation. The following Delineate Subbasins dialog box will be displayed at this stage.

Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-15.png


The software provides three options to choose from to perform stream delineation, as described below:

Automatic Stream Delineation

Selecting this option causes the software to automatically perform stream delineation using stream drop analysis.

Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-16.png


The Bridge width threshold input field allows the user to define the threshold value for the width of geographic obstructions such as roadways, bridges, and culverts that are burned on the terrain surface. These obstructions can affect the surface flow and break stream networks. Using the threshold value, the software can detect these obstructions and maintain the correct stream network. The user can enter the threshold value manually in the Bridge width threshold input field or click the [Measure] button to measure the threshold value of geographic obstructions from the Map View.

Checking the Smooth stream trenches checkbox causes the software to level the trenches found on the terrain surface. By default, this check box is checked.

Manual Stream Delineation

Selecting this option allows the user to manually select or draw polylines as delineated streams.

Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-17.png


The Manual Stream Delineation option is useful when the user wants the delineation process to be more precise. For example, the user can quickly "burn-in" streams along bridge or culvert connections where one is missing. The software will honor the manually drawn stream alignment and force the delineation to follow that culvert or bridge connection to show the actual water flow.

Example of using Manual Stream Delineation option

To assign already drawn polylines as delineated streams, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Pick] button.
  2. The Delineate Subbasins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the stream alignment polylines.
  3. Select the polylines representing the stream network on the terrain surface in the Map View. The status bar will display the count of selected polylines.
  4. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The Delineate Subbasins dialog box will be redisplayed. The stream count will appear in the Stream Polylines read-only field.Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-21.png
    To manually draw polylines as delineated streams, follow the steps below:
  1. Click the [Draw] button.
  2. The Delineate Subbasins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw stream alignment polylines.
  3. Draw the polylines representing the stream network in the Map View. The status bar will display the count of drawn polylines.
  4. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The Delineate Subbasins dialog box will be redisplayed. The stream count will appear in the Stream Polylines read-only field.
    Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-25.png
    Checking the Smooth stream trenches checkbox causes the software to level the stream trenches on the terrain surface. By default, this checkbox is checked.

Do Not Apply Stream Delineation

Selecting this option allows the user to skip the Stream Delineation stage. Select this option when the relevant elevation terrain surface already has a stream network burned on it.

Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-26.png

Once all the options in the Delineate Subbasins dialog box are configured, click the [Next] button. The Stream Delineation process will begin. On completion, the software will automatically proceed to the Watershed Delineation stage.

Watershed Delineation

This is the last stage of the delineation process. At this stage, the software performs multiple tasks such as forming stream network and drainage subbasins, smoothing subbasin boundaries, and computing subbasin hydrology. The following Delineate Subbasins dialog box will be displayed at this stage.

Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-27.png


In the above dialog box, the user needs to specify the following:

Watershed Delineation

This section allows the user to define the extent of the drainage accumulation area. This is the area that must be amassed for runoff to be considered as streamflow. Smaller values result in minor and major streams; larger values result in only major streams. By default, the software uses a value of 100 acres. The user can enter a different value for drainage accumulation area in the Subbasin contributing area input field or click the […] button to interactively measure it from the Map View.

Manually Define Subbasin Outlets

This section allows the user to manually draw outlets or select the already drawn outlets from the Map View. Select the Manually Define Subbasin Outlets checkbox to enable this section.

Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-29.png


Note that it is recommended to use the default settings. For example, if you specify the minimum subbasin area (Subbasin contributing area) to be too large and manually define the outlets, the smaller subbasins may not appear. The software discards the subbasins with smaller areas than the defined minimum subbasin area. As a result, rather than specifying large values for the minimum subbasin area, it is advisable to use the Merge adjacent subbasins option from the Computational Option section. If the subbasins still don't show up, it is better to go with the default settings and let the software automatically find the placement of subbasins.

To draw the outlets on the Map View, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Draw] button.
  2. The Delineate Subbasins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to place the outlet points.
  3. Click on the Map View to place downstream outlets points. The status bar will display the count of placed outlet points.
  4. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The Delineate Subbasins dialog box will be redisplayed. The count of drawn outlet points will appear in the Draw outlets read-only field.Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-33.png
  6. The [Clear] button can be used to remove any previously defined outlets in order to redo the process.

To assign outlets from the Map View, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Pick] button.
  2. The Delineate Subbasins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select outlets points from Map View.
  3. Click on the outlets on Map View to select them (selected outlets will be highlighted). The count of selected outlets will be displayed on the status bar.
  4. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The Delineate Subbasins dialog box will be redisplayed. The count of selected outlets will appear in the Assign Outlets read-only field.Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-37.png
  6. The [Clear] button can be used to remove any previously defined outlets in order to redo the process.

The user can define a threshold value for maximum distance to traverse for snapping the outlet point to the nearest stream in the Snap to stream distance input field. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to measure the threshold value from the Map View. By default, the software uses a value of 300 ft.

Computational Options

This section provides multiple options to affect the subbasin's appearance and delineation process.

Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-38.png


The following options are provided under the Computational Options section:

  • Checking the Results layer group checkbox allows the user to group the junctions, subbasin and stream network layers into one layer group in the Map Data Layers panel. If this checkbox is left unchecked, the software will put the junctions, subbasin, and stream network layers separately in the Map Data Layers panel. The user can define the names of these layers by clicking the corresponding pen icons next to the layer name.
  • Checking the Delete previously delineated subbasins checkbox causes the software to delete any previously delineated subbasins. By default, this checkbox is checked.
  • Checking the Compute basic hydrologic properties checkbox causes the software to compute the basic hydrologic properties of each delineated subbasin. By default, this checkbox is checked.
  • Checking the Compute detailed hydrologic properties checkbox causes the software to compute the detailed hydrologic properties of each delineated subbasin.
  • Checking the Smooth subbasin boundaries checkbox causes the software to smooth the boundaries of delineated subbasins. By default, this checkbox is checked.
  • Checking the Smooth stream alignments checkbox causes the software to smooth the stream alignment network. By default, this checkbox is checked.
  • Checking the Merge adjacent subbasins checkbox causes the software to merge smaller adjacent subbasins into a larger subbasin.
  • Checking the Fix junctions checkbox causes the software to accurately align the junction points towards the actual intersection point of the delineated subbasins. By default, this checkbox is checked.
  • The Subbasin Colorization section allows the user to define and edit the color scheme for delineated subbasins. The Scheme dropdown combo box allows the user to choose a subbasin colorization scheme from multiple color schemes listed under it.

Once all the options in the Delineate Subbasins dialog box are configured, click the [Next] button. The Watershed Delineation process will begin.

Delineate-Subbasins-Command-img-39.png

Note that the user can switch back and forth between completed stages and change their choices using the [Back] and [Next] buttons. To reset the entire delineation process, the user can click the [Reset All] button.

To learn more about the basic and detailed hydrologic properties computed during the Watershed Delineation stage, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

On completion of the Watershed Delineation stage, the delineated subbasins network will be displayed in the Map View.

Delineated subbasins network
Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Subbasin Drawing & Assignment

Georeferencing Subbasins

When the software imports a model, it automatically places the subbasins on the Map View. However, if the original model was not spatially georeferenced, the subbasins will not align with any loaded background base map. While the software can operate without any issues in this situation, the user may prefer to have the subbasins georeferenced to the background base map. Therefore, it may become necessary to georeference the imported subbasins.

The Georeference Subbasins command is used to manually georeference each of the subbasins to the background base map displayed in the Map View. The process of georeferencing subbasins to the Map View can be a trial-and-error process—especially when the exact location of the original subbasins is not known. Using the Georeference Subbasins command, the georeferencing process can be accelerated.

Follow the steps below to georeference an existing subbasin:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Drainage Subbasins dropdown menu and then select the Georeference Subbasins command.
    Georeference Subbasins Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Georeference Subbasins dialog box will be displayed.
    Georeference Subbasins dialog box
  3. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Subbasin ID dropdown combo box.
    [Pick] button
  4. The Georeference Subbasins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  5. Select subbasin on the Map View.
  6. The Georeference Subbasins dialog box will be redisplayed, and the selected subbasin will be displayed in the Subbasin ID dropdown combo box.
    Subbasin ID dropdown combo box
    Alternatively, choose the subbasin from the dropdown combo box adjacent to the Subbasin ID entry.
    Subbasin ID dropdown entry
    Note that if a subbasin has been preselected prior to running this command, the selected subbasin will be displayed in the Subbasin ID dropdown combo box.
  7. Click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.

Once the subbasin has been selected, the user can choose between the following options to georeference the subbasin.

  • Snap to Alignment Polyline/Polygon
  • Draw on Map View

Snap to Alignment Polyline/Polygon

If an existing river alignment centerline for the selected subbasin exists on the Map View, the Snap to Alignment Polyline/Polygon can be used to snap the HEC-HMS subbasin to the alignment polyline/polygon.

Follow the steps below to snap the subbasin to the selected alignment polyline or polygon:

  1. Choose the Snap to Alignment Polyline/Polygon radio button option and click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Select alignment polyline/polygon read-only field.
    Snap to Alignment Polyline/Polygon radio button option
  2. The Georeference Subbasins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  3. Select the alignment polyline or polygon on the Map View.
  4. The Georeference Subbasins dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Select alignment polyline/polygon read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.
  5. Click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.
  6. Click the [Snap] button.
    [Snap] button
  7. The software will snap the subbasin to the selected alignment polyline or polygon.

Draw on Map View

This section allows the user to draw the subbasin polygon on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to draw the storage area on the Map View:

  1. Choose the Draw on Map View radio button option and click the [Draw] button. Alternatively, turn on the Create curvilinear polygon checkbox option to draw the polygon using curvilinear segments.
    Draw on Map View radio button option
  2. The Georeference Subbasins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  3. Draw the subbasin polygon on the Map View.
  4. When drawing the subbasin polygon, click on a starting location on the subbasin outline and click on locations where the subbasin outline changes direction. While drawing the subbasin on the Map View, a rubber banding line will be shown to indicate where the subbasin is being placed. Finally, click an ending location for the subbasin outline.
  5. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu.

    Note that only one subbasin can be drawn at a time, although the user can revise the drawn subbasin by reselecting the [Draw] button.

  6. The Georeference Subbasins dialog box will be redisplayed.
  7. The software will automatically snap the subbasin accordingly.

Additional Georeferencing Options

This section contains the Assign polygon area as subbasin drainage area checkbox option. The user can turn on this checkbox for assigning the polygon area as the subbasin’s drainage area. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked when the dialog box is displayed.

Additional Georeferencing Options section
Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Subbasin Editing

Subbasin Table Edit Command

The Subbasin Table Edit command allows the user to edit the subbasin parameters in one dialog box for common hydrology infiltration and runoff methods. When the user selects this command, a modeless dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box contains a table with editable columns listing all the subbasins in the current scenario, along with the associated subbasin parameters. When the user selects a row in the table, the corresponding subbasin will be magnified on the Map View (if not visible) and highlighted. In addition, the user can select a subbasin from the Map View, and the corresponding row in the table will be shown selected.

Follow the steps below to use the Subbasin Table Edit command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Drainage Subbasins dropdown menu and then select the Subbasin Table Edit command.
    Subbasin Table Edit Command
  2. The Subbasin Table Edit dialog box will be displayed.
    Subbasin Table Edit dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Subbasin Table Edit command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Infiltration and Runoff Methods

The user can select one of the following infiltration and runoff methods from the Options backstage page. Upon selecting the infiltration and runoff method, the parameters displayed in the Subbasin Parameters table changes.

unknown node

Subbasin Parameters

In the Subbasin Table Edit dialog box, the Subbasin Parameters section contains a table with editable columns listing the subbasin parameters.

Subbasin Parameters section

Sorting the Subbasin Parameters Table

The data in the Subbasin Parameters table can be sorted by multiple columns. The user can sort the data by holding down the [Shift] key while clicking the Up or Down arrows in the column headers. This allows for multi-column sorting without losing the previous sort. The sorting order is determined by the sequence in which the column headers are selected.

Subbasin Parameters Table Sorting

Follow the steps below to sort the data by using multiple columns:

  1. Select the header of the first column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
  2. Hold down the [Shift] key, then select the header of the second column and click the Up or Down arrow to sort the second column.
  3. Repeat step 2 to sort the data of any additional column.

For example, first, select the Initial Abstraction column and click the Up arrow to sort the data in ascending order. Then, while holding the [Shift] key, select the Curve Number column and click the Down arrow to apply a secondary sort.

Subbasin Parameters Table Sorting

Copying and Exporting Subbasin Parameters

The data in the Subbasin Parameters table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using the right-click context menu commands, such as Copy, Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF.

Right-Click Context Menu Commands

Selected Cells Group Editing

The Selected Cells Group Editing section allows the user to edit multiple cells in the Subbasin Parameters table at once.

Selected Cells Group Editing

The user can select the required cells from the table and then edit the subbasin parameters using one of the following options:

  • No change: This radio button option is selected by default. When this option is selected, the data remains unchanged.
  • Add constant: This radio button entry allows the user to add a constant value to the existing data. The new value will be the sum of the previous value and a constant value provided by the user.
  • Multiply by factor: This radio button entry allows the user to multiply the existing data by a factor. The new value will be the product of the previous value and a constant value provided by the user.
  • Apply value: This radio button entry allows the user to replace the existing data with a new value. The new value entered in the adjacent entry field will replace all previous values.

After selecting the preferred option, click on the [Apply Change] button to update the new values in the cells.

Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Subbasin Editing

Reshape Subbasins Command

In CivilGEO's software, the Reshape Subbasins command allows the user to easily and quickly cleanup the watershed boundary for a single subbasin or between two adjacent subbasins.

unknown node

This article describes how to use the Reshape Subbasins command.

Reshaping a Single Subbasin

Follow the steps below to reshape a single subbasin:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Reshape Subbasins command.
    Reshape Subbasins command
  2. The Reshape Subbasins dialog box will be displayed.
    Reshape Subbasins dialog box
  3. From the Single Subbasin panel, click the [Pick] button under the Select Subbasin to Reshape section. The Reshape Subbasins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user to select the subbasin to be reshaped.
  4. Select the subbasin on the Map View to be reshaped.
  5. The Reshape Subbasins dialog box will be redisplayed. The status of the Pick subbasin read-only field will change to Selected.
    Pick subbasin read-only field

Draw Intersecting Reshape Polyline

This option allows the user to draw a polyline on the Map View that the reshaped subbasin should follow. The drawn polyline must intersect the subbasin two or more times. If both polyline endpoints are inside the subbasin, the intersecting area is added to the subbasin. If both polyline endpoints are outside the subbasin, the intersecting area is removed from the subbasin.

  1. Choose the Draw Intersecting Reshape Polyline radio button option and click the [Draw] button. Note that the Draw Intersecting Reshape Polyline radio button option is selected by default.Draw Intersecting Reshape Polyline radio button option
  2. The Reshape Subbasins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user to draw a trace polyline.
  3. Draw the reshape polyline on the Map View representing the change in shape for the selected subbasin. Then, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Reshape Subbasins dialog box will be redisplayed. The status of the Draw reshape polyline read-only field will change to Drawn.
    Draw reshape polyline read-only field
  5. Click the [OK] button.
  6. The software will reshape the selected subbasin.

Use Intersecting Trace Polyline

This option allows the user to select an already existing polyline on the Map View that the reshaped subbasin should follow. The selected polyline must intersect the subbasin two or more times. If both polyline endpoints are inside the subbasin, the intersecting area is added to the subbasin. If both polyline endpoints are outside the subbasin, the intersecting area is removed from the subbasin.

  1. Choose the Use Intersecting Trace Polyline radio button option and click the [Pick] button.Use Intersecting Trace Polyline radio button option
  2. The Reshape Subbasins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user to select the trace polyline that intersects with the subbasin to be reshaped.
  3. Select the trace polyline on the Map View.
  4. The Reshape Subbasins dialog box will be redisplayed. The status of the Pick trace polyline read-only field will change to Selected.
    Pick trace polyline read-only field
  5. Click the [OK] button.
  6. The software will reshape the selected subbasin.

Reshaping Adjacent Subbasins

Follow the steps below to reshape the subbasin boundary between two adjacent subbasins:

  1. From the Reshape Subbasins dialog box, select the Adjacent Subbasins panel.Adjacent Subbasins panel
  2. From the Select Adjacent Subbasins to Reshape section, click the [Pick]. The Reshape Subbasins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user to select two adjacent subbasins with a common boundary to be reshaped.
  3. Select two adjacent subbasins on the Map View to be reshaped.
  4. The Reshape Subbasins dialog box will be redisplayed. The status of the Pick two adjacent subbasins read-only field will change to Selected.
    Pick two adjacent subbasins read-only field

Note that the Draw Intersecting Reshape Polyline and Use Intersecting Trace Polyline options work similar to what is provided in the Single Subbasin panel. These options allow the user to either draw or select an already existing intersection trace polyline from the Map View.

After clicking the [OK] button, the software will reshape the common boundary of two adjacent subbasins along the intersecting trace polyline.

Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Subbasin Editing

Split Subbasins Command

The Split Subbasins command allows the user to split one or more selected subbasins into separate subbasin polygons using a cut polyline. When splitting subbasins, make sure that the cut polyline intersects completely through the selected subbasin polygons.

Split subbasin schematic diagram

Follow the steps below to use the Split Subbasins command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Split Subbasins command.
    Split Subbasins command
  2. The Split Subbasins dialog box will be displayed.
    Split Subbasins dialog box

The following sections describe the Split Subbasins command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Subbasins to Split

The Select Subbasins to Split section allows the user to select the subbasins to be split.

The user can click the [Pick] button to select the subbasins from the Map View. After selecting the subbasins, the Pick subbasins read-only field will display the number of selected subbasins.

Selecting Subbasins to Split

Alternatively, the user can preselect the subbasins on the Map View prior to running this command. Upon running the command, the number of preselected subbasins will be displayed in the Pick subbasins read-only field.

Defining Cut Polyline

The Define Cut Polyline section allows the user to either draw or select an existing cut polyline from the Map View.

The following options are provided for defining the cut polyline:

Draw Cut Polyline

The Draw cut polyline radio button option allows the user to interactively draw a cut polyline on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to draw a cut polyline on the Map View:

  1. Select the Draw cut polyline radio button option and then click the [Draw] button. Alternatively, check the Create curvilinear polyline checkbox to draw the cut polyline using curvilinear segments.
    Draw Cut Polyline
  2. The Split Subbasins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  3. Draw the cut polyline on the Map View. While drawing polylines, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between linear and curvilinear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about drawing elements on the Map View.
  4. After drawing the cut polyline, right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  5. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Draw cut polyline read-only field will change from Not Drawn to Drawn.

Pick Cut Polyline

The Pick cut polyline radio button option allows the user to select an existing cut polyline from the Map View.

Follow the steps below to select a cut polyline from the Map View:

  1. Select the Pick cut polyline radio button option and then click the [Pick] button.
    Pick Cut Polyline
  2. The Split Subbasins dialog will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  3. Select the cut polyline from the Map View. After selecting the cut polyline, right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Pick cut polyline read-only field will change from Not Selected to Selected.

After the cut polyline has been defined, the user can click the [OK] button. The software will split the selected subbasin(s) along the defined cut polyline.

Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Subbasin Editing

Merge Subbasins Command

The Merge Subbasins command is used to merge two (or more) existing subbasins as a single subbasin that shares internal polygon boundaries.

Notes:

  • When merging subbasins, non-geometric attributes (i.e., area, perimeter, etc.) are assigned from the first selected subbasins.
  • If the selected subbasins overlap or are adjacent to one another (share a common edge), then a single subbasin is created.

Follow the steps given below to use the Merge Subbasins command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Merge Subbasins command.
    Merge Subbasins watershed ribbon menu command
    Alternatively, the user can select the Merge Subbasins command from the Drainage Subbasins dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu.
    Merge Subbasins from Drainage Subbasins dropdown of input ribbon menu command
  2. The Merge Subbasins dialog box will be displayed.
    Merge Subbasins dialog box
  3. Click the [Pick] button adjacent to the Pick subbasin polygons field.
  4. The Merge Subbasins dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select subbasin polygons from the Map View.
  5. Click on the polygons representing the subbasins on the Map View to select them.
  6. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  7. The Merge Subbasins dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected polygons will be displayed in the Pick subbasin polygons field, as shown below.
    Pick subbasin polygons readonly field
    Note that if the subbasins polygon(s) have been preselected prior to running this command, the count of selected polygon(s) will be displayed in the Pick subbasin polygons field.
  8. Check the Compute basic hydrologic properties checkbox to compute the basic hydrologic properties of the selected subbasins. By default, this checkbox is checked.
  9. Check the Compute detailed hydrologic properties (optional) checkbox to compute the detailed hydrologic properties of the selected subbasins. By default, this checkbox is unchecked.
  10. When all the data have been defined, click the [Merge] button.
    [Merge] button
  11. The software will merge the selected subbasins into a single subbasin.

Note that if the user has selected the subbasins polygons that are not adjacent (or directly connected) to each other, the following informational dialog box will be displayed on clicking the [Merge] button.

Cannot Merge Subbasins informational dialog box
Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Subbasin Properties

Subbasin Data Command

Subbasins define the drainage area polygons that produce runoff to the other elements in the model. In GeoHECHMS, the Subbasin Data command allows users to add new subbasin and edit subbasin data in a project.

Follow the steps below to view or modify the subbasin data:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Subbasin Data command.
    Subbasin Data Input ribbon menu commandAlternatively, the user can either double-click on the subbasin polygon from the Map View or choose the Subbasin Data command from the Drainage Subbasins dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu.
    Subbasin Data command from the Drainage Subbasins dropdown menu
  2. The Subbasin Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Subbasin Data dialog box

The following sections describe the Subbasin Data command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Subbasin

The Select Subbasin section allows the user to select the subbasin for defining the subbasin data. The user can create a new subbasin, copy existing subbasin data to a new subbasin, and delete a subbasin. In addition, the user can navigate between subbasins and enter a description detailing the defined subbasin.

Select Subbasin section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Subbasin ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the subbasins that are defined in the project. The user can select the desired subbasin from the dropdown combo box. Click the pencil icon to edit the subbasin ID. The user can navigate between the previous and next subbasins using the up and down arrow buttons. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to select the subbasin from the Map View. Note that the up and down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) when the model contains only a single subbasin.
  • Description
    This text field allows the user to enter additional information to describe the selected subbasin.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to create a new subbasin. On clicking this button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user to draw a new subbasin on the Map View. Once finished, press the [Enter] key, or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. While drawing a subbasin, the user can press the [Esc] key to abort the creation of a new subbasin, which returns the dialog box to its previous state.

    The dialog box will be redisplayed. Next, enter the subbasin name in the Subbasin ID entry field and click the [Accept Changes] button. The software checks that the defined ID is unique. If not, a warning dialog box is displayed, and the user is then returned to the Subbasin ID field to change the ID.
    unknown node
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to copy existing subbasin data to a new subbasin. When this command is executed, the software automatically provides a unique default name for the duplicated subbasin. The cursor is then placed into the Subbasin ID. The user can go with the default name or enter a different valid and unique ID before moving on to add any other data.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete a selected subbasin and its associated data from the project.

Subbasin Specifications

The following sections describe the subbasin. Click on the dropdown selector at the Subbasin Specifications entry to display the various data panels that define the subbasin data.

Subbasin Specifications dropdown entry

General Specifications

This panel allows the user to define the infiltration, runoff, baseflow, surface storage, and canopy methods to be used for the current subbasin.

General Specifications panel

Note that the infiltration, runoff, baseflow, surface storage, and canopy methods are defined for the project in the Scenario Manager, which will be displayed automatically in the corresponding dropdown entries. However, the user can change the desired method for the selected subbasin from this dialog box. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Scenario Manager dialog box.

The following options are provided in this data panel:

  • Infiltration (loss) method
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the infiltration method for the selected subbasin. Infiltration methods are used to calculate precipitation loss due to infiltration. It is impossible to precisely predict infiltration in heterogeneous soil over commonly used modeling scales, such as hundreds to thousands of square miles. The dropdown combo box provides the following infiltration methods:
    1. None
    2. Deficit and Constant
    3. Exponential
    4. Green and Ampt
    5. Initial and Constant
    6. Layered Green and Ampt
    7. SCS Curve Number
    8. Smith Parlange
    9. Soil Moisture Accounting Loss
      unknown node

      Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about various infiltration methods and how to use them to compute surface runoff.
  • Runoff (transform) method
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the runoff method for the selected subbasin. Runoff (transform) methods are used to transform the excess precipitation (after the losses have been subtracted) into surface runoff (direct runoff). The dropdown combo box provides the following runoff methods:
    1. None
    2. Clark Unit Hydrograph
    3. Kinematic Wave
    4. SCS Unit Hydrograph
    5. Snyder Unit Hydrograph
    6. User-Specified S-Graph
    7. User-Specified Unit Hydrograph
      unknown node

      Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about various runoff methods and how to use them to compute surface runoff.
  • Baseflow method
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the baseflow method for the selected subbasin. Baseflow methods are used to represent contributions to subbasin runoff due to excess groundwater. Baseflow is comprised of runoff that infiltrates into the ground, flows down gradient or slope, and then reaches back on the land surface and flows back into small channels. The smaller channels merge into a larger channel, then into the stream and river and so on. The dropdown combo box provides the following runoff methods:
    1. None
    2. Bounded Recession
    3. Linear Reservoir
    4. Monthly Constant
    5. Nonlinear Boussinesq
    6. Recession
      unknown node

      Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about various baseflow methods and how to use them to compute surface runoff.
  • Surface storage method
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the surface storage method for the selected subbasin. Surface storage methods are used to compute precipitation losses due to local depressions in the ground surface, cracks and crevices in parking lots or roofs. The surface component is included to represent the ground surface where water may accumulate in surface depression storage. Selecting a surface method is optional and generally only used for continuous simulation applications. The dropdown combo box provides the following runoff methods:
    1. None
    2. Simple Storage
      unknown node

      Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about various surface storage methods and how to use them to compute surface runoff.
  • Canopy method
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the canopy method for the selected subbasin. The canopy component represents the presence of plants in the landscape. The dropdown combo box provides the following runoff methods:
    1. None
    2. Simple Canopy
      unknown node

      Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about various canopy methods and how to use them to compute surface runoff.
  • Drainage area
    This entry field defines the area of the selected subbasin. The user can either enter the value manually or click the [...] button to measure the subbasin area from the Map View. Clicking on the [...] button allows the user to draw a measurement polyline representing the outline of the subbasin area. However, initially the software will assign the area from the defined subbasin polygon. If the user graphically edits the subbasin polygon boundary, then the drainage area value automatically updates based upon the Recompute dimensions on element edits checkbox setting in the Options backstage page. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about the Options backstage page.

Clicking on the [Recalc] button causes the software to automatically update this field value with the corresponding subbasin polygon area. Similarly, the [Recalc All] button causes the software to update the subbasin areas for all subbasin polygon areas.

  • Downstream connection
    This entry field defines the downstream element that the selected subbasin drains to. Clicking on the [...] button allows the user to select the downstream element from the Map View. The following elements can be selected:
    1. Diversion
    2. Junction
    3. Reach
    4. Reservoir
    5. Sink

Note that a subbasin cannot connect to another subbasin.

  • Runoff (flow) adjustment ratio
    This spin control entry field allows the user to specify an adjustment ratio for calibrating the runoff from the selected subbasin. By default, the software uses a value of 1.00, meaning that there is no adjustment. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 0 to 1.

Computational Results

This section allows the user to see the analysis results for the current subbasin that was computed by HEC-HMS.

Computational Results section

DSS Data

This section includes an external DSS file for referencing the HEC-HMS computational results. It allows the user to easily copy the references and paste them into GeoHECRAS.

DSS Data section
  • DSS file name: This entry defines the external DSS file to be used for reading the data.
  • Data path: This entry denotes the data path within the DSS data file which contains the paired data.

Baseflow Data

The Baseflow Data panel is used to enter the data for the selected baseflow method for the defined subbasins. This panel is displayed when the Baseflow Data option is selected in the Subbasin Specifications dropdown combo box. Note that the Baseflow Data panel content changes based upon the baseflow method selected in the General Specifications section.

Baseflow Data panel


Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this panel.

Canopy Data

The Canopy Data panel is used to enter data for the selected canopy method for the defined subbasins. This panel is displayed when the Canopy Data option is selected in the Subbasin Specifications dropdown combo box. Note that the Canopy Data panel content changes based upon the canopy method selected in the General Specifications section.

Canopy Data panel


Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this panel.

Infiltration (Loss) Data

The Infiltration (Loss) Data panel is used to enter data for the selected infiltration method for the defined subbasins. This panel is displayed when the Infiltration (Loss) Data option is selected in the Subbasin Specifications dropdown combo box. Note that the Infiltration (Loss) Data panel content changes based upon the infiltration (loss) method selected in the General Specifications section.

Infiltration (Loss) Data panel


Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this panel.

Runoff (Transform) Data

The Runoff (Transform) Data panel is used to enter data for the selected runoff method for the defined subbasins. This panel is displayed when the Runoff (Transform) Data option is selected in the Subbasin Specifications dropdown combo box. Note that the Runoff (Transform) Data panel content changes based upon the runoff (transform) method selected in the General Specifications section.

Runoff (Transform) Data panel


Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this panel.

Surface Storage Data

The Surface Storage Data panel is used to enter data for the selected surface storage method for the defined subbasins. This panel is displayed when the Surface Storage Data option is selected in the Subbasin Specifications dropdown combo box. Note that the Surface Storage Data panel content changes based upon the surface storage method selected in the General Specifications section.

Surface Storage Data panel


Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this panel.

Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Subbasin Properties

Hydrologic Properties

Basin Hydrologic Properties Computation

After the subbasins have been delineated, the software computes the hydrologic properties (attributes) for each subbasin. The GIS hydrologic attribute variables are represented by square brackets (shown below), allowing the user to run queries on this data.

Basic Properties

The following hydrologic properties are always computed for subbasins, regardless of the detailed hydrologic properties checkbox option.

  • Basin area [BASINAREA]
    Area of the drainage basin.
  • Basin perimeter [BASINPERIM]
    Perimeter length the drainage basin boundary (divide).
  • Overland flow slope (mean) [OVRFLSLAVG]
    Computed by summing the slope of each cell within the subbasin, and then dividing by the number of cells within the subbasin. Reported as a decimal percent slope.
  • Overland flow slope (maximum) [OVRFLSLMAX]
    Computed by reviewing the slope of each cell within the drainage subbasin and returning the maximum value. Reported as a decimal percent slope.
  • Stream slope (average) [STRMSPLAVG]
    Average slope of all streams within the subbasin, from the top of each stream to where the stream exits the subbasin at the outlet. If more than one stream exists within a subbasin, then this value represents the average slope of the stream with the maximum flow length (i.e., STREAMFLOWLEN). Reported as a decimal percent slope.
  • Stream slope (maximum) [STRMSPLMAX]
    Maximum slope of all streams within the subbasin, from the top of each stream to where the stream exits the subbasin at the outlet. If more than one stream exists within a subbasin, then this value represents the maximum slope of the stream with the maximum flow length (i.e., STREAMFLOWLEN). Reported as a decimal percent slope.
  • Stream length (maximum) [STRMLENMAX]
    Computed by determining the flow distance traveled from the top of each stream within the subbasin and to where the stream exits the basin at the outlet. If more than one stream exists within a subbasin, then this value represents the maximum flow distance of the evaluated streams.
  • Stream length (total) [STREAMLEN]
    Computed by determining the flow distance traveled from the top of each stream within the subbasin and to where the stream exits the subbasin at the outlet. If more than one stream exists within a subbasin, then this value represents the summation of all flow distances of the evaluated streams.

Advanced Properties

The following hydrologic properties are only computed for the subbasins when you select the Compute detailed hydrologic properties checkbox as shown below.

Delineate-Subbasins-Dialog-Box-Compute-detailed-hydrologic-properties-checkbox-Image-1.png
  • Basin azimuth [BSNAZIMUTH]
    The compass direction of a straight line from the drainage subbasin outlet to the farthest point on the subbasin parameter. Reported as decimal degrees, measured clockwise from North at 0°.
  • Basin compactness ratio [BSNCOMPRAT]
    Computed as the ratio of the subbasin perimeter to the circumference of a circle of equal area (i.e., BASINPERIM / CIRCLEPERIM).
  • Basin elevation (mean) [BSNELVMEAN]
    Mean elevation within the subbasin, computed by adding up the elevations of each of the cells contained within the subbasin and then dividing by the number of cells within the subbasin.
  • Basin elevation (maximum) [BSNELEVMAX]
    Computed by reviewing the elevation of each cell within the subbasin and returning the maximum value.
  • Basin elevation (minimum) [BSNELEVMIN]
    Elevation of the cell at the subbasin cell.
  • Basin elevation (relief) [BSNELEVRLF]
    Elevation change contained within the subbasin, computed by BSNELEVMAX – BSNELEVMIN.
  • Basin elevation (relative relief) [BSNELEVREL]
    Normalized subbasin relief, computed by BSNELEVRLF / BASINPERIM.
  • Basin length [BSNLENGTH]
    Computed by measuring the distance in a straight line from the subbasin outlet to the farthest point on the subbasin parameter. Sometimes referred to as valley length.
  • Basin shape factor [BSNSHPFCTR]
    Computed by dividing basin length by basin width. Sometimes referred to as basin slenderness ratio.
  • Basin width [BASINWIDTH]
    Computed by dividing basin area by subbasin length. Sometimes referred to as valley width.
  • Overland flow distance [OVRFLWDIST]
    Computed by averaging the overland distance traveled from the centroid of each cell within the subbasin to the nearest stream within the subbasin.
  • Percent North facing [PRCNTNORTH]
    The percentage of the subbasin whose aspect is directed North, where North is defined as the positive Y direction. Reported as a decimal percent.
  • Percent South facing [PRCNTSOUTH]
    The percentage of the subbasin whose aspect is directed South, where South is defined as the negative Y direction. Reported as a decimal percent.
  • Stream density [STRMDENSTY]
    Computed as the total stream length divided by the subbasin area (i.e., STREAMLEN / BASINAREA). Reported as miles per mile² or km per km².
  • Stream order (Shreve method) [STRMORSHRV]
    Stream order computed by Shreve method of the stream at the subbasin outlet. This method of stream ordering by magnitude, proposed by Shreve in 1967. All links with no tributaries are assigned a magnitude (order) of one. Magnitudes are additive downslope. When two links intersect, their magnitudes are added and assigned to the downslope link.
    Shreve-Stream-Ordering-image-2-update
  • Stream order (Strahler method) [STRMORSTHR]
    Stream order computed by Strahler method of the stream at the subbasin outlet. This method of stream ordering was proposed by Robert E. Horton (1945) and Arthur Newell Strahler (1952, 1957). All streams with no tributaries are assigned a base order of 1 and the stream order only increases when streams of the same order intersect. Therefore, the intersection of a first-order and second-order link will remain a second-order stream, rather than create a third-order stream.
    Strahler-Stream-Ordering-Image-3
  • Stream first order [STRMFRORDR]
    Number of first order stream segments contained within the subbasin. This value is the same for either the Strahler or Shreve stream ordering method.
  • Stream sinuosity [STRMSNOSTY]
    Computed by maximum stream length within the subbasin divided by the subbasin length (STREAMLEN / BASINLEN).
  • Total flow length [TLFLOWLEN]
    Total flow distance within the subbasin, including both overland and stream flow.
  • Total flow slope (average) [TLFLSLPAVG]
    Average flow slope within the subbasin, including both overland and stream flow. Reported as a decimal percent slope.
  • Total flow slope (maximum) [TLFLSLPMAX]
    Maximum flow slope within the subbasin, including both overland and stream flow. Reported as a decimal percent slope.
  • Total flow slope ratio [TLFLSLPRAT]
    Computed as the average stream slope divided by the average overland flow slope.
  • Total stream length [TLSTRMLEN]
    Total length of all streams within the subbasin.

Stream Hydrologic Properties Computation

After the subbasins have been delineated, the software computes the hydrologic properties (attributes) for each stream. The hydrologic attribute variables are represented by square brackets (shown below), allowing the user to run queries on this data.

Basic Properties

The following hydrologic properties are always computed for the streams, regardless of the detailed hydrologic properties checkbox option.

  • Stream segment length [SSTRMLEN]
    Length of the stream segment.
  • Stream segment slope (average) [SSTRMSLAVG]
    Average slope of the stream segment. Reported as a decimal percent slope.
  • Stream segment slope (maximum) [SSTRMSLMAX]
    Maximum slope of the stream segment. Reported as a decimal percent slope.

Advanced Properties

The following hydrologic properties are only computed for the streams when you select the Compute detailed hydrologic properties checkbox as shown below.

Delineate-Subbasins-Dialog-Box-Compute-detailed-hydrologic-properties-checkbox-Image-4.png
  • Stream segment elevation (average) [SSTRMELAVG]
    Average elevation of the stream segment, computed by averaging the maximum and minimum elevation of the stream segment.
  • Stream segment elevation (maximum) [SSTRMELMAX]
    Maximum elevation of the stream segment.
  • Stream segment elevation (minimum) [SSTRMELMIN]
    Minimum elevation of the stream segment.
  • Stream segment elevation (relief) [SSTRMELREL]
    Elevation change along the stream segment, computed by SSTRMELMAX – SSTRMELMIN.
  • Stream segment order (Shreve method) [SSTRMORSHR]
    Stream order computed by Shreve method of the stream segment. This method of stream ordering by magnitude, proposed by Shreve in 1967. All links with no tributaries are assigned a magnitude (order) of one. Magnitudes are additive downslope. When two links intersect, their magnitudes are added and assigned to the downslope link.
    Stream-segment-order-Shreve-Stream-Ordering-Image-5
  • Stream segment order (Strahler method) [SSTRMORSTR]
    Stream order computed by Strahler method of the stream segment. This method of stream ordering was proposed by Robert E. Horton (1945) and Arthur Newell Strahler (1952, 1957). All streams with no tributaries are assigned a base order of 1 and the stream order only increases when streams of the same order intersect. Therefore, the intersection of a first-order and second-order link will remain a second-order stream, rather than create a third-order stream.
    Stream-segment-order-Strahler-Stream-Ordering-Image-6
Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Subbasin Computations

Recompute Properties Command

The Recompute Properties command is used to compute the hydrologic properties (attributes) of stormwater elements (subbasin polygons and reach polylines). Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about hydrologic properties.

Note that if the user has not delineated the subbasins using the Delineate Subbasins command before running this command, the software will prompt the user to perform those computations. Hydrologic properties of only those stormwater elements delineated using the Delineate Subbasins command are computed. To learn more about the Delineate Subbasins command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Follow the steps below to use the Recompute Properties command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Recompute Properties command.
    Recompute Properties Command
  2. The Recompute Properties dialog box will be displayed.
    Recompute Properties dialog box
  3. Click the [Pick] button to select the stormwater elements for computation of hydrologic properties.
    [Pick] Button
  4. The Recompute Properties dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user to select elements from the Map View.
  5. Click the elements on the Map View to select them.
  6. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  7. The Recompute Properties dialog box will be redisplayed. The Select elements read-only field will display the number of selected elements.
    Select elements read-only field
  8. The Compute basic hydrologic properties checkbox is used to compute the basic hydrologic properties of the selected elements. By default, this checkbox is selected.
  9. Select the Compute detailed hydrologic properties (optional) checkbox to compute the detailed hydrologic properties of the selected elements.
  10. Click the [Compute] button.
    [Compute] Button
  11. The software will compute the hydrologic properties of the selected elements. The progress bar at the bottom will display the progress of the execution gradually.

Note that if the user has selected polylines and polygons that do not have the necessary data fields for storing the hydrologic properties, the command will skip over those elements.

Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Subbasin Computations

Compute Reach Parameters Command

The Compute Reach Parameters command of GeoHECHMS allows the user to compute invert elevation, slope, length, and other parameters using reach alignment along the elevation terrain surface. These parameters are useful for quantifying the physical traits of reaches.

Follow the steps below to use the Compute Reach Parameters command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Routing Reaches dropdown menu, and then choose the Compute Reach Parameters command.Routing Reaches dropdown menu
  2. The Compute Reach Parameters dialog box will be displayed.Compute Reach Parameters Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Compute Reach Parameters command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Reaches

The Select Reaches section includes a table that lists all the reaches contained within the current scenario along with their elevations, lengths, and slopes.

This section is used to manually select reach(s) from the Map View. Clicking on the [Pick] button will cause the dialog box to temporarily disappear, allowing the user to select reaches from the Map View.

Upon returning to the Compute Reach Parameters dialog box, the total number of selected reach(s) will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.

Note that the user can also preselect the reach(s) from the Map View prior to running this command. If the reach(s) were preselected on the Map View, the same reach(s) will be shown selected within the table.

Extract Elevation Data

This optional section is used to define the elevation data source to be used for extracting the reaches. Depending upon the elevation data source type that is selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the types of terrain elevation data that can be used to construct reaches.

If the section checkbox is unchecked, then the Downstream invert elevation and Reach Slope options of the Compute Parameters section will be unavailable (i.e., grayed out). The software will only compute the reach length.

The user can also apply the elevation offset by enabling the Apply elevation offset check box entry. To lower the reaches for specific circumstances—a manhole bottom elevation, for example—define a negative offset value.

Compute Parameters

This section is used to compute the selected parameters for the reach. The Reach length checkbox is checked by default. The software automatically computes the reach length based upon the assigned polyline length.

Compute Parameters Section


If the user has checked the Extract Elevation Data checkbox section, the software will also allow the user to compute the following parameters for the reach:

  • Downstream invert elevation
  • Reach slope

Computing Reach Parameters

Once the data has been defined in the Compute Reach Parameter dialog box, click the [Compute] button. The software will then look at each selected reach and compute the chosen parameters.

Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Subbasin Computations

Compute Subbasin Areas Command

Subbasins define the drainage area polygons that produce runoff to other elements in the model. CivilGEO's software automatically calculates and assigns the drainage area for the subbasins from the defined subbasin polygon. The user can keep using the polygons or revise the polygons to represent the actual shape of the drainage area. If the user revises the subbasin polygons, then the drainage area value can be recalculated for the corresponding subbasins using the Compute Subbasins Areas command. This command allows the user to compute the drainage area of multiple subbasins simultaneously.

Follow the steps below to use the Compute Subbasin Areas command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Drainage Subbasins menu item and select the Compute Subbasin Areas command.Select the Compute Subbasin Areas command
  2. The Compute Subbasin Areas dialog box will be displayed.Compute Subbasin Areas dialog box
  3. Select the subbasins for which the drainage area needs to be calculated.Selecting subbasins to compute subbasin area
  4. Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to select the subbasins from the Map View interactively. On clicking the [Pick] button, the Compute Subbasin Areas dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar directing the user to select the subbasins. Select the subbasins from the Map View. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed. The number of selected subbasins will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.
  5. Once the subbasins are selected, click the [Compute] button. The software will compute the drainage area for the selected subbasins and update their drainage area values.[Compute] button
Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Subbasin Computations

Compute % Impervious Command

An impervious surface is a hard surface that prevents or stops water from entering the soil mantle or causes water to run off the surface in higher amounts or at a faster rate. Common impervious surfaces include rooftops, walkways, patios, driveways, parking lots, storage areas, concrete or asphalt paving, and gravel roads.

During stormwater modeling, impervious surfaces serve as one of the critical factors influencing the rainfall-runoff relationship in urban areas. Impervious surface increases the amount and speed of water entering rivers and other water bodies during a stormwater event and limits the amount of water that can soak into the soil. Impervious surfaces also affect water quality, streamflow, and flooding characteristics of local streams.

In GeoHECHMS, the below listed stormwater loss methods require the user to define the percent of land area that is impervious (e.g., concrete, asphalt, etc.):

  • Deficit and Constant
  • Exponential
  • Green and Ampt
  • Initial and Constant
  • Layered Green and Ampt
  • SCS Curve Number
  • Smith Parlange
  • Soil Moisture Account

Area of land that is impervious is assumed to have no infiltration losses and the loss method is applied only to the remainder of the area.

Within GeoHECHMS, the user can automatically compute the percent impervious value (i.e., percent of land area that is impervious) for each subbasin using the Compute % Impervious command. This command utilizes the USGS NLCD web map service data and/or the user-defined GIS polygon shapefile representing the impervious areas to compute the percent impervious value. Additionally, it allows the user to manually provide a default percent impervious value that will be assigned to the remaining areas not covered by NLCD and polygon layers.

unknown node

The software uses a grid approach to determine the composite imperviousness for each subbasin. In this approach, an internal uniformly spaced cell-centered grid is created to examine fixed points in the subbasins and investigate the corresponding NLCD imperviousness and GIS polygon shapefile value at each point. The grid is traversed row by row, investigating each cell within a row. After processing all the cells, the composite impervious parameter value for each subbasin is computed by the software. While determining the imperviousness value, the GIS polygon layer impervious value has the highest priority, followed by the NLCD impervious value, and then the default impervious value. The command also allows the user to compute intermediate results in the form of shapefile.

After computation, the software automatically populates the computed percent impervious value into the appropriate fields of each HEC-HMS stormwater loss method. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about HEC-HMS stormwater loss methods.

Follow the steps below to use the Compute % Impervious command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Compute % Impervious command.
    Compute Impervious command
  2. The Compute % Impervious dialog box will be displayed.
    Compute % Impervious dialog box

The following sections describe how to compute the % Impervious and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Subbasins

The Select Subbasins section lists all the subbasins contained within the current scenario.

The user can select the subbasins for which the percent impervious value is to be computed. If a subbasin is already selected on the Map View prior to running this command, the same subbasin will be shown selected within the table.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively select the subbasins from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the Compute % Impervious dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select subbasins from the Map View. After selecting the subbasins, the user can press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The software will accept the selection of the subbasin and then the dialog box will be redisplayed. The total number of selected subbasins will be displayed in the Total selected entry.

Selecting subbasins

Impervious Land Cover Data

This section consists of four data panels that are used to define the impervious land cover data.

NLCD Layer

This panel allows the user to utilize the USGS Percent Developed Impervious web map service to compute the percent impervious value for a subbasin.

The name (i.e., NLCD Urban Impervious) displayed in the NLCD map layer read-only field is the default NLCD layer name.

The NLCD impervious data source dropdown combo box allows the user to select which impervious data source to use. By default, the command utilizes the latest available impervious data source. The NLCD impervious data source dropdown combo box contains the following options:

  • NLCD Impervious 2021
  • NLCD Impervious 2019
  • NLCD Impervious 2016
  • NLCD Impervious 2013
  • NLCD Impervious 2011
  • NLCD Impervious 2008
  • NLCD Impervious 2006
  • NLCD Impervious 2004
  • NLCD Impervious 2001
    NLCD impervious data source dropdown combo box

If the “Overwrite existing data” checkbox option is checked, then the new impervious data selected in the NLCD impervious data source dropdown combo box will overwrite the existing impervious data (if one exists).

Note that for countries other than the USA, the NLCD Layer data panel will be replaced by the GMIS Layer data panel. The software will utilize the GMIS urban impervious database for computing % impervious values in these regions.

Polygon Layer

The user may have a GIS polygon layer that can be used to represent areas of imperviousness. By default, it is assumed that the polygon areas contained within the GIS polygon layer are 100% impervious. However, similar to the USGS Percent Developed Impervious web map service, the software also supports partial imperviousness.

Polygon Layer

Land use layer
This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS polygon layer included within the project.

Impervious value
This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the corresponding GIS shapefile field that represents the amount of imperviousness for each polygon area.

Value type
This dropdown combo box is used to determine how to apply the defined impervious value for computing the subbasin imperviousness. If the user specifies an impervious value in the above entry, then this dropdown combo box provides the following options:

  • Decimal Fraction
  • Percentage (default)

Default Value

This panel allows the user to define the default percent impervious value for the subbasins. By default, the software uses a value of 20 %. However, if desired, the user can change this value as needed.

Default Value

Intermediate Results

In this panel, the user can compute and save the intermediate results of the subbasin polygons in the form of shapefile. The Compute Intermediate Results checkbox option should be checked before computing the intermediate results. If Load intermediate results option is checked, then the software will create a % Impervious Intermediate Results layer in the Map Data Layers panel that will contain the intermediate results for the selected subbasin(s).

Intermediate Results

Computing Subbasin % Impervious

Once the required data has been defined in the Compute % Impervious dialog box, click the [Compute] button.

Computing Subbasin % Impervious

The software will then compute the percent impervious value for each of the selected subbasins. After the computation is done, the computed values will be shown in the Computed % Impervious editable column. The software also allows the user to modify these computed values.

Once the computation is done, all HEC-HMS stormwater loss methods that require the percent impervious value will have the data populated into the appropriate fields.

Computed Intermediate Results

After computing the % impervious with the intermediate results, the corresponding intermediate results of the subbasin polygons can be viewed in the % Impervious Intermediate Results layer under the Map Data Layers panel.

Intermediate Results
Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Curve Numbers & Land Use

Curve Numbers for Urban Impervious Areas

Curve numbers provide a practical way to estimate how much rainfall becomes runoff from a watershed or subbasin. In urban areas, the calculation deserves extra attention because rooftops, streets, parking lots, sidewalks, compacted soils, and storm drainage systems can quickly change how rainfall moves across a site.

Suburban neighborhood with rooftops, driveways, and streets that influence urban runoff curve numbers


unknown node

What is a Curve Number?

A curve number, commonly abbreviated as CN, is an empirical value used in hydrology to estimate direct runoff from rainfall. It ties together three major site characteristics: land use or land cover, the underlying hydrologic soil group, and the moisture or runoff condition assumed for the storm event. In most stormwater applications, CN values are treated as practical runoff indicators: the higher the CN, the greater the expected runoff potential.

The curve number method was developed by the USDA Soil Conservation Service, now the Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS), and became widely used because it gave engineers a practical way to estimate runoff from storm events using information that is usually available for a project: soils, cover, and drainage conditions. TR-55, first issued by the Soil Conservation Service in 1975 and revised in 1986, helped make the method especially familiar for small and urbanizing watersheds.

In simple terms, the curve number is not a randomly selected modeling input. It is looked up or computed from a combination of what is on the ground surface and what is underneath. A paved parking lot on soil with poor drainage will produce a much higher CN than a forested area on sandy soil. That is why the same rainfall depth can produce very different runoff results from two areas in close proximity to one another.

Why Urban Areas Need Special Treatment

Urbanization changes the natural water cycle by replacing absorbent ground with surfaces that do not allow much infiltration. Roads, roofs, parking lots, driveways, sidewalks, and compacted soils reduce infiltration and deliver runoff more rapidly to streams or drainage infrastructure. EPA summarizes this as a common hydrologic effect of urbanization: decreased infiltration, increased surface runoff, and faster delivery of runoff through storm drainage systems.

This is why curve numbers are so important in stormwater modeling. A site may look simple in plain view, but hydrologically it can behave very differently depending on whether runoff is allowed to spread across grassed areas or is routed directly into a storm drain. Recent urban hydrology research summarized by the USGS notes that roughly 90 percent of rainfall on impervious surfaces and drainage infrastructure can become runoff, which helps explain why developed watersheds can experience increased flood risk, water quality impacts, and reduced groundwater recharge.

unknown node

Data Used to Determine Curve Numbers

To determine a curve number, the software needs two main pieces of information: the land use or land cover and the hydrologic soil group. These two datasets are combined spatially, and the appropriate CN value is selected from standard curve number relationships for each land use and soil group combination.

For example, a grassy open space on a well-drained soil will usually have a lower CN than that same grassy area on a poorly drained soil. If the area is paved, the CN will be higher still because most of the rainfall becomes runoff. This is the central idea behind CN lookup tables: each land cover and soil group combination represents a different runoff response.

unknown node

Understanding Hydrologic Soil Groups

The NRCS classifies soils into hydrologic soil groups based on how easily water can move through the soil when it is wet. These groups have a direct impact on curve numbers because they describe the infiltration side of the runoff equation.

A helpful way to think about the progression is this: Group A behaves more like sand, where water can soak in quickly. Group D behaves more like clay or a shallow restrictive soil, where water is much more likely to remain near the surface and become runoff. Groups B and C fall between those two conditions.

unknown node

Dual Hydrologic Soil Groups: A/D, B/D, and C/D

Some soils are assigned dual hydrologic soil groups, such as A/D, B/D, or C/D. These are usually wet soils that behave like Group D soils in their natural, undrained condition because of a shallow seasonal water table. If those soils are adequately drained, they may behave like the first letter in the dual classification.

For example, an A/D soil can behave like Group A if it is adequately drained, but like Group D if it remains undrained. The first letter represents the drained condition, and the second letter represents the undrained condition. For this reason, it is important to confirm whether the project condition being modeled reflects drained or undrained soil behavior.

Connected and Unconnected Impervious Areas

In urban watersheds, it is not enough to know how much impervious area exists. It also matters how that impervious area is connected to the drainage system. TR-55 specifically identifies the percentage of impervious area and the means of conveying runoff from impervious areas to the drainage system as important factors in computing urban curve numbers.

Connected Impervious Areas

An impervious area is considered connected when runoff flows directly into a drainage system. This can include runoff flowing into a curb and gutter, storm sewer inlet, channel, pipe, ditch, or another defined drainage path. TR-55 also treats impervious runoff as connected when it travels as concentrated shallow flow across a pervious area and then enters the drainage system.

Connected impervious area example

Urban CN tables were developed for typical land use relationships using assumed percentages of impervious area. They also assume that pervious urban areas behave like pasture in good hydrologic condition and that impervious areas have a CN of 98 when directly connected to the drainage system. If those assumptions do not match the project site, a composite CN should be computed instead of relying only on the default table value.

Composite Curve Number with Connected Impervious Area

Unconnected Impervious Areas

An impervious area is considered unconnected when its runoff is spread over a pervious surface as sheet flow before entering the drainage system. This allows part of the runoff to slow down, infiltrate, or be filtered by vegetation before it reaches a gutter, inlet, or channel.

Unconnected impervious area example

TR-55 provides a separate procedure for an unconnected impervious area when the total impervious area is less than 30 percent. In that situation, the composite CN accounts for both the total impervious area and the ratio of unconnected impervious area to total impervious area. When the total impervious area is 30 percent or greater, TR-55 recommends using the connected impervious area relationship because the remaining pervious area is not expected to significantly reduce runoff.

The chart below shows the unconnected impervious area composite CN procedure used when the total impervious area is less than 30 percent.

Composite Curve Number with Unconnected Impervious Areas

Why This Distinction Matters

The difference between connected and unconnected impervious areas can affect the computed CN. TR-55 gives a simple example: a half-acre residential lot with 20 percent total impervious area and a pervious CN of 61 produces a composite CN of 68 if all impervious area is connected, but a lower composite CN of 66 when 75 percent of the impervious area is unconnected.

Rooftop Disconnection

Rooftop disconnection is a common example of an unconnected impervious area. Instead of directing a roof leader or downspout directly into a storm sewer, the discharge is routed onto a vegetated area. This gives runoff a chance to spread out, slow down, and infiltrate before reaching the drainage system.

When rooftop disconnection is allowed by the reviewing agency, it can reduce the amount of directly connected impervious area used in the composite CN calculation. However, this credit should not be applied automatically. Local plumbing codes, stormwater ordinances, separation distances, soil limitations, and grading requirements should always be checked before applying a rooftop disconnection credit.

Local requirements reminder

unknown node

Rooftop disconnection requirements vary by jurisdiction. Before applying a disconnection credit, confirm that the proposed discharge location, flow path length, slope, soil conditions, and setback requirements comply with the governing stormwater and plumbing requirements.

Common Rooftop Disconnection Checks

The following checks are commonly seen in local stormwater guidance. They should be treated as examples only; always follow the requirements of the governing jurisdiction.

  • The contributing roof area to each disconnected discharge point is limited, often to 500 square feet or less.
  • The receiving pervious area is not a hydrologic soil group D, or an equivalent very poorly draining soil.
  • The pervious flow path has a gentle slope, commonly 5 percent or less.
  • The flow path is continuous, vegetated, and free of intervening impervious surfaces.
  • The flow path remains separated from ground-level impervious areas, such as driveways and walkways, where required by local guidance.
  • Each discharge point has adequate energy dissipation or spreading, so the flow remains sheet flow instead of causing erosion or concentrated flow.

Example Partial Rooftop Disconnection Credit

Some local stormwater ordinances use a partial-credit relationship based on the length of the pervious flow path. The example below is representative of one commonly used approach and should be checked against local requirements before use.

unknown node

As an example, consider a 1,000 square foot roof served by two roof leaders, with each leader draining 500 square feet to a lawn area. If the receiving area has a hydrologic soil group B, a slope of 3 percent, and a 65 foot pervious flow path before reaching the street, the table above would treat 80 percent of the contributing roof area as disconnected under that example standard. The remaining connected portion would still be treated as directly connected impervious area.

Automated Curve Number Computation in CivilGEO Software

CivilGEO software can automate much of the curve number computation by combining land use or land cover data with hydrologic soil type data. The software evaluates each selected subbasin, overlays the land cover and soil group datasets, and computes the curve number based on the resulting land use and soil group combinations.

For United States projects, this workflow commonly uses online land cover data, such as NLCD, together with NRCS soil survey data. For projects outside the United States, available land cover and soil datasets may vary by country or region. Users can also bring in their own GIS polygon layers when more detailed local land use or soil data are available.

For site-specific projects, user-supplied GIS polygon data are often the best approach because the data can represent precise boundaries for rooftops, parking lots, roadways, landscaped areas, open space, and other important site features. Pixel-based land cover datasets can work well for regional studies, but they may not capture enough detail for smaller urban sites.

unknown node

In CivilGEO software, the Compute CN command can be used to automatically compute the curve number based on the underlying land use and hydrologic soil type data. To learn more about the Compute CN command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Intermediate Results and QA Review

A useful quality-check step is to review the intermediate land use and soil group combinations used by the software. When intermediate results are generated, each unique land use and soil group combination can be represented as a separate GIS polygon. This helps the modeler verify which land cover types and soil groups are driving the final composite curve number for each subbasin.

This is especially helpful for urban projects where small areas can have a large hydrologic effect. For example, a parking lot on Group C soil, a lawn on Group B soil, and a rooftop routed directly to a storm sewer may all exist in the same subbasin. Reviewing the intermediate results makes it easier to confirm that the final CN reflects the intended spatial data and assumptions.

unknown node

Practical Modeling Guidance

Curve numbers are simple enough to use efficiently, but they still require engineering judgment. The following checks can help avoid common mistakes:

  • Confirm that land use categories match the project condition being modeled, such as existing conditions, proposed conditions, or post-development conditions.
  • Use site-specific GIS land use polygons when a project requires more detail than an online land cover dataset can provide.
  • Verify hydrologic soil groups, especially where soils are disturbed, compacted, filled, drained, or mapped as dual hydrologic soil groups.
  • Do not treat all impervious areas the same. Determine whether impervious runoff is connected or unconnected to the drainage system.
  • Apply rooftop disconnection credits only when the site meets the governing jurisdiction’s criteria and local code requirements.
  • Review intermediate results when available to confirm that the spatial overlay and computed CN values make sense.

Conclusion

The curve number method remains popular because it is practical, familiar, and able to translate land cover, soil behavior, and drainage assumptions into a single runoff parameter. In urban watersheds, the most important modeling step is often not just identifying how much impervious area exists, but understanding how that impervious area drains. Connected impervious areas typically produce more runoff, while properly unconnected areas may allow some infiltration and runoff reduction. By combining accurate land use data, reliable hydrologic soil group data, and careful review of connected versus unconnected impervious areas, the computed CN values can provide a more defensible basis for stormwater modeling and design.

Watershed & Subbasin Modeling › Curve Numbers & Land Use

Automated Curve Number Computation

What are Curve Numbers?

A curve number (CN) is a hydrologic parameter used to describe the stormwater runoff potential for the drainage area. It is a function of land use, soil type, and soil moisture. The curve number values range from approximately 30 (for permeable soils with high infiltration rates) to 100 (for water bodies, impervious surfaces, and soil near-zero infiltration rates).

This video demonstrates how to compute the curve numbers.

unknown node

Curve Number Computation

The process of computing CN involves land use and soil types. Our software automates this process by using the following data:

  • Drainage area
  • Land use and soil maps data
  • Look-up tables for software reference

For a watershed that consists of several soil types and land use, a composite CN is calculated as:

Composite CN computation formula

Compute CN Command

The Compute CN command is used to compute the curve number (CN) for each subbasin, which is used to determine how much runoff occurs based upon the Land Use (or Land Cover) and the underlying Hydrologic Soil Type. For example, urban areas that are characterized by pavement and hard surfaces will generate significant runoff, regardless of the underlying hydrologic soil type. To learn more about curve number computation for urban areas, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Wooded areas tend to absorb a lot of rainfall but produce very little runoff, unless the underlying hydrologic soil type cannot absorb the rainwater, such as hardpan clay soils. Therefore, the command will combine the two coverages (i.e., Land Use and Hydrologic Soil Type) and develop a representative curve number for each subbasin.

Follow the steps below to compute the curve number for subbasins using the Compute CN command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Compute CN command.Compute CN command
  2. The Compute CN dialog box will be displayed.Compute CN dialog box
    Note that the [Compute] button will be grayed out until the user has selected a subbasin.

The following sections describe how to use the Compute CN command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Subbasins

The Select Subbasins section includes a table that lists all the subbasins contained within the current scenario.

The user can select the subbasins for which the curve number value is to be computed. If a subbasin is already selected on the Map View prior to running this command, the same subbasin will be shown selected within the table.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively select the subbasins from the Map View. Clicking on the [Pick] button will cause the dialog box to temporarily disappear, allowing the user to select HEC-HMS subbasins from the Map View. Upon returning to the Compute CN dialog box, the total number of selected subbasins will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field as shown below.

Select Subbasins section

Note that the user can select multiple subbasins from the Map View prior to running the Compute CN command by holding the [Ctrl] key while selecting the desired subbasins.

Defining Computational Data

The Define Computational Data section contains three panels: Land Use Data, Hydrologic Soil Type Data, and Intermediate Results. These panels are used to define the land cover data and hydrologic soil group data that will be used for computing the curve number for the selected subbasins.

Land Use Data

The Land Use Data panel contains three subpanels, which are described below:

NLCD Layer

The NLCD Layer subpanel is used to determine land type with data from the National Land Cover Database (NLCD), which is represented by 75 ft cells throughout the USA. The NLCD map service is used to determine the curve number based upon the hydrologic soil group (i.e., A, B, C, D, A/D, B/D, C/D) as shown below.

NLCD Layer subpanel

Note that for countries other than the USA, the software provides similar land cover databases. The content of this data panel will change to represent the one that is available for the project area. Currently, our software supports land cover databases from Africa, Australia, Canada, Europe, India, New Zealand, and the USA.

The Layer cover data source dropdown combo box allows the user to select which land use data source to utilize for the newly created layer. By default, the software selects the most recent land use data. The following options are available in the dropdown combo box:

  • NLCD Land Cover 2021 (default)
  • NLCD Land Cover 2019
  • NLCD Land Cover 2016
  • NLCD Land Cover 2013
  • NLCD Land Cover 2011
  • NLCD Land Cover 2008
  • NLCD Land Cover 2006
  • NLCD Land Cover 2004
  • NLCD Land Cover 2001
Layer cover data source dropdown combo box


If the “Overwrite existing data” checkbox option is checked, then the new land cover data selected in the Land cover data source dropdown combo box will overwrite the existing land cover data (if one exists).

The user can click the [Edit] button to display the NLCD Land Cover dialog box that provides an editable data grid, allowing the user to change the CN values of different hydrologic soil groups.

NLCD Land Cover 2021 dialog box

After editing the required cell values, the user can click the following buttons:

  • [Default] – This button will restore the default CN values and close the dialog box.
  • [Save] – This button will save the user changes and close the dialog box.
  • [Cancel] – This button will discard any user changes and close the dialog box.

The NLCD Layer subpanel will be replaced by other subpanels based on the modeling region, as described below:

unknown node

GIS Polygon Layer

The GIS Polygon Layer subpanel is used for user-defined land use polygon data. The land use data can either directly assign the CN value for each polygon or provide a standard land use type for the software to cross reference. When the user makes the Standardized land use type attribute field radio button entry active, then the Soil Group CN attribute field dropdown combo box entries become enabled. The Soil Group CN attribute field dropdown combo box entries show text, float, and integer fields contained within the selected land use layer. Then, the software determines which CN value should be applied based upon the corresponding land type and CN value.

GIS Polygon Layer subpanel under Land Use Data panel

Default Values

The Default Values subpanel is used to define the default CN value or standardized land use type for the software to cross-reference. The user can enter integer or float values into these default value fields.

Default Values subpanel under Land Use Data panel

Hydrologic Soil Type Data

The Hydrologic Soil Type Data panel contains three subpanels, which are described below:

NRCS Layer

The NRCS Layer subpanel uses data from the NRCS Soil Survey Database to determine the hydrologic soil group data for the watershed region.

NRCS Layer subpanel

The Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS) has divided soils into four hydrologic soil groups (i.e., A, B, C, and D) according to water’s ability to infiltrate. In addition to standard hydrologic soil groups, the software supports dual hydrologic soil groups (i.e., A/D, B/D, C/D). The dual hydrologic soil groups are used for certain wet soils because they might have a high-water table within 60 cm of the surface. Once drained, these soils can be assigned a less restrictive hydrologic soil group (i.e., “A” instead of “D” in a HSG of “A/D”). The first letter in the dual hydrologic soil group refers to the drained condition and the second letter refers to the undrained condition.

Note that for countries other than the USA, the software provides similar soil survey databases. The content of this data panel will change to represent the one that is available for the project area. Currently, our software supports land cover databases for Africa, Australia, Canada, Europe, India, New Zealand, and the USA.

The NRCS Layer subpanel will be replaced by other subpanels based on the modeling region, as described below:

unknown node

GIS Polygon Layer

The GIS Polygon Layer subpanel is used for the user-defined soil map polygon data. The soil map data provides hydrologic soil group data for each defined polygon.

GIS Polygon Layer subpanel

Default Value

The Default Value subpanel is used to define a default hydrologic soil type for the software to cross-reference as shown below.

Default Value subpanel

Intermediate Results

The Intermediate Results panel allows the user to compute the intermediate results of the selected subbasin(s) in a shapefile, save the results at the user-specified location, and load the results in a project. By default, the content of this panel is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Select the Compute Intermediate Results checkbox to enable the content of this panel.

Intermediate Results panel

Clicking the […] browse button adjacent to the Intermediate results shapefile path entry field allows the user to define the location where the intermediate computed results will be saved.

Note that the Load intermediate results checkbox should be checked to load the computed intermediate results in a project.

Computing Curve Number

When the data have been defined in the Compute CN dialog box, click the [Compute] button. The software will then look at each selected subbasin and compute the curve number for each subbasin.

After the curve numbers are computed, the values will be shown in the Compute CN editable column, as shown below. The software also allows the user to modify these computed values.

[Compute] button

Once curve numbers are computed, all stormwater methods that require a curve number will have the data populated into the appropriate fields.

Note that while the computation is running, the [Close] button changes to [Cancel] so that the user can abort applying the computed curve numbers if desired.

In the Map Data Layers panel, the software provides a data legend for computed intermediate results of each subbasin layer that lists the land covers included within that layer. The user can expand the layer to view the data legend.

Map Data Layers panel

Clicking on the […] button adjacent to the computed intermediate results of each subbasin layer will display the GIS polygon properties dialog box, allowing the user to adjust the color and style of the polygon(s) according to the land and soil type. To learn more about the GIS polygon properties dialog box, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Loss/Runoff Methods › Canopy Methods

Subbasin Data - Selecting a Canopy Method

The canopy component represents the presence of plants in the landscape. Plants intercept precipitation, reducing the amount of precipitation that arrives at the ground surface. Intercepted water evaporates between storm events. Plants also extract water from the soil in a process called transpiration. Evaporation and transpiration are often combined as evapotranspiration.

In GeoHECHMS, the Simple Canopy method is used to compute the precipitation loss due to evapotranspiration. Selecting a canopy method is optional and generally used for continuous simulation applications. If no canopy method is selected, the subbasin will not compute any losses due to evapotranspiration and all precipitation will be treated as direct precipitation.

The Simple Canopy method provides a simple representation of a plant canopy. In this method, all the precipitation is intercepted until the canopy storage capacity is full. Once the canopy storage is filled, all further precipitation falls to the surface or directly to the soil if no surface representation is included. All potential evapotranspiration will be used to empty the canopy storage until the water in storage has been eliminated. The potential evapotranspiration is multiplied by the crop coefficient to determine the amount of evapotranspiration from canopy storage and later from surface and soil components. Only after the canopy storage has been emptied will the surface, and soil components, use the unused potential evapotranspiration.

Note that the Dynamic Canopy and Gridded Simple Canopy methods are not supported in GeoHECHMS since they are mostly used by researchers or the Army Corps of Engineers.

Follow the steps given below to select a canopy method:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Subbasin Data command.
    Input ribbon menu - Subbasin Data command
  2. The Subbasin Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Flood Map dialog box
  3. From the Subbasin ID dropdown combo box, select the subbasin to assign a canopy method.
    Flood map type dropdown combo box - Water Surface Elevation option
  4. From the Canopy method dropdown combo box, select the canopy method.
    Flood map computation dropdown combo box - Time Series Animation option
  5. To enter the parameters for the selected canopy method, select the Canopy Data option from the Subbasin Specifications dropdown combo box.
    Options button adjacent to the Flood map computation dropdown combo
    Note that the Canopy Data option will be grayed out (i.e., unavailable) when None is selected for the canopy method.
  6. The Canopy Data panel will be displayed.
    Flood Map Computation Options dialog box
  7. Specify the initial condition of the canopy storage using the Initial storage spin control button. The initial condition is specified as the percentage of the canopy storage that is full of water at the beginning of the simulation.
  8. In the Maximum storage field, specify the maximum amount of water that can be held on leaves before through-fall to the surface begins. The amount of storage is specified as an effective depth of water.
  9. Specify the Crop coefficient, which is the ratio applied to potential evapotranspiration. It is used for calculating the quantity of water extracted from the soil during crop development.
  10. From the Evapotranspiration dropdown combo box entry, select one of the following options:
    • Dry Periods Only
      Use this option to set the canopy to evaporate water from storage and extract water from the soil only during dry periods with no precipitation.
    • Wet & Dry Periods
      Use this option to set the canopy to evaporate water from storage and extract water from the soil during both dry and wet periods.
      Map Data Layers panel - raster grid layer - Properties button
      Note that the choice for simultaneous precipitation and evapotranspiration can improve results when using a long interval.
  11. From the Uptake method dropdown combo box entry, select the method for extraction of water from the soil.
    Canopy Data panel - Uptake method dropdown combo box
    The Simple method extracts water at the potential evapotranspiration rate and can be used with the deficit constant or soil moisture accounting infiltration loss methods. In contrast, the Tension Reduction method can be used with the soil moisture accounting method and extracts water at the potential evapotranspiration rate from the gravity zone, but reduces the rate when extracting from the tension zone. When None is selected, there will be no soil water extraction. To learn how to select an infiltration method for a subbasin, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  12. When the data has been defined, click the [Close] button to close the Subbasin Data dialog box.

Canopy Methods along with the Kinematic Wave Runoff Method

If Kinematic Wave is selected as the runoff method, then the Canopy Data panel will be divided into two surface area sections as shown below.

Kinematic Wave runoff method - Canopy Data panel

By default, Surface area #1 is active with the Subbasin area field set as 100 %. However, changing the Subbasin area in Surface area #1 activates the Surface area #2 fields.

In addition, changing the Subbasin area in either Surface area #1 or Surface area #2 adjusts the Subbasin area in the other counterpart such that the total Subbasin area adds to 100%.

To learn how to select a runoff method for a subbasin, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Pros and Cons of Simple Canopy Method

unknown node
Loss/Runoff Methods › Surface Storage Methods

Subbasin Data – Selecting a Surface Storage Method

The surface storage component of the subbasin element represents the ground surface where water may accumulate in surface depression storage. The depression storage of an impervious surface such as a parking lot is generally close to zero. However, the depression storage for an agricultural field can be quite large if conservation tillage practices are used.

In GeoHECHMS, the simple storage method is used to compute the precipitation losses due to depression storage. Selecting a surface storage method is optional and generally only used for continuous simulation applications.

The simple storage method provides a simple representation of the soil surface. In this method, all the precipitation or precipitation through-fall from the canopy arriving on the soil surface is captured in storage until the storage capacity of the surface is full. Water in surface storage infiltrates into the soil whenever it is present, i.e., water will infiltrate even when the storage capacity is not full. The surface runoff will begin when the storage capacity is filled, and the precipitation through-fall rate exceeds the infiltration rate.

Note that the grided surface storage method is not supported in GeoHECHMS as it is mostly used by researchers or the Army Corps of Engineers.

The user can select a surface storage method for a subbasin from the General Specifications section of the Subbasin Data dialog box.

Follow the steps given below to select a surface storage method:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Subbasin Data command.Subbasin Data ribbon menu command
  2. The Subbasin Data dialog box will be displayed.Subbasin Data dialog box
  3. From the Subbasin ID dropdown combo box, select the subbasin to assign a surface storage method.Subbasin ID dropdown combo box
  4. From the Surface storage method dropdown combo box, select the surface storage method. Surface storage method dropdown combo box
  5. To enter the parameters for the selected surface storage method, select the Surface Storage Data option from the Subbasin Specifications dropdown combo box. Note that the Surface Storage Data option will be grayed out (i.e., unavailable) when None is selected for the surface storage method.Surface Storage Data dropdown entry
  6. The Surface Storage Data panel will be displayed.Surface Storage Data panel for Simple Storage method
  7. Specify the initial condition of the surface storage using the Initial storage spin control button. Initial condition is specified as the percentage of the surface storage that is full of water at the beginning of the simulation.
  8. Specify the maximum amount of water that can be held on the soil surface in the Maximum storage entry field. This is the amount of water that can be accumulated in the depression storage before surface runoff begins. The amount of storage is specified as an effective depth of water. Click the […] button to display the Maximum Storage lookup table.
  9. When the data has been defined, click the [Close] button to close the Subbasin Data dialog box.

Pros and Cons of Simple Storage Method

unknown node
Loss/Runoff Methods › Infiltration / Loss Methods

Subbasin Data – Selecting an Infiltration Method

Subbasins define the drainage area polygons that produce runoff to the other elements in the model. While a subbasin element conceptually represents infiltration, surface runoff, and subsurface processes interacting together, the actual infiltration loss calculations are performed by an infiltration method contained within the subbasin.

There are many different infiltration methods provided with HEC-HMS. Some of the methods are designed primarily for simulating events, while others are intended for continuous simulation. All of the methods conserve mass. That is, the sum of infiltration and precipitation left on the surface will always be equal to total incoming precipitation.

The table below shows the various methods' suitability for an event and continuous simulation.

unknown node


In GeoHECHMS, the infiltration method for a subbasin can be selected from the General Specifications section of the Subbasin Data dialog box.

Follow the steps given below to select an infiltration method:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Subbasin Data command.
    Subbasin Data ribbon menu command
  2. The Subbasin Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Subbasin Data dialog box
  3. From the Subbasin ID dropdown combo box, select the subbasin to assign an infiltration method.
  4. From the Infiltration (loss) method dropdown combo box, select the infiltration method.
    Infiltration (loss) method dropdown combo box
  5. To enter the data for the selected infiltration method, select the Infiltration (Loss) Data option from the Subbasin Specifications dropdown combo box.
    Subbasin Specifications dropdown combo box
  6. The Infiltration (Loss) Data panel will be displayed. Note that the Infiltration (Loss) Data panel content changes based upon the infiltration (loss) method selected in the General Specifications section.
    Infiltration (Loss) Data panel

The following sections describe the different infiltration methods and how to define the data for each method in the Infiltration (Loss) Data panel.

Infiltration Method: None

When None is selected for the Infiltration (Loss) Method, then the Infiltration (Loss) Data dropdown combo box entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Selecting None as infiltration method

Infiltration Method: Deficit and Constant

The deficit and constant infiltration method uses a single soil layer to account for continuous changes in moisture content. This method is used for continuous simulation.

It should be combined with a canopy method that will extract water from the soil in response to potential evapotranspiration computed in the meteorologic model. The soil layer will dry out as the canopy extracts soil water between precipitation events. There will be no soil water extraction unless a canopy method is selected. To learn how to select a canopy method for a subbasin, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

It may also be combined with a surface storage method that will hold water on the land surface. The water in surface storage infiltrates the soil layer. The infiltration rate is determined by the capacity of the soil layer to accept water. To learn how to select a surface storage method for a subbasin, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

When Deficit and Constant is selected for the Infiltration (Loss) Method, the following data panel will be displayed.

Infiltration (Loss) Data panel for Deficit and Constant method

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  • Initial moisture deficit
    This entry field defines the initial condition for the method. At the start of the simulation, it is the amount of water required to fill the soil layer to the maximum storage.
  • Maximum moisture deficit
    This entry field is used to specify the total amount of water the soil layer can hold as an effective depth.
  • Constant loss rate
    This entry field defines the infiltration and percolation rates when the soil layer is saturated. Clicking on the […] lookup button will display a Soil Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity lookup table dialog box.
  • Impervious surface
    The field defines the percentage of the subbasin area that is impervious. No loss calculations are carried out on the impervious area. All precipitation on that portion of the subbasin becomes excess precipitation subject to surface storage and direct runoff. Note that the user can automatically compute the percent imperviousness for each subbasin using Compute % Impervious command. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this command.

Infiltration Method: Exponential

The exponential infiltration method is empirical and should not be used without calibration. This method should only be used for event simulation. It represents incremental infiltration as an exponentially decreasing function of accumulated infiltration. It includes the option for increased initial infiltration when the soil is particularly dry before the arrival of a storm. Before using this method, consideration should be given to the Green and Ampt method (explained below) because it produces a similar exponential decrease in infiltration and uses parameters with better physical interpretation.

When Exponential is selected for the Infiltration (Loss) Method, the following data panel will be displayed.

Infiltration (Loss) Data panel for Exponential method

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  • Initial range
    This entry field specifies the amount of initially accumulated infiltration during which the loss rate increases. This parameter is a function of antecedent soil moisture deficiency and is usually storm-dependent.
  • Initial coefficient
    This entry field specifies the starting loss rate coefficient on the exponential infiltration curve. It is assumed to be a function of infiltration characteristics and consequently may be correlated with soil type, land use, vegetation cover, and other properties of a subbasin.
  • Coefficient ratio
    This entry field specifies the rate at which the exponential decrease in infiltration capability proceeds. It may be considered a function of the ability of the surface of a subbasin to absorb precipitation and should be reasonably constant for large, homogeneous areas.
  • Precipitation exponent
    This entry field defines the influence of precipitation rate on subbasin-average loss characteristics. It reflects the manner in which storms occur within an area and may be considered a characteristic of a particular region. It varies from 0.0 up to 1.0.
  • Impervious surface
    The field defines the percentage of the subbasin area that is impervious.

Infiltration Method: Green and Ampt

The Green and Ampt infiltration method is essentially a simplification of the comprehensive Richard's equation for unsteady water flow in soil. This method should only be used for event simulation and not for a continuous simulation where there is an extended dry period(s) between precipitation events. It assumes the soil is initially at uniform moisture content, and infiltration occurs with so-called piston displacement. It is also assumed that the soil layer is infinitely deep, so reaching saturation can be defined purely by the Green and Ampt equation. The method automatically accounts for ponding at the soil-air interface.

When Green and Ampt is selected for the Infiltration (Loss) Method, the following data panel will be displayed.

Infiltration (Loss) Data panel for Green and Ampt method

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  • Soil moisture method
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select a method for specifying the initial soil moisture state. Two available options are Initial Content and Initial Deficit.
  • Initial moisture content
    This entry field allows the user to specify the initial soil moisture state in terms of moisture content. Note that this field is only available when Initial Content is selected for the Soil moisture method. Otherwise, this entry is unavailable (i.e., grayed out).
  • Saturated moisture content
    This entry field specifies the maximum water holding capacity in terms of volume ratio. It is often assumed to be the total porosity of the soil. Note that this field is only available when Initial Content is selected for the Soil moisture method. Otherwise, this entry is unavailable (i.e., grayed out).
  • Initial moisture deficit
    This entry field allows the user to specify the initial soil moisture state in terms of a deficit. Note that this field is only available when Initial Deficit is selected for the Soil moisture method. Otherwise, this entry is unavailable (i.e., grayed out).
  • Wetting front suction head
    This entry field is used to specify the wetting front suction. It is generally assumed to be a function of the soil texture. Clicking on the […] lookup button will display a Soil Suction lookup table dialog box.
  • Hydraulic conductivity
    This entry field is used to specify the hydraulic conductivity. It can be estimated from field tests or approximated by knowing the soil texture. Clicking on the […] lookup button will display a Soil Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity lookup table dialog box.
  • Impervious surface
    The field defines the percentage of the subbasin area that is impervious.

Infiltration Method: Initial and Constant

The initial and constant infiltration method is very simple but appropriate for watersheds lacking detailed soil information. It is also suitable for certain types of flow-frequency studies. This method should only be used for event simulation.

When Initial and Constant is selected for the Infiltration (Loss) Method, the following data panel will be displayed.

Infiltration (Loss) Data panel for Initial and Constant method

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  • Initial loss
    This entry field specifies the amount of incoming precipitation infiltrated or stored in the watershed before surface runoff begins. There is no recovery of the initial loss during periods without precipitation. Clicking the [Calc] button will cause the software to automatically compute the initial loss for the selected subbasin. Click the [Calc All] to compute the initial loss for all the subbasins.
  • Curve number
    This entry field defines the curve number for the subbasin used to determine how much runoff occurs based upon the Land Use (or Land Cover) and the underlying Hydrologic Soil Type. Note that the user can automatically compute the curve number for each subbasin using Compute CN command. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this command. Clicking the […] lookup button will display the SCS Curve Number lookup table dialog box.
  • Constant loss rate
    This entry field specifies the rate of infiltration that will occur after the initial loss is satisfied. The same rate is applied regardless of the length of the simulation.
  • Impervious surface
    The field defines the percentage of the subbasin area that is impervious.

Infiltration Method: Layered Green and Ampt

The layered Green and Ampt infiltration method uses two soil layers (layer 1 and layer 2) to account for continuous changes in moisture content. This method is based on algorithms originally developed for the Guelph Agricultural Watershed Storm-Event Runoff (GAWSER) model. This method should only be used for continuous simulation.

Two soil layers are used to represent the dynamics of water movement in the soil. Surface water infiltrates into the upper layer, called layer 1. Layer 1 produces seepage to the lower layer, called layer 2. Both layers are functionally identical but may have separate and distinct parameters. Separate parameters can be used to represent layered soil profiles and allow for a better representation of stratified soil drying between storms. Each layer is described using bulk depth and water content values for saturation, field capacity, and wilting point. Soil water in layer 2 can percolate out of the soil profile.

This method is intended to be used in combination with the linear reservoir baseflow method. When used in this manner, the percolated water can be split between baseflow and aquifer recharge. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to select a baseflow method for a subbasin.

This method can also be used in combination with a canopy method and surface storage method.

When Layered Green and Ampt is selected for the Infiltration (Loss) Method, the following data panel will be displayed.

Infiltration (Loss) Data panel for Layered Green and Ampt method

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  • Layer 1 / Layer 2 initial moisture content
    These entry fields are used to set the amount of soil water at the beginning of a simulation for the two soil layers. The values should be specified in terms of volume ratio.
  • Hydraulic conductivity
    This entry field is used to specify the hydraulic conductivity. It can be estimated from field tests or approximated by knowing the surface soil texture. Clicking on the […] lookup button will display a Soil Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity lookup table dialog box.
  • Max seepage
    This entry field is used to specify the maximum seepage at the bottom of layer 1. Field tests or the soil texture at the bottom of layer 1 can be used to estimate this value.
  • Max percolation
    This entry field is used to specify the maximum percolation at the bottom of layer 2. Field tests or the soil texture at the bottom of layer 2 can be used to estimate this value.
  • Wetting front suction head
    This entry field is used to specify the wetting front suction. It is generally assumed to be a function of the soil texture. Clicking on the […] lookup button will display a Soil Suction lookup table dialog box.
  • Dry duration
    This entry field is used to set the amount of time that must pass after a storm event to recalculate the initial condition for the Green and Ampt equation. It has been found that 12 hours often works well.
  • Impervious surface
    The field defines the percentage of the subbasin area that is impervious.
  • Layer 1 thickness
    This entry field defines the bulk depth of soil measured from the ground surface down to the bottom of layer 1.
  • Layer 2 thickness
    This entry field defines the bulk depth of soil measured from the bottom of layer 1 down to the bottom of layer 2.
  • Layer 1/ Layer 2 saturated moisture content
    These entry fields are used to specify the maximum water holding capacity in terms of volume ratio for the two soil layers. These values define the total porosity of the soil.
  • Layer 1 / Layer 2 field capacity
    These entry fields specify the point where the soil naturally stops seeping under gravity. The values should be specified in terms of volume ratio.
  • Layer 1 / Layer 2 wilting point
    These entry fields specify the amount of water remaining in the soil layers when plants are no longer capable of extracting it. The values should be specified in terms of volume ratio.

Infiltration Method: SCS Curve Number

The Soil Conservation Service (SCS) curve number method implements the curve number methodology for incremental losses (NRCS, 2007). The SCS curve number loss method should only be used for event simulation. Originally, the methodology was intended to calculate total infiltration during a storm. The software computes incremental precipitation during a storm by recalculating the infiltration volume at the end of each time interval. Infiltration during each time interval is the difference in volume at the end of two adjacent time intervals.

When SCS Curve Number is selected for the Infiltration (Loss) Method, the following data panel will be displayed.

Infiltration (Loss) Data panel for SCS Curve Number method

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  • Initial abstraction
    This entry field allows the user to enter an initial abstraction. The initial abstraction defines the amount of precipitation that must fall before surface excess results. However, it is not the same as an initial interception or loss since changing the initial abstraction changes the infiltration response later in the storm. If this field is left blank, it will be automatically calculated as 0.2 times the potential retention, which is calculated from the curve number.
  • Curve number
    This entry field allows the user to enter a curve number.
  • Impervious surface
    The field defines the percentage of the subbasin area that is impervious.

Infiltration Method: Smith Parlange

The Smith Parlange infiltration method approximates Richard's equation for infiltration into the soil. It assumes that the wetting front can be represented with an exponential scaling of the saturated conductivity. This linearization approach allows the infiltration computations to proceed quickly while maintaining a reasonable approximation of the wetting front. This method should only be used for event simulation.

When Smith Parlange is selected for the Infiltration (Loss) Method, the following data panel will be displayed.

Infiltration (Loss) Data panel for Smith Parlange method

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  • Initial moisture content
    This field specifies the initial saturation of the soil at the beginning of a simulation. It should be specified in terms of volume ratio.
  • Residual moisture content
    This field specifies the amount of water remaining in the soil after all drainage has ceased. It should be specified in terms of volume ratio.
  • Saturated moisture content
    This field specifies the maximum water holding capacity in terms of volume ratio. It is often assumed to be the total porosity of the soil.
  • Bubbling pressure
    This entry field specifies the bubbling pressure, also known as the wetting front suction. It is generally assumed to be a function of the soil texture.
  • Pore size distribution
    This entry field specifies how the total pore space is distributed in different size classes. It is typically assumed to be a function of soil texture.
  • Hydraulic conductivity
    The entry field specifies the hydraulic conductivity as the effective saturated conductivity. It can be estimated from field tests or approximated by knowing the soil texture.
  • Impervious surface
    The field defines the percentage of the subbasin area that is impervious.
  • Temperature gage
    This dropdown combo box lists temperature gage time series. The temperature gage is used to adjust for water density, water viscosity, and matric potential versus temperature. If no temperature gage is defined, then a temperature of 25° C (or 75° F) is assumed. The temperature gage must be defined in the Temperature Gage Data dialog box before selecting it.Clicking the […] button will display the Temperature Gage Data dialog box, which allows the user to define temperature gages.
    Temperature Gage Data dialog boxThe user may enter the time-series values by manually typing them or using the clipboard to copy and paste. Alternatively, the user may load the time-series data from a HEC-DSS file.
  • Beta zero
    This entry field is used to define the beta zero parameter. This parameter is used to correct the matric potential based on temperature, which is generally a function of soil texture.

Infiltration Method: Soil Moisture Accounting Loss

The soil moisture accounting loss method uses three soil layers to account for continuous changes in moisture content throughout the vertical profile of the soil. This method is intended to be used for continuous simulation. This method can also be used in combination with a canopy and surface storage method.

Three soil layers are used in this method to represent the dynamics of water movement in the soil. Layers include soil storage, upper groundwater, and lower groundwater. The groundwater layer is not designed to represent aquifer processes. It is intended to be used for representing shallow inter-flow processes. The soil layer is subdivided into an upper zone and a tension zone. Soil water only percolates from the upper zone while water in the tension zone resists percolation. Water in the upper groundwater layer percolates to the lower groundwater layer.

The soil moisture accounting loss method is designed to be used in combination with the linear reservoir baseflow method. When used in this way, water can move laterally out of upper and lower groundwater layers to enter baseflow. Water percolating out of the lower groundwater layer can be split between entering baseflow and leaving the land surface as aquifer recharge.

When Soil Moisture Accounting Loss is selected for the Infiltration (Loss) Method, the following data panel will be displayed.

Infiltration (Loss) Data panel for Soil Moisture Accounting Loss method

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  • Soil layer initial saturation
    This entry field is used to specify the initial condition of the soil as the percentage of the soil that is full of water at the beginning of the simulation.
  • Upper/Lower groundwater layer initial saturation
    These entry fields are used to specify the initial condition of the upper and lower groundwater layers.
  • Soil layer maximum infiltration rate
    This entry field is used to set the upper bound on infiltration from the surface storage into the soil. If a surface storage method is selected, the actual infiltration in a particular time interval is a linear function of the surface and soil storage. If no surface storage method is selected, water will always infiltrate at the maximum rate.
  • Impervious surface
    This entry field is used to specify the percentage of the subbasin area which is impervious.
  • Soil layer total storage
    This entry field specifies the total storage available in the soil layer. Provide a zero value if you wish to eliminate soil calculations and pass infiltrated water directly to groundwater.
  • Soil layer tension storage
    This entry field specifies the amount of water storage in the soil that does not drain under the effects of gravity. Percolation from the soil layer to the upper groundwater layer will occur whenever the current soil storage exceeds the tension storage. Water in tension storage is only removed by evapotranspiration. Tension storage must be less than soil storage.
  • Soil layer percolation rate
    This entry field specifies the upper bound on percolation from the soil storage into the upper groundwater. The actual percolation rate is a linear function of the current storage in the soil and the current storage in the upper groundwater.
  • Upper groundwater layer total storage
    This entry field specifies the total storage in the upper groundwater layer. It may be zero if you wish to eliminate the upper groundwater layer and pass water percolated from the soil directly to the lower groundwater layer.
  • Upper groundwater layer percolation rate
    This entry field specifies the upper bound on percolation from the upper groundwater layer into the lower groundwater layer. The actual percolation rate is a linear function of the current storage in the upper and lower groundwater layers.
  • Upper groundwater layer time lag coefficient
    This entry field specifies the time lag on a linear reservoir whereby water in storage becomes lateral outflow. The lateral outflow is available to become baseflow.
  • Lower groundwater layer total storage
    This entry field specifies the total storage in the lower groundwater layer. It may be zero if you wish to eliminate the lower groundwater layer and pass water percolated from the upper groundwater layer directly to deep percolation.
  • Lower groundwater layer percolation rate
    This entry field specifies the upper bound on deep percolation out of the system. The actual percolation rate is a linear function of the current storage in the lower groundwater layer.
  • Lower groundwater layer time lag coefficient
    This entry field specifies the time lag on a linear reservoir whereby water in storage becomes lateral outflow. It is usually larger than the Upper groundwater layer time lag coefficient. The lateral outflow is likewise available to become baseflow.

Infiltration Methods along with the Kinematic Wave Runoff Method

When Kinematic Wave is selected for the Runoff (Transform) Method, two surface area sections are shown in the Infiltration (Loss) Data panel for defining data of the infiltration method. These include one for impervious surfaces and the other for pervious surfaces within the subbasin.

Below is an example of the Infiltration (Loss) Data panel displayed for the SCS Curve Number method.

SCS Curve Number method along with Kinematic Wave runoff method

Pros and Cons of Infiltration Methods

unknown node
Loss/Runoff Methods › Infiltration / Loss Methods

Compute Green Ampt Command

The Green and Ampt infiltration method is essentially a simplification of comprehensive Richard’s equation for unsteady water flow in soil. This method should only be used for event simulation and not for a continuous simulation where there is an extended dry period(s) between precipitation events. It assumes the soil is initially at uniform moisture content, and infiltration occurs with so-called piston displacement. It is also assumed that the soil layer is infinitely deep, so reaching saturation can be defined purely by the Green and Ampt equation. The method automatically accounts for ponding at the soil-air interface.

The Compute Green Ampt command is used to compute the Green and Ampt infiltration parameters for each subbasin based upon the hydrologic soil data.

Follow the steps below to use the Compute Green Ampt command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Compute Green Ampt command.
    Compute Green Ampt command
  2. The Compute Green Ampt dialog box will be displayed.
    Compute Green Ampt dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Compute Green Ampt command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Subbasins

The Select Subbasins section includes a table that lists all the subbasins contained within the current scenario along with their initial content, saturated content, initial deficit, suction head, and hydraulic conductivity.

This section is used to manually select subbasins from the Map View. If a subbasin is already selected on the Map View before running this command, the same subbasin will be shown selected within the table.

Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to interactively select subbasins from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the Compute Green Ampt dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select subbasins from the Map View. After selecting the subbasins, the user can press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected subbasins will be displayed in the Total selected read-only entry.

Total selected read-only entry

Note that the user can select multiple subbasins from the Map View before running the Compute Green Ampt command by holding the [Ctrl] key while selecting the desired subbasins.

Defining Computational Data

The Define Computational Data section contains a Soil moisture method dropdown combo box option and three panels that are the GIS Polygon Layer, the NRCS Layer, and the Default Values. From these three panels, the user can compute Green Ampt infiltration parameters for the various methods available.

Soil Moisture Method

This dropdown combo box allows the user to select a method for specifying the initial soil moisture state. Two available options are:

  • Initial Content
  • Initial Deficit (default)

Based on the option selected, the content of the GIS Polygon Layer and the Default Values panels will be enabled and disabled.

GIS Polygon Layer

This panel is used for the user-defined soil map polygon data. The soil map data provides hydrologic soil group data for each defined polygon.

GIS Polygon Layer panel

The following entries are provided in the data panel:

  • Soil Map Layer
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS polygon layer included within the project.
  • Initial Moisture Content
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS shapefile field that contains initial moisture content for each polygon area. Note that this dropdown entry is only available when Initial Content is selected for the Soil moisture method. Otherwise, this dropdown entry is unavailable (i.e., grayed out).
  • Saturated Moisture Content
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS shapefile field that contains saturated moisture content. Note that this dropdown entry is only available when Initial Content is selected for the Soil moisture method. Otherwise, this dropdown entry is unavailable (i.e., grayed out).
  • Initial Moisture Deficit
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS shapefile field that contains the initial soil moisture deficit. Note that this dropdown entry is only available when Initial Deficit is selected for the Soil moisture method. Otherwise, this dropdown entry is unavailable (i.e., grayed out).
  • Wetting Front Suction Head
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS shapefile field that contains wetting front suction.
  • Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the GIS shapefile field that contains hydraulic conductivity.
  • Value type
    This dropdown combo box is used to determine how to apply the defined value to compute the Green Ampt infiltration parameters.

    If the user specifies a value in the above entry, then this dropdown combo box provides the following options for Initial moisture content, Saturated moisture content, and Initial moisture deficit:
    • Decimal Fraction
    • Percentage (default)

For Wetting front suction head:

    • in
    • mm

For Saturated hydraulic conductivity:

    • in/hr
    • mm/hr

NRCS Layer

The NRCS Layer panel uses data from the NRCS Soil Survey Database to determine the hydrologic soil group data for the watershed region. This web soil survey database is only available within the USA and does not work outside the USA.

NRCS Layer panel

Note that for countries other than the USA, the software provides similar soil survey databases. This data panel will change to represent the one that is available for the project area. The software will automatically download the data once the user has selected this option and the command is executed.

Initial Setup

This subpanel allows the user to define the setup to be used in computing the Green Ampt parameters using the NRCS soil survey database.

Initial soil moisture content estimate
This radio button selection allows the user to specify the initial soil moisture conditions at the beginning of the simulation in terms of volume ratio. The following options are provided:

  • Dry - This radio button option is used for lands such as desert and rangeland.
  • Normal - This radio button option is used for lands under normal soil moisture conditions. By default, this radio button option is selected.
  • Wet or Saturated - This radio button option is used immediately after a storm or for irrigated agricultural land.
  • Custom - This radio button option is used to enter a custom value. By default, the software uses a value of 0.80. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 0.00 to 1.00. This value is applied to all subbasins—regardless of the soil content.

NRCS Map Layer

This subpanel is used to see the parameters computed from the NRCS soil textures determined from the soil classifications.

NRCS Map Layer subpanel

Default Values

This panel is used to define default values for computing the Green Ampt infiltration parameters.

Default Values panel

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  • Initial moisture content
    This entry field allows the user to specify the initial soil moisture state in terms of moisture content. Note that this field is only available when Initial Content is selected for the Soil moisture method. Otherwise, this entry is unavailable (i.e., grayed out).
  • Saturated moisture content
    This entry field specifies the maximum water holding capacity in terms of volume ratio. It is often assumed to be the total porosity of the soil. Note that this field is only available when Initial Content is selected for the Soil moisture method. Otherwise, this entry is unavailable (i.e., grayed out).
  • Initial moisture deficit
    This entry field allows the user to specify the initial soil moisture state in terms of a deficit. Note that this field is only available when Initial Deficit is selected for the Soil moisture method. Otherwise, this entry is unavailable (i.e., grayed out).
  • Wetting front suction head
    This entry field is used to specify the wetting front suction that describes the attraction of water within the void spaces of the soil column. It is generally assumed to be a function of the soil texture. Clicking on the […] lookup button will display a Soil Suction lookup table dialog box.
  • Hydraulic conductivity
    This entry field is used to define the rate at which surface water will enter the soil column when completely saturated. It can be estimated from field tests or approximated by knowing the soil texture. Clicking on the […] lookup button will display a Soil Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity lookup table dialog box.

Computing Green Ampt

When the data have been defined in the Compute Green Ampt dialog box, click the [Compute] button.

[Compute] button

The software will then look at each subbasin selected and compute the Green Ampt infiltration parameters for each subbasin. The computed values will be shown in the Select subbasins editable column as shown below. The software also allows the user to modify these computed values.

Select subbasins editable column

Note that while the computation is running, the [Close] button changes to [Cancel] so that the user can abort applying the computed Green Ampt parameters values if desired..

Loss/Runoff Methods › Baseflow Methods

Subbasin Data – Selecting a Baseflow Method

Subbasins define the drainage area polygons that produce runoff to the other elements in the model. While a subbasin element conceptually represents infiltration, surface runoff, and subsurface processes interacting together, the actual subsurface calculations are performed by a baseflow method contained within the subbasin. There are many different baseflow methods provided with HEC-HMS. Some methods are designed primarily for simulating events, while others are intended for continuous simulation.

In GeoHECHMS, the baseflow method for a subbasin can be selected from the General Specifications section of the Subbasin Data dialog box. Each subbasin may use a different method, or several subbasins may use the same method.

Follow the steps below to select a baseflow method:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Subbasin Data command.
    Subbasin Data ribbon menu command
  2. The Subbasin Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Subbasin Data dialog box
  3. From the Subbasin ID dropdown combo box, select the subbasin to assign a baseflow method.
  4. From the Baseflow method dropdown combo box, select the baseflow method.
    Baseflow method dropdown combo box
  5. To enter the parameters for the selected baseflow method, select the Baseflow Data option from the Subbasin Specifications dropdown combo box. Note that identical parameters between different baseflow methods are shared so that the user does not have to enter the data twice when switching between methods.
    Subbasin Specifications dropdown combo box
  6. The Baseflow Data panel will be displayed. Note that the Baseflow Data panel content changes based upon the baseflow method selected in the General Specifications section.
    Baseflow Data panel

The following sections describe the different baseflow methods and how to enter the parameters for each method in the Baseflow Data panel.

Baseflow Method: None

When None is selected for the baseflow method, the Baseflow Data dropdown combo box entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Baseflow Data dropdown entry for None option

If None is selected for the baseflow method, the subbasin will not compute baseflow, and the outflow will only include direct runoff from the transform method.

Baseflow Method: Bounded Recession

The bounded recession baseflow method is intended primarily for real-time forecasting operations. The method is very similar to the recession method (explained below) and does not conserve mass in the subbasin. The principal difference is that the bounded recession method allows for the specification of monthly baseflow limits. The baseflow is computed according to the recession methodology, and then the monthly limits are imposed. Though there are many similarities with the recession method, one important difference is that this method does not reset the baseflow after a storm event.

When Bounded Recession is selected for the baseflow method, the following data panel will be displayed:

Baseflow Data panel for Bounded Recession method

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  1. Initial type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select one of the following options to specify the initial baseflow at the beginning of a simulation:
    • Discharge: When this option is selected, the user must specify the initial baseflow as a discharge in units of volume per time (cfs). Selecting this option is particularly effective at determining the channel’s initial flow when there is observed streamflow data at the subbasin outlet.
    • Discharge per Area (default): When this option is selected, the user must specify the initial baseflow as a discharge in units of volume per area per time (cfs/mi2). Selecting this option is particularly effective when general guidelines for watershed yield must be used to estimate the initial flow.
  2. Initial discharge
    This entry field is used to specify the amount of initial baseflow at the beginning of the simulation.
  3. Recession constant
    This entry field specifies the rate at which baseflow recedes between storm events. It is defined as the ratio of baseflow at the current time to the baseflow one day earlier.

Furthermore, baseflow values for the months of January through December must be put in the table. These values are used to limit the computed baseflow.

Baseflow Method: Linear Reservoir

The linear reservoir baseflow method, as its name implies, uses a linear reservoir to model the recession of baseflow after a storm event. It is the only baseflow method that conserves mass within the subbasin. Infiltration or percolation computed by the infiltration method is provided as the inflow to the linear reservoirs. This method can use one, two, or three reservoirs. Partition fractions are used to split the inflow to each of the reservoirs. The inflow is multiplied by the partition fraction to determine the amount of inflow going to each reservoir. The sum of the partition fractions must be less than or equal to one. If the sum of the fractions is less than one, the remaining percolated water is considered as aquifer recharge. If the sum of the fractions is exactly equal to one, then all percolation will become baseflow, and there will be no aquifer recharge.

All losses from the SCS Curve Number, Exponential, Initial and Constant, Green and Ampt, and Smith-Parlange infiltration methods are routed to the linear reservoir baseflow model. Only percolation losses (during saturated conditions) in the Soil Moisture Accounting, Layered Green and Ampt, and Deficit and Constant infiltration methods are routed to the linear reservoir baseflow model. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the infiltration methods.

When using the linear reservoir method with the Soil Moisture Accounting method, the number of baseflow reservoirs should be consistent with the number of groundwater layers in the infiltration method. The lateral outflow from the upper and lower groundwater layers is provided as the inflow to baseflow reservoirs 1 and 2. The percolation out of the lower groundwater layer is provided as inflow to baseflow reservoir 3. Partition fractions are not used for baseflow reservoirs 1 and 2 because their inflow is determined by the respective lateral outflow. A partition fraction should be used with the percolation to define the split between aquifer recharge and inflow to baseflow reservoir 3.

When Linear Reservoir is selected for the baseflow method, the following data panel will be displayed:

Baseflow Data panel for Linear Reservoir method

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  1. Reservoirs
    This spin control button is used to specify the number of reservoirs (number of groundwater layers). The minimum is one, and the maximum is three. Separate initial conditions and parameters must be specified for each reservoir. The Reservoir 2/3 Specifications sections are enabled or disabled based on the number of reservoirs specified.
  2. Initial type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select one of the following options to specify the initial baseflow at the beginning of the simulation:
    • Discharge
    • Discharge per Area (default)
  3. GW 1/2/3 initial
    These entry fields are used to specify the amount of initial baseflow for each of the reservoirs.
  4. GW 1/2/3 fraction
    These entry fields determine how water from the infiltration method is distributed to the reservoirs. Each fraction must be greater than zero and less than or equal to one. When the sum of the fractions is one, there will be no aquifer recharge. When the sum of the fractions is less than one, the remainder of the percolation becomes aquifer recharge.
  5. GW 1/2/3 coefficient
    These entry fields define the time constant for each reservoir (linear reservoir coefficient). Since this coefficient is measured in hours, it gives a sense of the response time for a component of subsurface flow within a subbasin.
  6. GW 1/2/3 steps
    These spin control buttons are used to define the number of routing steps to subdivide the routing through each reservoir. The routing steps relate to the amount of attenuation during the routing. Minimum attenuation is achieved when only one routing step is defined. Baseflow attenuation increases as the number of steps increases.

Baseflow Method: Monthly Constant

The monthly constant baseflow method allows the specification of a constant baseflow for each month of the year. It does not conserve mass within the subbasin. It is intended primarily for continuous simulation in subbasins where a constant flow for each month approximates the baseflow.

When Monthly Constant is selected for the baseflow method, the following data panel will be displayed:

Baseflow Data panel for Monthly Constant method

Baseflow values for January through December must be entered into the table. These values are used to limit the computed baseflow.

Baseflow Method: Nonlinear Boussinesq

The nonlinear Boussinesq baseflow method is designed to approximate the typical behavior observed in subbasins when channel flow recedes after an event. This method is similar to the recession baseflow method but can be parameterized using observable field data. This method is intended primarily for event simulation. However, it can also be used for continuous simulation because of its ability to reset automatically after each storm event. It does not conserve mass within the subbasin.

When Nonlinear Boussinesq is selected for the baseflow method, the following data panel will be displayed:

Selecting a Baseflow Method Image 10

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  1. Initial discharge type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select one of the following options to specify the initial baseflow at the beginning of the simulation.
    • Discharge
    • Discharge per Area (default)
  2. Initial discharge
    This entry field is used to specify the amount of initial baseflow at the beginning of the simulation.
  3. Threshold type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select one of the following options to reset the baseflow during a storm event:
    • Ratio to Peak (default)
    • Threshold Discharge
  4. Threshold ratio
    This entry is only enabled if the Ratio to Peak option is selected for the Threshold type. Otherwise, this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out). It specifies the flow ratio to the peak. The baseflow is reset when the current flow divided by the peak flow falls to the specified value. For example, if a ratio of 0.2 is provided, the baseflow will reset on the receding limb of an event hydrograph when the flow has decreased to 20% of the event peak flow.
  5. Threshold discharge
    This entry field is only enabled if the Threshold discharge is selected for the Threshold type. Otherwise, this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out). It specifies the threshold baseflow value. The baseflow is always reset when the receding limb of the hydrograph falls to the specified flow value, regardless of the peak flow during the previous storm event.
  6. Subsurface flow length
    This entry field is used to specify the characteristic subsurface flow length. This could be estimated as the mean distance from the subbasin boundary to the stream. Clicking the […] button allows the user to measure the subsurface flow length from the Map View.
  7. Hydraulic conductivity
    This entry field is used to specify the conductivity of the soil. This could be estimated from field tests or from the soil texture. Clicking the […] lookup button will display the Soil Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity lookup dialog box.
  8. Porosity
    This entry field is used to specify the drainable porosity in terms of volume ratio. The upper limit would be the total porosity minus the residual porosity. The actual drainable porosity depends on local conditions.

Baseflow Method: Recession

The recession baseflow method is designed to approximate the typical behavior observed in subbasins when channel flow recedes exponentially after an event. This method is intended primarily for event simulation. However, it does have the ability to automatically reset after each storm event and consequently may be used for continuous simulation. It does not conserve mass within the subbasin.

When Recession is selected for the baseflow method, the following data panel will be displayed:

Baseflow Data panel for Recession method

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  1. Initial discharge type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select one of the following options to specify the initial baseflow flow at the beginning of a simulation.
    • Discharge
    • Discharge per Area(default)
  2. Initial discharge
    This entry field specifies the amount of initial baseflow at the beginning of a simulation.
  3. Recession constant
    This entry field describes the rate at which baseflow recedes between storm events. It is defined as the ratio of baseflow at the current time, to the baseflow one day earlier.
  4. Threshold type
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select from one of the following options to reset the baseflow during a storm event.
    • Ratio to Peak (default)
    • Threshold Discharge
  5. Threshold ratio
    This entry is only enabled if the Ratio to Peak option is selected for the Threshold type. Otherwise, this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out). It specifies the flow ratio to the peak.
  6. Threshold discharge
    This entry field is only enabled if the Threshold Discharge is selected for the Threshold type. Otherwise, this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out). It specifies the threshold baseflow value. The baseflow is always reset when the receding limb of the hydrograph falls to a specified flow value, regardless of the peak flow during the previous storm event.

Pros and Cons of Baseflow Methods

unknown node
Loss/Runoff Methods › Double Counting Impervious Areas

Double Counting Impervious Areas

In SCS Curve Number hydrology, double counting occurs when the same impervious surface is represented twice in a subbasin: once inside the curve number selected by the user and again as a separate percent impervious value. The model has no way of knowing that the rooftops, roads, and sidewalks have already been baked into the CN, so it adds an additional impervious calculation on top of it. The result is consistently overestimated peak flows, oversized stormwater infrastructure, and overly conservative floodplain mapping.

This article explains how to avoid double counting impervious areas during hydrologic analysis, ensuring that impervious surfaces are represented only once.

Why Double Counting Matters

Engineers rely on hydrologic models to size storm sewers, culverts, detention basins, channels, and floodplain limits. Each of those design decisions is sensitive to peak discharge. If imperviousness is counted twice, the modeled peak grows for reasons that have nothing to do with the watershed; the impact compounds as the design moves downstream.

Common consequences of double counting include:

  • Inflated peak discharges for the design storm, leading to oversized inlets, pipes, and culverts.
  • Larger detention requirements than the project necessitates, increasing land use requirements and construction costs.
  • Overly conservative floodplain limits that can affect insurance ratings, lot layouts, and permitting.
  • Calibration drift where the user attempts to match observed flows by tweaking unrelated parameters such as time of concentration or initial abstraction, masking the underlying input error.

Curve Number and Impervious Surface

The SCS curve number (CN) is a dimensionless index that estimates direct runoff from a rainfall depth based on land use, soil type, and antecedent moisture conditions. Standard CN tables, such as those in the NRCS TR-55 manual and NEH-630 Chapter 9 already include the effect of typical impervious cover for many urban and developed land use categories.

The impervious surface percentage defines the fraction of a subbasin where rainfall does not infiltrate, such as roofs, paved roads, parking lots, and sidewalks. When entered separately, it tells the model to compute runoff from that fraction of the subbasin using a fully impervious response and to combine it with the runoff from the pervious portion.

Both inputs describe imperviousness, but they describe it in two different ways. The trouble starts when both are used to describe the same impervious cover at the same time.

Where This Issue Can Occur

When the user models runoff with the SCS Curve Number method, both the curve number and the impervious surface percentage are entered together in the Subbasin Data dialog box. The dialog box accepts both inputs without warning, which is why it is up to the user to make sure they are consistent. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Subbasin Data command.

Double Counting Impervious Areas Img 1unknown node

How to Avoid Double Counting

The fix is to make sure imperviousness is represented in exactly one place in each subbasin. There are two reliable ways to do this. Both produce technically correct results. The right choice depends on how the curve number was derived.

Method 1 — Use a Pre-Weighted Curve Number

If the selected CN value already includes the effect of impervious cover for the land use (for example, a value taken from a standard table for “1/4-acre urban residential” or “commercial and business areas”), then the Impervious surface percentage in the Subbasin Data dialog box should be set to 0%. The CN already accounts for the imperviousness; entering it again would double count it.

The standard NRCS TR-55 table shown below is a good example of pre-weighted values. Each developed land use has an “average percent impervious area” included in the listed CN.

Double Counting Impervious Areas Img 2unknown node

Method 2 — Separate Pervious CN with Explicit Impervious Percentage

If the CN represents only the pervious portion of the subbasin (for example, a value for open space, meadow, woods, or row crops), then enter the actual impervious percentage in the Impervious surface entry field. The software then computes runoff from the pervious area using the entered CN, computes runoff from the impervious area using a fully impervious response and combines the two contributions to give total subbasin runoff.

This method is useful when:

  • The user has measured impervious cover from aerial mapping, GIS data, or CivilGEO’s built-in imperviousness coverage and wants the model to reflect the actual existing site conditions.
  • The user is evaluating future build-out where the impervious fraction will change but the underlying pervious land use will not.
  • The user is comparing existing vs proposed scenarios and wants imperviousness to be the single variable that changes between runs.

Quick Decision Guide

Use the table below as a quick check before running the model. The goal is to make sure the CN value and the impervious surface input are consistent and do not represent the same impervious area twice.

unknown node

Double Counting Example Scenario — New Residential Subdivision

A user is sizing a detention basin for a proposed residential subdivision on Hydrologic Soil Group C. The subdivision has roughly 30% impervious cover from streets, driveways, rooftops, and sidewalks. The subbasin is set up with the SCS Curve Number loss method.

Incorrect Setup — Double Counted

The user picks the CN for “1/4-acre urban residential” from a standard table, which already accounts for typical urban imperviousness, and enters an additional 30% impervious value. The same imperviousness is now represented twice. The computed peak discharge is artificially inflated, and the detention basin is sized for a flow that does not exist on the actual site.

Correct Method 1 — Pre-Weighted CN

The user picks the CN for “1/4-acre urban residential” and sets the impervious value to 0%. Imperviousness is represented once inside the CN, and the computed peak reflects the developed condition consistent with the CN table.

Correct Method 2 — Pervious CN with Explicit Imperviousness

The user picks a pervious-only CN (for example, “open space, good condition” on HSG C) and enters 30% in impervious value. The software computes runoff from the 70% pervious portion using the CN and from the 30% impervious portion as fully impervious, then combines the two. Imperviousness is again represented once.

unknown node

Conclusion

Double counting impervious areas is one of the most common sources of overestimated runoff in SCS Curve Number modeling. Before computing runoff for a subbasin, the user should confirm one of two things: either the curve number already represents the developed land use and the impervious surface field is set to 0%, or the curve number represents only the pervious land cover, and the impervious surface field carries the actual percent imperviousness.

When impervious cover is represented correctly, the model produces peak discharges that are consistent with the source data, detention sizing that reflects the real site, and floodplain limits that support agency review.

Transform Methods (Unit Hydrograph) › Runoff Method Selection

Subbasin Data - Selecting a Runoff Method

Subbasins are represented by drainage area polygons that produce the runoff that drain into other elements in the model. Runoff (Transform) methods are used to transform the excess precipitation (after the losses have been subtracted) into surface runoff (direct runoff). Several runoff methods are available to use including unit hydrograph methods and kinematic wave implementation.

In GeoHECHMS, the runoff method for a subbasin can be selected from the General Specifications section of the Subbasin Data dialog box.

Follow the steps given below to select a runoff method:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Subbasin Data command.Subbasin Data Input Ribbon Menu Command
  2. The Subbasin Data dialog box will be displayed.Subbasin Data Dialog Box
  3. From the Subbasin ID dropdown combo box, select the subbasin that will be assigned a runoff method.
  4. From the Runoff (transform) method dropdown combo box, select the runoff method.Runoff Method Dropdown Combo Box
  5. To enter the data for the selected runoff method, select the Runoff (Transform) Data option from the Subbasin Specifications dropdown combo box.Runoff Data Dropdown Combo Box
  6. The Runoff (Transform) Data panel will be displayed. Note that the Runoff (Transform) Data panel content changes based upon the runoff (transform) method selected in the General Specifications section.SCS Unit Hydrograph Specifications

The following sections describe the different runoff methods and how to enter the parameters for each method in the Runoff (Transform) Data panel.

Runoff Method: None

When None is selected for the Runoff (Transform) Method, then the Runoff (Transform) Data dropdown combo box entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Runoff Method None

Runoff Method: Clark Unit Hydrograph

The Clark Unit Hydrograph is a synthetic unit hydrograph method. This means that the user is not required to develop a unit hydrograph through analysis of past observed hydrographs. Instead, a time versus area curve (time-area curve) is used to develop the translation hydrograph resulting from a burst of precipitation. The resulting translation hydrograph is routed through a linear reservoir to account for storage attenuation effects across the subbasin.

When Clark Unit Hydrograph is selected for the Runoff (Transform) Method, the following data panel will be displayed.

Runoff Data Clark Unit Hydrograph Specifications

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

Unit Hydrograph Method

The Unit hydrograph method dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select the method for the Clark unit hydrograph. There are two options available: Standard Parameters and Variable Parameters. Based on the option selected, the different entry fields become either enabled or disabled in the data panel.

Standard Parameters

On selecting this option, the following entries are available to the user:

Time of Concentration

The Time of concentration entry field allows the user to define the maximum travel time in the subbasin.

Storage Coefficient

The Storage coefficient entry field allows the user to enter the storage coefficient, which is used in the linear reservoir that accounts for storage effects.

TOC vs Drainage Area Method

The TOC vs drainage area method entry field allows the user to define the time area method. There are two options available:

  1. Default: This option provides a default time area curve that represents the subbasin using an elliptical shape.
  2. Percentage Curve: This option provides a user-specified time-area curve. The relationship must be defined as a percentage curve in the paired data manager before it can be used in the subbasin element.
TOC vs Drainage Area Percentage Curve

The TOC vs drainage area percentage curve dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already defined percentage curve. Note that this dropdown combo box is only enabled when the Percentage Curve option is selected for the TOC vs Drainage Area Method entry. Otherwise, this dropdown combo box is disabled (e.g., grayed out). Clicking on the […] button will display a Percentage Curve Data dialog box, which allows the user to define a new user-defined percentage curve.

TOC vs Drainage Area Percentage Curve Dialog Box

Variable Parameters

On selecting this option, the following additional entries (shown in the red rectangle box) get enabled in the data panel.

Unit hydrograph Method Variable Parameters


The user must enter the data for the Time of concentration, Storage coefficient, TOC vs drainage area method and the following additional entries:

Excess (index) Precipitation Rate

The Excess (index) precipitation rate entry field allows the user to enter the excess (index) precipitation rate. This value represents the excess precipitation rate, which is used to relate the Time of Concentration and Storage Coefficient against the Concentration Curve and Storage Curve for the variable unit hydrograph method.

Time of Concentration Percentage Curve

The Time of concentration percentage curve dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already defined percentage curve. Clicking on the […] button will display a Time of Concentration Percentage Curve Data dialog box, which allows the user to define a new user-defined percentage curve.

TOC Percentage Curve Data Dialog Box
Storage Coefficient Percentage Curve

The Storage coefficient percentage curve dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already defined percentage curve. Clicking on the […] button will display the Storage Coefficient Percentage Curve Data dialog box, which allows the user to define a new user-defined percentage curve.

Storage Coefficient Percentage Curve Data Dialog Box

Runoff Method: Kinematic Wave

The Kinematic Wave method is designed principally for representing urban areas, although it can be used for undeveloped regions as well. It is a conceptual model that includes one or two representative surface areas. Typically, one surface area is used for impervious surfaces and one for pervious surfaces. Separate canopy, surface, and loss rate information is required for each surface area and is entered separately. The kinematic wave equations are used to calculate runoff for each surface area and then a weighted composite runoff is calculated using the representative percentage for each surface area.

The composite runoff is directed to a subcollector, which is used to represent primary collection in the stormwater management system. The most common collection system is represented by gutters along streets. In areas without gutters, unlined ditches next to the street may perform a similar stormwater collection function. The composite runoff is applied to the subcollector as a uniform lateral boundary condition, with scaling based on the representative area of a typical subcollector. Water is routed through a representative subcollector using the kinematic wave equations. There is no seepage from the subcollector so it may be difficult to use for representation of vegetated swales and other types of best management practices.

The outflow from the representative subcollector is directed to a collector, which is used to represent the next step up in the stormwater management system. Conceptually, the collector receives inflow from multiple gutters or ditches. The outflow from the subcollector is scaled up using the representative area of a typical collector and applied to the collector as a uniform lateral boundary condition. Water is routed through a representative collector using the kinematic wave equations. Again, there is no seepage from the collector.

The outflow from the representative collector is directed to a channel. The channel may be used to represent the final step in the stormwater management system, or alternatively, may be used to represent the river passing through the subbasin. Conceptually, the channel receives inflow from multiple collectors. The outflow from the representative collector is scaled up using the area of a typical collector and the area of the subbasin. The scaled flow is applied to the channel as a uniform lateral boundary condition. Water is routed through the channel to become the outflow from the subbasin.

When Kinematic Wave is selected for the Runoff (Transform) Method, the following data panel will be displayed.

Runoff Method: Kinematic Wave Dialog Box

Surface Area #1

The following input parameters are provided for the Surface Area #1 panel.

Total Length

The Total length entry field allows the user to enter the length of the surface area. For impervious areas, this should be the average flow length from the point where precipitation falls, to where the runoff first enters a collection gutter or channel. For pervious areas, this should likewise be the average flow length. When using the two surface areas, it is helpful to adopt a convention for which the surface area number (one or two) represents the pervious area. Clicking on the […] Measure button allows the user to select the length from the subbasin surface area to the collection network within the subbasin from the Map View.

Average Slope (V:H)

The Average slope (V:H) entry field allows the user to enter the average basin slope along the flow line from the point where precipitation falls to where the runoff first enters a gutter or channel. Clicking on the […] Measure button allows the user to select the basin slope from the subbasin outlet along the main watercourse, to a point opposite the subbasin centroid on the Map View.

Overland Flow Roughness

The Overland flow roughness entry field allows the user to define Manning's roughness coefficient for the overland flow surface areas. Clicking on the […] lookup button will display an Overland Flow Roughness lookup table dialog box.

Subbasin Area

The Subbasin area entry field allows the user to enter the percentage of the subbasin area occupied by each surface area. If the user wants to use one surface area, then enter 100 for the first surface area and 0 for the second. Note that as the user changes this value, the Subbasin area spin control in the Surface Area #2 panel changes accordingly. The two spin controls always add up to 100%. So, setting this value to 20% will set the spin control in the Surface Area #2 panel to 80%.

Routing Steps

The Routing steps entry field allows the user to enter the number of routing steps. The software uses the routing steps as a prompt to determine the correct distance step to use during runoff calculations. By default, the software uses a value of 5. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 5 to 99.

Surface Area #2

Note that this panel is the same as the Surface Area #1 panel. If the user has defined the Subbasin area in the Surface Area #1 panel as 100%, then the fields provided in the Surface Area #2 panel are disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Surface Area #2 Panel

Subcollector

The composite runoff is directed to a subcollector. The following input parameters are provided for the Subcollector panel.

Subcollector Panel

Additional Drainage Area

The Additional drainage area entry field allows the user to enter the area of the subcollector. This entry is used to determine how to apply the composite outflow from the subcollector to the collector channel. Clicking on the […] Measure button allows the user to draw an outline of the collector area, which prompts the software to measure the drainage area from the Map View.

Total Length

The Total length entry field allows the user to enter the flow length. The length should be the average distance from the starting point of the subcollector to the point at which it will enter a collector.

Average Slope (V:H)

The Average slope (V:H) entry field allows the user to enter the average slope along the average flow length.

Manning’s Roughness

The Manning’s roughness entry field allows the user to enter the roughness coefficient, which should be the average value for the entire subcollector.

Number Subreaches

The Number subreaches entry field allows the user to enter the number of subreaches, a value which the software uses to determine the correct distance step to use during routing calculations.

Element Shape

The Element shape dropdown combo box allows the user to specify the cross section shape. The dropdown combo box lists circular pipe, deep rectangle, rectangle, trapezoid, and triangle shapes.

Based upon the shape selected, additional information will be needed to describe the dimensions of the cross section shape. This information may include a diameter (circular pipe), channel width (deep rectangle, rectangle), bottom width (trapezoid), or side slope (trapezoid, triangle).

Collector

The outflow from the subcollector enters a collector as lateral inflow. The collector channel is intended to represent small ditches or open channels that are part of an engineered stormwater management system. The parameters for the collector are exactly the same as for the subcollector.

The Length, Slope, Manning's roughness, Number subreaches, and Element shape all have the same definitions. The drainage area served by a typical collector must be entered. This value is used to apply lateral inflow from the collector to the main channel.

Channel

The outflow from the representative collector is directed to a channel. The following input parameters are provided in the Channel panel.

Channel Panel

Routing Method

The Routing method dropdown combo box allows the user to select the routing method. There are two options available: Kinematic Wave and Muskingum Cunge. The runoff on the two surface areas is always routed using the kinematic wave method. However, the user may choose to use Muskingum-Cunge routing in the subcollector, collector, and main channel. All three channels use the same method.

Total Length

The Total length entry field allows the user to specify the flow length within the subbasin to the outlet. Clicking on the […] Measure button allows the user to select length within the subbasin from the Map View.

Average Slope (V:H)

The Average slope (V:H) entry field allows the user to enter the average slope for the whole channel. Clicking on the […] Measure button allows the user to select the basin slope from the subbasin outlet along the main watercourse, to a point opposite the subbasin centroid on the Map View.

Manning’s Roughness

The Manning’s roughness entry field allows the user to enter the Manning’s roughness value for the whole channel. Clicking on the […] lookup button will display a Manning’s Roughness lookup table dialog box.

Manning’s Roughness Data dialog Box

Number Subreaches

The Number subreaches entry field allows the user to enter the number of subreaches, which is used to determine the distance step to use during routing calculations. By default, the software uses a value of 5. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 2 to 99. Note that when the Muskingum Cunge routing method is selected, then this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Element Shape

The Element shape dropdown combo box allows the user to specify the cross section shape. If the Kinematic Wave routing method is selected, the dropdown combo box lists Circular Pipe, Deep Rectangle, Rectangle, Trapezoid, and Triangle options. When the Muskingum-Cunge routing method is selected, the dropdown combo box lists 8-Point Cross Section, Circular Pipe, Rectangle, Trapezoid, and Triangle.

Based upon the shape selected, additional information will be needed to describe the dimensions of the cross section shape. This information may include a diameter (circular pipe), channel width (deep rectangle, rectangle), bottom width (trapezoid), side slope (trapezoid, triangle), or left and right overbank Manning’s n (8-point cross section shape).

Trapezoid Bottom Width

The Trapezoid bottom width entry field allows the user to enter the channel bottom width.

Side Slope (V:H)

The Side slope (V:H) entry allows the user to enter the channel side slope. The side slope is dimensionless and entered as the units of horizontal distance per one unit of vertical distance.

Runoff Method: SCS Unit Hydrograph

The Soil Conservation Service (SCS) unit hydrograph method defines a curvilinear unit hydrograph by first setting the percentage of the unit runoff that occurs before the peak flow (NRCS, 2007). A triangular unit hydrograph can then be fit to the curvilinear unit hydrograph so that the total time base of the unit hydrograph can be calculated. The standard unit hydrograph is defined with 37.5% of unit runoff occurring before the peak flow. This definition corresponds to a peak rate factor of 484, which incorporates the percentage of unit runoff before the peak, calculated total time base, and unit conversions when applying the equations within the US Customary unit system.

When SCS Unit Hydrograph is selected for the Runoff (Transform) Method, the following data panel will be displayed.

Runoff Method: SCS Unit Hydrograph

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

Hydrograph Peaking Factor

The Hydrograph peaking factor dropdown combo box allows the user to select the peaking factor, which essentially controls the volume of water on the rising and recession limbs. By default, the Standard (PRF=484) option is selected.

Lag Time

The Lag time entry field allows the user to enter the lag time, which is defined as the length of time between the centroid of precipitation mass and the peak flow of the resulting hydrograph.

Runoff Method: Snyder Unit Hydrograph

The Snyder Unit Hydrograph method is a synthetic unit hydrograph method. The original methodology only supported computing the peak flow as the result of a unit of precipitation. Later, equations were developed to estimate the time base of the hydrograph and the width at 50% of the peak flow. Because the Snyder method does not compute all ordinates of the hydrograph, a Clark hydrograph is constructed in such a way that the Snyder properties are maintained.

When Snyder Unit Hydrograph is selected for the Runoff (Transform) Method, the following data panel will be displayed.

Runoff Method: Snyder Unit Hydrograph

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

Lag Time Method

The Lag time method dropdown combo box allows the user to select the lag time method. There are three options available: Standard, Ft Worth District, and Tulsa District. Based on the option selected, the content of this panel changes to define additional data.

Standard

On selecting this option, the following entries are available to the user:

Lag Time

The Lag time entry field allows the user to enter the lag time.

Peaking Coefficient

The Peaking coefficient entry field allows the user to enter the peaking coefficient, which is used to measure the steepness of the hydrograph that results from a unit of precipitation.

Ft Worth District

On selecting this option, the following input parameters will be displayed.

Ft Worth District Data Panel
Total Length

The Total length entry field allows the user to enter the length from the point of the outlet of the subbasin, along the main watercourse to the most hydraulically remote point on the subbasin boundary. Clicking on the […] Measure button allows the user to select the length from the Map View.

Centroid Length

The Centroid length entry field allows the user to enter the length from the outlet of the subbasin, along the main watercourse, to a point opposite the subbasin centroid. Clicking on the […] Measure button allows the user to select the length from the Map View.

Weighted Slope (V:H)

The Weighted slope (V:H) entry field allows the user to enter the weighted slope. The weighted slope is the slope of the main watercourse between points located at 10 percent and 85 percent of the length of the main watercourse, measured from the subbasin outlet. Clicking on the […] Measure button allows the user to select the basin slope from the subbasin outlet along the main watercourse, to a point opposite the subbasin centroid on the Map View.

Urbanization

The Urbanization spin control allows the user to enter the urbanization percentage. This percentage is estimated as the percentage of the subbasin where the drainage system has been improved to carry runoff more efficiently to the outlet. By default, the software uses a value of 25. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 0 to 100.

Sand

The Sand spin control allows the user to enter the sand percentage. Zero percent indicates essentially all-clay soils with characteristically low infiltration rates. Conversely, 100 percent indicates essentially all-sandy soils with characteristically high infiltration rates. By default, the software uses a value of 25. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 0 to 100.

Peaking Coefficient

The Peaking coefficient entry field is estimated by another method and entered directly. The Ft Worth District method does not include estimation of the peaking coefficient.

Tulsa District

On selecting this option, the following input parameters will be displayed.

Tulsa District Data Panel

Note that all the input parameters of this method are similar to the Ft Worth District method, except for the following entry:

Channelization

The Channelization spin control allows the user to enter the percentage of channelization. This percentage is estimated as the percentage of the subbasin where the drainage system has been improved to carry runoff more efficiently to the outlet. By default, the software uses a value of 25. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 0 to 100.

Runoff Method: User-Specified S-Graph

The User-Specified S-Graph method is not synthetic. It uses a special summation unit hydrograph (s-graph) to represent the response of a subbasin to a unit of precipitation. The s-graph is defined with the percentage of the time lag as the independent variable (x-axis), and the percentage of the cumulative runoff volume as the dependent variable (y-axis). Computationally, the s-graph is scaled by a specified time lag and then successive differences are taken along the curve to compute a unit hydrograph directly from the scaled s-graph.

When User-Specified S-Graph is selected for the Runoff (Transform) Method, the following data panel will be displayed.

Runoff Method: User-Specified S-Graph

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

Lag Time Method

The Lag time method dropdown combo box allows the user to select the lag time method. There are two options available: Standard and Regression. Based on the option selected, the content of this panel changes to define additional data.

Standard

On selecting this option, the following entries are available to the user:

Summation Unit Hydrograph

The Summation unit hydrograph dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already defined summation unit hydrograph (s-graph). Clicking on the […] button will display a Summation Unit Hydrograph Data dialog box, which allows the user to define a new user-defined summation unit hydrograph.

Summation Unit Hydrograph Data Dialog Box
Lag Time

The Lag time entry field allows the user to enter the lag time.

Regression

On selecting this option, the following input parameters will be displayed.

Regression Data Panel
Total Length

The Total length entry field allows the user to enter the length of the longest flow path in the subbasin. Clicking on the […] Measure button allows the user to select the length from the Map View.

Centroid Length

The Centroid length entry field allows the user to enter the length along the stream from the outlet to a point opposite the centroid. Clicking on the […] Measure button allows the user to select the length from the Map View.

Weighted Slope (V:H)

The Weighted slope (V:H) entry field allows the user to enter the slope of the stream. Clicking on the […] Measure button allows the user to select the basin slope from the subbasin outlet along the main watercourse, to a point opposite the subbasin centroid on the Map View.

Hydraulic Efficiency Coefficient

The Hydraulic efficiency coefficient entry field allows the user to enter the hydraulic efficiency of the stream channel.

M Exponent

The M exponent entry field allows the user to enter the M exponent value. This value should be determined through a regional regression study of watershed properties and observed lag time.

P Exponent

The P exponent entry field allows the user to enter the P exponent value. This value should be determined through a regional regression study of watershed properties and observed lag time.

Runoff Method: User-Specified Unit Hydrograph

The User-Specified Unit Hydrograph method is not synthetic. Consequently, a separate unit hydrograph must be developed for each subbasin. Ideally, these unit hydrographs are developed from multiple storm observations when precipitation and flow have been measured at similar time intervals. The unit hydrograph developed in this manner has a so-called duration that is equal to the duration of excess precipitation. For example, a 3-hour duration unit hydrograph is generated by a precipitation event with 3 hours of excess precipitation.

When User-Specified Unit Hydrograph is selected for the Runoff (Transform) Method, the following data panel will be displayed.

Runoff Method: User-Specified Unit Hydrograph

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

Unit Hydrograph

The Unit hydrograph dropdown list allows the user to select the unit hydrograph to use. The unit hydrograph must be defined in the Unit Hydrograph Data dialog box before selecting it. Clicking on the [...] button will display the Unit Hydrograph Data dialog box, which allows the user to define new user-defined unit hydrograph flow values.

Unit Hydrograph Data dialog box

Number of Passes

The Number of passes spin control is used to define the number of passes. The number of passes is used to correct for minor inflection points in the S-curve that is used to convert the unit hydrograph from the input duration to the duration required as per the computational interval.

Pros and Cons of Runoff (Transform) Methods

unknown node
Transform Methods (Unit Hydrograph) › SCS Unit Hydrograph & Peaking Factor

SCS Hydrograph Peaking Factor

The Soil Conservation Service (SCS) unit hydrograph method defines a curvilinear unit hydrograph by setting the percentage of the unit runoff that occurs before the peak flow. The unit hydrograph impacts the shape of the runoff hydrograph generated by the model, particularly the peak rate of discharge.

The standard unit hydrograph is defined as 37.5% of the unit runoff occurring before the peak flow. This definition corresponds to a peak rate factor (PRF) of 484, which incorporates the percentage of unit runoff before the peak.

However, the percentage of unit runoff occurring before the peak flow is not uniform across all watersheds, as it depends on flow length, ground slope, and other watershed properties.

For stormwater projects, the user can follow the steps below to select a hydrograph peak rate factor:

  1. Under the File ribbon menu, select the Options backstage page. Options backstage page
  2. The Options backstage page will be displayed. From either the Project Options or Application Options, click the SCS hydrograph peaking factor dropdown combo box under the General Preference section. SCS hydrograph peaking factor dropdown combo box

The SCS hydrograph peaking factor option allows the user to select the peaking factor, which controls the runoff on the rising and recession limbs of the hydrograph. By default, the Standard (PRF = 484) option is selected. The user can pick any other peak rate factor value, and the software will automatically construct the unit hydrograph and display it as a graphical plot in the Subbasin Data dialog box or Plot Hydrographs dialog box.

The following graphical representation shows a comparison between two dimensionless unit hydrographs with different peak rate factor values.

Comparison of Different Dimensionless Unit Hydrographs

The following table describes the typical hydrograph peaking factors available in CivilGEO Software:

unknown node

Note that flat watersheds typically have a lower PRF that may be as small as 100. In contrast, steeper watersheds have a larger PRF that may range up to 600.

The following table provides a description of typical hydrograph peaking factors along with their limb ratios (ratio of the recession limb length to rising limb length):

unknown node
Transform Methods (Unit Hydrograph) › Time of Concentration (TOC)

Subbasin TOC Data - Selecting FAA TOC Method

The Subbasin TOC Data command allows the user to compute the time of concentration (TOC) for one or more subbasins using the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) method. The user can select the TOC/Lag time method from the Subbasin - TOC/Lag Time Method dropdown combo box in the General Preferences section of the Options backstage page. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about TOC methods.

The FAA TOC method computes TOC using the following equation:

1.png

Where:

  • L = Longest flow path in the subbasin
  • S = Flow path average slope
  • C = Rational Method runoff coefficient

Follow the steps below on how to compute time of concentration using the FAA TOC method:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Subbasin TOC Data command.
    Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-FAA-TOC-Method-Image-1.png
    Alternatively, from the Input ribbon menu, click the Drainage Subbasins dropdown menu and select the Subbasin TOC Data command.
    Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-FAA-TOC-Method-Image-2.png
  2. The Subbasin TOC Data dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-FAA-TOC-Method-Image-3.png

The Subbasin TOC Data dialog box contains three tabs as described below:

  • Compute TOC
  • Convert CN to Runoff Coefficient
  • Rainfall Intensity Lookup

Compute TOC

In the Compute TOC panel, the Select Subbasins section allows the user to select single or multiple subbasins defined in the current scenario for computing the time of concentration using the FAA method.

The user can select the subbasin(s) using any of the following methods:

  • By checking the checkboxes corresponding to each subbasin in the Select Subbasins section.
  • By clicking the [Pick] button. In this selection method, the Subbasin TOC Data dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the subbasin(s) from the Map View. After selecting the subbasin(s), press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The Subbasin TOC Data dialog box will be redisplayed.

After selecting the subbasin(s), the total number of selected subbasins will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field, as shown below.

Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-FAA-TOC-Method-Image-4.png

If the US unit system is selected on the Options backstage page, the US units will be displayed in the Select Subbasins section. The user can also change the unit system to a metric (SI) unit, if necessary. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about setting the model units to metric (SI) or US units.

The table in the Select Subbasins section contains the following columns:

  • Subbasin
    This read-only column lists all subbasin IDs contained in the current scenario.
  • Flow Path Slope (ft/ft)
    This read-only column lists the computed flow path slopes using the Automated Flow Paths command. To learn more about the Automated Flow Paths command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Flow Path Length (ft)
    This read-only column lists the computed flow path lengths using the Automated Flow Paths command. To learn more about the Automated Flow Paths command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Runoff Coefficient
    This editable column lists the computed runoff coefficients. Clicking the […] lookup button displays a Runoff Coefficients dialog box, which allows the user to select the runoff coefficient.
    Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-FAA-TOC-Method-Image-5.png
  • Computed TOC (minutes)
    This editable column lists the computed TOC value. By default, this column lists the TOC value defined in the Subbasin Data dialog box. To learn more about the Subbasin Data command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Convert CN to Runoff Coefficient

This panel is used to convert computed curve number (CN) values into equivalent runoff coefficient values for the selected subbasin(s).

Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-FAA-TOC-Method-Image-6.png

Note
Subbasins selected in the Compute TOC panel will also appear as selected in this panel.

The table in the Select Subbasins section contains the following columns:

  • Subbasin
    This read-only column lists all subbasin IDs contained in the current scenario.
  • Flow Path Slope (ft/ft)
    This read-only column lists the computed flow path slopes using the Automated Flow Paths command. To learn more about the Automated Flow Paths command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Curve Number
    This editable column lists the computed curve numbers using the Compute CN command. To learn more about the Compute CN command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Impervious Area (%)
    This editable column lists the computed impervious areas using the Compute % Impervious command. To learn more about the Compute % Impervious command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Runoff Coefficient
    This editable column lists the runoff coefficient that is computed when the user clicks the [Compute] button.

Clicking on the [Compute] button allows the software to compute the runoff coefficient for the selected subbasin(s) and display the result in the Runoff Coefficient column.

Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-FAA-TOC-Method-Image-7.png

Notes

  • If SCS Curve Number is selected as the EPA SWMM infiltration method in the Scenario Manager dialog box and no curve number is defined for the subbasin, the following informational dialog box will be displayed:
    Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-FAA-TOC-Method-Image-8.png
  • If a method other than SCS Curve Number is selected as the EPA SWMM infiltration method in the Scenario Manager dialog box and no curve number is defined for the subbasin, the following informational dialog box will be displayed:
    Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-FAA-TOC-Method-Image-9.png
  • If no rainfall intensity is defined in the Rainfall Intensity Lookup panel, the following informational dialog box will be displayed:
    Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-FAA-TOC-Method-Image-10.png

Rainfall Intensity Lookup

This panel is used to retrieve the rainfall intensity value required to convert a previously computed curve number (CN) into an equivalent runoff coefficient.

Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-FAA-TOC-Method-Image-11.png

Location Selection

This section allows the user to select the location from which the rainfall intensity value is to be retrieved.

The following options are available in this section:

  • Centered on current view extents
    If this radio button option is selected, the software automatically selects the central location of the region displayed in the current Map View extents for retrieval of rainfall intensity value.
  • Centered on subbasins
    If this radio button option is selected, the software automatically selects the central location of the subbasin model defined in the current scenario. If no subbasins are defined, this option will be disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Select location
    This radio button option allows the user to pick the required location from the Map View interactively by using the [Pick] button. The address of the selected location will be displayed in the read-only field next to this option. The latitude and longitude values for the selected location will be displayed in the Latitude & longitude fields. The user can click the [Clear] button to clear the selected location and redo the entire process.
    Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-FAA-TOC-Method-Image-12.png

If the user selects either the Centered on current view extents or the Centered on subbasins options, the software will display the information of the selected location after successfully retrieving the rainfall intensity value.

Perform Rainfall Intensity Lookup

This section allows the user to retrieve the rainfall intensity value for the selected location.

Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-FAA-TOC-Method-Image-13.png

The following entries are available in this section:

  • Rainfall data source
    This dropdown combo box entry lists the rainfall data sources that are available for the selected location. The following rainfall data sources are available:
    • Austria – Bundesministerium Wasserwirtschaft eHYD Data Service
    • Canada – Environment Canada & Ontario Ministry of Transportation
    • Canada – Ontario Ministry of Transportation
    • Germany – Deutscher Wetterdienst – Klima und Umwelt
    • USA – ISWS (Illinois) Bulletin 75 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
    • USA – NOAA Atlas 14 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
    • USA – NOAA Atlas 2 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
    • USA – NRCC (Northeast Regional Climate Center) PFDS
    • USA – SUDAS (lowa) Bulletin 71 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server

Note: The specific rainfall data source entry will be displayed based on the selected location.

  • Return interval
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the return intervals that are provided by the selected rainfall data source. By default, the 2 Year return interval is selected.
  • Rainfall intensity
    This entry field contains the rainfall intensity value that is returned for the selected location, rainfall data source, and return interval. Clicking the [Retrieve] button allows the software to retrieve the rainfall intensity value and display the results in the entry field.

Computing TOC

Once all the data have been defined in the Subbasin TOC Data dialog box, click the [Compute] button. The software will then compute the time of concentration for the selected subbasin(s) and display the results in the Computed TOC column.

Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-FAA-TOC-Method-Image-14.png
Transform Methods (Unit Hydrograph) › Time of Concentration (TOC)

Subbasin TOC Data Command

The Subbasin TOC Data command allows the user to subdivide the subbasin flow path into individual segments in order to assign the appropriate SCS TR-55 runoff flow types to compute the SCS TR-55 Time of Concentration (TOC) / Lag Time. The defined flow path and corresponding computed Time of Concentration / Lag Time is then stored for each subbasin and used in the HEC-HMS runoff computations in the following runoff methods:

unknown nodeunknown node

To use the Subbasin TOC Data command, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Subbasin TOC Data command.Subbasin TOC Data command
  2. The Subbasin TOC Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Subbasin TOC Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to compute the subbasin flow path TOC / Lag Time and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Subbasin Flow Path

Using the dropdown combo boxes and corresponding [Pick] buttons provided under the Select Subbasin Flow Path section, the user can select the required subbasin and associated flow path for purposes of computing the SCS TR-55 Time of Concentration (TOC) / Lag Time.

The following entries are provided in the Select Subbasin Flow Path section:

Subbasin ID

The Subbasin ID dropdown combo box allows the user to select the subbasin. If only one subbasin is present in the current scenario, then that subbasin will be automatically selected.

Subbasin ID dropdown combo box

Note that if no subbasin is already selected, the dropdown combo box status will appear as “Not Selected”.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively select the subbasin from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the Subbasin TOC Data dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next. The user can then click on the required subbasin on the Map View to select it. The Subbasin TOC Data dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Subbasin ID dropdown combo box will automatically update to show the ID of the selected subbasin.

Flow Path ID

The Flow path ID dropdown combo box allows the user to select the subbasin flow path. If only one flow path is defined for the selected subbasin, then that flow path will be automatically selected.

Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-Img-4.png

Note that if no flow path is already selected, the dropdown combo box status will appear as “Not Selected”.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively select the flow path from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the Subbasin TOC Data dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next. The user can click on the required flow path to select it. The Subbasin TOC Data dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Flow path ID dropdown combo box will automatically update to show the ID of the selected flow path.

Terrain

The Terrain dropdown combo box allows the user to select the terrain surface associated with the selected subbasin. If only one terrain surface is present in the project, then that terrain surface will be automatically selected. Note that if there is no terrain surface corresponding to the selected subbasin, the dropdown combo box status will appear as “Not Selected”.

Flow Path Profile Plot

After the subbasin and associated flow path have been selected, the software will display a profile view of the terrain surface along the flow path line, starting at the highest endpoint of the flow path line at the left side end of the profile. This profile view allows the user to subdivide the flow path into flow segments, where each segment corresponds to a specific flow type [i.e., sheet flow, shallow concentrated flow, channel flow, pipe flow, and zero travel time (ponds)].

Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-Img-5.png

The user can extract the flow path profile for different terrain surfaces by selecting the terrain surface from the Terrain dropdown combo box and clicking the [Extract] button. The new flow path profile for the selected terrain surface will be displayed in the profile plot.

Flow Path Profile Plot - New flow path profile

Editing Flow Segments on Profile Plot

The user can grab the joint between any two segments and drag the joint to the left or right. User adjustments will be reflected in the flow path profile line. As the joint is moved, the length and slope will automatically update in the data table shown in the Define SCS TR-55 TOC Data section. In addition, the length of each segment is shown above the segment so that the user can see how the edits are impacting segment length.

Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-Img-7.png

Adding/Merging Flow Segments on Profile Plot

The user can also add new segments or merge existing segments of the flow path using the Add Segment or Merge Segments option from the profile plot context menu.

Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-Img-8.png

To add a flow segment, the user can right-click at a location on the profile line and select the Add Segment option from the displayed context menu. The software will insert a new segment breakpoint at the cursor location. After adding segments, the user can define the runoff flow type for each segment using the data table provided under the Define SCS TR-55 TOC Data section.

Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-Img-9.png

To merge two flow path segments, the user can select the segment breakpoint between the two segments on the profile plot. The selected segment breakpoint will be highlighted. The user can then right-click and select the Merge Segments option from the displayed context menu.

The software will merge the segments adjacent to the segment break point. However, the flow line (and profile line) will not shorten. The two bracketing flow segments surrounding the segment breakpoint will fill-in the gap.

Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-Img-10.png

Editing Flow Path Segments in Data Table

The flow path segments can also be edited using the data table entries provided under the Define SCS TR-55 TOC Data section.

Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-Img-11.png

If the Maintain total flow length (adjacent segments will automatically adjust their lengths) checkbox entry is checked, then:

  • The total length of the flow path will not change. Note that the total length of the flow path is displayed in the Total flow path length read-only field.
  • The slope values are editable and can be changed for the flow segments.
  • If the user manually edits the segment length values in the table, the segment length below the current entry will change accordingly to reflect the manual edit.
  • If the user enters a segment length value larger than feasible relative to the segment length below it, the following informational dialog box will be displayed, and the entry will be discarded.
    Invalid Segment Length informational dialog box

The user can freely edit the segmented flow path lengths and slopes. The profile plot will adjust accordingly, ignoring the profile that was extracted from the selected terrain surface.

Data Table Entries

The following entries are provided in the data table:

Runoff Flow Type

The Runoff Flow Type dropdown combo box is used to define the runoff flow type for each segment. It lists five options to define segment flow type: Channel Flow, Pipe Flow, Shallow Concentrated Flow, Sheet Flow, and Zero Travel Time (Ponds).

Runoff Flow Type dropdown combo box
  • Channel Flow: It is assumed to begin where surveyed cross section information has been obtained (where channels are visible on aerial photographs or blue lines that indicate streams appear on USGS quadrangle sheets).
  • Pipe Flow: It is a flow through a pipe network.
  • Shallow Concentrated Flow: Sheet flow usually becomes shallow concentrated flow after a distance of 300 feet.
  • Sheet Flow: It is a flow over plane surfaces and usually occurs in the headwater of streams.
  • Zero Travel Time (Ponds): It accounts for flow segments through a reservoir, lake, pond, or other structure that has a zero travel time.

Flow Length (ft)

The Flow Length (ft) entry is used to alter the length of flow segments. This entry accepts only positive, non-zero integers.

Slope (ft/ft)

The Slope (ft/ft) editable entry represents the slope of the flow segment line on the selected terrain surface. This entry accepts only positive, non-zero floating numbers. The user can click the adjacent [Recalc] button to recompute the segment slope for the defined flow length and elevation terrain surface. Similarly, the [Recalc All] button allows the user to recompute the slope value for the flow path segments available in the scenario.

Hydraulic Radius (ft)

The Hydraulic Radius (ft) entry is used in the Channel Flow and Pipe Flow equations while computing the Time of Concentration (TOC) values. This entry is only enabled for the Channel Flow and Pipe Flow rows, and its default value is 0.45 ft.

Surface Roughness/Type

The Surface Roughness/Type entry automatically changes depending upon the runoff flow type selected.

unknown node
Shallow Concentrated Flow

When Shallow Concentrated Flow is selected as the Runoff Flow Type, a dropdown combo box will be displayed with the following entries:

  • Agricultural Crops
  • Bare Ground
  • Forest With Underbush
  • Forest Without Underbush
  • Long Grass
  • Paved
  • Short Grass
  • Unpaved
    Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-Img-14.png

The TOC for the Shallow Concentrated Flow is computed using the following equation.

Shallow Concentrated Flow Equation

The Shallow Concentrated Flow computational procedure uses the same mathematical formula as used in the NRCS Upland Method (USDA NRCS NEH National Engineering Handbook, Chapter 15, Travel Time, Time of Concentration and Lag). The basic difference between the two methods is that the Shallow Concentrated Flow utilizes two surface types (i.e., paved and unpaved). Due to the similarity between these two methods, the software includes the capabilities in the NRCS Upland Method to provide additional flexibility in computing the TOC for the Shallow Concentrated Flow.

Note that the surface roughness values used to calculate the TOC for the Shallow Concentrated Flow are shown in the below table.

unknown node
Channel Flow

When Channel Flow is selected as the Runoff Flow Type, an entry field is provided to enter the roughness value. The user can click the […] lookup button to display the Manning’s Roughness lookup table dialog box, as shown below.

Manning’s Roughness lookup table dialog box 1
Pipe Flow

When Pipe Flow is selected as the Runoff Flow Type, an entry field is provided to enter the roughness value. The user can click the […] lookup button to display the Channel and Pipe Manning’s Roughness lookup table dialog box, as shown below.

Channel and Pipe Manning’s Roughness lookup table dialog box

A default value of 0.29 ft is used for Hydraulic Radius. This value is for a 12 in pipe with maximum discharge. For maximum discharge, the depth must be 0.939 times the diameter, or the hydraulic radius must be 0.286 times the diameter.

Sheet Flow

When Sheet Flow is selected as the Runoff Flow Type, an entry field is provided to enter the roughness value. The user can click the […] lookup button to display the Overland Flow Roughness lookup table dialog box, as shown below.

Manning’s Roughness lookup table dialog box 2
Zero Travel Time (Ponds)

When Zero Travel Time (Ponds) is selected as the Runoff Flow Type, the software does not require any roughness value or surface type. It accounts for flow segments that pass through a reservoir, lake, pond, or other structure. This travel time is normally very small and can be assumed as zero.

Velocity (ft/s)

The Velocity (ft/s) is a read-only entry that displays the computed flow velocity for that row.

TOC (minutes)

The TOC (minutes) is a read-only entry that displays the computed time of concentration for that row.

Total TOC (minutes)

The Total TOC (minutes) is a read-only entry that displays the summation of all the individual flow segment TOC values.

Lag time (minutes)

The Lag time (minutes) is a read-only entry that displays the corresponding lag time based upon the total TOC.

Editing Flow Path Segments on Map View

The user can click the [Edit TOC Segments] button to add, edit, or delete flow path segments on the Map View.

Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-Img-17.png

On clicking the [Edit TOC Segments] button, the Subbasin TOC Data dialog box will temporarily disappear. The user can then select the flow segment nodes and drag them along the flow path line on the Map View.

Flow segment node on Map View

Adding/Deleting Flow Path Segments on Map View

If necessary, the user can add or delete a flow segment while editing the flow path on the Map View. To add or delete a flow segment from a TOC flow path, the user can right-click at a location where a new flow segment node is to be inserted or select an existing TOC flow segment that is to be deleted. Then select the Add Segment or Delete Segment option from the displayed context menu.

Adding/Deleting Flow Path Segments on Map View

On selecting the Add Segment option, the software will insert a node at the selected location and subdivide the previous flow segment into two separate segments. The two flow segments will have the same runoff flow type as the previous flow segment. The inserted node will be selected. The user can click and drag the node along the TOC flow path to adjust the length of the two adjacent flow segments.

On selecting the Delete Segment option, the software will remove the selected TOC flow segment. The remaining flow segments will fill-in (backfill) any removed flow segments. When removing a flow segment, the next downstream flow segment will fill-in the removed flow segment (by convention) where possible. If the most downstream flow segment is removed, then the next upstream flow segment will fill-in the removed flow segment.

Note that if there is only one flow segment on the flow path, the user cannot remove the flow segment, and the Delete Segment option is grayed out (unavailable).

After editing the flow paths, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Subbasin TOC Data dialog box will be redisplayed.

SCS TR-55 Time of Concentration Computation

The software requires a 2-year-24-hour rainfall depth value to calculate TOC for sheet flow. For the regions falling within the United States, the software automatically retrieves and displays the 2-year-24-hour rainfall depth value in the 2yr-24hr rainfall depth entry field.

Subbasin-TOC-Data-Command-Img-20.png

The Precipitation data source dropdown entry is used to select the precipitation data source for regions such as Austria, Germany, Ontario (Canada), and the USA. The precipitation data source is used for computing the 2yr-24hr rainfall depth data for the selected location.

The available precipitation data source options are:

  • Austria – Bundesministerium Wasserwirtschaft eHYD Data Service
  • Canada – Environment Canada & Ontario Ministry of Transportation
  • Canada – Ontario Ministry of Transportation
  • Germany – Deutscher Wetterdienst – Klima und Umwelt
  • USA – NOAA Atlas 2 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
  • USA – NOAA Atlas 14 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server (default)
  • USA – ISWS (Illinois) Bulletin 75 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
  • USA – SUDAS (lowa) Bulletin 71 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
  • USA – NRCC (Northeast Regional Climate Center) PFDS

Note: The specific precipitation data source entry will be displayed based on the selected location.

The 2yr-24hr rainfall depth entry field is used to define the 2-year-24-hour rainfall depth value. Clicking the [Retrieve] button causes the software to automatically retrieve the 2-year-24-hour rainfall depth value for the regions falling within the United States.

For regions falling outside the precipitation data coverage area, the user needs to manually enter the rainfall depth value in the 2yr-24hr rainfall depth entry field.

To compute the Time of Concentration (TOC) / Lag Time for the selected flow path, the user can click the [Compute] button. On clicking the [Compute] button:

  • The TOC for individual segments will be displayed in the corresponding TOC (minutes) read-only field.
  • The TOC and Lag Time of the complete flow path will be displayed in the Total TOC (minutes) and Lag time (minutes) read-only field, respectively.
  • All HEC-HMS stormwater runoff methods that require the SCS TR-55 TOC Time of Concentration (TOC) / Lag Time will have the data populated into the appropriate fields.
    [Compute] button

Furthermore, the user can click the [Compute All] button to compute the TOC /Lag Time for all subbasins at once. On clicking the [Compute All] button, the software will go through each subbasin and compute the TOC / Lag Time. If a subbasin has multiple flow paths, the software will compute the TOC / Lag Time for each flow path. However, the flow path with the largest TOC /Lag Time will be assigned to the subbasin. Click the [Restore] button to restore the TOC flow segments back to their original segments and computed values.

Transform Methods (Unit Hydrograph) › Time of Concentration (TOC)

Subbasin TOC Data - Selecting SCS Watershed Lag Method

The Subbasin TOC Data command allows the user to compute the time of concentration (TOC) for one or more subbasins using the SCS Watershed Lag method. The user can select the TOC/Lag time method from the Subbasin - TOC/Lag Time Method dropdown combo box in the General Preferences section of the Options backstage page.

The SCS Watershed Lag method computes TOC using the following equation:

SCS Watershed Lag method computation equation

Where:

L = Longest flow path in the subbasin

S = Average subbasin slope

RT = Maximum potential retention

Also,

Maximum potential retention calculation formula

Here, CN = Curve number

Follow the steps below that describe how to compute time of concentration using the SCS Watershed Lag TOC method:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Subbasin TOC Data command.
    Subbasin TOC Data command - SCS Watershed Lag method
    Alternatively, from the Input ribbon menu, click the Drainage Subbasins dropdown menu and select the Subbasin TOC Data command.
    Subbasin TOC Data command of Drainage Subbasins dropdown menu
  2. The Subbasin TOC Data dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.
    Subbasin TOC Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Subbasin TOC Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Subbasins

The Select Subbasins section allows the user to select single or multiple subbasins defined in the current scenario to compute the time of concentration using the SCS Watershed Lag method.

The user can select the subbasin(s) using any of the following methods:

  • By checking the checkboxes corresponding to each subbasin in the Select Subbasins section.
  • By clicking the [Pick] button. In this selection method, the Subbasin TOC Data dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the subbasin(s) from the Map View. After selecting the subbasin(s), press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The Subbasin TOC Data dialog box will be redisplayed.

After selecting the subbasin(s), the total number of selected subbasins will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field, as shown below.

Total selected read-only field

Note that if the US unit system is selected on the Options backstage page, the US units will be displayed in the Select Subbasins section. The user can also change the unit system to a metric (SI) unit, if necessary. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about setting the model units to metric (SI) or US units.

The table in the Select Subbasins section contains the following data column entries:

  • Subbasin
    This read-only entry lists all subbasin IDs contained in the current scenario.
  • Flow Path Length (ft)
    This read-only entry lists the computed flow path lengths using the Automated Flow Paths command. To learn more about the Automated Flow Paths command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Subbasin Slope (ft/ft)
    This editable entry lists the computed subbasin slopes using the Compute Slopes command. To learn more about the Compute Slopes command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Curve Number
    This editable entry lists the computed curve numbers using the Compute CN command. Clicking the […] lookup button displays a SCS Curve Number dialog box, which allows the user to select the curve number for urban areas. To learn more about the Compute CN command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
    SCS Curve Number dialog box
  • Computed TOC (minutes)
    This editable entry lists the computed TOC value. By default, this entry lists the TOC value defined in the Subbasin Data dialog box.

Computing TOC

Once all the data have been defined, click the [Compute] button. The software will then compute the time of concentration for the selected subbasin(s) and display the result in the Computed TOC data column entry.

Computed TOC data column entry
Transform Methods (Unit Hydrograph) › Time of Concentration (TOC)

Subbasin TOC Data Table Edit Command

The Subbasin TOC Data Table Edit command allows the user to view and edit all subbasin TOC data in a single editable table. Note that the table will display TOC data only after it has been calculated using the Subbasin TOC Data command. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about Subbasin TOC Data command.

Follow the steps below to use the Subbasin TOC Data Table Edit command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Drainage Subbasins dropdown menu and then select the Subbasin TOC Data Table Edit command.
    Subbasin TOC Data Table Edit command
  2. The Subbasin TOC Data Table Edit dialog box will be displayed.
    Subbasin TOC Data Table Edit dialog box

The following sections describe the Subbasin TOC Data Table Edit dialog box.

Subbasin TOC Data Table

The following data entries are provided in the Subbasin TOC Data editable table.

Subbasin ID

This column lists all subbasins contained in the current scenario. The user can use the filter option from the column header to limit the subbasins displayed in the table.

TOC Segment

This column sequentially numbers the TOC segment from the most upstream to the most downstream segments.

Runoff Flow Type

This column having a dropdown combo box lists the available runoff flow types, as listed below.

  • Channel Flow
  • Pipe Flow
  • Shallow Concentrated Flow (default for newly inserted rows)
  • Sheet Flow
  • Zero Travel Time (Ponds)
    Runoff Flow Type dropdown column

Flow Length

This column lists the length of the TOC segment. Clicking the […] button under this column causes the dialog box to temporarily disappear, allowing the user to measure the flow path segment length from the Map View.

Slope

This column lists the slope of the TOC segment. If the user has specified a Terrain elevation surface, then the user can measure the Flow Length from the Map View and the software will automatically compute the TOC segment slope.

If no Flow Length is defined, then this entry will be blank. If a Flow Length is specified and no Terrain Elevation Surface is defined, then the default value of slope will be 0.0300.

The user can click the [Recalc] button to recompute the segment slope for the defined flow length and elevation terrain surface. Similarly, the [Recal All] button allows the user to recompute the slope value for all the flow path segments available in the scenario at once.

Hydraulic Radius

This column will be enabled if Channel Flow or Pipe Flow is selected as the Runoff Flow Type. The default value of the Hydraulic Radius is 0.45 ft for the Channel Flow and 0.29 ft for the Pipe Flow.

Surface Roughness/Type

This column changes its behavior depending upon the Runoff Flow Type selected. When Sheet Flow is selected as the Runoff Flow Type, then an entry field with a lookup […] button will be displayed in the corresponding Surface Roughness/Type column field. If Sheet Flow is selected as the Runoff Flow Type, the default value for the corresponding Surface Roughness/Type column will be 0.40000.

Runoff Flow - Sheet Flow

Clicking the […] button under the Surface Roughness/Type column displays the Overland Flow Roughness lookup dialog box.

Overland Flow Roughness dialog box

When Shallow Concentrated Flow is selected as the Runoff Flow Type, then a dropdown combo box will be displayed in the corresponding Surface Roughness/Type column field with the following entries.

  • Unpaved (default entry)
  • Agricultural Crops
  • Bare Ground
  • Forest With Underbrush
  • Forest Without Underbrush
  • Long Grass
  • Paved
  • Short Grass
    Runoff Flow Type - Shallow Concentrated Flow

When Channel Flow is selected as the Runoff Flow Type, then an entry field with a lookup […] button will be displayed in the corresponding Surface Roughness/Type column field. If Channel Flow is selected as the Runoff Flow Type, the default value for the corresponding Surface Roughness/Type column will be 0.04500.

Runoff Flow Type - Channel Flow


Clicking the […] button under the Surface Roughness/Type column displays the Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box.

Manning's Roughness dialog box

When Pipe Flow is selected as the Runoff Flow Type, then an entry field with a lookup […] button will be displayed in the corresponding Surface Roughness/Type column field. If Pipe Flow is selected as the Runoff Flow Type, the default value for the corresponding Surface Roughness/Type column will be 0.01300.

Runoff Flow Type - Pipe Flow

Clicking the […] button under the Surface Roughness/Type column displays the Channel and Pipe Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box.

Channel and Pipe Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box

When Zero Travel Time (Ponds) is selected as the Runoff Flow Type, then the Surface Roughness/Type column field becomes read-only. This option is used for flow segments that pass through a reservoir, lake, pond, or other structure where travel time is considered negligible or zero.

Velocity

This column lists the computed flow velocity.

TOC

This column lists the computed Time of Concentration (TOC) value.

Terrain Elevation Surface

The Terrain elevation surface dropdown entry is used to select the terrain surface available in the project. The dropdown entry by default is set to the current scenario’s terrain surface.

Terrain elevation surface dropdown entry

Precipitation Data Source

The Precipitation data source dropdown entry is used to select the precipitation data source for regions such as Austria, Germany, Ontario (Canada), and the USA. The precipitation data source is used for computing the 2yr-24hr rainfall depth data for the selected location.

The available precipitation data source options are:

  • Austria – Bundesministerium Wasserwirtschaft eHYD Data Service
  • Canada – Environment Canada & Ontario Ministry of Transportation
  • Canada – Ontario Ministry of Transportation
  • Germany – Deutscher Wetterdienst – Klima und Umwelt
  • USA – NOAA Atlas 2 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
  • USA – NOAA Atlas 14 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server (default)
  • USA – ISWS (Illinois) Bulletin 75 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
  • USA – SUDAS (Iowa) Bulletin 71 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
  • USA – NRCC (Northeast Regional Climate Center) PFDS

Note: The specific precipitation data source entry will be displayed based on the selected location.

2yr-24hr Rainfall Depth

The 2yr-24hr rainfall depth entry stores the 2-year 24-hour rainfall depth for the sheet flow computations. Clicking the [Retrieve] button retrieves the rainfall data for the selected location.

2yr-24hr rainfall depth entry

After defining or editing the required table value(s), click the [Compute] button to calculate the results of the Subbasin TOC Data table.

Exporting Subbasin TOC Data Table

After computing the subbasin TOC data, click the [Export] button to export the subbasin TOC tabular data into a spreadsheet. Alternatively, right-click on any of the column headers or editable table cells and select Export Table to Excel or Export Table to PDF command from the context menu to export the data into the required format.

Export Table to Excel or Export Table to PDF command
Reach Routing › Reach Drawing & Assignment

Georeferencing Reaches

When the software imports a model, it automatically places the reaches on the Map View. However, if the original model was not spatially georeferenced, the reaches will not align with any loaded background base map. While the software can operate without any issues in this situation, the user may prefer that the reaches be georeferenced to the background base map. Therefore, it may become necessary to georeference the imported reaches.

The Georeference Reaches command in GeoHECHMS software is used to manually georeference each of the reaches to the background base map displayed in the Map View. The process of georeferencing a reach to the Map View can be a trial-and-error process, especially when the exact location of the original reach is not known. Using the Georeference Reaches command, this process is accelerated.

Follow the steps below to georeference an existing reach:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and then select the Georeference Reaches command.

    Select the Georeference Reaches command
  2. The Georeference Reaches dialog box will be displayed.

    Georeference Reaches dialog box

The following sections describe how to georeference an existing reach and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Reach to Georeference

The Select Reach to Georeference section allows the user to select the reach to be georeferenced.

Note that if a reach has been preselected from the Map View before running this command, then the selected reach will be displayed in the Reach ID dropdown combo box.

If the model contains a single reach, then it will automatically be selected in the Reach ID dropdown combo box. If the model contains multiple reaches, then the user can select the desired reach from the Reach ID dropdown combo box.

Select Reach to Georeference section

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the reach from the Map View. Clicking on the [Pick] button causes the dialog box to temporarily disappear, and the user will be prompted to select the reach from the Map View. After selecting a reach, the dialog box will be redisplayed with the reach shown as selected. The selected reach will also be highlighted on the Map View.

Note that the user can click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.

After selecting the reach, the user can select one of the following georeference options:

  • Snap to Alignment Polyline
  • Slide Along Alignment Polyline
  • Draw on Map View

Snap to Alignment Polyline

If an existing alignment polyline for the selected reach exists on the Map View, the Snap to Alignment Polyline section can be used to snap the reach to the alignment polyline. Selecting the Snap to Alignment Polyline radio button option enables this section.

Snap to Alignment Polyline section

This section contains the following options:

  • Pick near upstream end
    Clicking the [Pick] button adjacent to this read-only entry allows the user to pick a point from the Map View near the upstream end of the alignment polyline. On clicking the [Pick] button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear, and the user will be prompted to select an upstream point on the alignment polyline. After selecting the upstream point, the dialog box will be redisplayed and the Pick near upstream end entry changes from Not Selected to Selected. In addition, a temporary highlighted point is shown on the alignment polyline to display the selected location. To abort the selection process, press the [Esc] key or right-click and choose Cancel from the displayed context menu.
  • Pick near downstream end
    Clicking the [Pick] button adjacent to this read-only entry allows the user to pick a point from the Map View near the downstream end of the alignment polyline. On clicking the [Pick] button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear, and the user will be prompted to select a downstream point on the alignment polyline. After selecting the downstream point, the dialog box will be redisplayed and the Pick near downstream end entry will change from Not Selected to Selected. In addition, a temporary highlighted point is shown on the alignment polyline to display the selected location. To abort the selection process, press the [Esc] key or right-click and choose Cancel from the displayed context menu.

After selecting the upstream and downstream end of the reach, click the [Snap] button and the reach will get snapped to the alignment polyline.

Note that the [Snap] button can only be enabled when the upstream and downstream ends of the reach have been selected. In addition, a preview of the snapped reach is shown on the alignment polyline, which allows the user to reselect the downstream and upstream points or cancel the selection process.

The user can turn on the Scale to fit checkbox option to scale the reach to fit within the alignment polyline.

If the upstream and downstream points do not overlay the same continuous alignment polyline, then the following informational message will be displayed.

Noncontinuos Alignment polyline

Slide Along Alignment Polyline

If the reach has been snapped to an alignment polyline on the Map View, but is not precisely located where it should be, the Slide Along Alignment Polyline section can be used to slide the reach along the alignment polyline. Selecting the Slide Along Alignment Polyline radio button option enables this section.

Slide Along Alignment Polyline section

Clicking the [Pick] button allows the user to select an alignment polyline from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear, and the user will be prompted to select an alignment polyline. After selecting the alignment polyline, a Snap Entity dialog box will be displayed. Click the [Yes] button to snap the entity on the selected polyline. Otherwise, click the [No] button to cancel the selection and redo the entire process.

Snap Entity dialog box

After selecting the alignment polyline, the Georeference Reaches dialog box will be redisplayed and the Select alignment polyline element read-only entry will change from Not Selected to Selected.

Click the [Slide] button to manually slide the reach along the underlying alignment polyline. Clicking the [Slide] button makes the dialog box temporarily disappear and prompts the user to select the reach and drag it along the underlying alignment polyline. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. To abort the slide operation, press the [Esc] key and the moved reach will return to its original location.

While sliding the reach along the alignment polyline, the user would not be allowed to move the reach beyond the end of the alignment polyline. The Recompute adjacent node element elevations checkbox option allows the user to recompute the elevation of the adjacent node type elements after georeferencing the reach.

Note that if the endpoints of the reach do not overlay the same continuous polyline, then the following informational message will be displayed.

Cannot slide reach diaglox box

Draw on Map View

This section allows the user to draw the reach on the Map View. Selecting the Draw on Map View radio button option enables this section.

Draw on Map View radio button section

Clicking the [Draw] button temporarily removes the dialog box and prompts the user to draw the reach on the Map View. Once the reach is drawn, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The reach will then automatically snap to the drawn alignment polyline.

The user can turn on the Create curvilinear polyline checkbox option to draw the polyline using a curvilinear segment. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about element digitizing on the Map View.

The user can turn on the Scale to fit checkbox option to scale the reach to fit within the alignment polyline.

Reach Routing › Reach Drawing & Assignment

Merge Reaches Command

In GeoHECHMS, the Merge Reaches command is used to merge two or more connected reaches (end to end along an alignment) into a single reach. This article describes how to use the Merge Reaches command.

Follow the steps below to merge two or more reaches:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and select the Merge Reaches command.

    Merge Reaches Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Merge Reaches dialog box will be displayed.

    Merge Reaches dialog box
  3. Click the [Pick] button to select the reaches to be merged.

    [Pick] button
  4. The Merge Reaches dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user what to do next.
  5. Select reaches that are connected along a single alignment to merge from the Map View.
  6. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  7. The Merge Reaches dialog box will be redisplayed, and the number of selected reaches will be displayed in the Pick Reaches read-only field, as shown below.

    Pick reaches read-only fieldNote that if the reaches have been preselected prior to running this command, the same number of selected reaches will be displayed in the Pick Reaches read-only field.
  8. Click the [OK] button and the software will then merge the selected reaches into a single reach.

    [OK] button
  9. If the user has selected reaches that are not connected along a single alignment, the following informational dialog box will be displayed on clicking the [OK] button.

    Cannot Merge Reaches informational dialog box
Reach Routing › Reach Drawing & Assignment

Automated Draw Reaches Command

The Automated Draw Reaches command allows the user to automatically draw reaches from the user selected locations on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to use the Automated Draw Reaches command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and then choose the Automated Draw Reaches command.
    Select Automated Draw Reaches from the Routing Reaches menu
  2. The Automated Draw Reaches dialog box will be displayed.
    Automated Draw Reaches dialog box

The following sections describe the Automated Draw Reaches command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Reach Starting Point

The Select Reach Starting Point section is used to select a starting point on the Map View for drawing the reach.

To select a starting point, follow the steps below:

  1. Click on the [Pick] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    [Pick] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt you to select a point on the Map View. Select the starting point on the Map View to draw the reach.
  3. After selecting the starting point, the user is immediately returned to the Automated Draw Reaches dialog box, and the Select point read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.
    Select point read-only field

Reach Draw Direction

This section is used to define the direction of the reach polyline to be drawn based on the selected starting point.

Reach Draw Direction section

The following options are provided:

  • Downstream flow direction
    This radio button option is used to define the flow direction of the reach polyline downstream from the starting point. Note that this option is selected by default when the dialog box is displayed.
  • Upstream flow direction
    This radio button option is used to define the flow direction of the reach polyline upstream from the starting point.

Reach Specifications

This section is used to specify a reach ID for each drawn reach. The user can assign these IDs either manually or automatically using some predefined formats.

Follow the steps below to assign reach IDs to the reaches:

  1. If a reach has been drawn while the Reach ID option was enabled, the user can manually enter the reach ID in the corresponding field as shown below.
    Reach ID radio button option in the Reach Specifications section
  2. Alternatively, the user can enable the Auto-name reach ID radio button option to automatically name newly drawn reaches as per the user’s predefined naming formats as shown below.
    Auto-name reach ID radio button option in the Reach Specifications section

The different reach naming formats present in the Auto-name reach ID option are as follows:

  • Reach ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the start of the reach ID.
  • Reach ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the reach ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the reach ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
  • Next available reach ID: This entry defines the next element ID number to be used.
  • Reach ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering elements. The default value is 1.
  • Reach ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the reach ID.
  • Reach ID preview: This entry provides a preview of the reach naming specifications defined above.

General Options

This section is used to define the general options for drawing the reach.

General Options section
  • Terrain surface
    The dropdown combo box lists the terrain surfaces associated with the project which are used to define the reach polyline. By default, the current scenario’s terrain surface is selected. If there is no terrain surface defined for the selected scenario, then this entry is blank.
  • Reach Maximum length
    This optional checkbox option is used to define the maximum length that the reach polyline will be drawn. If left blank, the polyline will extend to the limits of the underlying flow direction grid.

    Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to draw a polyline representing the maximum reach length. On clicking the [Pick] button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw an approximate reach polyline on the Map View. When starting to draw a reach polyline by holding down the [Shift] key, the drawing is done along an ortho line. Similarly, if the user holds down the [Ctrl] key while drawing, the drawing is done along a curvilinear line. In addition, the status bar shows the accumulated length while drawing the reach polyline. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The drawn polyline will be removed, and the Automated Draw Reaches dialog box will be redisplayed with the measured distance, as shown below.
    Reach maximum length entry field
    Note that the [Pick] button will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) up until the point that the user selects a starting point.

Computing Flow Direction

When all the options have been properly defined, click the [Compute] button to compute the flow direction grid for the selected terrain surface.

Automated Draw Reaches dialog box

While the computation is running, the [Compute] button will change to [Cancel] button, which allows the user to abort the command if needed. In addition, a progress bar at the bottom will show the progress of the computation along with status messages.

After computing the flow direction grid, the software will internally assign the created polyline as a reach on the Map View.

Reach Routing › Reach Drawing & Assignment

Reverse Reaches Command

In GeoHECHMS, the Reverse Reaches command is used to reverse the reach flow direction.

Follow the steps below to use the Reverse Reaches command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and select the Reverse Reaches command.Reverse Reaches command under the Routing Reaches dropdown menu.
  2. The Reverse Reaches dialog box will be displayed.Reverse Reaches dialog box
  3. The Select Reaches section lists all the available reach(s) of the scenario. The user can select the desired reach using the check box option. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to manually select the reach from the Map View and then press [Enter] or can right-click and select Done from the context menu to complete the selection. (The number of selected reach(s) will be displayed in the Total Selected field as shown below.)Total Selected field
  4. After selecting the reach(s), click on the [Reverse] button and the software will reverse the reach flow direction as shown below.Reverse-Reaches-Command-image-4.png
  5. Alternatively, the user can select the reach directly from the Map View and reverse its flow direction using the Reverse Reach command from the right-click context menu.Reverse-Reaches-Command-image-5.png
Reach Routing › Reach Drawing & Assignment

Draw and Assign Reaches Command

A reach is a section of a stream or river along which similar hydrologic routing conditions exist, such as discharge, depth, area, and slope.

unknown node

In GeoHECHMS, reaches can be defined by either drawing or assigning polyline(s) on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw Reaches
  • Assign Reaches

Drawing/Assigning Reaches

The Draw/Assign Reaches command allows the user to manually draw/assign polylines on the Map View as reaches one after another until completed.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw/Assign Reaches command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and then choose the Draw/Assign Reaches command.
    Draw/Assign Reaches commands
  2. The following dialog box(s) will be displayed.
    • Draw Reaches:
      Draw Reaches dialog box
    • Assign Reaches:
      Assign Reaches dialog box

Note that pressing the [Ctrl+E] keys will run the Draw Reaches command directly on the Map View.

The following sections describe how to use the Draw/Assign Reaches command and interact with the above dialog box(s).

Drawing Reaches

Drawing Reach Polylines

The Draw Reach Polylines section is used to draw the reaches on the Map View using polylines. To draw reach polylines, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Draw Reach Polylines section, click the [Draw] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. Use the Draw curvilinear polyline checkbox option to draw the polyline using curvilinear segments.
    Drawing reach polylines
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt you to draw a reach on the Map View. Draw the reach polyline on the Map View. While drawing elements, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between the curvilinear and the linear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about drawing elements on the Map View.
    Reach on Map ViewNotes:
    • To draw the reaches more accurately, use the mouse roller wheel to zoom into a specific location.
    • The Snap Mode option can be enabled to cause the drawn reach to snap to the nearest HEC-HMS element.
  3. After completing the reach drawing, the Draw Reaches dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Reach polylines read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Drawn reach
  4. The user can also reverse the direction of the drawn/assigned reach by clicking the [Reverse Direction] button.

Assigning Reaches

Selecting Reach Polylines

The Select Reach Polylines section can be used to manually assign multiple polylines on the Map View as reaches. To assign reach polylines, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Select Reach Polylines section, click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Assigning reach polylines
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt you to select a reach polyline from the Map View. Click on the previously drawn reach polyline on the Map View to select it.
    Reach on Map View
  3. Following the selection of a reach polyline, the Assign Reaches dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Reach polylines read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to 1 Selected.
    Assigned reach

Reach Specifications

This section is common to both the Draw Reaches and Assign Reaches dialog box and is used to specify the reach ID for each drawn/assigned reach. The user can assign these IDs either manually or automatically using some predefined formats.

Follow the steps below to assign reach IDs to the reaches:

  1. If a reach was drawn/assigned while the Reach ID radio button option was selected, the user can manually enter the reach ID in the corresponding field as shown below.
    Manual Reach ID
  2. Alternately, the user can enable the Auto-name reach ID radio button option to automatically name every newly drawn/assigned reach as per the user’s predefined naming formats as shown below.
    Automatic reach ID
    The different reach naming formats present in the Auto-name reach ID option are as follows:
    • Reach ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the start of the reach ID.
    • Reach ID digits: This option permits specification of a set number of digits to use for the reach ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the reach ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
    • Next available reach ID: This entry defines the next element ID number to be used.
    • Reach ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering elements. The default value is 1.
    • Reach ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the reach ID.
    • Reach ID preview: This entry provides a preview of the reach naming specifications defined above.
  3. After providing the Reach ID, press the [Enter] key or click the [Apply] button.
    Applying reach drawing/assigning
    Note that if the auto-name option is enabled and the user returns to the dialog box, the [Apply] button is disabled since the just drawn/assigned reaches have already been named and created.

Assign Reach Slope, Downstream Invert Elevation, Flow Direction & Missing Junctions

This section is common to both the Draw Reaches and Assign Reaches dialog box and allows the user to assign an invert elevation to the reach using a terrain model. Define this section before drawing/assigning the reaches so that the invert elevations can be assigned.

To assign an invert elevation, the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation grids
  • LandXML data
  • TIN surfaces

The user can also apply an elevation offset to raise or lower the reach by the specified amount by checking the Apply elevation offset checkbox. On selecting this checkbox, the entry field next to it becomes available for entering an elevation offset value. A negative offset value will lower the reach by the specified amount.

In the Assign Reaches dialog box, an additional Create junctions (if missing) at confluences checkbox option is provided. If the user assigns the reach polylines where the junction(s) are not available, then checking this checkbox option will automatically insert the junction(s) at the confluences.

Create junctions (if missing) at confluences checkbox option
Reach Routing › Reach Properties & Editing

Reach Table Edit Command

The Reach Table Edit command allows the user to edit the reach parameters in one dialog box for common hydrology routing methods. When the user selects this command, a modeless dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box contains an editable data grid listing all the reaches in the current scenario. When the user selects a row in the data grid, the corresponding reach will be zoomed to the Map View (if not visible) and highlighted. In addition, the user can select a reach from the Map View, and the corresponding row in the data grid will be shown selected.

Follow the steps below to use the Reach Table Edit command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and then select the Reach Table Edit command.
    Reach Table Edit command
  2. The Reach Table Edit dialog box will be displayed.
    Reach Table Edit dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Reach Table Edit command and interact with the above dialog box.

Reach Parameters

The Reach Parameters section will display the editable data grid columns listing the reach parameters contained in the current scenario. Based upon the selected routing method in the Project Options backstage page, as shown below, the data grid columns listing will be changed.

Options backstage page - reach routing methods selection

The user can select the following routing methods from the Project Options backstage page and the associated parameters will be listed in the data grid of the Reach Table Edit command.

unknown node

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about reach routing methods.

Exporting Data to Excel or PDF

The user can export the data grid column values to Microsoft Excel or PDF documents. To export data into Excel or PDF, right-click on the data grid column and select Export Table to Excel or Export Table to PDF command from the displayed context menu.

Exporting data to Excel or PDF

Sending Data to the Windows Clipboard

The user can send the data grid column values to the Windows clipboard. Moving a data grid column value to the clipboard allows those values to be pasted into another software. To transfer the data to the Windows clipboard, right-click on the data grid column and select the Copy Table to Clipboard command from the displayed context menu. The data will automatically be sent to the Windows clipboard.

Sending data to the Windows clipboard

After editing the desired reach parameters for common hydrology routing methods, the user can click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.

Reach Routing › Reach Properties & Editing

Reach Data Command

Reaches define the elements (i.e., pipes, ditches, streams, etc.) that route flows through the stormwater network model. In GeoHECHMS, the Reach Data command allows the user to add new reach and edit reach data in a project.

unknown node

Follow the steps below to view or modify the reach data:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Reach Data command.
    Reach Data Input ribbon menu commandAlternatively, the user can either double-click on the reach polyline from the Map View or choose the Reach Data command from the Routing Reaches dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu.
    Reach Data command from the Routing Reaches dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu
  2. The Reach Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Reach Data dialog box

The following sections describe the Reach Data command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Reach

This section allows the user to select the reach in order to define the reach data. The user can create a new reach, copy existing reach data to a new reach, and delete a reach. In addition, the user can navigate between reaches and enter a description detailing the defined reach.

Select Reach section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Reach ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the reaches that are defined in the model. The user can select the desired reach from the dropdown combo box. Click the pencil icon to edit the reach ID. The user can navigate between the previous and next reaches using the up and down arrow buttons. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to select the reach from the Map View. Note that the up and down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) when the model contains only a single reach.
  • Description
    This text field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the selected reach.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to create a new reach. On clicking this button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar informing the user to draw the reach in an upstream to downstream direction on the Map View. Once finished, press the [Enter] key, or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. While drawing a reach, the user can press the [Esc] key to abort the creation of a new reach and return the dialog box to its previous state.

The dialog box will be redisplayed. Next, enter the reach name in the Reach ID entry and click the [Accept changes] button. The software checks that the defined ID is unique. If not, a warning dialog box is displayed, and the user is then returned to the Reach ID field to change the ID.

[Accept changes] button
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to copy existing reach data to a new reach. When this command is executed, the software automatically provides a unique default name for the duplicated reach. The cursor is then placed into the Reach ID. The user can go with the default name or enter a different valid and unique ID before moving on to add any other data.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the current reach data from the model. Clicking the [Delete] button causes the following confirmational dialog box to be displayed.
    Delete Reach conformational dialog box

Click the [Yes] button to delete the selected reach data.

Click the [No] button to abort the deletion process.

Reach Specifications

The following sections describe the reach. Click on the dropdown selector at the Reach Specifications entry to display the various data panels that define the reach data.

Reach Specifications

General Specifications

This panel allows the user to define the routing and loss/gain methods to be used for the current reach.

General Specifications panel

Note that the routing and loss/gain methods are defined for the project in the Scenario Manager and will be displayed automatically in the corresponding dropdown entries. However, the user can change the desired method for the selected reach from this dialog box. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Scenario Manager dialog box.

The following options are provided in this data panel:

  • Routing method
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the routing method for the selected reach. While a reach element conceptually represents a segment of stream or river, the actual calculations are performed by a routing method contained within the reach. The dropdown combo box provides the following routing methods.
    1. None
    2. Kinematic Wave
    3. Lag Time
    4. Lag Time & Attenuation
    5. Modified Puls
    6. Muskingum
    7. Muskingum Cunge
    8. Normal Depth
    9. Straddle Stagger
Routing method dropdown


Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about various HEC-HMS routing methods.

  • Loss/gain method
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the loss/gain method for the selected reach. While a reach element conceptually represents a segment of stream or river, optional modeling of interactions with the subsurface is performed by a loss/gain method contained within the reach. The dropdown combo box provides the following loss/gain methods.
    1. None
    2. Constant Loss/Gain
    3. Percolation Loss
Loss/gain method dropdown


Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about various HEC-HMS loss/gain methods.

  • Initial conditions
    This dropdown combo box entry sets the amount of stored water in the storage area at the start of the simulation. The dropdown combo box lists the following conditions:
    1. Discharge
    2. Inflow = Outflow
Initial conditions dropdown


If you use the first option, you will also have to enter a discharge value. If you use the second option, it will be assumed that the initial outflow is the same as the initial inflow to the reach from upstream elements. This is essentially the same as assuming a steady-state initial condition.

  • Initial discharge
    This entry field defines the initial discharge being released from the storage area. This entry is only available when the Initial conditions entry has been set to the Discharge option. Otherwise, this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Length
    This entry field defines the length of the selected reach. The user can either enter the value manually or click the […] button to measure the length from the Map View. Clicking on the […] button allows the user to draw a measurement polyline representing the flow length of the selected reach. However, initially the software will assign the length from the defined reach polyline.

If the user graphically edits the reach polyline, then the length value automatically updates based upon the Recompute dimensions on element edits checkbox setting in the Options backstage page. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about the Options backstage page.

Clicking on the [Recalc] button causes the software to automatically update this field value with the corresponding digitized reach polyline length. Similarly, the [Recalc All] button causes the software to update the lengths for all digitized reach polylines.

Note that this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out) for the following routing methods: Lag Time, Lag Time & Attenuation, Modified Puls, Muskingum, and Straddle Stagger.

  • Slope
    This entry field defines the slope of the selected reach. The software will automatically compute the slope based upon the connected element elevations (where possible). However, the user can override the assigned slope by manually defining the value. If the connected elements’ invert elevations change, then the software automatically updates this value based upon the Recompute dimensions on element edits checkbox setting in the Options backstage page. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about the Options backstage page.

Clicking on the [Recalc] button causes the software to automatically update this field value with the corresponding slope based upon changed elevations. Similarly, the [Recalc All] button causes the software to update the slopes for all reaches.

Note that this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out) for the following routing methods: Lag Time, Lag Time & Attenuation, Modified Puls, Muskingum, and Straddle Stagger.<

  • Downstream connection
    This entry field defines the downstream element that the selected reach drains to. Clicking on the […] button allows the user to select the downstream element from the Map View. The following elements can be selected.
    1. Diversion
    2. Junction
    3. Reach
    4. Reservoir
    5. Sink

Note that a reach can connect downstream to another reach. Multiple reaches can be chained together to represent a long river reach with changing geometry. However, a reach cannot connect downstream to a subbasin.

  • Downstream invert elevation
    This entry field defines the invert elevation at the downstream end of the selected reach.

If the selected reach is not connected to another reach (i.e., connected to a junction, etc.), then this field is read-only, showing the invert elevation of the connected element.

If the selected reach is connected to another reach, then this field is editable. The software will attempt to compute this value by using the upstream invert elevation (if available) and the defined reach length and slope values. The user can also override the computed invert elevation by manually defining the value.

Note that this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out) for the following routing methods: Lag Time, Lag Time & Attenuation, Muskingum, and Straddle Stagger.

Computational Results

This section allows the user to see the analysis results for the current reach that was computed by HEC-HMS.

Computational Results section

Note that the Detailed Results section provides additional analysis results for the current reach that was computed by HEC-HMS.

DSS Data

This section includes an external DSS file for referencing HEC-HMS computational results. It allows the user to easily copy the references and paste them into GeoHECRAS.

DSS Data section
  • DSS file name: This entry defines the external DSS file to be used for reading the data.
  • Data path: This entry denotes the data path within the DSS data file, which contains the paired data.

Routing Data

The Routing Data panel is used to enter the data for the selected routing method for the defined reaches. This panel is displayed when the Routing Data option is selected in the Reach Specifications dropdown combo box. Note that the Routing Data panel content changes based upon the routing method selected in the General Specifications section.

Routing Data panel

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this panel.

Loss/Gain Data

The Loss/Gain Data panel is used to enter data for the selected loss/gain method for the defined reaches. This panel is displayed when the Loss/Gain Data option is selected in the Reach Specifications dropdown combo box. Note that the Loss/Gain Data panel content changes based upon the loss/gain method selected in the General Specifications section.

Loss/Gain Data

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this panel.

Reach Routing › Reach Properties & Editing

Renumber Interconnected Reaches Command

The Renumber Interconnected Reaches command allows the user to automatically renumber routing reaches and connected routing junctions along a defined flow path.

Follow the steps below to use the Renumber Interconnected Reaches command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Routing Reaches dropdown menu and then select the Renumber Interconnected Reaches command.
    Renumber Interconnected Reaches Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Renumber Interconnected Reaches dialog box will be displayed.Renumber Interconnected Reaches dialog box

The following sections describe the Renumber Interconnected Reaches command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Reaches

The Select Reaches panel allows the user to select reaches that define the river path. The user can use the checkbox contained within the column header to select and deselect all reaches.

Selecting Multiple (Interconnected) Reaches

The Select Multiple (Interconnected) Reaches section is used to sequentially number reaches and (by option) junctions along the selected path that has reaches connected end-to-end with each other. This section allows the user to select multiple reaches defined in the project that make up the river path.

If a reach is already selected on the Map View before running this command, the same reach will be shown selected within the table. The user can also select/deselect the desired reach by checking/unchecking the checkboxes corresponding to each reach that defines the river path.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the most downstream and upstream reach on the Map View and the software will automatically determine all connected reaches between them that make up the river path. On clicking the [Pick] button, the Renumber Interconnected Reaches dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the most downstream and upstream reach on the Map View. Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected reaches will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.

Total selected read-only field

Notes:

  • The user can select multiple reaches from the Map View before running the Renumber Interconnected Reaches command by holding the [Ctrl] key while selecting the desired reaches.
  • Only those reaches that contain irregular cross sections are listed.
  • Multiple reaches that reference the same irregular cross section geometry are not listed.

Manual Editing

This section contains a data grid listing all IDs of the selected reaches and junctions. The data grid also lists the reach distance and total reach distance in miles and feet. The values in the last two columns of the data grid provide a preview of the reaches and junctions naming specifications defined in the Reach Renumbering and Junction Renumbering panels.

In addition, the data contained in a data grid can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using the Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF commands from the right-click context menu.

Manual Editing section

Reach Renumbering

This panel allows the user to number the reaches based upon river chainage or incrementally.

Reach Renumbering panel

The following options are provided in the data panel:

  • Reach ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the start of the reach ID.
  • Reach ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the reach ID.
  • Reach ID preview: This entry provides a preview of the reach naming specifications defined above.
  • Numbering direction: This dropdown combo box defines the direction in which the reach IDs are increasing. The following options are available:
    1. Increasing Downstream
    2. Increasing Upstream (HEC-RAS style) (default)

Based on the option selected, the content of the Use reach distance subsection may change.

Use Reach Distance

The Use reach distance subsection is used to number the reach by using the river chainage along the defined river path. By default, this radio button option is shown selected on selecting the Reach Renumbering panel.

The following entries are provided in this subsection:

  • Downstream reach ID: This entry provides a reach ID that will be used as the downstream most reach station.

Note that if the Increasing Downstream option is selected in the Numbering direction dropdown combo box, then the Downstream reach ID entry will be changed in the Upstream reach ID as shown below. In addition, the numbering methodology is altered to account for the selected direction.

Numbering direction dropdown entry
  • Upstream reach ID: This entry provides a reach ID that will be used as the upstream most reach station.
  • Distance units: This dropdown combo box defines the unit for the reach length. Two available options are:
    1. Feet
    2. Miles
  • Decimal precision: This optional checkbox defines the decimal precision that will be used in determining the reach stations. By default, this checkbox is disabled (i.e., grayed out). If enabled, then the user can enter a value ranging from 0 to 15.

Clicking on the [Preview] button will cause the software to fill the reach IDs in the New Reach ID column of the Manual Editing data grid.

New Reach ID column of the Manual Editing data grid

Use Auto Increment

The Use auto increment subsection is used to number the reach using a fixed increment. Select the Use auto increment radio button option to enable the content of this subsection.

The following entries are provided in this subsection:

  • Reach ID digits: This option permits specification of a set number of digits to use for reach ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the reach ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
  • Next available reach ID: This entry defines the next element ID number to be used.
  • Reach ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering elements. The default value is 1.

Junction Renumbering

This panel allows the user to number the junctions based upon river chainage or incrementally. By default, the Junction Renumbering checkbox panel is checked. If the panel checkbox is unchecked, then the content of this panel will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) and the junction renumbering cannot be performed.

Junction Renumbering panel

The following options are provided in the data panel:

  • Junction ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the start of the junction ID.
  • Junction ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the junction ID.
  • Junction ID preview: This entry provides a preview of the junction naming specifications defined above.
  • Numbering direction: This dropdown combo box defines the direction in which the junction IDs are increasing. The following options are available:
    1. Increasing Downstream
    2. Increasing Upstream (HEC-RAS style) (default)

Based on the option selected, the content of the Use reach distance subsection may change.

Use Reach Distance

This subsection is similar to that of the Use reach distance subsection of the Reach Renumbering panel. Hence, refer to the first subsection of the Reach Renumbering panel to learn more about it.

Use Auto Increment

The Use auto increment subsection is used to number the junction using a fixed increment. Select the Use auto increment radio button option to enable the content of this subsection.

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Junction ID digits: This option permits specification of a set number of digits to use for junction ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the junction ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
  • Next available junction ID: This entry defines the next element ID number to be used.
  • Junction ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering elements. The default value is 1.

Clicking on the [Preview] button causes the software to fill the junction IDs in the New Junction ID column of the Manual Editing data grid.

New Junction ID column of the Manual Editing data grid

When all the required data have been properly defined in the Renumber Interconnected Reaches dialog box, click the [Apply] button. The software will then assign the user-defined changes to the reach stations along a defined flow path. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.

Note that when the user clicks the [Preview] button and then navigates to select a different reach or clicks the [Close] button without applying the changes, the Renumber Entities confirmational dialog box will be displayed.

Renumber Entities conformational dialog box

Clicking on the [Apply] button will apply the user-defined changes to the reach station.

Clicking on the [Discard] button will discard the user-defined changes and allows the user to redo the process.

Reach Routing › Routing Method Selection

Reach Data - Selecting a Routing Method

In developing HEC-HMS models, there are essentially two requirements - a runoff-generation component and a routing component. Routing is an essential component of any hydrology modeling project for the derivation of time series of flows into the oceans and studies of climate/land use change on water resources.

While a reach element conceptually represents a segment of stream or river, the actual calculations are performed by a routing method contained within the reach. Several routing methods are defined in GeoHECHMS. Each method implements a hydrologic routing methodology comparable to a hydraulic approach that implements the full unsteady flow equations.

The routing method for a reach can be selected from the Reach Specifications section of the Reach Data dialog box.

Follow the steps given below to select a routing method:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Reach Data command.
    Reach Data input ribbon menu command
    Alternatively, the user can either double click on the reach polyline from the Map View or choose the Reach Data command from the Routing Reaches dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu.
    Routing Reaches dropdown - Reach Data command
  2. The Reach Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Reach Data dialog box
  3. From the Routing method dropdown combo box, select a routing method from the list of available choices.
    Routing method dropdown combo box
  4. To enter the data for the selected routing method, select the Routing Data option from the Reach Specifications dropdown combo box.
    Reach Specifications dropdown - Routing Data option
  5. The Routing Data panel of the Reach Data dialog box will be displayed. Note that the Routing Data panel content changes based upon the routing method selected in the General Specifications section of the Reach Data dialog box.

The following sections describe different routing methods and how to define the data for each method in the Routing Data panel.

Routing Method: None

When None is selected for the Routing method, the Routing Data dropdown combo box entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Routing Method - None

If the user chooses the None method, the reach will translate flow instantaneously and without attenuation.

Routing Method: Kinematic Wave

The Kinematic Wave routing method approximates the full unsteady flow equations by ignoring inertial and pressure forces. It is assumed that the energy slope is equal to the bed slope. Consequently, this method is best suited to fairly steep streams. It is often used in urban areas where natural channels have been modified to have regular shapes and slopes.

When Kinematic Wave is selected for the Routing method, the following data panel will be displayed.

Routing Method - Kinematic Wave

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  • Manning’s roughness
    This entry defines the Manning’s roughness for the channel. Clicking on the […] lookup button will display an Open Channel Manning’s Roughness lookup table dialog box.
    Open Channel Manning’s Roughness dialog box
  • Number subreaches
    This spin control button is used to define the number of subreaches in the reach element. The number of subreaches is used as a hint to the software when it determines the correct distance step to use during routing calculations. Criteria based on the steepness of the inflow hydrograph and other factors are used to automatically determine the correct distance and time steps for solving the kinematic wave equation. This entry's default value is 2 but may be increased by the user.
  • Index method
    This dropdown combo box lists the following conditions:
    1. Celerity (Wave Velocity)
    2. Discharge (default)
  • Maximum (index) discharge
    This entry represents the maximum expected flow in the reach. This value is used to develop a storage-discharge relationship for the reach using 1.5 times this value and the defined reach geometry.

    This entry is enabled when the Index method entry is set to Discharge. Otherwise, this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Maximum (index) celerity
    This entry is used to compute the travel time. This entry is enabled when the Index method entry is set to Celerity. Otherwise, this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Element shape
    This dropdown combo box lists the following shapes:
    1. Circular Pipe
    2. Deep Rectangle
    3. Rectangle
    4. Trapezoid (default)
    5. Triangle

    The above listed shapes are provided for specifying the cross section shape. The circle shape cannot be used for pressure flow or pipe networks but is suitable for representing a free water surface inside a pipe. The deep shape should only be used for flow conditions where the flow depth is approximately equal to the flow width. Depending on the shape you choose, additional information will have to be entered to describe the size of the cross section shape. This information may include a diameter (Circular Pipe), channel width (Deep Rectangle, Rectangle), trapezoid bottom width (Trapezoid), trapezoid side slope (V:H) (Trapezoid) or side slope (Triangle).

Note that the Trapezoid bottom width and Trapezoid side slope (V:H) options will be replaced by other parameters according to the shape selected from the Element shape dropdown combo box.

Routing Method: Lag Time

The Lag Time routing method only represents the translation of flood waves. It does not include any representation of attenuation or diffusion processes. Consequently, it is best suited to short stream segments with a predictable travel time that does not vary with flow depth.

When Lag Time is selected for the Routing method, the following data panel is shown.

Routing Method - Lag Time

Reach routing lag time is computed based upon the flow velocity in the reach routing element.

Lag time is the amount of time (i.e., travel time) that the inflow hydrograph will be translated as it moves through the reach.

Routing Method: Lag Time and Attenuation

The Lag Time and Attenuation routing method is a hydrologic storage routing method based on a graphical routing technique that is extensively used by the National Weather Service. The method is a special case of the Muskingum method where channel storage is represented by the prism component alone with no wedge storage (i.e., Muskingum X = 0). The lack of wedge storage means that the method should only be used for slowly varying flood waves. Like all hydrologic routing methods, it does not account for complex flow conditions such as backwater effects and/or hydraulic structures.

When Lag Time & Attenuation is selected for the Routing method, the following data panel is shown.

Routing Method - Lag Time and Attenuation

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel.

  • Initial conditions
    This dropdown combo box entry sets the amount of stored water in the storage area at the start of the simulation. The dropdown combo box lists the following conditions:
    1. Discharge
    2. Inflow = Outflow (default)

    If you use the first option, you will also have to enter a discharge value. If you use the second option, it will be assumed that the initial outflow is the same as the initial inflow to the reach from upstream elements. This is essentially the same as assuming a steady-state initial condition.

  • Initial discharge
    This entry defines the initial discharge being released from the storage area. This entry is only available when the Initial conditions entry has been set to the Discharge option. Otherwise, this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Inflow lag time method
    This dropdown combo box lists the following methods:
    1. Constant Lag (default)
    2. Variable Lag
  • Inflow lag Time
    This entry allows the user to define the travel time of the flood wave as it moves downstream. It is only available when the Constant Lag option is selected for the Lag method entry. Otherwise, this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Inflow lag time function
    This entry is only available when the Variable Lag option is selected for the Lag method entry. Otherwise, this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Clicking on the […] lookup button will display the Inflow Lag Data dialog box. This allows the user to define an inflow lag curve.
  • Outflow attenuation method
    This dropdown combo box lists the following methods:
    1. Constant Attenuation (default)
    2. Variable Attenuation
  • Outlflow attenuation duration
    This entry allows the user to define the attenuation of the flood wave. It is only available when the Constant Attenuation option is selected for the Attenuation method entry. Otherwise, this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Outlfow attenuation function
    This entry is only available when the Variable Attenuation option is selected for the Attenuation method entry. Otherwise, this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Clicking on the […] lookup button will display the Outflow Attentuation Curve Data dialog box. This allows the user to define an outflow attenuation curve.

Routing Method: Modified Puls

The Modified Puls routing method is also known as storage routing or level pool routing. It uses conservation of mass and a relationship between storage and discharge to route flow through the stream reach. Attenuation is achieved through the storage and delayed release of water in the reach instead of through a rigorous conservation of momentum approach. It can be useful for representing backwater due to flow constrictions in a channel so long as the backwater effects are fully contained within reach.

When Modified Puls is selected for the Routing method, the following data panel is shown.

Routing Method - Modified Puls

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel.

  • Storage discharge rating curve
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already defined storage discharge rating curve. Clicking on the […] define button will display a Storage Outflow Curve Data dialog box. This allows the user to define a new storage discharge rating curve.
  • Number subreaches
    The number of subreaches affect attenuation where one subreach gives the maximum attenuation and increasing the number of subreaches approaches zero attenuation. This parameter is necessary because the travel time through a subreach should be approximately equal to the simulation time step for an idealized channel. An initial estimate of this parameter can be obtained by dividing the actual reach length by the product of the wave celerity and the simulation time step. For natural channels that vary in cross section dimension, slope, and storage, the number of subreaches can be treated as a calibration parameter. The number of subreaches may be used to introduce numerical attenuation, which can better represent the movement of floodwaves through the natural system. Here, the default value is 1 but may be optionally increased.
  • Initial conditions
    This dropdown combo box lists the following conditions:
    1. Discharge
    2. Inflow = Outflow (Default)

    If the first option is used, a discharge value is to be entered. The initial storage in the reach will be calculated from the specified discharge and the storage-discharge function. If the second option is used, it will be assumed that the initial outflow is the same as the initial inflow to the reach from upstream elements. This is essentially the same as assuming a steady-state initial condition. The initial storage will be computed from the first inflow to the reach and storage-discharge function.

  • Initial discharge
    This entry defines the initial discharge value. This entry is only available when the Discharge option is selected for the Initial conditions entry. Otherwise, this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Depth discharge rating curve (optional)
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already defined depth discharge rating curve. Clicking on the […] define button will display the Depth Discharge Rating Curve Data dialog box. This allows the user to define a new depth discharge rating curve.

    Note that when this option is used, it is necessary that the user defines a downstream invert elevation in the General Specifications panel. The downstream invert elevation is added to the flow depth to compute the water surface elevation.

Routing Method: Muskingum

The Muskingum routing method uses a simple conservation of mass approach to route flow through the stream reach. However, it does not assume that the water surface is level. By assuming a linear, but non-level, water surface it is possible to account for increased storage during the rising side of a flood wave and decreased storage during the falling side. By adding a travel time for the reach and a weighting between the influence of inflow and outflow, it is possible to approximate attenuation.

When Muskingum is selected for the Routing method, the following data panel is shown.

Routing Method - Muskingum

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel.

  • Reach travel time
    This entry defines the travel time of a reach in minutes.
  • Attenuation coefficient
    This entry defines the weighting between inflow and outflow influence; it ranges from 0.0 up to 0.5. In practical application, a value of 0.0 results in maximum attenuation and 0.5 results in no attenuation. Most stream reaches require an intermediate value found through calibration.
  • Number subreaches
    This spin control button defines the numbers of subreaches in the reach element. The number of subreaches affect attenuation where one subreach gives more attenuation and increasing the number of subreaches decreases the attenuation. The number of subreaches may be used to introduce numerical attenuation, which can be used to better represent the movement of floodwaves through the natural system. Here, the default value is 1 but may be optionally increased.

Routing Method: Muskingum-Cunge Routing

The Muskingum-Cunge routing method is based on the combination of the conservation of mass and the diffusion representation of the conservation of momentum. It is sometimes referred to as a variable coefficient method because the routing parameters are recalculated every time step based on channel properties and the flow depth. It represents the attenuation of flood waves and can be used in reaches with a small slope.

When Muskingum Cunge is selected for the Routing method, the following data panel is shown.

Routing Method - Muskingum-Cunge Routing

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel.

  • Time step method
    This dropdown combo box lists the following conditions:
    1. Auto DX Auto DT (default)
    2. Specified DX Auto DT
    3. Specified DX Specified DT

    When the Auto DX Auto DT method is selected, the program will automatically select space and time intervals that maintain numeric stability. Alternatively, when the Specified DX Auto DT method is selected, the program will use the specified number of subreaches (i.e., DX) while automatically varying the time interval to take as long a time interval as possible while also maintaining numeric stability. When the Specified DX Specified DT method is selected, the program will use the specified number of subreaches and subintervals throughout the entire simulation.

  • Number subreaches
    This spin control button defines the numbers of subreaches in the reach element. This entry is enabled when the Time step method entry is set to Specified DX Auto DT or Specified DX Specified DT. Otherwise, this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Here, the default value is 1 but may be optionally increased.
  • Number subintervals
    This entry is enabled when the Time step method entry is set to Specified DX Specified DT. Otherwise, this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out). The default value is 1 Hour but may be changed from the options listed under this dropdown combo box.
  • Index method
    This dropdown combo box lists the following conditions:
    1. Celerity (Wave Velocity)
    2. Discharge (default)

    The index method is used in conjunction with the physical properties of the channel and the previously mentioned time step method selection. The program's selected index method and specified parameters will be used to discretize the routing reach in both space and time.

  • Maximum (index) discharge
    This entry represents the maximum expected flow in the reach. This value is used to develop a storage-discharge relationship for the reach using 1.5 times this value and the defined reach geometry.

    This entry is enabled when the Index method entry is set to Discharge. Otherwise, this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Maximum (index) celerity
    This entry is enabled when the Index Method entry is set to Celerity. Otherwise, this entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Manning's roughness
    This entry defines the Manning’s roughness for the channel. Clicking on the […] lookup button will display an Open Channel Manning’s Roughness lookup table dialog box.
  • Element shape
    This dropdown combo box lists the following shapes:
    1. 8-Point Cross Section
    2. Circular Pipe
    3. Rectangle
    4. Tabular Cross Section
    5. Trapezoid (default)
    6. Triangle

Note that the Trapezoid bottom width and Trapezoid side slope (V:H) options will be replaced according to the shape selected from the Element shape dropdown combo box.

Based on the selected shape, the interface of the Reach Data dialog box will change. When a user selects 8-Point Cross Section or Tabular Cross Section as an element shape, the Cross Section Geometry section will get enabled. This section is located below the Muskingum Cunge Specifications section.

Cross Section Geometry section

The 8-point shape requires a cross section simplified with only eight station-elevation values. The cross section is usually configured to represent the main channel plus left and right overbank areas. A separate Manning’s n value is entered for each overbank. The cross section should extend from the channel invert up to the maximum water surface elevation that will be encountered during a simulation.

If the tabular shape is used, you will also have to select multiple curves that describe how discharge, area, and top width changes with elevation. These curves must be defined as elevation-discharge, elevation-area, and elevation-width functions, respectively, in the paired data manager before they can be used in the reach element. These curves must be monotonically increasing. Within each of the curves mentioned above, the x-axis defines the elevation, while the y-axis defines the variable of interest. Elevations must be monotonically increasing.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to know more about 8-Point Cross Section and Tabular Cross Section.

Routing Method: Normal Depth Routing

The Normal Depth routing method uses a Modified Puls routing approach where storage-discharge relationships are developed using a normal depth assumption for the reach. The user enters geometric data for the channel. HEC-HMS computes the storage-discharge relationship for the given channel using Manning's equation for normal depth. HEC-HMS computes the number of Modified Puls subreaches by dividing the travel time by the simulation time interval.

When Normal Depth is selected for the Routing method, the following data panel is shown.

Routing Method - Normal Depth Routing

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel.

  • Manning’s roughness
    This entry defines the Manning’s roughness for the channel. Clicking on the […] lookup button will display an Open Channel Manning’s Roughness lookup table dialog box.

    Note that previously defined Manning’s n values from the previously defined cross section should be carried over to the new cross section - reach as they are created.

  • Maximum (index) discharge
    This entry represents the maximum expected flow in the reach. This value is used to develop a storage-discharge relationship for the reach using 1.5 times this value and the defined reach geometry.
  • Element shape
    This dropdown combo box lists the following shapes:
    1. 8-Point Cross Section
    2. Circular Pipe
    3. Rectangle
    4. Trapezoid (default)
    5. Triangle
  • Trapezoid bottom width
    This entry is used to define the bottom width of the trapezoidal channel.
  • Trapezoid side slope (V:H)
    This entry is used to define the side slope of the trapezoidal channel. The side slope is dimensionless and entered as the units of horizontal distance per one unit of vertical distance.

Note that the Trapezoid bottom width and Trapezoid side slope (V:H) options will change according to the shape selected from the Element shape dropdown combo box.

Routing Method: Straddle Stagger Routing

The Straddle Stagger method uses empirical representations of translation and attenuation processes to route water through a reach. Inflow is delayed a specified amount of time. The delayed flows are averaged over a specified amount of time to produce the final outflow.

When Straddle Stagger is selected for the Routing method, the following data panel is shown.

16. Routing Method - Straddle Stagger Routing

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel.

  • Lag time
    This entry specifies travel time through the reach. Inflow to the reach is delayed in time by an amount equal to the specified lag.
  • Attenuation duration
    This entry specifies the amount of spreading in a flood peak as it travels through the reach. The delayed inflows are averaged over this specified time duration. The duration parameter loses physical meaning when it is greater than twice the lag time.

Pros and Cons of HEC-HMS Routing Methods

Kinematic Wave Routing

unknown node

Lag Time Routing

unknown node

Lag Time & Attenuation Routing

unknown node

Modified Puls Routing

unknown node

Muskingum Routing

unknown node

Muskingum-Cunge Routing

unknown node

Normal Depth Routing

unknown node

Straddle Stagger Routing

unknown node
Reach Routing › Loss/Gain Methods

Reach Data - Selecting a Loss/Gain Method

While a reach element conceptually represents a segment of stream or river, optional modeling of interactions with the subsurface is performed by a loss/gain method contained within the reach. A loss/gain method represents losses from the channel, additions to the channel from groundwater, or bi-directional water movements, depending on the specific implementation of a method. The following loss/gain methods are provided in GeoHECHMS:

  • Constant Loss/Gain
  • Percolation Loss

Each method included in the software provides a different level of detail and not all methods are equally adept at representing a particular stream. Further, some loss/gain methods are only compatible with certain routing methods because of differing data requirements.

The user can select the loss/gain method for a reach using the Reach Data dialog box.

Follow the steps given below to select a loss/gain method:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Reach Data command.
    Reach Data ribbon menu command
    Alternatively, the user can either double click on the reach polyline from the Map View or choose the Reach Data command from the Routing Reaches dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu.
    Routing Reaches dropdown menu - Reach Data command
  2. The Reach Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Reach Data dialog box
  3. Click on the Loss/gain method dropdown combo box to select a loss/gain method from the list of available choices.
    Reach Data dialog box - Loss/gain method dropdown combo box
  4. To enter the data for the selected loss/gain method, select the Loss/Gain Data option from the Reach Specifications dropdown combo box.
    Reach Specifications dropdown combo box - Loss/Gain Data option
  5. The Loss/Gain Data panel will be displayed. Note that the Loss/Gain Data panel content changes based upon the loss/gain method selected in the General Specifications section.
    Loss/Gain Data panel

The following sections describe different loss/gain methods and how to enter the data for each method in the Loss/Gain Data panel.

Loss/Gain Method: None

When None is selected for the Loss/gain method, the Loss/Gain Data dropdown combo box entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Loss/Gain Method - None

If the user chooses the None method, the reach will perform routing calculations without including any losses or gains to the channel.

Loss/Gain Method: Constant Loss/Gain

The constant loss/gain method uses an empirical relationship to calculate channel loss using a fixed flow rate reduction and a ratio of the flow. It does not include any capability to represent gaining streams. A fixed flow rate is subtracted from the routed flow, and then the remainder is multiplied by a ratio. The reduced flow becomes the outflow for the reach.

Note that this method is compatible with all routing methods.

When Constant Loss/Gain is selected for the Loss/gain method, the following data panel will be displayed.

Loss/Gain Method - Constant Loss/Gain

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  • Infiltration rate
    This entry field specifies the amount of flow to be subtracted from the inflow. It may be zero or greater than zero. If the specified value is zero, then no flow rate reduction will occur. If the specified value is greater than the inflow for a time step, then no outflow will result for that interval.
  • Infiltration reduction fraction
    This spin control is used to reduce the inflow in linear proportion to the flow rate. After the constant value is subtracted from the routed inflow, the remainder is multiplied by the value one minus the fraction. The fraction must be between zero and one.

Loss/Gain Method: Percolation Loss

The percolation method uses a constant infiltration rate in combination with the inundated area in the reach to compute channel loss. It does not include any capability to represent gaining streams.

Note that this method is only compatible with the Modified Puls and Muskingum Cunge routing methods.

When used with the Modified Puls method, the optional elevation-discharge function and invert elevation must be specified in the routing parameters. The inundated area is calculated differently depending on the routing method. In combination with the Modified Puls method, the current storage and outflow are combined with the elevation-discharge curve to compute the inundated area. With the Muskingum-Cunge method, the wetted perimeter is multiplied by the reach length to compute area.

To learn more about different routing methods, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

When Percolation Loss is selected for the Loss/gain method, the following data panel will be displayed.

Loss/Gain Method - Percolation Loss

The following input parameter is provided in the data panel:

  • Infiltration rate
    This entry field specifies percolation in terms of a flow rate per area. The inundated area is multiplied by the rate to determine the channel loss for each time interval.
Reach Routing › Connect Downstream

Connect Downstream Command

The Connect Downstream command allows the user to automatically assign subbasin connections to the next downstream junction. It also allows the user to manually assign subbasin connections to downstream elements such as diversions, junctions, storage areas, reaches, manholes, pipes, etc.

Follow the steps given below to use the Connect Downstream command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Drainage Subbasins dropdown menu, and then select the Connect Downstream command.
    Drainage Subbasins menu item
  2. The Connect Downstream dialog box will be displayed.
    Connect Downstream Command Dailog Box

The following sections describe the Connect Downstream command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Subbasins

The Select Subbasins section includes a table that lists all the subbasins contained within the current scenario and their associated downstream elements.

If a subbasin is already selected on the Map View prior to running this command, the same subbasin will be shown selected within the table.

Alternatively, click the [Pick] button adjacent to Manual selection to interactively select subbasins from the Map View. Clicking on the [Pick] button will cause the dialog box to temporarily disappear, allowing the user to select subbasins from the Map View. Then the user will be returned to the dialog box and the total number of selected subbasins will be displayed in the Total selected entry.

The Connected To column lists the downstream connection for each subbasin. Alternatively, the user can manually select the downstream connection element using the [Pick] button adjacent to the subbasin entry. Clicking on the [Pick] button will cause the dialog box to temporarily disappear, allowing the user to select the downstream element from the Map View.

The following elements can be selected:

  • Diversions
  • Junctions
  • Sinks
  • Storage Areas
  • Reaches
  • Manholes
  • Pipes
  • and more...

Once the element is selected, the connection line will be drawn and the user will then be returned to the dialog box. The corresponding row contained in the data grid will be updated with the corresponding downstream element.

Selecting Terrain Surface

The Terrain surface dropdown combo box lists all the elevation grids (i.e., DEMs) loaded in the project. Select the elevation grid to be used in computing the downstream junction for each subbasin.

Computing Downstream Connection

On clicking the [Compute] button, the software will create a hidden buffer for each selected subbasin boundary and determine all the junctions contained within the buffered area.
Based on the number of available junctions, the software will perform one of the following actions:

  • Case 1: One Junction Available
    If the software finds one junction contained within the selected subbasin, it will assign that junction as the downstream connection for the subbasin.
  • Case 2: More than One Junction Available
    If there is more than one junction, the software will analyze each junction location and compare it to the selected terrain surface. The software will then determine which junction has a lower elevation. The junction with the lowest elevation will then be assigned to the subbasin as the downstream connection point.
  • Case 3: No Junctions Available
    If there is no junction within the buffer, then no downstream connection will be made.

Note that if the user has manually connected a downstream element for a subbasin, then the software will remember the connection at the project level.

Hydrologic Elements › Junctions

Junction Data Command

Junctions define the elements (i.e., nodes, manholes, confluences, etc.) where rivers, streams, and stormwater pipes combine flow as it is being routed through the stormwater network model. Junction elements can have one or more inflows, but only one outflow. In addition, subbasins can be connected to junctions.

In GeoHECHMS, the Junction Data command allows the user to add new junctions and edit junction data in a project.

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Junction Data command.
    Junction Data commandAlternatively, the user can either double-click on the junction node from the Map View or choose the Junction Data command from the Routing Junctions dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu.
    Routing Junctions dropdown menu
  2. The Junction Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Junction Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Junction Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Junction

The Select Junction section allows the user to select the junction for defining the junction data. The user can create a new junction, copy existing junction data to a new junction, and delete a junction. In addition, the user can navigate between junctions and enter a description detailing the defined junction.

Selecting Junction

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Junction ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the junctions that are defined in the model. The user can select the desired junction from the dropdown combo box. Click the pencil icon to edit the junction ID. The user can navigate between the previous and next junctions using the up and down arrow buttons. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to select the junction from the Map View. Note that the up and down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) when the model contains only a single junction.
  • Description
    This text field allows the user to enter additional information that describes the selected junction.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to create a new junction. On clicking this button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar informing the user to place a junction on the Map View. Click on the Map View to place the junction. Following the placement of a junction, the dialog box will be redisplayed. Next, enter the junction name in the Junction ID entry field and click the [Accept changes] button.
    New button
    The software checks that the defined ID is unique. If not, a warning dialog box is displayed as shown below. Click the [OK] button and the user is then returned to the Junction ID field to change the ID.
    Informational message
  • Copy
    This button causes the software to copy existing junction data to a new junction. On clicking the [Copy] button, the software automatically provides a unique default name for the duplicated junction. The user can use the default name or enter a different valid and unique ID before moving on to add any other data.
  • Delete
    This button allows the user to delete the current junction data from the model. On clicking the [Delete] button, the following confirmational dialog box is displayed.Delete Junction informational message

Click the [Yes] button to delete the selected junction.

Click the [No] button to abort the deletion process.

Junction Specifications

This section allows the user to define the data to be used for the current junction.

Junction Specifications

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Invert elevation
    This entry field defines the invert elevation of the selected junction. The other basin elements such as reach that can connect to the junction do require an invert elevation based upon the specific parameters.
  • Downstream connection
    This entry field defines the downstream connection that the selected junction drains to. Clicking on the […] button allows the user to select the downstream elements from the Map View. The following elements can be selected:
    1. Diversion
    2. Junction
    3. Reach
    4. Sink
    5. Storage Area
    The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Computational Results

This section allows the user to see the analysis results for the current junction that were computed by HEC-HMS.

Computational Results

Note that the Detailed Results section provides additional analysis results for the current junction that were computed by HEC-HMS.

DSS Data

This section displays information related to the output DSS (Digital Storage System) file generated for the HEC-HMS computational results.

DSS Data
  • DSS file name: This entry defines the external DSS file to be used for reading the data.
  • Data path: This entry denotes the data path within the DSS data file which contains the paired data.
Hydrologic Elements › Junctions

Renumber Interconnected Junctions Command

The Renumber Interconnected Junctions command allows the user to automatically renumber routing junctions and connected routing reaches along a defined flow path.

Follow the steps below to use the Renumber Interconnected Junctions command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Routing Junctions dropdown menu and then select the Renumber Interconnected Junctions.
    Renumber Interconnected Junctions command
  2. The Renumber Interconnected Junctions dialog box will be displayed.
    Renumber Interconnected Junctions dialog box

The following sections describe the Renumber Interconnected Junctions command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Reaches

The Select Reaches panel allows the user to select reaches that define the flow path.

Selecting Multiple (Interconnected) Reaches

The Select Multiple (Interconnected) Reaches section is used to sequentially number reaches and junctions along the selected flow path that has reaches connected end-to-end with each other.

If a reach(s) is already selected on the Map View before running the command, the same reach will be shown selected within the data table. The user can also select/unselect the desired reach by checking/unchecking the checkboxes corresponding to each reach that defines the flow path.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to manually select the downstream most and upstream most reach on the Map View, and the software will then automatically determine all the junctions and reaches that connect with each other and form a river path.

Once the downstream and upstream reaches are selected, the dialog box will be redisplayed and the total number of selected reaches will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.

Selecting Multiple (Interconnected) Reaches

Notes:

  • The user can select multiple reaches from the Map View before running the Renumber Interconnected Junctions command by holding the [Ctrl] key while selecting the desired reaches.
  • Only those reaches that contain irregular cross sections are listed.
  • Multiple reaches that reference the same irregular cross section geometry are not listed.

Manual Editing

This section contains a data table that lists the IDs of the selected reaches and junctions. The data table also lists the reach distance and total reach distance in miles and feet. The user can enter new reach and junction IDs in the table columns. Alternatively, the user can use the Reach Renumbering and Junction Renumbering panels to generate new reach and junction IDs as per the defined naming specifications.

Manual Editing

Junction Renumbering

This panel allows the user to number the junctions based upon river chainage or incrementally.

Junction Renumbering

Junction Stationing

This section contains the following junction stationing options:

  • Junction ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the start of the junction ID.
  • Junction ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the junction ID.
  • Junction ID preview: This entry provides a preview of the junction naming specifications defined above.
  • Numbering direction: This dropdown combo box defines the direction in which the junction IDs are increasing. The following options are available:
    1. Increasing Downstream
    2. Increasing Upstream (HEC-RAS style)

Use Reach Distance

The Use reach distance subsection is used to number the junctions by using the river chainage along the defined flow path. By default, this radio button option is selected.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Downstream junction ID: This entry provides a junction ID that will be used as the downstream most reach station.

    Note that if the Increasing Downstream option is selected from the Numbering direction dropdown combo box, then the Downstream junction ID entry will change into Upstream junction ID. In addition, the numbering methodology will be altered to account for the selected direction.
  • Distance units: This dropdown combo box defines the unit of reach length. The available options are:
    1. Feet
    2. Miles
  • Decimal precision: This optional checkbox entry defines the decimal precision that will be used in determining the reach stations. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. If checked, then the user can enter a value ranging from 0 to 15.

Clicking the [Preview] button will cause the software to automatically fill in the junction IDs in the New Junction ID column of the Manual Editing data table.

Use Reach Distance

Use Auto Increment

The Use auto increment subsection is used to number the junction using a fixed increment. The user can select the Use auto increment radio button option to enable the content of the subsection.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Junction ID digits: This option allows the user to set the number of digits to be used for junction ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the junction ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
  • Next available Junction ID: This entry defines the next element ID number to be used.
  • Junction ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering elements. The default value is 1.

Reach Renumbering

This optional panel allows the user to number reaches based upon river chainage or incrementally. By default, the checkbox on the Reach Renumbering panel is checked. If this panel is unchecked, then the content under this panel will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) and the reach renumbering cannot be performed.

Reach Renumbering

Reach Stationing

This section contains the following reach stationing options:

  • Reach ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the start of the reach ID.
  • Reach ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the reach ID.
  • Reach ID preview: This entry provides a preview of the reach naming specifications defined above.
  • Numbering direction: This dropdown combo box defines the direction in which the reach IDs are increasing. The following options are available:
    1. Increasing Downstream
    2. Increasing Upstream (HEC-RAS style)

Use Reach Distance

The Use reach distance subsection is used to number the reach by using the river chainage along the defined flow path. By default, this radio button option is selected when the Reach Numbering panel is checked.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Downstream reach ID: This entry provides a reach ID that will be used as the downstream most reach station.

    Note that if the Increasing Downstream option is selected from the Numbering direction dropdown combo box, then the Downstream reach ID entry will change into Upstream reach ID. In addition, the numbering methodology will be altered to account for the selected direction.

  • Distance units: This dropdown combo box defines the unit of reach length. The available options are:
    • Feet
    • Miles
  • Decimal precision: This optional checkbox entry defines the decimal precision that will be used in determining the reach stations. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. If checked, then the user can enter a value ranging from 0 to 15.

Clicking the [Preview] button will cause the software to automatically fill in the reach IDs in the New Reach ID column of the Manual Editing data table.

Use Reach Distance

Use Auto Increment

The Use auto increment subsection is used to number the reach using a fixed increment. The user can select the Use auto increment radio button option to enable the content of this subsection.

The following options are provided in this subsection:

  • Reach ID digits: This option permits specification of a set number of digits to use for reach ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the reach ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
  • Next available Reach ID: This entry defines the next element ID number to be used.
  • Reach ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering elements. The default value is 1.

Once all the required data inputs have been defined, click the [Apply] button and the software will assign the user-defined changes along a defined flow path.

Hydrologic Elements › Junctions

Georeference Junctions Command

When defining a reach, the user might use multiple cross sections or reach geometries to define each reach. In this situation, several reaches are connected with junctions to represent the extent of the reach in which the defined cross section or reach geometry should be applied. If a junction is not located at the correct location on the river reach, the user can use the Georeference Junctions command to automatically map that junction to a desired location.
The Georeference Junctions command provides three options for mapping junctions to the desired locations, as listed below:

  • Snap to Alignment Point
  • Slide Along Alignment Polyline
  • Draw on Map View

Follow the steps below to use the Georeference Junctions command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on Routing Junctions dropdown menu and select the Georeference Junctions command.Georeference Junctions Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Georeference Junctions dialog box will be displayed.Georeference Junctions command dialog box is displayed

The following sections describe how to georeference a junction to a desired location.

Selecting Junction to Georeference

The Select Junction to Georeference section allows the user to select the junction that is to be georeferenced. The user can select the junction from the Junction ID dropdown combo box listing all the junctions contained within the model. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the junction from the Map View.

After clicking the [Pick] button, the Georeference Junctions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next. The user can then interactively select a junction from the Map View.

Note that the user can select only one junction at a time to georeference.

Upon selecting a junction, the user is immediately returned to the dialog box, and the selected junction is highlighted on the Map View.

Note that the Junction ID dropdown combo box updates automatically to match the selected junction.

The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.

Snapping Junction to an Alignment Point

If an existing alignment point for the junction exists on the Map View, the Snap to Alignment Point option can be used to snap the HEC-HMS junction to the alignment point so that the HEC-HMS junction matches that of the alignment point.

Snap to Alignment Point option

The user can click the [Pick] button to select the alignment point from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the Georeference Junctions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next. The user can then interactively select the alignment point from the Map View.

Upon selecting the point, the user is immediately returned to the dialog box, and the status of Select alignment point read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected. The user can select only one alignment point to use for georeferencing.

Once the junction alignment point is selected, the user can click the [Snap] button. On clicking the [Snap] button, the software will snap the selected junction to the selected alignment point.

Sliding Junction Along an Alignment Polyline

If a HEC-HMS junction has been snapped to an alignment point (on the defined reach) on the Map View but is not precisely located where it should be, the Slide Along Alignment Polyline option can be used to slide the junction along the defined river reach. Select the Slide Along Alignment Polyline radio button option to enable this section.

Slide along Alignment Polyline option

The user can click the [Pick] button to select the alignment polyline from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the Georeference Junctions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the alignment polyline from the Map View.

Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Select alignment polyline element read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected. The user can select only one alignment polyline to use for georeferencing.

Next, click on the [Slide] button. The Georeference Junctions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next.

The user can then “slide” the junction along the defined river reach on the Map View. However, the command doesn’t allow sliding when an adjacent cross section is encountered.

Georeference junction slide functionality

Once finished, the user can press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the junction will be placed at the new location.

The user can also check the Recompute adjacent node element elevations checkbox option to recompute the elevation of the adjacent node type elements while georeferencing the junction. By default, this checkbox is checked.

Note that the user cannot use the “slide” functionality to change the location of the termination (upstream most or downstream most) junctions on multiple reaches.

Drawing Junction Node on Map View

The Draw on Map View radio button option allows the user to draw a junction node on the Map View to which the selected junction is to be georeferenced.

Draw on Map View radio button option

On selecting the Draw on Map View radio button option, the [Draw] button becomes enabled (no longer grayed out). The user can click the [Draw] button to interactively draw the junction node on the Map View.

On clicking the [Draw] button, the Georeference Junctions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next. The user can then draw the junction node on the Map View. Once finished, the user can press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the selected junction will be georeferenced to the drawn node.

Assigning Junction Elevation

The Assign Junction Elevation section uses elevation data to assign an invert elevation to the georeferenced junction. The user should define the data for this section before georeferencing junctions. Alternatively, the user can use the Assign Junction Elevations command to assign invert elevations to the already drawn junctions. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about this command.
For assigning elevation data, this section only supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation grids
  • LandXML data
  • TIN surfaces

It does not support the following surface types:

  • CAD drawings
  • GIS contours

The user can also apply an elevation offset to raise or lower the selected junction by the specified amount by checking the Apply elevation offset checkbox. On selecting this checkbox, the entry field next to it becomes available for entering an elevation offset value. For example, the user can define a negative offset value to lower the junction for specific circumstances, such as in the case of representing a manhole bottom elevation.

Hydrologic Elements › Junctions

Draw and Assign Junctions Command

Junction elements are used to combine runoff and stream flow from hydrologic elements located upstream. The inflow into the junction element can come from one or multiple upstream elements.

unknown node

In GeoHECHMS, junctions can be defined by either drawing or assigning nodes on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw Junctions
  • Assign Junctions

Drawing/Assigning Junctions

The Draw/Assign Junctions command allows the user to manually draw/assign multiple nodes on the Map View as junctions, one after another until completed.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw/Assign Junctions command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Routing Junctions dropdown menu and then choose the Draw/Assign Junctions command.
    Draw/Assign Junctions commands
  2. The following dialog box(s) will be displayed.
    • Draw Junctions:
      Draw Junctions dialog box
    • Assign Junctions:
      Assign Junctions dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Draw/Assign Junctions command and interact with the above dialog box(s).

Drawing Junctions

Drawing Junction Nodes

The Draw Junction Nodes section is used to place/draw the junction on the Map View using nodes. To draw a junction node, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Draw Junction Nodes section, click the [Draw] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Drawing junction nodes
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt you to place a junction node on the Map View. Click on the Map View to place the junction.
    Junction on Map ViewNotes:
    • To place the node more accurately, use the mouse roller wheel to zoom into a specific location.
    • The Snap Mode option can be enabled to cause the drawn junction to snap to the nearest HEC-HMS element.
  3. Following placement of a junction, the Draw Junctions dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Junction nodes read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Drawn junction
    To abort the current draw command, press the [Esc] key.

Assigning Junctions

Selecting Junction Nodes

The Select Junction Nodes section can be used to manually assign multiple nodes on the Map View as junctions. To assign junction nodes, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Select Junction Nodes section, click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Assigning junction nodes
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt you to select a junction node from the Map View. Click on the previously drawn junction node on the Map View to select it.
    Junction on Map View
  3. Following the selection of a junction node, the Assign Junctions dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Junction nodes read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to 1 Selected.
    Assigned junction
  4. Click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Junction Specifications

This section is common to both the Draw Junctions and Assign Junctions dialog box and is used to specify the junction ID for each drawn/assigned junction. The user can assign these IDs either manually or automatically using some predefined formats.

Follow the steps below to assign junction IDs to the junctions:

  1. If a junction was drawn/assigned while the Junction ID radio button option was selected, the user can manually enter the junction ID in the corresponding field as shown below.
    Manual naming junction ID
  2. Alternately, the user can enable the Auto-name junction ID radio button option in order to automatically name every newly drawn/assigned junction as per the user’s predefined naming formats as shown below.
    Automatic naming junction ID
    The different junction naming formats present in the Auto-name junction ID option are as follows:
    • Junction ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the start of the junction ID.
    • Junction ID digits: This option permits specification of a set number of digits to use for the junction ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the junction ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
    • Next available junction ID: This entry defines the next element ID number to be used.
    • Junction ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering elements. The default value is 1.
    • Junction ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the junction ID.
    • Junction ID preview: This entry provides a preview of the junction naming specifications defined above.
  3. After providing the Junction ID, press the [Enter] key or click on the [Apply] button.
    [Apply] button
    Note that if the auto-name option was selected and the user returns to the dialog box, the [Apply] button is disabled since the just drawn/assigned junctions have already been named and created.

Assign Invert Elevation

This section is common to both the Draw Junctions and Assign Junctions dialog box and allows the user to assign an invert elevation to the junction using a terrain model. Define this section before drawing/assigning junctions so that invert elevations can be assigned.

To assign an invert elevation, the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation grids
  • LandXML data
  • TIN surfaces

The user can also apply an elevation offset to raise or lower the junction by the specified amount by checking the Apply elevation offset checkbox option. On selecting this checkbox option, the entry field next to it becomes available for entering an elevation offset value. A negative offset value will lower the junction by the specified amount.

Hydrologic Elements › Sources

Source Data Command

Source data define the elements (i.e., upstream flow sources) where additional inflows can enter the stormwater network model. Typically, this represents an upstream boundary condition such as unmodeled headwater regions for the current model. In GeoHECHMS, the Source Data command allows the user to add new source and edit source data in a project.

Follow the steps below to view or modify the source data:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Sources dropdown menu and then select the Source Data command. Alternatively, the user can double-click on the source element from the Map View.Source Data Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Source Data dialog box will be displayed.Source Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Source Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Source

The Select Source section allows the user to select the source for defining the source data. The user can create a new source, copy existing source data to a new source, and delete a source. In addition, the user can navigate between sources and enter a description detailing the defined source.

Select Source section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Source ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the sources that are defined in the project. The user can select the desired source from the dropdown combo box. Click the pencil icon to edit the source ID. The user can navigate between the previous and next sources using the up and down arrow buttons. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to select the source from the Map View. Note that the up and down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) when the model contains only a single source.
  • Description
    This text field allows the user to enter additional information to describe the selected source.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to create a new source. On clicking this button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw a new source on the Map View. Once finished, press the [Enter] key, or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. While drawing a source, the user can press the [Esc] key to abort the creation of a new source, which returns the dialog box to its previous state.

The dialog box will be redisplayed. Next, enter the source name in the Source ID entry field and click the [Accept changes] button. The software checks that the defined ID is unique. If not, a warning dialog box is displayed, and the user is then returned to the Source ID field to change the ID.

[Accept Changes] button
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to copy existing source data to a new source. When this command is executed, the software automatically provides a unique default name for the duplicated source. The cursor is then placed into the Source ID. The user can go with the default name or enter a different valid and unique ID before moving on to add any other data.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete a selected source and its associated data from the project.

Source Specifications

This section allows the user to define the data to be used for the current source.

Source Specifications section

The following options are provided in this section:

  • Invert elevation
    This entry field allows the user to define the junction invert elevation. Note that HEC-HMS does not use this value, but other elements that can connect to the junction do require an invert elevation based upon specific parameters. For example, reaches require an invert elevation. In addition, profile plots require an invert elevation.
  • Upstream drainage area
    This entry field only reports the amount of drainage area that contributes flow to the current source node. It is used in the reports generated by the software but is not used in the computations. Clicking on the […] button allows the user to draw a polygon to measure the drainage area.
  • Downstream connection
    This entry field allows the user to define the downstream element that the selected source node drains to. Clicking on the […] button allows the user to select the downstream element from the Map View. The following elements can be selected:
    1. Diversion
    2. Junction
    3. Reach
    4. Reservoir
    5. Sink
  • Discharge adjustment ratio
    This spin control entry field allows the user to specify an adjustment ratio for calibrating the discharge from the selected source. By default, the software uses a value of 1.00, meaning that there is no adjustment. However, the user can enter a different value ranging from 0 to 1.
  • Discharge method
    This dropdown combo allows the user to select a method for computing the inflow. The following options are available in the dropdown combo box:
    Discharge method dropdown entry
    1. None: When None is selected for the source, the source will have a discharge of exactly zero into the flow network throughout the simulation.
    2. Constant Discharge (default): When Constant Discharge method is selected for the source, then the Constant discharge and Constant discharge annual pattern entry fields get enabled in the dialog box.
      Discharge method dropdown entry Constant Discharge method
    3. Discharge Hydrograph: When Discharge Hydrograph method is selected for the source, then the Discharge hydrograph entry field gets enabled in the dialog box.Discharge method dropdown entry Discharge Hydrograph method
  • Constant discharge
    This field allows the user to define the discharge being routed downstream. The same discharge value is used for all time steps during a simulation.
  • Constant discharge annual pattern
    This dropdown combo box lists the already defined annual patterns. If no annual pattern is defined, then the same discharge value is used for every time interval in the simulation. When a pattern is specified, the discharge value is multiplied by the percentage found in the annual pattern for each time interval in the simulation. The annual pattern provides a percentage that varies throughout the year. The annual pattern must be defined in the Source Constant Discharge Annual Pattern Data dialog box before it can be used in the source element.

Clicking on the […] button will display a Source Constant Discharge Annual Pattern Data dialog box, which allows the user to define a new user-defined annual pattern.

Source Constant Discharge Annual Pattern Data dialog box
  • Discharge hydrograph
    This dropdown combo box lists the already defined unit hydrograph. The unit hydrograph should record the discharge to use for each time interval during a simulation. If there is missing data in the record and the basin model options are set to replace missing data, a zero flow rate will be substituted for each missing data value. If the basin model is not set to replace missing data, any missing data will cause the simulation to stop and an error message will be displayed. The unit hydrograph must be defined in the Discharge Hydrograph Data dialog box before it can be used in the source element.

Clicking on the […] button will display a Discharge Hydrograph Data dialog box, which allows the user to define a new user-defined unit hydrograph.

Discharge Hydrograph Data dialog box

Computational Results

This section allows the user to see the analysis results for the current source that were computed by HEC-HMS.

Computational Results section

DSS Data

This section includes an external DSS file for referencing the HEC-HMS computational results. It allows the user to easily copy the references and paste them into GeoHECRAS.

  • DSS file name: This entry defines the external DSS file to be used for reading the data.
  • Data path: This entry denotes the data path within the DSS data file which contains the paired data.
Hydrologic Elements › Sources

Georeferencing Sources

When the GeoHECHMS software imports a HEC-HMS model, it automatically places the source on the Map View. However, if the original HEC-HMS model was not spatially georeferenced, the source will not align with any loaded background base map. While the software can operate without any issues in this situation, the user may prefer that the source be georeferenced to the background base map. Therefore, it may become necessary to georeference the imported HEC-HMS source.

The Georeference Sources command is used to manually georeference each of the sources to the background base map displayed in the Map View.

Follow the steps below to use the Georeference Sources command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Sources dropdown menu and select the Georeference Sources.

    Georeference Sources command
  2. The Georeference Sources dialog box will be displayed.

    Georeference Sources dialog box

The following sections describe how to georeference a source to a desired location and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Source to Georeference

The Select Source to Georeference section allows the user to select the source that is to be georeferenced. The user can select the source present in the HEC-HMS model from the Source ID dropdown combo box. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the source from the Map View.

After clicking the [Pick] button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next. The user can then interactively select a source from the Map View.

Note that the user can select only one source at a time to georeference.

Upon selecting a source, the dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Source ID dropdown combo box updates automatically to match the selected source. The user can unselect the source using the [Clear] button.

Snapping Source to an Alignment Point

If an existing alignment point for the source exists on the Map View, the Snap to Alignment Point option can be used to snap the HEC-HMS source to the alignment point.

Snapping Source to an Alignment Point

The user can click the [Pick] button to select the alignment point from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next. The user can then interactively select the alignment point from the Map View.

Upon selecting the point, the user is immediately returned to the dialog box, and the status of the Select alignment point read-only field changes to Selected. The user can select only one alignment point to use for georeferencing. The user can unselect the alignment point using the [Clear] button.

Once the alignment point is selected, the user can click the [Snap] button and the software will snap the selected source to the alignment point.

Drawing Source Node on Map View

The Draw on Map View radio button option allows the user to draw a source node on the Map View to which the selected source is to be georeferenced.

Drawing Source Node on Map View

Selecting the Draw on Map View radio button option enables the [Draw] button. The user can click the [Draw] button to interactively draw a source node on the Map View.

On clicking the [Draw] button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next. The user can then draw the source node on the Map View. Once the source node is drawn, the dialog box will be redisplayed, and the selected source will be georeferenced to the drawn node.

Assigning Source Elevation

The Assign Source Elevation section uses the elevation data to assign an invert elevation to the georeferenced source. The user should define the data in this section before georeferencing sources. Alternatively, the user can use the Assign Sources Elevations command to assign invert elevations to the already drawn sources. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about Assign Source Elevations command.

Assigning Source Elevation

For assigning elevation data, this section supports the following terrain elevation source types:

  • Elevation grids
  • LandXML data
  • TIN surfaces

The following terrain elevation source types are unsupported:

  • CAD drawings
  • GIS contours

The user can also apply an elevation offset to raise or lower the selected source by the specified amount by checking the Apply elevation offset option. On selecting this checkbox, the entry field next to it becomes available for entering an elevation offset value.

Hydrologic Elements › Sources

Draw and Assign Sources Command

Sources define the elements (i.e., upstream flow sources) where additional inflows can enter the stormwater network model. Typically, this represents an upstream boundary condition such as unmodeled headwater regions for the current model.

In GeoHECHMS, sources can be defined by either drawing or assigning nodes on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw Sources
  • Assign Sources

Drawing/Assigning Sources

The Draw/Assign Sources command is used to manually draw/assign multiple source nodes on the Map View, one after another until completed.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw/Assign Sources command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Sources dropdown menu and then choose the Draw/Assign Sources command.
    Draw/Assign Sources command
  2. The following dialog box(s) will be displayed.
    • Draw Sources:
      Draw Sources dialog box
    • Assign Sources:
      Assign Sources dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Draw/Assign Sources command and interact with the above dialog box(s).

Drawing Sources

Drawing Source Nodes

The Draw Source Nodes section is used to draw sources on the Map View using nodes. To draw source nodes, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Draw] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    [Draw] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt you to place a source on the Map View. Click on the Map View to place the source.
    Map View to place the source
    Notes:
    • To position the source more accurately, use the mouse roller wheel to zoom into a specific location.
    • The Snap Mode option can be enabled to cause the drawn source to snap to the nearest HEC-HMS element.
  3. Following the placement of a source, the Draw Sources dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Source nodes read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Not Drawn to Drawn

Assigning Sources

Selecting Source Nodes

The Select Source Nodes section is used to select the previously drawn nodes from the Map View to assign them as sources. To assign source nodes, follow the steps below:

  1. Click the [Pick] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    [Pick] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt you to select a source node from the Map View. Click on the previously drawn source node on the Map View to select it.
    Click on the previously drawn source node
  3. Following the selection of a source node, the Assign Sources dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Source nodes read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to 1 Selected.
    Not Selected to 1 Selected

Source Specifications

The Source Specifications section is used to specify the source ID for each drawn source. The user can assign these IDs either manually or automatically using some predefined formats.

Follow the steps below to assign source IDs to the sources:

  1. If a source has been drawn while the Source ID radio button option was selected, the user can manually enter the source ID in the corresponding field as shown below.
    Source ID radio button
  2. Alternatively, the user can enable the Auto-name source ID radio button option to automatically name every newly drawn source as per the user’s predefined naming formats as shown below.
    Auto-name source ID radio button
    The different naming formats present in the Auto-name source ID option are as follows:

    • Source ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the start of the source ID.
    • Source ID digits: This option permits specification of a set number of digits to use for the source ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the source ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
    • Next available source ID: This entry defines the next element ID number to be used.
    • Source ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering elements. The default value is 1.
    • Source ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the source ID.
    • Source ID preview: This entry provides a preview of the source naming specification defined above.
  3. After providing the Source ID, press the [Enter] key or click on the [Apply] button.
    [Apply] button

Note that if the auto-name option is enabled and the user returns to the dialog box, the [Apply] button will be disabled because the just drawn sources have already been named and created.

Assigning Invert Elevation

This section allows the user to assign an invert elevation to the source using a terrain model. Define this section before drawing/assigning sources so that the invert elevations can be assigned.

To assign an invert elevation, the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation Grid
  • LandXML Data
  • TIN Surface

The user can also apply an elevation offset to raise or lower the source by the specified amount by checking the Apply elevation offset checkbox. On selecting this checkbox, the entry field next to it becomes available for entering an elevation offset value. A negative offset value will lower the source by the specified amount.

Hydrologic Elements › Sinks

Sink Data Command

Basin models are one of the main components of a project. The main purpose of the basin model is to convert atmospheric conditions into streamflow at specific locations in the watershed. Hydrologic elements are used to break the watershed into manageable pieces and are connected in a dendritic network to form a representation of the stream system.

A sink in a basin model is an element with one or more inflows but no outflow. Multiple inflows are added together to determine the total amount of water entering the element. Sinks can be used to represent the lowest point of an interior drainage area or the outlet of the basin model.

In GeoHECHMS, the Sink Data dialog box allows the user to view and edit the sink data.

Follow the steps below to view or modify sink data:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, expand the Sinks dropdown menu and select the Sink Data menu item.
    Sink Data menu item
  2. The Sink Data dialog box will be displayed.Sink Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to define the sink data and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Sink

The Select Sink section allows the user to select a sink in order to define the associated sink data.

Selecting Sink

This section contains the following options:

  • Sink ID
    This editable dropdown combo box displays the sink(s) defined in the project. The up and down arrow buttons adjacent to the dropdown combo box allow the user to switch between the available sinks. Alternatively, the user can click the […] pick button to select the sink from the Map View. Note that if the project contains only one sink, then the up/down and pick buttons will remain disabled (grayed out).
  • Reference flow
    This optional entry field allows the user to enter a reference flow value to associate it with the selected sinks. Note that the entered reference flow value does not contribute to and affect the modeling results and the associated parameters.
  • Reference label
    This optional entry field allows the user to enter a reference label for the selected sink.
  • Description
    This optional entry field allows the user to describe the information about the current sink.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to draw a new sink on the Map View.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to create a copy of the current sink on the Map View.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the current sink.
  • Less/More
    The [< Less] and [More >] buttons at the Select Sink header allow the user to hide and display the right side of the dialog box containing the Computed Results plot. This allows the dialog box to be smaller when the user does not want to see the plot view.

Sink Specifications

This section displays the computational results and the DSS output data associated with the sink.

Sink Specifications

The Invert elevation optional entry defines the sink invert. The other basin elements such as reach that can connect to the sink do require an invert elevation based upon the specific parameters. Note that the invert elevation of the sink will automatically populate in the Invert elevation entry field if the project contains a terrain elevation source.

This section contains the following sub-sections.

Computational Results

This sub-section displays various flow results of the sink once the analysis of the project is run successfully.

Computational Results

DSS Data

This sub-section displays the information of the output DSS (Digital Storage System) file generated for the HEC-HMS computational results. The DSS file name entry defines the external DSS file to be used for reading the data. The Data path entry defines the data path within the DSS file for the data to be read from.

DSS Data

Computed Results Plot

The Computed Results plot displays the flow hydrograph (i.e., Discharge vs Time plot) of the sink corresponding to the computational results.

Computed Results Plot

Note that if the analysis of the project is not computed, the Computational Results and DSS Data sub-sections will not display any output data, as shown below.

Computed Results Missing
Hydrologic Elements › Sinks

Georeferencing Sinks

A sink is an element with one or more inflows but no outflows. Multiple inflows are added together to determine the total amount of water entering the element. Sinks can be used to represent the lowest point of an interior drainage area or the outlet of the basin model.

In GeoHECHMS, the Georeference Sinks command is used to manually georeference each of the sinks to the background base map displayed in the Map View.

The Georeference Sinks command provides the following two options to manually georeference sinks to the desired location:

  • Snap to Alignment Point
  • Draw on Map View

Follow the steps below to use the Georeference Sinks command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, expand the Sinks dropdown menu and select the Georeference Sinks command.
    Select the Georeference Sinks command
  2. The Georeference Sinks dialog box will be displayed.
    Georeference Sinks dialog box

The following sections describe how to georeference a sink to a desired location and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Sink to Georeference

The Select Sink to Georeference section allows the user to select the sink that is to be georeferenced. The user can select the sink from the Sink ID dropdown combo box that lists all the sinks contained within the model. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the sink from the Map View.

Select Sink to Georeference section

After clicking the [Pick] button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next. The user can then interactively select a sink from the Map View. Note that the user can select only one sink at a time to georeference.

Upon selecting a sink, the dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Sink ID dropdown combo box updates automatically to match the selected sink.

The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.

Snapping Sink to an Alignment Point

If an existing alignment point for the sink exists on the Map View, the Snap to Alignment Point option can be used to snap the sink to the alignment point.

Snap to Alignment Point option

The user can click the [Pick] button to select the alignment point from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next. The user can then interactively select the alignment point from the Map View.

Upon selecting the point, the dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of the Select alignment point read-only field changes to Selected. Note that the user can select only one alignment point to use for georeferencing.

The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.

Once the alignment point has been selected, click the [Snap] button, and the software will snap the selected sink to the alignment point.

Drawing Sink Node on Map View

The Draw on Map View radio button option allows the user to draw a sink node on the Map View to which the selected sink is to be georeferenced. Selecting the Draw on Map View radio button option enables the [Draw] button.

[Draw] button

On clicking the [Draw] button, the Georeference Sinks dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next. The user can then draw the sink node on the Map View. Once the sink node is drawn, the dialog box will be redisplayed and the selected sink will be georeferenced to the drawn node.

Assigning Sink Elevation

The Assign Sink Elevation section uses the elevation data to assign an invert elevation to the georeferenced sink. The user should define the data in this section before georeferencing sinks. Alternatively, the user can use the Assign Sink Elevations command to assign invert elevations to the already drawn sinks. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Assign Sink Elevations command.

Assign Sink Elevation section

For assigning elevation data, the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation grids
  • LandXML data
  • TIN surfaces

The following surface types are unsupported:

  • CAD drawings
  • GIS contours

The user can also apply an elevation offset to raise or lower the selected sink by the specified amount by checking the Apply elevation offset checkbox option. On selecting this checkbox, the user can enter the offset value in the entry field next to Apply elevation offset checkbox option.

Hydrologic Elements › Sinks

Draw and Assign Sinks Command

Sinks define the elements (i.e., dry wells, wet wells, etc.) where one or more inflows enter, but there are no outflows. Multiple inflows in a sink element are added to determine the total amount of water entering the element. Sinks can be used to represent the lowest point of an interior drainage area or the outlet of the basin model.

In GeoHECHMS, sinks can be defined by either drawing or assigning nodes on the Map View using the following commands:

  1. Draw Sinks
  2. Assign Sinks

Drawing/Assigning Sinks

The Draw/Assign Sinks command is used to manually draw/assign multiple sink nodes on the Map View, one after another until completed.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw/Assign Sinks command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Sinks dropdown menu and then choose the Draw/Assign Sinks command.
    Draw Sinks and Assign Sinks input ribbon menu commands
  2. The following dialog box(s) will be displayed.
    • Draw Sinks:
      Draw Sinks dialog box
    • Assign Sinks:
      Assign Sinks dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Draw/Assign Sinks command and interact with the above dialog box(s).

Drawing Sinks

Drawing Sink Nodes

The Draw Sink Nodes section is used to draw sinks on the Map View using nodes. To draw sink nodes, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Draw Sink Nodes section, click the [Draw] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Draw sink node
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt you to place a sink on the Map View. Click on the Map View to place the sink.
    Sink node on Map ViewNotes:
    • To position the sinks more accurately, use the mouse roller wheel to zoom into a specific location.
    • The Snap Mode option can be enabled to cause the drawn sink to snap to the nearest HEC-HMS element.
  3. Following placement of a sink, the Draw Sinks dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Sink nodes read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Sink node drawn

Assigning Sinks

Selecting Sink Nodes

The Select Sink Nodes section can be used to manually assign multiple nodes on the Map View as sinks. To assign sink nodes, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Select Sink Nodes section, click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Pick sink node
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt you to select a sink node from the Map View. Click on the previously drawn sink node on the Map View to select it.
    Sink node on Map View
  3. Following the selection of a sink node, the Assign Sinks dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Sink nodes read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to 1 Selected.
    Sink node picked

Sink Specifications

This section is common to both the Draw Sinks and Assign Sinks dialog box and is used to specify the sink ID for each drawn/assigned sink. The user can assign these IDs either manually or automatically using some predefined formats.

Follow the steps below to assign sink IDs to the sinks:

  1. If a sink was drawn/assigned while the Sink ID radio button option was selected, the user can manually enter the sink ID in the corresponding field as shown below.
    Sink ID
  2. Alternatively, the user can enable the Auto-name sink ID radio button option to automatically name every newly drawn/assigned sink as per the user’s predefined naming formats as shown below.
    Auto-name sink ID
    The different naming formats present in the Auto-name sink ID option are as follows:

    • Sink ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the start of the sink ID.
    • Sink ID digits: This option permits specification of a set number of digits to use for the sink ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the sink ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
    • Next available sink ID: This entry defines the next element ID number to be used.
    • Sink ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering elements. The default value is 1.
    • Sink ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the sink ID.
    • Sink ID preview: This entry provides a preview of the sink naming specification defined above.
  3. After providing the Sink ID, press the [Enter] key or click the [Apply] button.
    Apply drawn sink node

Note that if the auto-name option is enabled and the user returns to the dialog box, the [Apply] button will be disabled since the just drawn/assigned sinks have already been named and created.

Assign Invert Elevation

This section is common to both the Draw Sinks and Assign Sinks dialog box and allows the user to assign an invert elevation to the sink using a terrain model. Define this section before drawing/assigning sinks so that invert elevations can be assigned.

To assign an invert elevation, the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation grids
  • LandXML data
  • TIN surfaces

The user can also apply an elevation offset to raise or lower the sink by the specified amount by checking the Apply elevation offset checkbox. On selecting this checkbox, the entry field next to it becomes available for entering an elevation offset value. A negative offset value will lower the sink by the specified amount.

Hydrologic Elements › Diversions

Diversion Data - Selecting a Diversion Method

A diversion is an element with two outflows, main and diverted, and one or more inflows. Inflow comes from other elements in the basin model. If there are multiple inflows, all inflows are added together before computing the outflow. A diversion can be used to represent weirs or pump stations that divert flow into canals or off-stream storage. The diversion element includes various methods for limiting the diverted flow that will be taken out of the channel. All flow that is not diverted becomes the main outflow. Diverted flow can be connected to an element that is computationally downstream or can simply be lost out of the system.

In GeoHECHMS, the diversion methods can be selected from the General Specifications section of the Diversion Data dialog box. Each diversion element may use a different method, or several diversions may use the same method.

Follow the steps below to select a diversion method:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Diversions dropdown menu, and then select the Diversion Data command.
    Diversion Data input ribbon menu command
  2. The Diversion Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Diversion Data dialog box
  3. From the Diversion ID dropdown combo box, select the diversion to assign a diversion method.
  4. From the Diversion method dropdown combo box, select the diversion method.
    Diversion method dropdown combo box
  5. To enter the data for the selected diversion method, select the Diversion Data option from the Diversion Specifications dropdown combo box.
    Diversion Specifications dropdown combo box - Diversion Data option
  6. The Diversion Data panel will be displayed. Note that the Diversion Data panel content changes based upon the diversion method selected in the General Specifications section.
    Diversion Data panel

The following sections describe the different diversion methods and how to enter the parameters for each method in the Diversion Data panel.

Diversion Method: None

When None is selected for the diversion method, the Diversion Data dropdown combo box entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Diversion Method: None data panel

If None is selected for the diversion method, the diversion will pass all flow down the main connection and no flow will be diverted.

Diversion Method: Constant Discharge

This method uses a constant diversion flowrate for the entire simulation. It is best suited to a particular event simulation when the diversion flow is more likely to be constant. If the diversion flowrate changes during the year according to a reliable pattern, the optional percentage pattern can be used to adjust the constant rate throughout the year.

When Constant Discharge is selected for the diversion method, the following data panel will be displayed:

Diversion Method: Constant Discharge data panel

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  • Constant discharge
    This entry field allows the user to define the discharge being diverted. If the total inflow into the diversion element is less than this specified discharge, the diversion flow rate will be limited to the total inflow.
  • Constant discharge annual pattern
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already defined annual pattern. The annual pattern provides a percentage that varies throughout the year. If no annual pattern is selected, then the software will use the same diversion flowrate for each time interval in the simulation. Clicking on the pencil icon allows the user to rename the percent pattern ID. Clicking on the […] browse button will display a Diversion Constant Discharge Annual Pattern Data dialog box, which allows the user to define a new user-defined annual pattern as a percentage.
    Diversion Constant Discharge Annual Pattern Data dialog boxNote that the user can define a percentage value ranging from 0 to 1000%.

Diversion Method: Inflow Diversion Table

This method uses a functional relationship between inflow and diverted flow to determine the amount of flow that should be diverted for each time step. The defined range of inflows should cover the complete range of total inflow from the upstream elements. Usually, the first defined inflow value is defined as zero. The last defined inflow value should be greater than the maximum anticipated inflow into the diversion element. Diversion flow is a dependent variable and must be specified for each corresponding inflow value.

When the Inflow Diversion Table is selected for the diversion method, the following data panel will be displayed:

Diversion Method: Inflow Diversion Table data panel

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  • Inflow
    This data column allows the user to define the discharge entering the diversion structure from upstream sources.
  • Diverted Flow
    This data column allows the user to define the corresponding discharge being diverted from the downstream routing reach.

Diversion Method: Lateral Weir

The only method currently available for computing flow over the lateral weir is the broad-crested spillway method. Flow depth in the channel is computed using a rating curve. It is assumed to be level with a uniform head along the length of the weir computed using the rating curve. Tailwater is similarly computed using a rating curve that represents the characteristics of the area where the weir discharges the diverted flow.

When Lateral Weir is selected for the diversion method, the following data panel will be displayed:

Diversion Method: Lateral Weir data panel

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  • Computational method
    This dropdown combo box entry allows the user to select the weir computational method to be used. Currently, only the Broad Crested Weir option is available.
  • Weir discharge coefficient
    This entry field allows the user to define the weir discharge coefficient to be used in the weir computations. Note that different coefficients may be selected, depending on the project data units: Metric (SI) or US Units. By default, the software uses a value of 2.6 for US Units. Clicking on the […] lookup button will display a Weir Discharge Coefficient dialog box.
    Weir Discharge Coefficient dialog box
  • Weir crest elevation
    This entry field allows the user to define the elevation of the weir crest. This value needs to be in the same vertical datum as the rating curves.
  • Weir crest length
    This entry field allows the user to define the length of the weir crest. It should be the total width over which water passes. Clicking on the […] browse button causes the dialog box to temporarily disappear and allows the user to measure the weir crest length from the Map View.

Rating Curve Definition

This section allows the user to define the rating curve data. Any defined rating curve should provide the stage for the entire range of inflows that will occur during a simulation. The defined curve must be monotonically increasing.

The following tabbed panels are provided:

Channel

This panel allows the user to define a channel rating curve. It represents the elevation versus discharge at the upstream side of the flow diversion.

The following entries are used for defining the rating curve:

  • Elevation
    This data column allows the user to specify the corresponding elevation for the defined rating curve.
  • Discharge
    This data column allows the user to specify the corresponding discharge for the defined rating curve.

Tailwater (Optional)

This optional panel allows the user to define a tailwater rating curve. The rating curve should define the tailwater stage in the area where the diverted flow is discharged. It is used to automatically account for the submergence of the weir. If there is no tailwater rating curve defined, then the software computes the flow over the weir assuming no tailwater influence.

Rating Curve Definition - Tailwater (Optional) panel

Note that the entries of the Tailwater (Optional) panel are similar to that of the Channel panel.

Diversion Method: Pump Station

A pump station diversion method is designed to represent one or more pump units extracting water from the main channel and discharging it into a diversion. The head-discharge curve describes the pumping capability of the pump as a function of the total head. The total head is the sum of the equipment loss and the dynamic head. The dynamic head is first estimated as the difference between the water surface elevation in the channel and the line elevation. If the water surface elevation is above the line elevation, then the estimated value will be zero. Secondarily, the estimate is adjusted for tailwater submergence. This second stage is only necessary if an optional tailwater rating curve is specified. When specified, the tailwater water surface elevation is compared to the line elevation. If the tailwater exceeds the line elevation, then the depth of submergence over the line elevation is added to the initial estimate of the dynamic head. The head-discharge curve is used to calculate the diverted flow given the calculated total head.

When Pump Station is selected for the diversion method, the following data panel will be displayed:

Diversion Method: Pump Station data panel

The following input parameters are provided in the data panel:

  • Head-discharge pump curve
    The head-discharge curve defines the pumping capacity of the pump as a function of the total head. The dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already defined pump curve. Clicking on the pencil icon allows the user to rename the elevation discharge ID. Clicking on the […] browse button will display a Head Discharge Pump Curve Data dialog box, which allows the user to define a new user-defined pump curve.
    Head Discharge Pump Curve Data dialog box
  • Number of pumps
    This entry field allows the user to define the number of identical pumps in operation at the diversion. It allows pump data to be defined only once when there are multiple pump units of the same type being used throughout the model.
  • Pump intake elevation
    This entry field allows the user to define the elevation for the pump intake.
  • Pump highest line elevation
    This entry field allows the user to define the highest elevation in the pump pressure line from the pump to the discharge point.
  • Pump ON elevation
    This entry field allows the user to define the trigger elevation for the pump to turn on. Once the pump turns on, it will remain on until the stage in the intake drops below this trigger elevation.
  • Pump OFF elevation
    This entry field allows the user to define the trigger elevation for the pump to turn off. Once the pump turns off, it will remain off until the stage in the intake exceeds the pump on elevation. This elevation must be below the pump on elevation.
  • Minimum pump ON time
    This optional entry field allows the user to define the minimum run time. If it is used, once a pump turns on, it must remain on for the specified minimum run time—even if the intake water surface elevation drops below the trigger elevation to turn the pump off. The only exception is if the water surface elevation drops below the intake elevation and the pump starves for water. In this situation, the pump will shut off.
  • Minimum pump OFF time
    This optional entry field allows the user to define the minimum rest time. If it is used, once a pump turns off, it must remain off for the specified minimum rest time—even if the intake water surface elevation exceeds the trigger elevation to turn the pump on.
  • Pump head loss
    This entry field allows the user to define the energy head loss of the pump and associated equipment. It includes all energy losses between the intake and discharge points. These losses are sometimes called static losses because they do not change very much even as the water surface elevation at the intake fluctuates. Components of this loss include entrance losses at the intake, losses in the pump, pipe friction losses, pipe bend losses, and exit losses at the discharge point. The defined loss is added to the dynamic head to determine the total head against which the pump must operate.

Note that the Rating Curve Definition section of the Pump Station diversion method is similar to that of the Rating Curve Definition section of the Lateral Weir diversion method.

Diversion Method: Time Series

The time series flow diversion method is designed for situations where the flow diverted from the channel is measured with a flow gage. This method allows the user to enter the time series of discharges that are diverted from the channel. If the specified diversion discharge exceeds the total inflow to the diversion, then the diversion will be limited to the inflow volume.

When Time Series is selected for the diversion method, the following data panel will be displayed:

Diversion Method: Time Series data panel

The following input parameter is provided in the data panel:

  • Time series diverted flow
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already defined time series. Clicking on the pencil icon allows the user to rename the diverted flow ID. Clicking on the […] browse button will display a Diverted Flow Time Series Data dialog box, which allows the user to define a new user-defined time series.
    Diverted Flow Time Series Data dialog box

Pros and Cons of Diversion Methods

unknown node
Hydrologic Elements › Diversions

Renumber Interconnected Diversions Command

The Renumber Interconnected Diversions command allows the user to automatically renumber diversion structures and connected routing reaches along a defined flow path.

Follow the steps below to use the Renumber Interconnected Diversions command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Diversions dropdown menu and then select the Renumber Interconnected Diversions command.Renumber Interconnected Diversions command
  2. The Renumber Interconnected Diversions dialog box will be displayed.Renumber Interconnected Diversions dialog box

The following sections describe the Renumber Interconnected Diversions command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Reaches

The Select Reaches panel is used to select all the reaches that define a flow path.

Selecting Multiple (Interconnected) Reaches

The Select Multiple (Interconnected) Reaches section is used to sequentially number reaches and diversions along the selected flow path that has reaches connected end-to-end with each other.

The user can click the [Pick] button and select the downstream most and upstream most reach on the Map View, and the software will automatically determine all connected diversions and reaches between them that make up the river path.

If a reach is already selected on the Map View prior to running this command, the same reach will be shown selected within the table.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to manually select the reaches from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the Renumber Interconnected Diversions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the reaches from the Map View. After selecting the reaches, the user can press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The Renumber Interconnected Diversions dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected reaches will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.

Selecting multiple (interconnected) reaches

Note that the user can select multiple reaches from the Map View prior to running the Renumber Interconnected Diversions command by holding the [Ctrl] key while selecting the desired reaches.

Manual Editing

This section contains a data grid that lists the IDs of the selected reaches and diversions. The data grid also lists the reach distance and total reach distance in miles and feet. The values in the last two columns of the data grid provide a preview of the reaches and diversions naming specifications defined in the Diversion Renumbering and Reach Renumbering panels.

Diversion Renumbering

This panel allows the user to number diversions based upon diversion stationing or incrementally.

Diversion Renumbering panel

Diversion Stationing

This section is used to define diversion stationing. Diversions can be numbered using a fixed increment or by the river chainage along the river reach. The river chainage can be in miles or feet if working in US units, or kilometers or meters if working in metric (SI) units.

The following options are provided in this data panel:

  • Diversion ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the start of the diversion ID.
  • Diversion ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the diversion ID.
  • Diversion ID preview: This entry provides a preview of the diversion naming specifications defined above.
  • Numbering direction: This dropdown combo box defines the direction in which the diversion IDs are increasing. The following options are available:
      1. Increasing Downstream
      2. Increasing Upstream (HEC-RAS style) (default)

Based on the option selected, the content of the Use reach distance radio button subsection will be changed.

Use Reach Distance

This subsection is used to number the diversion by using the river chainage along the river reach. The following entries are provided:

  • Downstream diversion ID: This entry provides a diversion ID that will be used as the downstream most river station. Note that if the Increasing Downstream option is selected in the Numbering direction dropdown combo box, then the Downstream diversion ID entry will change to Upstream diversion ID, as shown below. In addition, the numbering methodology will be altered to account for the selected direction.Diversion Stationing section
  • Upstream diversion ID: This entry provides a diversion ID that will be used as the upstream most river station.
  • Distance units: This dropdown combo box defines the unit for the reach length. Two available options are:
    1. Feet
    2. Miles
  • Decimal precision: This optional checkbox defines the decimal precision that will be used in determining the diversion river stations. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. If checked, then the user can enter a value ranging from 0 to 15.

Use Auto Increment

This subsection is used to number the diversion using a fixed increment. The following options are provided:

  • Diversion ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the diversion ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the diversion ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
  • Next available diversion ID: This entry defines the next element ID number to be used.
  • Diversion ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering elements. The default value is 1.

Previewing Diversion ID

Clicking on the [Preview] button causes the software to fill the diversion IDs in the New Diversion ID column of the Manual Editing data grid.

Previewing Diversion ID

Reach Renumbering

This panel allows the user to number the reaches based upon river chainage or incrementally. By default, the Reach Renumbering checkbox panel is checked. If the panel checkbox is unchecked, then the content of this panel will be disabled and the reach will not be renumbered.

Reach Renumbering panel

Reach Stationing

This section is used to define the river stationing to be used for the constructed reaches.

The following options are provided in the data panel:

  • Reach ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the start of the reach ID.
  • Reach ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the reach ID.
  • Reach ID preview: This entry provides a preview of the reach naming specifications defined above.
  • Numbering direction: This dropdown combo box defines the direction in which the reach IDs are increasing. The following options are available
    1. Increasing Downstream
    2. Increasing Upstream (HEC-RAS style) (default)

Based on the option selected, the content of the Use reach distance radio button subsection will be changed.

Use Reach Distance

This subsection is used to number the reach by using the river chainage along the river reach. The following entries are provided:

  • Downstream reach ID: This entry provides a reach ID that will be used as the downstream most river station. Note that if the Increasing Downstream option is selected in the Numbering direction dropdown combo box, then the Downstream reach ID entry will change to Upstream diversion ID. In addition, the numbering methodology will be altered to account for the selected direction.
  • Upstream reach ID: This entry provides a reach ID that will be used as the upstream most river station.
  • Distance units: This dropdown combo box defines the unit for the reach length. Two available options are:
    1. Feet
    2. Miles
  • Decimal precision: This optional checkbox defines the decimal precision that will be used in determining the river stations. By default, this checkbox is unchecked. If checked, then the user can enter a value ranging from 0 to 15.

Use Auto Increment

The Use auto increment subsection is used to number the reach using a fixed increment. The following options are provided:

  • Reach ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to be used for reach ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the reach ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
  • Next available reach ID: This entry defines the next element ID number to be used.
  • Reach ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering elements. The default value is 1.

Previewing Reach ID

Clicking on the [Preview] button causes the software to fill the reach IDs in the New Reach ID column of the Manual Editing data grid.

Previewing Reach ID

Renumbering Diversions and Reaches

When the data have been defined in the Renumber Interconnected Diversions dialog box, click the [Apply] button. The software will then renumber the IDs of the diversions and reaches along a defined flow path.

Hydrologic Elements › Diversions

Georeferencing Diversions

A diversion is an element with two outflows (main and diverted) and one or more inflows. Inflow comes from other elements in the basin model. If there is more than one inflow, all inflows are added together before computing the outflows. A diversion can be used to represent weirs or pump stations that divert flow into canals or off-stream storage.

In GeoHECHMS, if a diversion is not located at the correct location on the river reach, the Georeference Diversions command can be used to automatically map a diversion to a desired location.

The Georeference Diversions command provides the following options to map a diversion to the desired location:

  • Snap to Alignment Point
  • Draw on Map View

Follow the steps below to use the Georeference Diversions command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, expand the Diversions menu item and select the Georeference Diversions command.
    Select the Georeference Diversions command
  2. The Georeference Diversions dialog box will be displayed.
    Georeference Diversions dialog box

The following sections describe how to georeference a diversion to a desired location and to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Diversion to Georeference

The Select Diversion to Georeference section allows the user to select the diversion that is to be georeferenced. The user can select the diversion from the Diversion ID dropdown combo box that lists all the diversions contained within the model. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the diversion from the Map View.

Select Diversion to Georeference

After clicking the [Pick] button, the Georeference Diversions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next. The user can then interactively select a diversion from the Map View.

Note that the user can select only one diversion at a time to georeference.

Upon selecting a diversion, the dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Diversion ID dropdown combo box updates automatically to match the selected diversion.

The user can click the [Clear] button to unselect the diversion.

Snapping Diversion to an Alignment Point

If an existing alignment point for the diversion exists on the Map View, the Snap to Alignment Point option can be used to snap the HEC-HMS diversion to the alignment point.

Snap to Alignment Point

The user can click the [Pick] button to select the alignment point from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the Georeference Diversions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next. The user can then interactively select the alignment point from the Map View.

Upon selecting the point, the dialog box will be redisplayed, and the status of Select alignment point read-only field changes to Selected. Note that the user can select only one alignment point to use for georeferencing.

The user can click on the [Clear] button to deselect the alignment point.

Once the diversion alignment point is selected, click the [Snap] button, and the software will snap the selected diversion to the selected alignment point.

Drawing Diversion Node on Map View

The Draw on Map View radio button option allows the user to draw a diversion node on the Map View to which the selected diversion is to be georeferenced. Selecting the Draw on Map View radio button option enables the [Draw] button.

Draw on Map View radio button option

On clicking the [Draw] button, the Georeference Diversions dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user on what to do next. The user can then draw the diversion node on the Map View.

Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the selected diversion will be georeferenced to the drawn node.

Assigning Diversion Elevation

The Assign Diversion Elevation section uses the elevation data to assign an invert elevation to the georeferenced diversions. The user should define the data for this section before georeferencing diversions. Alternatively, the user can use the Assign Diversion Elevations command to assign invert elevations to the already drawn diversions. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Assign Diversion Elevations command.

Assign Diversion Elevation section

For assigning elevation data, the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation grid
  • LandXML data
  • TIN surfaces

The following surface types are unsupported:

  • CAD drawings
  • GIS contours

The user can also apply an elevation offset to raise or lower the selected diversions by the specified amount by checking the Apply elevation offset checkbox option. On selecting this checkbox, the user can enter the offset value in the entry field next to Apply elevation offset checkbox option.

Hydrologic Elements › Diversions

Draw and Assign Diversions Command

A diversion is an element with two outflows, main and diverted, and one or more inflows. Inflow comes from other elements in the basin model. If there is more than one inflow, all inflows are added together before computing the outflows. A diversion can be used to represent weirs or pump stations that divert flow into canals or off-stream storage. The diversion element includes optional properties for limiting the amount of diverted flow.

In GeoHECHMS, diversions can be defined by either drawing or assigning nodes on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw Diversions
  • Assign Diversions

Drawing/Assigning Diversions

The Draw/Assign Diversions command is used to manually draw/assign multiple diversion nodes on the Map View, one after another, until completed.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw/Assign Diversions command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Diversions dropdown menu and then choose the Draw/Assign Diversions command.Draw/Assign Diversions command
  2. The following dialog box(s) will be displayed.
    • Draw Diversions:
      Draw Diversions
    • Assign Diversions:
      Assign Diversions

The following sections describe how to use the Draw and Assign Diversions commands and interact with the above dialog boxes.

Drawing Diversions

Drawing Diversion Nodes

The Draw Diversion Nodes section is used to draw diversions on the Map View using nodes. To draw diversion nodes, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Draw Diversion Nodes section, click the [Draw] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.Drawing Diversion Nodes
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt you to place a diversion on the Map View. Click on the Map View to place the diversion.Drawing Diversion Nodes on Map View
  3. Following placement of a diversion, the Draw Diversions dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Diversion nodes read-only field will change from Not Drawn to Drawn.Diversion nodes read-only field
    Notes:
    • To position the diversions more accurately, use the mouse roller wheel to zoom into a specific location.
    • The Snap Mode option can be enabled to cause the drawn diversion to snap to the nearest HEC-HMS element.

Assigning Diversions

Selecting Diversion Nodes

The Select Diversion Nodes section can be used to manually assign multiple nodes on the Map View as diversions. To assign diversion nodes, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Select Diversion Nodes section, click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.Selecting Diversion Nodes
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt you to select a diversion node from the Map View. Click on the previously drawn diversion node on the Map View to select it.Selecting Diversion Nodes on Map View
  3. Following the selection of a diversion node, the Assign Diversions dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Diversion nodes read-only field will change from Not Selected to 1 Selected.Diversion nodes read-only field

Diversion Specifications

This section is common to both the Draw Diversions and Assign Diversions dialog boxes and is used to specify the diversion ID for each drawn/assigned diversion. The user can assign these IDs either manually or automatically using some predefined formats.

Follow the steps below to assign diversion IDs to the diversions:

  1. If a diversion was drawn/assigned while the Diversion ID radio button option was selected, the user can manually enter the diversion ID in the corresponding field as shown below.Diversion Specifications
  2. Alternatively, the user can enable the Auto-name diversion ID radio button option to automatically name every newly drawn/assigned diversion as per the user’s predefined naming formats as shown below.Auto-name diversion ID radio button option
    The different naming formats present in the Auto-name diversion ID option are as follows:
    • Diversion ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the start of the diversion ID.
    • Diversion ID digits: This option permits specification of a set number of digits to use for the diversion ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the diversion ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
    • Next available diversion ID: This entry defines the next element ID number to be used.
    • Diversion ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering elements. The default value is 1.
    • Diversion ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the diversion ID.
    • Diversion ID preview: This entry provides a preview of the diversion naming specification defined above.
  3. After providing the Diversion ID, press the [Enter] key or click the [Apply] button.Apply button

Note that if the auto-name option is enabled and the user returns to the dialog box, the [Apply] button will be disabled since the just drawn/assigned diversions have already been named and created.

Assign Invert Elevation

This section is common to both the Draw Diversions and Assign Diversions dialog boxes and allows the user to assign an invert elevation to the diversion using a terrain model. Define this section before drawing diversions so that invert elevations can be assigned.

To assign an invert elevation, the Terrain elevation source dropdown combo box supports the following surface types:

  • Elevation grids
  • LandXML data
  • TIN surfaces

The user can also apply an elevation offset to raise or lower the diversion by the specified amount by checking the Apply elevation offset checkbox. On selecting this checkbox, the entry field next to it becomes available for entering an elevation offset value. A negative offset value will lower the diversion by the specified amount.

Hydrologic Elements › Reservoirs / Storage Areas

Storage Area Data Command (HEC-HMS)

Storage areas define the elements (i.e., reservoirs, lakes, detention ponds, storage nodes, etc.) where there are one or more inflows and only one computed outflow. Inflow comes from other elements in the model, such as drainage basins, routing reaches, or diversions. If there is more than one inflow, all inflow is added together before computing the outflow. It is assumed that the water surface in the storage area pool is level.

In GeoHECHMS, the Storage Area Data command allows the user to define different computational methods and options for each storage area of the model.

Follow the steps below to define the storage area data using the Storage Area Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Storage Area Data command.
    Select the Storage Area Data command
    Alternatively, select the Storage Area Data command under the Storage Areas dropdown menu.
    Alternatively, select the Storage Area Data command
  2. The Storage Area Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Storage Area Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to define the storage area data and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Storage Area

The Select Storage Area section allows the user to select a storage area for defining the storage area data.

Select Storage Area section allows

This section contains the following entries:

  • Storage area ID
    This dropdown entry displays the ID of the selected storage area, which is also editable. The up and down arrow buttons allow the user to navigate between the next or previous storage area. The […] button allows the user to select a storage area from the Map View.
  • Reference flow
    This optional entry field allows the user to assign a reference flow to the selected storage area.
  • Reference label
    This optional entry field allows the user to assign a reference label to the selected storage area.
  • New
    The [New] button allows the user to draw a new storage area on the Map View.
  • Copy
    The [Copy] button allows the user to create a copy of the current storage area on the Map View.
  • Delete
    The [Delete] button allows the user to delete the current storage area.
  • Description
    This optional entry field allows the user to include information on the current storage area.
  • Less/More
    The [< Less] and [More >] buttons at the Select Storage Area section header allow the user to hide and display the right side of the dialog box containing the Computed Results plot. This allows the dialog box to be smaller when the user does not want to see the plot view.

Once the user selects the required storage area, the following panels from the Storage Area Specifications dropdown entry can be used to view and edit the associated storage area data.

Storage Area Specifications

This section contains a dropdown combo box with the following data panel entries, each of which allows the user to define relevant storage area data:

  • General Specifications
  • Additional Release
  • Culverts
  • Dam Breach
  • Dam Crest Geometry
  • Evaporation
  • Orifices
  • Outflow Routing
  • Pump Stations
  • Seepage
  • Spillways
Storage Area Specifications

General Specifications

This data panel allows the user to define the general properties of the current storage area.

General Specifications Data Panel

The General Specifications section of this data panel contains the following options:

  • Downstream connection
    This optional entry field defines the downstream connection element that the selected storage area drains to such as Diversion, Junction, Reach, Storage Area, and Sink. Clicking the […] pick button allows the user to select the downstream connection element from the Map View.
  • Routing method
    The routing methods under this dropdown combo box are used to compute the flow through the storage area. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries:
    1. None
    2. Outflow Curve (default)
    3. Outflow Structures
    4. Specified Release
  • Storage method
    The storage methods under this dropdown combo box are used to define the storage area relationship. The routing through a reservoir, lake, detention pond, or storage node assumes that the water surface in the storage area is level. This dropdown combo box provides the following storage methods based upon the selected routing method:
    unknown node
  • Elevation-Area curve
    This dropdown combo box is only available if Elevation-Area-Discharge or Elevation-Area is selected as the storage method. This dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already-defined elevation area curve. Clicking the adjacent […] button displays a User-Defined Elevation Area Curves Data paired data dialog box that allows the user to define a new user-defined elevation area curve.
    User-Defined Elevation Area Curves Data
  • Elevation-Discharge curve
    This dropdown combo box is only available if Elevation-Area-Discharge is selected as the storage method. This dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already-defined elevation discharge curve. Clicking the adjacent […] button displays an Elevation Discharge Curve Data paired data dialog box that allows the user to define a new user-defined elevation discharge curve.
    Elevation Discharge Curve Data paired data dialog
  • Storage-Discharge curve
    This dropdown combo box is only available if Elevation-Storage-Discharge or Storage-Discharge is selected as the storage method. This dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already-defined storage discharge curve. Clicking the adjacent […] button displays a User-Defined Storage Discharge Curves Data paired data dialog box that allows the user to define a new user-defined storage discharge curve.
    User-Defined Storage Discharge Curves Data paired data dialog box
  • Primary data curve
    This dropdown combo box entry defines which user-defined paired data curve should be considered the primary table for interpolating values. This dropdown combo box is only visible if Elevation-Area-Discharge or Elevation-Storage-Discharge is selected as the storage method. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries based upon the selected storage method:
    unknown node
  • Initial condition
    This dropdown combo box entry sets the amount of stored water in the storage area at the start of the simulation. Various routing methods are provided for computing the flow through the storage area. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries based upon the selected routing and storage method:
    unknown node
  • Initial water surface elevation
    This entry defines the initial water surface elevation contained within the storage area. This entry is only available when the Initial Condition entry has been set to the Water Surface Elevation.
  • Initial discharge
    This entry defines the initial discharge being released from the storage area. This entry is only available when the Initial Condition entry has been set to the Discharge.
  • Initial storage
    This entry defines the initial storage contained within the storage area. This entry is only available when the Initial Condition entry has been set to Storage.
  • Discharge time series gage
    This dropdown combo box is only available when the Routing Method entry has been set to Specified Release. This dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already defined discharge gage. Clicking the adjacent […] button will display a Discharge Gage Data time series data dialog box that allows the user to define a new user-defined discharge gage.
    Discharge Gage Data time series data dialog box
  • Maximum discharge warning
    This entry is only available when the Routing Method entry has been set to Specified Release. This optional entry specifies whether a warning message should be displayed when the computed storage area discharge exceeds the specified maximum discharge value. If the computed discharge exceeds this value during a simulation, then a warning message will be displayed. However, this entry will not affect the discharge released from the storage area.
  • Maximum capacity warning
    This entry is only available when the Routing Method entry has been set to Specified Release. This optional entry specifies whether a warning message should be displayed when the computed storage exceeds the specified maximum capacity value. If the computed storage exceeds this value during a simulation, then a warning message will be displayed. However, this entry will not affect the computed storage contained in the storage area.

Computational and Detailed Results

The Computational Results and Detailed Results sections contain the following storage area results obtained after running the project’s analysis:

  • Maximum and minimum inflow
  • Maximum and minimum outflow
  • Maximum and minimum storage
  • Maximum and minimum pool elevation, etc

DSS Data

This section includes an external DSS (Digital Storage System) file for referencing the HEC-HMS computational results. The DSS file name field displays the external DSS file to be used for reading the data. The Data path field displays the data path within the DSS file for the data to be read from.

Additional Release

This data panel is enabled when Outflow Structures is selected as the routing method. Otherwise, this data panel entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Additional Release

In most situations, a dam can be properly configured using the provided outlet structures, such as spillways, outlets, etc. The total outflow from the storage area can be calculated automatically using the physical properties defined for each of the included structures. However, some storage areas may have an additional release beyond what is represented by the defined structures.

In some cases, this additional release is a schedule of managed releases achieved by operating the spillway gates. The additional release can be used in combination with other outlet structures to determine the total release from the storage area.

This data panel contains the following section:

Additional Release Specifications

This section contains the following options:

  • Additional release method
    This dropdown combo box entry defines how the additional release is computed at the storage area. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries:
    1. None (default)
    2. Gage Release
  • Release time series gage
    This dropdown combo box is enabled if the Gage Release is selected as the additional release method. This dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already defined discharge gage. Clicking the […] button displays an Additional Release Gage Data time series data dialog box that allows the user to define a new user-defined discharge gage.
    Additional Release Gage Data time series data dialog box

Culverts

This data panel is enabled when Outflow Structures is selected as the routing method. Otherwise, this data panel entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Culverts data panel

Refer to this article to learn more about the Culverts data panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box.

Dam Breach

This data panel is enabled when Outflow Structures is selected as the routing method. Otherwise, this data panel entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Dam Breach data panel

Refer to this article to learn more about the Dam Breach data panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box.

Dam Crest Geometry

This data panel will be enabled when Outflow Structures is selected as the routing method. Otherwise, this data panel entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Dam Crest Geometry data panel

Refer to this article to learn more about the Dam Crest Geometry data panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box.

Evaporation

This data panel will only be enabled when the following conditions are met:

  • Outflow Structures is selected as the routing method.
  • Elevation-Area is selected as the storage method.
    Evaporation data panel

Water losses due to evaporation may be an important part of the water balance for a storage area, especially in dry or desert conditions. The evaporation losses are different from other structures because they do not contribute to either main or auxiliary outflows downstream. The evaporation losses are computed separately and are available for review with the other time-series results for the storage area. An evaporation depth is computed for each time interval and then multiplied by the current surface area. In the Monthly Constant Specifications data table, the monthly Constant Evaporation value is used to represent the water loss, entered as a total depth for the month.

Orifices

This data panel will be enabled when Outflow Structures is selected as the routing method. Otherwise, this data panel entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Orifices

This data panel contains the following sections:

Orifice Definition

The data table under this section contains the following parameters:

  • Number Orifices
    This spin control field defines the number of identical orifice barrels that are defined.
  • Flow Direction
    This dropdown combo box entry defines where the orifice flow is being routed. The following dropdown entries are available:
    1. Main (default)
    2. Auxiliary
  • Barrel Center Elevation
    This entry defines the center of the cross-sectional flow area. This should be measured in the same vertical datum as the paired data functions defining the storage characteristics of the reservoir. It is used to compute the pressure head on the outlet, so no flow will be released until the storage area pool elevation is above this specified elevation.
  • Orifice Cross Sectional Area
    This entry defines the cross-sectional flow area of the orifice. The orifice assumptions are independent of the orifice shape.
  • Orifice Discharge Coefficient
    This entry defines the dimensionless discharge coefficient of the orifice. This coefficient describes the energy loss as water exits the storage area through the outlet. Clicking the […] button displays the Orifices Coefficients lookup dialog box.
    Orifices Coefficients lookup dialog box.

Outflow Routing

This data panel will be enabled when Outflow Structures is selected as the routing method. Otherwise, this data panel entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Outflow routing data panel

Refer to this article to learn more about the Outflow Routing data panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box.

Pump Stations

This data panel will be enabled when Outflow Structures is selected as the routing method. Otherwise, this data panel entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Pumping from a storage area is meant to represent low-head, high-flow situations. The pump should be designed for high flow rates against a relatively small head. The pump can be controlled to turn on and off as the storage area pool elevation changes.

Pump Stations

This data panel contains the following sections:

Available Pump Stations

The Pump Flow Direction dropdown combo box of the data table allows the user to define where the pump flow is being routed. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries:

  • None (default)
  • Main
  • Auxiliary

The Number of Pumps spin control defines the number of identical pumps in operation at the diversion. This allows pump data to be defined only once when there are multiple pump units of the same type being used throughout the model.

Pump Specifications

This section contains the following options:

  • Head-discharge pump curve
    The head-discharge curve defines the pumping capacity of the pump as a function of the total head. This dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already-defined pump curve. Clicking the […] button displays the Head-Discharge Pump Curve Data paired data dialog box that allows the user to define a new user-defined pump curve.
    Head-Discharge Pump Curve Data paired data dialog box
  • Pump intake elevation
    This entry defines the elevation for the pump intake.
  • Pump highest line elevation
    This entry defines the highest elevation in the pump pressure line from the pump to the discharge point.
  • Pump ON elevation
    This entry defines the trigger elevation for the pump to turn on. Once the pump turns on, it will remain on until the stage in the intake drops below this trigger elevation.
  • Pump OFF elevation
    This entry defines the trigger elevation for the pump to turn off. Once the pump turns off, it will remain off until the stage in the intake exceeds the “pump on” elevation. This elevation must be below the “pump on” elevation.
  • Minimum pump ON time
    This optional entry, if used, defines that once a pump turns on, it must remain on for the specified minimum run time—even if the intake water surface elevation drops below the trigger elevation to turn the pump off. The only exception is if the water surface elevation drops below the intake elevation and the pump starves for water. In this situation, the pump will shut off.
  • Minimum pump OFF time
    This optional entry, if used, directs that once a pump turns off, it must remain off for the specified minimum rest time—even if the intake water surface elevation exceeds the trigger elevation to turn the pump on.
  • Pump head loss
    This entry defines the energy head loss of the pump and associated equipment. This includes all energy losses between the intake and discharge points. These losses are sometimes called static losses because they do not change very much even as the water surface elevation at the intake fluctuates. Components of this loss include the following:
    1. Entrance losses at the intake
    2. Losses in the pump
    3. Pipe friction losses
    4. Pipe bend losses
    5. Exit losses at the discharge

Seepage

This data panel will be enabled when Outflow Structures is selected as the routing method. Otherwise, this data panel entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Seepage data panel

Most dams have some water seeping through the face of the dam. The amount of seepage depends on the elevation of water in the dam, the elevation of water in the tailwater, the dam's integrity, and other factors. In some situations, seepage from the pool through the dam and into the downstream routing reach can be a significant source of discharge that must be considered in the model (i.e., sink). In other conditions, water might seep into the storage area from external groundwater infiltration (i.e., source).

There can only be one dam seepage condition at a storage area, and it must represent the sum of all sources and sinks of seepage. When water seeps out of the storage area, the seepage is automatically taken from the storage and added to the main tailwater discharge location. This is the mode of seepage when the pool elevation is greater than the tailwater elevation. Seepage into the storage area happens when the tailwater elevation is higher than the pool elevation. In this mode, the appropriate amount of seepage is added to storage, but it is not subtracted from the tailwater.

Water losses due to evaporation may be an important part of the water balance for a storage area, especially in dry or desert conditions. The evaporation losses are different from other structures because they do not contribute to either main or auxiliary outflow downstream. The evaporation losses are accounted for separately and available for review with the other time-series results for the storage area. An evaporation depth is computed for each time interval and then multiplied by the current surface area.

This data panel contains the following sections:

Seepage Specifications

This section contains the following options:

  • Seepage method
    This dropdown combo box entry defines how seepage is computed at the storage area. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries:
    1. None (default)
    2. Tabular Seepage
  • Inflow direction seepage
    This dropdown combo box will be enabled if Tabular Seepage is selected as the seepage method. This entry represents the elevation discharge rating curve to be used for modeling seepage into the storage area. No seepage out of the storage area will be represented by this entry. If desired, the same elevation discharge rating curve can be used to represent the inflow seepage and outflow seepage. Clicking the […] button displays an Inflow Direction Seepage Data paired data dialog box that allows the user to define a new elevation discharge curve.
    Inflow Direction Seepage Data
  • Outflow direction seepage
    This dropdown combo box will be enabled if Tabular Seepage is selected as the seepage method. This entry represents the elevation discharge rating curve to be used for modeling seepage out of the storage area. No seepage into the storage area will be represented by this entry. If desired, the same elevation discharge rating curve can be used to represent the inflow seepage and outflow seepage. Clicking the […] button displays an Outflow Direction Seepage Data paired data dialog box that allows the user to define a new elevation discharge curve.
    Outflow Direction Seepage Data paired data dialog box

Spillways

This data panel will be enabled when Outflow Structures is selected as the routing method. Otherwise, this data panel entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Spillways data panel

Refer to this article to learn more about the Spillways data panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box.

Hydrologic Elements › Reservoirs / Storage Areas

Defining Spillways for HEC-HMS Storage Areas

The Spillways data panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box will be enabled when Outflow Structures is selected as the routing method. Otherwise, this data panel entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Spillways typically represent structures at the top of the dam that allow water to go over the dam in a controlled manner.

Spillways panel in the Storage Area Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the Spillways data panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box.

Spillway Specifications

A maximum of 10 spillways can be defined under the Spillway Specifications data table. The Spillway Type dropdown entry defines how the dam crest geometry is to be defined. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries:

  • None (default)
  • Broad Crested
  • Ogee
  • User-Defined

The Flow Direction dropdown combo box entry defines where the spillway flow is being routed. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries:

  • Main (default)
  • Auxiliary

Broad Crested Spillway Specifications

This section will only be enabled when the Spillway Type entry of the Spillway Specifications data table is selected as Broad Crested.

Broad Crested Spillway Specifications

This section contains the following options:

  • Crest elevation
    This entry defines the crest elevation of the spillway.
  • Spillway width
    This entry defines the width of the spillway. Clicking the [Pick] button will cause the dialog box to temporarily disappear and allow the user to measure the width of the spillway from the Map View.
  • Discharge coefficient
    This entry defines the broad crested discharge coefficient used in spillway computations. Clicking the […] button displays the Weir Coefficients lookup dialog box that contains broad crest weir coefficients.

    Weir Coefficients

Ogee Spillway Specifications

This section will only be enabled when the Spillway Type entry of the Spillway Specifications data table is selected as Ogee. The ogee spillway allows for controlled flow over the top of the storage area according to the weir flow assumptions. However, the discharge coefficient in the weir flow equation is automatically adjusted when the upstream energy head is above or below the design head.

Ogee Spillway Specifications

This section contains the following options:

  • Crest elevation
    This entry defines the crest elevation of the spillway.
  • Spillway width
    This entry defines the width of the spillway. Clicking the [Pick] button will cause the dialog box to temporarily disappear and allow the user to measure the width of the spillway from the Map View.
  • Number of Abutments
    This integer spin control defines the number of spillway abutments that exist. This spin-control offers a range from 0, 1, and 2.
  • Abutment material
    This dropdown combo box entry defines the material that the spillway abutments are constructed of. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries:
    1. Concrete (default)
    2. Earthen
  • Approach depth
    This entry defines the approach depth of the spillway. If there is no approach channel, the depth should be the difference between the spillway crest and the bottom of the storage area.
  • Approach loss
    This entry defines the approach loss of the spillway. This represents the energy loss that occurs between the main storage area and the spillway. If there is no approach channel, the approach loss should be zero.
  • Apron elevation
    This entry defines the elevation of the spillway apron.
  • Apron length
    This entry defines the length of the spillway apron. Clicking the [Pick] button will cause the dialog box to temporarily disappear and allow the user to measure the length of the spillway apron from the Map View.
  • Design head
    This entry defines the design head of the Ogee spillway.

User-Defined Rating Curve Specifications

This section will only be enabled when the Spillway Type entry of the Spillway Specifications data table is selected as User-Defined.

User-Defined Rating Curve Specifications

The user-defined spillway rating curve option can be used to represent spillways with flow characteristics that cannot be represented by the broad crested or ogee weir assumptions. This allows the user to define an elevation versus discharge curve that represents the spillway discharge as a function of storage area pool elevation. Currently, there is no ability to include submergence effects on the spillway discharge. Therefore, this option should only be used for storage areas where the downstream tailwater stage cannot affect the discharge over the spillway.

The Spillway rating curve dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already defined spillway rating curve. Clicking the […] button displays the Spillway Rating Curve Data paired data dialog box that allows the user to define a new elevation discharge rating curve.

Spillway Rating Curve Data

Gate Specifications

In the Gate Specifications data table, up to ten separate gates can be used per spillway.

Gate Specifications

The data table under this section contains the following parameters:

  • Gate Type
    This dropdown combo box entry defines how the gate type is being defined. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries:
    1. None (default)
    2. Sluice
    3. Radial
  • Gate Width
    This entry defines the width of the gate.
  • Number of Gates
    This integer spin control sets the number of identical gates that are defined. This spin-control ranges from 1 to 10.

Sluice Gate Specifications

This section will only be enabled when the Gate Type entry of the Gate Specifications data table is selected as Sluice.

Sluice Gate Specifications

This section contains the following options:

  • Discharge coefficient
    This entry defines the sluice gate discharge coefficient used in spillway computations. Clicking the […] button displays the Gate Coefficients dialog box that displays assistance for the gate coefficients.

    Discharge coefficient
  • Submerged orifice coefficient
    This entry defines the submerged orifice discharge coefficient used in the spillway computations. Clicking the […] button displays the Orifice Discharge Coefficients lookup dialog box containing orifice discharge coefficients.

    Orifice discharge coefficients
  • Gate opening height
    This entry defines the fixed height of the gate opening.

Radial Gate Specifications

This section will only be enabled when the Gate Type entry of the Gate Specifications data table is selected as Radial.

Radial Gate Specifications

This section contains the following options:

  • Radial discharge coefficient
    This entry defines the radial gate discharge coefficient used in spillway computations. Clicking the […] button displays the Gate Coefficients dialog box that displays assistance for the gate coefficients.

    Radial discharge coefficient
  • Trunnion exponent
    This entry defines the radial gate trunnion exponent used in spillway computations.
  • Opening exponent
    This entry defines the radial gate opening exponent used in spillway computations.
  • Head exponent
    This entry defines the radial gate head exponent used in spillway computations.
  • Trunnion height
    This entry defines the trunnion height of the gate opening.
  • Submerged orifice coefficient
    This entry defines the submerged orifice discharge coefficient used in spillway computations. Clicking the […] button displays the Orifice Discharge Coefficients lookup dialog box containing orifice discharge coefficients.

    Orifice discharge coefficients
  • Gate opening height
    This entry defines the fixed height of the gate opening.
Hydrologic Elements › Reservoirs / Storage Areas

Defining Dam Crest Geometry for HEC-HMS Storage Areas

The Dam Crest Geometry data panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box will be enabled when Outflow Structures is selected as the routing method. Otherwise, this data panel entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out). The dam crest geometry is used to model the discharge flowing over the top of the dam.

Dam Crest Geometry data panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the Dam Crest Geometry data panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box.

Dam Crest Geometry

The data table under this section contains the following parameters:

  • Dam Crest Type
    This dropdown combo box entry defines how the dam crest geometry is to be defined. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries:
    1. None (default)
    2. Level
    3. Non-Level
  • Overflow Direction
    This dropdown combo box entry defines where the overflow is being routed. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries:
    1. Main (default)
    2. Auxiliary
  • Weir Overflow Discharge Coef
    This entry defines the weir overflow discharge coefficient for flow going over the top of the dam. Clicking the adjacent […] button displays the Weir Discharge Coefficient lookup dialog box.

    Weir Discharge Coefficient lookup dialog box

Level Dam Crest

This section will only be enabled if the selected row in the Dam Crest Geometry data table has the Level option selected for the Dam Crest Type entry. Otherwise, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Level Dam Crest

This section contains the following options:

  • Dam crest elevation
    This entry defines the crest elevation of a level dam.
  • Dam crest length
    This entry defines the length of the level dam crest. Clicking the adjacent [Pick] button will cause the dialog box to temporarily disappear and allow the user to measure the length of the dam crest from the Map View.

Non-Level Dam Crest

This section will only be enabled if the selected row in the Dam Crest Geometry data table has the Non-Level option selected for the Dam Crest Type entry. Otherwise, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out). This section allows the user to define 8-Point or Original dam crest geometry. Note that the software allows the user to cut the cross sections from the underlying terrain model and then simplify the cross section for the 8-point crest geometry used.

Non-Level Dam Crest
Hydrologic Elements › Reservoirs / Storage Areas

Defining Dam Breach for HEC-HMS Storage Areas

The Dam Breach data panel Storage Area Data dialog box is enabled when Outflow Structures is selected as the routing method. Otherwise, this data panel entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Dam Breach data panel Storage Area Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the Dam Breach data panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box.

Breach Control

The Breach structure checkbox option allows the user to toggle on and off the breaching of the structure. The checkbox is checked by default.

Breach Dimensions

This section contains the following options:

Breach Dimensions
  • Dam top elevation
    This entry defines the top elevation of the dam face. The dam failure may be initiated at a lower elevation than the top elevation, depending upon the dam breach type (i.e., overtopping or piping failure). This information is used to constrain the top of the breach opening as it grows.
  • Breach final bottom elevation
    This entry defines the bottom elevation of the breach trapezoidal opening in the dam face when the breach is fully developed.
  • Breach final bottom width
    This entry defines the bottom width of the breach trapezoidal opening in the dam face when the breach is fully developed.
  • Breach left side slope (V:H)
    This entry defines the left-side slope of the breach trapezoidal opening in the dam face when the breach is fully developed.
  • Breach right side slope (V:H)
    This entry defines the right-side slope of the breach trapezoidal opening in the dam face when the breach is fully developed.
  • Breach formation time
    This entry defines the total time required for the breach opening to fully develop after it has been initiated.

Breach Failure Details

This section contains the following options:

Breach Failure Details
  • Breach flow direction
    This dropdown combo box entry defines where the dam failure flow is being routed. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries:
    1. Main (default)
    2. Auxiliary
  • Breach failure type
    This dropdown combo box entry defines the mode of dam failure to be computed. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries:
    1. Overtopping (default)
    2. Piping
  • Piping coefficient
    This entry defines the orifice coefficient used in the piping failure computations. This coefficient represents the energy losses as water moves through the opening. This entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the Breach failure type has been set to Overtopping. Clicking the […] button displays an Orifice Piping Coefficients lookup dialog box.

    Orifice Piping Coefficients lookup dialog box
  • Initial piping elevation
    This entry defines the elevation at which the piping orifice flow initiates the failure computations. This entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the Breach failure type has been set to Overtopping.
  • Breach trigger
    This dropdown combo box entry defines the mode in which the dam failure is initiated. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries:
    1. Exceeds WS Elevation (default)
    2. Exceeds WS Elev & Time
    3. Date & Time

Based upon the selected entry, the additional sections are shown to the user for purposes of defining the dam breach data.

Triggered by Exceeding WS Elevation

This section will be enabled when the Exceeds WS Elev is selected as the breach trigger. The Breach trigger elevation entry defines the water surface elevation at which the dam failure is initiated.

Triggered by Exceeding WS Elevation

Triggered by Exceeding WS Elevation & Time Duration

This section will be enabled when the Exceeds WS Elev & Time is selected as the breach trigger.

Triggered by Exceeding WS Elevation & Time Duration

This section contains the following options:

  • Breach threshold elevation
    This entry defines the water surface elevation that the storage area pool has remained at or exceeded for the specified Duration above threshold time for the breach to initiate.
  • Duration above threshold
    This entry defines the total continuous time required above the specified Breach threshold elevation prior to initiating breach.

Triggered at Date & Time

This section will be enabled when the Date & Time is selected as the breach trigger.

Triggered at Date & Time

This section contains the following options:

  • Start date
    This entry defines the date on which the dam failure is initiated.
  • Start time
    This entry defines the time at which the dam failure is initiated.

Breach Progression

This section is used to define the progression of the dam breach.

Breach Progression

GeoHECRAS provides the following breach progression methods:

  • Linear
  • Sine Wave
  • User-Defined (in the form of Time Fraction and Breach Fraction pair data table)
Hydrologic Elements › Reservoirs / Storage Areas

Defining Culverts for HEC-HMS Storage Areas

The Culverts data panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box is enabled when Outflow Structures is selected as the routing method. Otherwise, this data panel entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Culverts data panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the Culverts data panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box.

Culvert Definition

In the Culvert Definition data table, the user can choose from different types of culvert shapes such as:

  • Box
  • Circular (default)
  • Semi-Circular
  • Ellipse
  • Arch
  • High-Profile Arch
  • Low-Profile Arch
  • Pipe Arch
  • CON/SPAN Arch

A maximum of 20 culvert structures can be defined, and each culvert structure can have 10 identical barrels. The user can also define the Flow Direction where the culvert flow is being routed. Main and Auxiliary are the available flow direction types.

  • Chart number
    This dropdown combo box entry defines the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) chart number of the culvert shape being defined. The chart number entry changes based upon the culvert shape selected.
  • Scale number
    This dropdown combo box entry defines the FHWA scale number of the culvert shape being defined. The scale number entry changes based upon the chart number selected.
  • Solution criteria
    This dropdown combo box entry defines the solution method to be used in the culvert computations. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries:
    1. Automatic
    2. Inlet Control
    3. Outlet Control

Culvert Dimensions

This section contains the following options:

  • Diameter or height
    This entry defines the diameter of a circular culvert or the height of the culvert shapes. This entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out) for the High-Profile Arch and Low-Profile Arch culvert shapes.
  • Width or span
    This entry defines the width (or span) of the culvert shapes. This entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out) for the Circular, Pipe Arch, and Semi-Circular culvert shapes.
  • Culvert length
    This entry defines the length of the culvert barrel. Clicking the […] button will cause the dialog box to temporarily disappear and allow the user to measure the length of the culvert barrel from the Map View.
  • Inlet invert elevation
    This entry defines the culvert invert on the inlet (or upstream) side of the culvert.
  • Outlet invert elevation
    This entry defines the culvert invert on the outlet (or downstream) side of the culvert.
  • Culvert slope
    This read-only field automatically calculates the culvert slope.

Culvert Coefficients

This section contains the following options:

  • Entrance loss coefficient
    This entry defines the entrance loss coefficient for the defined culvert. This coefficient describes the energy loss as water moves into the culvert inlet from the upstream area. Clicking the […] button displays the Culvert Entrance Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box.

    Culvert Entrance Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box
  • Exit loss coefficient
    This entry defines the exit loss coefficient for the defined culvert. This coefficient describes the energy loss as water moves from the culvert outlet to the downstream area. Clicking the […] button displays the Culvert Exit Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box.

    Culvert Exit Loss Coefficients lookup dialog box
  • Manning’s n
    This entry defines the culvert Manning’s roughness coefficient. Clicking the […] button displays the Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box.

    Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box
Hydrologic Elements › Reservoirs / Storage Areas

Defining Outflow Routing for HEC-HMS Storage Areas

The Outflow Routing data panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box will be enabled when Outflow Structures is selected as the routing method. Otherwise, this data panel entry is disabled (i.e., grayed out).

Outflow Routing panel in the Storage Area Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the Outflow Routing data panel of the Storage Area Data dialog box.

Main Discharge Channel

This section contains the following options:

  • Main tailwater submergence
    This dropdown combo box entry defines how tailwater submergence effects on the outflow structures will be handled for the main (or primary) discharge location. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries:
    1. Assume None (default)
    2. Storage Area Main Discharge
    3. Downstream of Main Discharge
    4. Specified Stage
    5. Fixed WSEL
  • Elev-Discharge rating curve
    This dropdown combo box is enabled if Storage Area Main Discharge or Downstream of Main Discharge is selected as the main tailwater submergence. This dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already-defined elevation discharge rating curve. Clicking the […] button displays an Elevation Discharge Rating Curve Data paired data dialog box that allows the user to define a new elevation discharge rating curve.

    Elevation Discharge Rating Curve Data dialog box
  • Stage gage
    This dropdown combo box is enabled if the Specified Stage is selected as the main tailwater submergence. This dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already defined stage gage. Clicking the […] button displays a User-Defined Stage Gage Data time series data dialog box that allows the user to define a new user-defined stage gage.

    User-Defined Stage Gage Data dialog box
  • Fixed water surface elev
    This entry defines the fixed water surface elevation contained within the storage area. This entry is enabled if the Fixed WSEL is selected as the main tailwater submergence.

Auxiliary Discharge Channel

This section contains the following options:

  • Auxiliary discharge connection
    This optional entry defines the downstream element that the selected storage area drains to, which can consist of the following elements:
    1. Diversion
    2. Junction
    3. Reach
    4. Storage Area
    5. Sink

    All storage areas have a main (or primary) discharge to a downstream element. Flow through outlets, spillways, and other structures leaves the storage area and enters some type of downstream channel. However, some storage areas also have a separate auxiliary (or secondary) discharge location in addition to the main discharge location. The flow exiting through the auxiliary discharge connection does not enter the same channel as the main discharge. The auxiliary discharge may be an emergency spillway that enters a secondary channel that eventually enters the main downstream channel. The auxiliary discharge could also be a withdrawal for urban consumptive use or possibly an irrigation canal. Clicking the [Pick] button allows the user to select the downstream element from the Map View.

  • Auxiliary tailwater submergence
    This dropdown combo box entry defines how tailwater submergence effects on the outflow structures will be handled for the auxiliary discharge location. This entry is enabled if an Auxiliary discharge connection has been defined. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries:
    1. Assume None
    2. Storage Area Main Discharge
    3. Downstream of Main Discharge
    4. Specified Stage
    5. Fixed WSEL
  • Elev-Discharge rating curve
    This dropdown combo box is enabled if Storage Area Main Discharge or Downstream of Main Discharge is selected as the auxiliary tailwater submergence. Clicking the […] button displays an Elevation Discharge Rating Curve Data paired data dialog box that allows the user to define a new elevation discharge rating curve.

    Elevation Discharge Rating Curve Data dialog box
  • Stage gage
    This dropdown combo box is enabled if the Specified Stage is selected as the auxiliary tailwater submergence. This dropdown combo box allows the user to select an already defined stage gage. Clicking the […] button displays a User-Defined Stage Gage Data time series data dialog box that allows the user to define a new user-defined stage gage.

    User-Defined Stage Gage Data dialog box
  • Fixed water surface elev
    This entry defines the fixed water surface elevation contained within the storage area. This entry is enabled if the Fixed WSEL is selected as the auxiliary tailwater submergence.

Other Options

This section contains the following options:

  • Computational time step
    This dropdown combo box entry defines the time step method for computing the simulation. This dropdown combo box provides the following entries:
    1. Automatic Time Slicing
    2. Simulation Time Step

The Simulation Time Step method uses the time step specified in the analysis parameters and is adequate when the storage area pool elevation is changing slowly. However, when the storage area pool elevation is changing rapidly, like during a dam failure simulation, a shorter time step needs to be used. In this situation, the Automatic Time Slicing method should be selected. The software will then compute the time step interval to use based upon the rates at which the pool elevation, storage volume, and outflow area change. For preliminary simulations, especially for models with a long simulation time period, it is better to use the Simulation Time Step method where less precision is required.

Hydrologic Elements › Reservoirs / Storage Areas

Defining HEC-HMS Storage Areas

Storage areas define the elements (i.e., reservoirs, lakes, detention ponds, storage nodes, etc.) where there are one or more inflows and only one computed outflow. Inflow comes from other elements in the model, such as drainage basins, routing reaches, or diversions. If there is more than one inflow, all inflow is added together before computing the outflow. It is assumed that the water surface in the storage area pool is level.

HEC-HMS storage areas can be defined by either drawing or assigning the boundary using the following commands:

  • Draw Storage Areas
  • Assign Storage Areas

Existing storage areas can also be georeferenced to a more accurate outline representation of the water body assigned. Additionally, the user can also revise the boundaries of the existing storage areas and extract the storage area volume from the terrain model.

Drawing HEC-HMS Storage Areas

The Draw Storage Areas command can be used to manually draw polygons, one-by-one, as storage areas on the Map View. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Draw Storage Areas command.

Assigning HEC-HMS Storage Areas

The Assign Storage Areas command can be used to manually associate previously drawn polylines or polygons as storage areas. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Draw Storage Areas command.

Georeferencing HEC-HMS Storage Areas

The Georeference Storage Areas command is used to manually georeference each of the storage areas to the background base map displayed in the Map View. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Georeference Storage Areas command.

Revising HEC-HMS Storage Area Boundary

Existing storage area boundaries can be revised using the Reshape Polygon command. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Reshape Polygon command.

Extracting Storage Area Volume Curve

GeoHECHMS software can be used to calculate how much storage area a site has and what volume it holds. After defining the storage area boundary, the software automatically computes the fixed area “footprint” that the storage area occupies to define the storage volume. This method works well in situations in which the storage area does not change with depth. However, defining the storage volume in this manner results in an inaccurate representation of the storage volume for regions where the storage area varies considerably with elevation change. For regions where a more accurate representation of the storage volume is required, the user can use the Extract Storage Area Volume Curve command to extract the storage volume from the terrain model if the bathymetry of the storage area is contained in the terrain model.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to extract storage area volume from the terrain model.

Hydrologic Elements › Reservoirs / Storage Areas

Assigning HEC-HMS Storage Areas

In GeoHECHMS, the Assign Storage Areas command allows the user to manually associate previously drawn polylines or polygons as storage areas.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Storage Areas command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Storage Areas dropdown menu and then choose the Assign Storage Areas command.
    Assigning-HEC-HMS-Storage-Areas-Image-1.png
  2. The Assign Storage Areas dialog box will be displayed.
    Assigning-HEC-HMS-Storage-Areas-Image-2.png

The following sections describe how to use the Assign Storage Areas command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Storage Areas Polygons/Polylines

Selection of a naming method from the Storage Area Specifications section should be considered before selecting storage area polygons/polylines. If the Storage area ID radio button option is selected, then only one polygon can be selected and assigned as a storage area at a time. By contrast, if the Auto-name storage area ID radio button option is selected, the user can interactively and continuously select polygons/polylines on the Map View to assign them as storage areas without having to purposefully interact with the dialog box.

Assigning Individual Storage Areas

To assign storage areas one at a time, naming each individual storage area before assigning the next one, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Storage Area Specifications section, select the Storage area ID radio button option.
  2. Click the [Pick] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Assigning-HEC-HMS-Storage-Areas-Image-3.png
  3. The status bar will prompt you to select the polygon/polyline on the Map View. Select the storage area polygon/polyline on the Map View.
  4. After selecting the polygon/polyline, the user is immediately returned to the Assign Storage Areas dialog box. The Storage area polygons/polylines read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.
  5. Enter the unique name to identify the selected storage area polygon/polyline in the Storage area ID entry field. After entering the name, press the [Enter] key or click the [Apply] button.
  6. Continue this process of assigning one storage area at a time until all the storage areas have been defined on the Map View. When finished, click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.

Assigning Multiple Storage Areas

To assigns multiple storage areas continuously without having to purposefully interact with the dialog box to identify and name each storage areas polygon/polyline, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Storage Area Specifications section, select the Auto-name storage area ID radio button option.
    Assigning-HEC-HMS-Storage-Areas-Image-4.png
    The different storage area naming formats present in the Auto-name storage area ID option are as follows:
    • Storage area ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the front of the storage area ID.
    • Storage area ID digits: This option permits specification of a set number of digits to use for the storage area ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the storage areas ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
    • Next available storage area ID: This entry defines the next element ID number to be used.
    • Storage area ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering elements. The default value is 1.
    • Storage area ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the storage area ID.
    • Storage area ID preview: This entry provides a preview of the storage area naming specifications defined above.
  2. Click the [Pick] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Assigning-HEC-HMS-Storage-Areas-Image-5.png
  3. On the Map View, click on a previously drawn storage area polygon/polyline to select it. Continue this process of selecting one storage area polygon/polyline at a time until all the polygons/polylines on the Map View have been selected.
  4. When finished, right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu or press the [Enter] key. The storage areas will be named and created automatically. You will be returned to the dialog box. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.
Hydrologic Elements › Reservoirs / Storage Areas

Drawing HEC-HMS Storage Areas

In GeoHECHMS, the Draw Storage Areas command allows the user to manually draw polygons, one-by-one, as storage areas on the Map View.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw Storage Areas command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Storage Areas dropdown menu and then choose the Draw Storage Areas command.
    Drawing-HEC-HMS-Storage-Areas-Image-1.png
  2. The Draw Storage Areas dialog box will be displayed.
    Drawing-HEC-HMS-Storage-Areas-Image-2.png

The following sections describe how to use the Draw Storage Areas command and interact with the above dialog box.

Drawing Storage Area Polygons

Selection of a naming method from the Storage Area Specifications section should be considered before drawing storage areas. If the Storage area ID radio button option is selected, then only one storage area can be drawn at a time. By contrast, if the Auto-name storage area ID radio button option is selected, the user can interactively and continuously draw storage areas on the Map View without having to purposefully interact with the dialog box each time a storage area needs to be identified and named.

Drawing Individual Storage Areas

To draw storage areas one at a time, naming each individual storage area before drawing the next storage area, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Storage Area Specifications section, select the Storage area ID radio button option.
  2. From the Draw Storage Area Polygons section, click the [Draw] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. Use the Draw curvilinear polygon checkbox option to draw the polygon using curvilinear segments.
    Drawing-HEC-HMS-Storage-Areas-Image-3.png
  3. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt you to draw a storage area on the Map View. Draw the storage area polygon on the Map View. While drawing elements, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between the curvilinear and the linear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about drawing elements on the Map View.
  4. To finish digitizing the storage area polygon, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. To abort the current draw command, press the [Esc] key.
  5. After completing the storage area digitization, the user is immediately returned to the Draw Storage Areas dialog box, and the Storage area polygons read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Drawing-HEC-HMS-Storage-Areas-Image-4.png
  6. After entering the Storage area ID, press the [Enter] key or click the [Apply] button.
    Drawing-HEC-HMS-Storage-Areas-Image-5.png
  7. The drawn storage area will be displayed on the Map View.
    Storage areas Map View

Continue this process of drawing one storage area at a time until all the storage areas have been placed on the Map View. When finished, click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.

Drawing Multiple Storage Areas

To draw multiple storage areas continuously and without having to purposefully interact with the dialog box to identify and name each individual storage area, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Storage Area Specifications section, select the Auto-name storage area ID radio button option.
    Drawing-HEC-HMS-Storage-Areas-Image-7.png
    The different storage area naming formats present in the Auto-name storage area ID option are as follows:
    • Storage area ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the front of the storage area ID.
    • Storage area ID digits: This option permits specification of a set number of digits to use for the storage area ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the storage areas ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
    • Next available storage area ID: This entry defines the next element ID number to be used.
    • Storage area ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering elements. The default value is 1.
    • Storage area ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the storage area ID.
    • Storage area ID preview: This entry provides a preview of the storage area naming specifications defined above.
  2. From the Draw Storage Area Polygons section, click the [Draw] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    Drawing-HEC-HMS-Storage-Areas-Image-8.png
  3. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt you to draw a storage area on the Map View. Draw the storage area polygon on the Map View.
  4. After drawing the first storage area, the status bar will prompt you to draw the next storage area on the Map View.
  5. Continue this process of drawing one storage area at a time until all the storage areas have been drawn on the Map View. When finished, right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu or press the [Enter] key. You will be returned to the dialog box. Click the [Close] button to close the dialog box.
Meteorology & Precipitation › Rain Gages

Rain Gage Data Command (GeoHECHMS)

Rain gages supply rainfall data for one or more subbasins in the study area. The rainfall data can either be user-defined or described in an external file. Rain gages are part of the project and can be shared by multiple basin or meteorologic models.

In GeoHECHMS, the user can define the rain gage time series data using the Rain Gage Data command. The defined rain gage time series data can later be used in the meteorological model for defining one or more gages for each subbasin in a watershed model. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to define a meteorological model.

Follow the steps below to use the Rain Gage Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Rain Gage Data command.
    Rain Gage Data command
  2. The Rain Gage Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Rain Gage Data dialog box

The below sections describe how to define the rain gage time series data and interact with the above dialog box.

Defining Rain Gages

The Select Rain Gage section allows the user to create, copy or delete rain gages. In addition, the user can edit the unique name assigned to the rain gages and provide a description for the selected rain gage.

Select Rain Gage section

The following entries are provided in this section:

  • Rain gage ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the rain gages that are defined in the current scenario. By default, the software names the rain gages as Rain Gage 01, 02, 03, etc. The user can select any rain gage and click on the pencil icon to edit the name.
  • Description
    This text field allows the user to enter an optional description that describes the rain gage being defined.
  • New
    Clicking the [New] button causes the software to create an empty time series data set. By default, the software provides a unique ID for the rain gage to be defined. Pressing the [Esc] key or [Cancel changes] button aborts the creation of a new time series data set and returns the dialog box to its previous state.
    Rain gage ID
    If the user exits the Rain gage ID field without defining an ID, the creation of the time series data set is aborted. After entering a Rain gage ID and clicking on the [Accept changes] button, the software checks that the defined ID is unique. If not, a warning dialog box is displayed, and the user is then returned to the Rain gage ID field to change the ID.
  • Copy
    Clicking the [Copy] button creates a copy of the current rain gage data set. When this command is executed, the software automatically provides a unique default name for the duplicated rain gage. The cursor is then placed into the Rain gage ID field. The user can go with the default name or enter a different valid and unique ID before moving on to add any other data.
  • Delete
    This button allows the user to delete the current rain gage data set from the current scenario. Clicking the [Delete] button causes the following confirmation dialog box to be displayed.
    Delete Rain Gage dialog box
    Clicking the [Yes] button causes the software to delete the current rain gage data set.

Rain Gage Location

This section allows the user to provide a precise description of the rain gage’s location. The location is specified for each gage as the latitude and longitude. The latitude and longitude can be entered in decimal degrees in the Latitude and Longitude fields, respectively. Upon entering the latitude and longitude, the software will provide the location's physical address in the Location read-only field. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to pick the location interactively from the Map View. The software will then display the physical address, longitude, and latitude values for the selected location in the respective fields.

Rain Gage Location section

DSS Data

This section allows the user to select a DSS data file to define the rain gage time series data. This section is disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the Time Series Data radio button option is selected.

DSS Data section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • DSS file
    This entry denotes the file directory path to the DSS data file. Clicking on the [Select] button allows the user to select the directory path and data path using the DSS Data File & Path dialog box (explained below).
  • DSS path
    This entry denotes the data path within the DSS data file, which contains the time series data.

DSS Data File & Path

Below is the DSS Data File & Path dialog box for selecting the directory path and data path for the time series data.

DSS Data File & Path dialog box

In the above dialog box, the user can click the [Select] button and browse to the folder containing the DSS file. Once a DSS file is selected, a list of all the DSS pathnames within that file will show up in the table. The user can select the desired data path from the table and click the [Add to Selected Data Paths] button to add the selected data path to the Selected Data Paths list. The dialog box also displays the graphical plot for the selected data path in the DSS data path plot section.

Once the required path is selected, the user can click the [OK] button. The user will be returned to the Rain Gage Data dialog box.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to view data contained in an HEC-DSS file.

Time Series Data

This section allows the user to manually enter time series data for the selected element. This section is disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the DSS Data radio button option is selected.

Time Series Data section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Rainfall type
    This dropdown combo box entry is used to define the type of data that is to be entered. The following options are available:
    1. Cumulative (default)
    2. Incremental
  • Time increment
    This dropdown combo box entry is used to define the time increment that defines the time series data. The following options are available:

    Minutes

    Hours

    Days

    1 minute

    1 hour

    1 day

    2 minutes

    2 hours


    3 minutes

    3 hours


    4 minutes

    4 hours


    5 minutes

    6 hours


    6 minutes

    8 hours


    10 minutes

    12 hours


    15 minutes



    20 minutes



    30 minutes



  • Time window
    This dropdown combo box entry is used to define the type of time window data that is to be entered. The following options are available.
    1. From Control Data
    2. User-Defined (default)

Note that the From Control Data dropdown combo box option is only available if control data has already been defined. Otherwise, this option is disabled.

  • Select control
    This dropdown combo box entry is used to define the control data set to use. This dropdown combo box is only available when the From Control Data option is selected. Otherwise, this option is disabled. If only one control data set is defined, then the software will automatically select that control data set. When a control data set is selected, the software will automatically populate the following fields:
    1. Start date & Start time
    2. End date & End time
  • Start date/Start time/End date/End time
    These fields define the time period for the element data. When the From Control Data option is selected, these fields become read-only fields. When the control data set is selected, the software will automatically fill-in the starting and ending dates and times. When the User-Defined option is selected, these fields allow manual entry of dates and times.
  • Time Series Table
    The Time column values automatically fill-in, based upon the selected Time Increment and Start/End dates & times. The user can manually enter data values into the Precipitation column fields.

Rainfall Time Series Plot

This section displays the Precipitation (in) vs Time plot of the selected rain gage data. Note that the data in the graph cannot be edited regardless of whether the gage uses manual entry or retrieves data from a DSS file. If no time series data is available for the specified time window, the graph will not show any data.

Rainfall Time Series Plot view
Meteorology & Precipitation › Rain Gages

Precipitation Type - Rain Gage

The Rain Gage precipitation type of the Meteorology Data dialog box is designed to work with time series recording and single value recording precipitation gages. Time series recording precipitation gages typically measure precipitation as it occurs and then the raw data is converted to a regular time step, such as 15 minutes or 1 hour. Single value recording precipitation gages only record the total storm depth. The user can choose from different methods to develop the weights applied to each rain gage when calculating the hyetograph for each subbasin. For increased flexibility, the total storm depth and the temporal pattern are developed separately for each subbasin.

When Rain Gage is selected as the Precipitation type in the Meteorology Data dialog box, the following data panel will be displayed for the Precipitation Data selector.

Rain Gage is selected as the Precipitation type

The following sections describe how to interact with the Rain Gage data panel of the Meteorology Data dialog box.

Rain Gage Specifications

This section of the data panel includes the following options.

  • Define index depth to adjust for regional bias in precipitation
    This checkbox option allows the user to adjust the regional bias in the rainfall depth to be used for each rain gage and subbasin. This is helpful when there are regional trends in precipitation patterns. Using this option requires the specification of an “index” value for each precipitation gage and each subbasin. The average annual precipitation total is often used as the index at a rain gage, and the estimated average annual precipitation over a subbasin area is often used as the index for a subbasin. Alternatively, the monthly average values may be used at each rain gage and subbasin. The index values are used to adjust the precipitation data for regional trends before calculating the weighted depth and weighted timing.
  • Define rain gage total depth (override)
    This checkbox option allows the user to override the precipitation depth at each rain gage. Without this override, the total depth defined at a rain gage is the sum of the values in the rain gage time series. With this override, the values in the rain gage time series are proportionally adjusted to have a sum equal to the specified total rain depth.

Subbasin Index Depths (Optional)

This optional section contains a data grid that is used to define an Index Depth for each subbasin. This section is disabled if the Define index depth to adjust for regional bias in precipitation checkbox is unchecked. For the Index Depth option to work, the user must enter an index value for each subbasin and rain gage.

Rain Gages precipitation panel - Subbasin Index Depth (Optional)

Time Series Rain Gage Specifications (Optional Override)

This section contains a data grid that is used to define a total depth and index depth for each rain gage defined within the Meteorological Model for the current scenario. This section is disabled if both the Define rain gage total depth(override) and the Define index depth to adjust for regional bias in precipitation checkbox options are unchecked.

Rain Gages precipitation panel - Time Series Rain Gage Specifications (Optional Override)

Single Value Rain Gage Specifications

This section contains a data grid that allows the user to manually define single value rain gages. In the Single Value Rain Gage ID column, the user can manually enter a unique ID for a single value rain gage.

Rain Gages precipitation panel - Single Value Rain Gage Specifications

Subbasin Weighted Rain Gages

This section allows the user to define how much weight each rain gage has for each subbasin.

Subbasin Weighted Rain Gages
  • Select Subbasin ID
    This dropdown combo box lists all the subbasins contained within the scenario. If a subbasin is currently selected on the Map View, it is shown selected in this entry. Otherwise, the last selected subbasin is shown selected. The [Pick] button allows the user to manually select the subbasin from the Map View.
  • Rain Gage ID
    This read-only data column lists all the rain gages (i.e., time series and single value) defined in the scenario.
  • Rain Gage Type
    This read-only field lists the type of rain gage that is defined. It is either Time Series or Single Value.
  • Use Rain Gage
    This checkbox entry allows the user to specify whether to use the rain gage for the selected subbasin or not.
  • Gage Depth Weight
    This spin control allows the user to define the depth weight for the rain gage. Note that this cell is disabled if the Use Rain Gage checkbox is unchecked.
  • Gage Time Weight
    This spin control allows the user to define the time weight for the rain gage. This cell is disabled for single value rain gages or if the Use Rain Gage checkbox is unchecked.
Meteorology & Precipitation › Precipitation Methods

Precipitation Type - Rainfall Distribution

The Rainfall Distribution precipitation type for stormwater projects allows the user to define precipitation data based on the selected rainfall distribution. The data used in this precipitation type are created by historical storm events and statistical analysis for each climate region and then grouped by different durations (6-hr, 12-hr, 24-hr, etc.), quartiles (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th), and percent of occurrence (10%, 20%, 30%, etc.).

Follow the steps below to define rainfall distribution data for different CivilGEO software products:

GeoHECHMS

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Meteorology Data command. Meteorology Data command
  2. The Meteorology Data dialog box will be displayed. Meteorology Data dialog box
  3. From the Precipitation type dropdown combo box, select the Rainfall Distribution option. Precipitation type dropdown combo box
  4. Select the Precipitation Data option from the Meteorology Specifications dropdown combo box. Meteorology Specifications dropdown combo box
  5. The corresponding panel that defines the rainfall distribution data will be displayed. Rainfall distribution data

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about other precipitation types available in the Meteorology Data command.

GeoSTORM

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Storm Data command. Storm Data command
  2. The Storm Data dialog box will be displayed. Storm Data dialog box
  3. From the Precipitation type dropdown combo box, select the Rainfall Distribution option. Precipitation type dropdown combo box - GeoSTORM
  4. The corresponding panel that defines the rainfall distribution data will be displayed. Rainfall distribution data - GeoSTORM

Note that the corresponding panel that defines the rainfall distribution data in the Meteorology Data and Storm Data dialog boxes is identical.

The following sections describe the different options available in the Precipitation Data panel to define rainfall distribution data.

Rainfall Distribution Specifications

This section of the Precipitation Data panel includes the following parameters.

Rainfall Distribution Specifications section
  • Rainfall distribution This read-only field displays information about the type of rainfall distribution selected. Clicking the [Select] button displays the Rainfall Distribution dialog box. Rainfall Distribution dialog box The above dialog box allows the user to select different rainfall distributions available. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about the Rainfall Distribution dialog box.
  • Rainfall description This read-only field displays the description corresponding to the selected rainfall distribution.
  • Storm duration This read-only field displays the corresponding value of a storm duration (in hours) for the selected rainfall distribution.

Precipitation Assignment

This section of the Precipitation Data panel includes the following input parameters:

Precipitation Assignment section
  • All subbasins same precipitation After selecting this radio button, the user can assign the same amount of precipitation to all the subbasins present within the model.
  • Individual subbasin precipitation After selecting this radio button, the user can specifically mention the amount of precipitation for all the individual subbasins present within the model.
Meteorology & Precipitation › Precipitation Methods

Precipitation Type - Standard Project Storm

The Standard Project Storm precipitation type of the Meteorology Data dialog box provides precipitation versus time relationship that is designed to be reasonably representative of major storms that have occurred or might occur in the area of concern. It is developed by studying the major storm events in the region, excluding the most extreme.

When Standard Project Storm is selected as the Precipitation type in the Meteorology Data dialog box, the following data panel will be displayed for the Precipitation Data selector.

Standard Project Storm is selected as the Precipitation type

The following sections describe how to interact with the Standard Project Storm data panel of the Meteorology Data dialog box.

Probable Maximum Index Precipitation Data

This section of the data panel includes the following input parameters:

  • Storm distribution type
    This dropdown combo box entry is used to select the storm distribution. The available entries in this dropdown are Southwest Division and Standard.
  • Index rainfall depth
    This field is used to define the rainfall depth. When the user clicks on the […] button, the Probable Maximum Index Precipitation dialog box will be displayed where the user can view the probable maximum index precipitation data.

    Probable Maximum Index Precipitation dialog box
  • Storm area
    This field is used to define the area that the storm occupies over the watershed.

Probable Maximum Index Precipitation Retrieval

This section of the data panel includes the following options.

  • Centered on current view extents
    If the user selects this radio button, the software will pick the center of the current view extent of the Map View.
  • Centered on subbasins
    If the user selects this radio button, the software will calculate and pick the center of the current subbasins present in the scenario.
  • Site location
    If the user selects this radio button, then clicking the [Pick] button allows the user to retrieve NOAA Atlas 14 precipitation data. The Latitude and Longitude for the selected location get automatically filled after the selection of the site location. The coordinate values entered have the same coordinate reference system (CRS) as the project. Using the [Clear] button, the user can clear the selected site location.
  • Precipitation data source
    This dropdown combo box entry is used to select a precipitation data source which can be used to retrieve the rainfall data for the selected storm frequency and storm duration. Note that the dropdown entry is only valid for the USA and does not provide precipitation data for Austria, Ontario, and Germany.
    The [Retrieve Probable Maximum Index Precipitation] button retrieves the probable maximum index precipitation data for the selected location.

Subbasin Transposition Factors

The data grid of this section has two columns. The Subbasin ID column lists all the subbasins contained within the scenario, and the Transposition Factor column accounts for the location of each subbasin contained in the scenario, relative to the center of the storm.

SCS Storm precipitation panel - Subbasin Transposition Factors
Meteorology & Precipitation › Precipitation Methods

Precipitation Type - Specified Hyetograph

The Specified Hyetograph precipitation type of the Meteorology Data dialog box allows the user to specify the exact rain gage time series to use for the hyetograph at each subbasin. This precipitation type is useful when precipitation data is processed externally and imported without modification. This method is also useful when a single rain gage can be used to represent a storm event.

When the Specified Hyetograph is selected as the Precipitation type in the Meteorology Data dialog box, the following data panel will be displayed for the Precipitation Data selector.

Specified Hyetograph precipitation panel

The following sections describe how to interact with the Specified Hyetograph data panel of the Meteorology Data dialog box.

Specified Hyetograph Options

The Scale rain gage hyetograph to defined total rainfall depth (Optional Total Depth Override) checkbox option is used to enable adjustment of the precipitation depth for each rain gage. Checking this option also enables the Optional Total Depth Override column of the Subbasin Rain Gages table.

Subbasin Rain Gages

The following data columns are provided in the data grid of this section.

  • Subbasin ID
    This column lists all the subbasins contained within the scenario.
  • Rain Gage ID
    This column contains a dropdown combo box in each cell that lists all the defined rain gages. Clicking the […] button will display the Rain Gage Data dialog box which allows the user to define time series rain gage data. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about Rain Gage Data dialog box.
  • Optional Total Depth Override
    This data column is enabled if the Scale rain gage hyetograph to defined total rainfall depth (Optional Total Depth Override) checkbox is checked. Otherwise, this data column is grayed out (i.e., disabled). This field gives the user the option to define a total rainfall depth for each subbasin.
Meteorology & Precipitation › Precipitation Methods

Precipitation Type - SCS Storm

Drainage planning in the United States is often performed using hypothetical storms developed by the Soil Conservation Service (SCS), now known as the Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS). These storms were developed by the SCS as averages of rainfall patterns; they are represented in a dimensionless form. The SCS designed this storm method for a small drainage area. This precipitation type intends to estimate both peak flow rate and runoff volume from precipitation of a "critical" duration.

When the SCS Storm is selected as the Precipitation type in the Meteorology Data dialog box, the following data panel will be displayed for the Precipitation Data selector.

SCS Storm precipitation panel

The following sections describe how to interact with the SCS Storm data panel of the Meteorology Data dialog box.

Precipitation Frequency Estimate Retrieval

This section of the data panel includes the following options.

  • Centered on current view extents
    If the user selects this radio button, the software will pick the center of the current view extent of the Map View.
  • Centered on subbasins
    If the user selects this radio button, the software will calculate and pick the center of the current subbasins present in the scenario.
  • Site location
    If the user selects this radio button, then clicking the [Pick] button allows the user to retrieve NOAA Atlas 14 precipitation data. The Latitude and Longitude for the selected location get automatically filled after the selection of the site location. The coordinate values entered have the same coordinate reference system (CRS) as the project. Using the [Clear] button, the user can clear the selected site location.
  • Precipitation data source
    This dropdown combo box entry is used to select a precipitation data source which can be used to retrieve the rainfall data for the selected storm frequency and storm duration. The dropdown entry provides the option to choose the precipitation data source for the USA, Austria, Ontario, and Germany.
  • Storm recurrence interval
    From this dropdown combo box, the user can select a storm reoccurrence interval.
  • Storm duration
    From this dropdown combo box, the user can select storm duration.

The [Retrieve Data] button allows the user to retrieve the rainfall data for the selected precipitation data source.

SCS Precipitation Data

This section of the data panel includes the following input parameters.

SCS Storm precipitation panel - SCS Precipitation Data section
  • SCS storm distribution
    This dropdown combo box entry is used to select the SCS storm distribution. The available options within this dropdown are Area-Dependent, Type I, Type IA, Type II, and Type III.
  • Rainfall depth
    This field is used to define the rainfall depth from the NOAA Atlas 14. Clicking the […] button displays the NOAA rainfall data web page for the current map location. Note that this button is disabled for precipitation data sources except for NOAA Atlas 14.

Apply storm area reduction

Storm area reductions can be applied to storm events when modeling very large watersheds. For example, when modeling a 100-year storm over a 350 square mile watershed, it is unreasonable to assume that the storm occurs simultaneously over the entire watershed. In reality, storms are much smaller, and only cover a small area of a large watershed. Therefore, a storm area reduction can be defined in these situations to compute a more accurate runoff amount.

If the user selects the Apply storm area reduction check box option, the following fields get activated:

SCS Storm precipitation panel - Apply storm area reduction section
  • Storm area
    This field is used to define the area that the storm occupies over the watershed.
  • TP40 storm area reduction
    This radio button option is used to define the area that the storm occupies over the watershed for purposes of applying the TP40 reduction in the computations.
  • User-defined area reduction
    This radio button entry allows the user to define a storm area reduction factor of the subbasin drainage area versus the storm area reduction factor to be applied to the subbasin. Clicking the […] button will display the Storm Area Reduction Curve Data dialog box that allows the user to define the paired data values for storm area reduction.

    SCS Storm precipitation panel - Storm Area Reduction Curve Data
Meteorology & Precipitation › Precipitation Methods

Precipitation Type - Inverse Distance Weighted

The Inverse Distance Weighted precipitation type of the Meteorology Data dialog box was originally designed for application in real-time forecasting systems. This precipitation type uses recording gages that are reported at regular intervals such as 15 minutes or 1 hour. It can also use gages that only report daily precipitation totals. This precipitation type can automatically switch from using close gages to using more distant gages when the closer gages stop reporting data.

When Inverse Distance Weighted is selected as the Precipitation type in the Meteorology Data dialog box, the following data panel will be displayed for the Precipitation Data selector.

Inverse Distance Weighted precipitation panel

The following sections describe how to interact with the Inverse Distance Weighted data panel of the Meteorology Data dialog box.

Inverse Distance Weighted Options

This section of the data panel includes the following input parameters.

  • Search radius
    This field defines the search distance (or radius) that is used to limit the influence distance of precipitation gages. The default value for this field is 621 miles (or 1000 kilometers). The user can click the [Measure] button to measure the influence distance from the Map View.
  • Use index depth to adjust for regional bias in precipitation
    When this checkbox is checked, the Index Depth columns of the Rain Gages and the Subbasin Weighted Nodes data grids are enabled.

Rain Gages

The Rain Gages data grid lists all the rain gages defined in the model and the manner by which they are to be utilized with the Inverse Distance Weighted meteorological method.

Inverse Distance Weighted precipitation panel - Rain Gages section
  • Rain Gage ID
    This read-only data column lists all the rain gages defined in the model.
  • Use Rain Gage
    This checkbox option is used to specify that the data defined for the rain gage should be used in the Inverse Distance Weighted meteorological method.
  • Daily Gage Only
    This checkbox option is used to specify that the rain gage only contains daily total precipitation values. If the Use Rain Gage checkbox option of the current rows is unchecked, then the Daily Gage Only checkbox option will be disabled.
  • Index Depth
    This field represents the index value to adjust the gage for regional bias. The average annual precipitation total is often used as the index depth at a rain gage. This data grid column will be disabled when the Use index depth to adjust for regional bias in precipitation checkbox is unchecked.

Subbasin Weighted Nodes

This section and the corresponding data grid list all the nodes defined for each subbasin.

Inverse Distance Weighted - Subbasin Weighted Nodes section
  • Subbasin ID
    This dropdown combo box is used to select the subbasin to define the weighted nodes to be used in the Inverse Distance Weighted meteorological method. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively select the subbasin from the Map View.
  • Node ID
    This editable column represents a unique name for the defined weighted node.
  • Location
    This read-only column indicates if the node location has already been placed on the Map View or not.
  • Node Weight
    This spin control field is used to define the node weight and ranges from 0.00 to 1.00.
  • Index Depth
    This column represents the index value to adjust the node for regional bias. Note that this data grid column is disabled when the Use index depth to adjust for regional bias in precipitation checkbox is unchecked.
    The [Assign] button is used to select node location on the subbasin from the Map View. The user can also use the [Draw] button to draw the node location on the subbasin from the Map View. The [Delete] button can be used to delete the current row’s weighted node definition. Alternatively, the user can right-click the desired row and select the Delete Row(s) option from the context menu.
Meteorology & Precipitation › Precipitation Methods

Precipitation Type - HMR52 Storm

The HMR52 Storm precipitation type of the Meteorology Data dialog box can be used to compute the probable maximum precipitation (PMP) for a watershed. The concentric ellipses are used to construct the storm spatial pattern where each ellipse represents an isohyet of precipitation depth. The storm is located over the watershed by specifying the center of the pattern and the angle of the major axis of the ellipses. Total precipitation depth is computed using a specified storm area and area-duration curves. The total precipitation depth is converted to a temporal pattern based on the selected placement of the peak intensity within the storm duration. The HMR52 storm precipitation type includes several parameters to describe the location, orientation, and temporal distribution of the storm.

When HMR52 Storm is selected as the Precipitation type in the Meteorology Data dialog box, the following data panel will be displayed for the Precipitation Data selector.

HMR52 Storm is selected as the Precipitation type

The following sections describe how to interact with the HMR52 Storm data panel of the Meteorology Data dialog box.

HMR52 PMP Storm Specifications

This section of the data panel includes the following options:

  • Centered on current view extents
    If the user selects this radio button, the software will pick the center of the current view extent of the Map View.
  • Centered on subbasins
    If the user selects this radio button, the software will calculate and pick the center of the current subbasins present in the scenario.
  • Storm center
    If the user selects this radio button, then clicking the [Pick] button allows the user to select the storm center on the Map View. The Latitude and Longitude for the selected location get automatically filled after the selection of the storm center. The coordinate values entered have the same coordinate reference system (CRS) as the project. Using the [Clear] button, the user can clear the selected storm location.
  • Storm preferred orientation & Storm actual orientation
    The preferred and actual storm orientation angles are measured in degrees increasing clockwise from North. Click the [Retrieve] button to retrieve the storm preferred orientation for the selected location. Clicking the [View] button displays the HMR52 Storm Preferred Orientation dialog box to view the storm preferred orientation data.
    HMR52 Storm Preferred Orientation dialog box
  • Peak intensity
    This dropdown combo box entry is used to select the 6-hour peak intensity for the HMR52 storm. This peak intensity parameter specifies the period within the 72-hour storm when the precipitation will be the greatest. The 6 hours of peak intensity can be set to begin as early as hour 24 of the storm or as late as hour 60 of the storm. The depth of rain falling during the period of peak intensity is subdivided into 1-hour increments using the 1-hour to 6-hour depth ratio parameter.
  • 1-hour to 6-hour depth ratio
    This field contains the ratio of the 1-hour to 6-hour depth during the 6-hour peak intensity period. The depth of rain falling during the period of peak intensity is subdivided into 1-hour increments using this parameter.
  • Probable maximum storm area
    This field specifies the total storm area.

HMR51 Depth-Area-Duration PMP Estimates

The table under this section allows the user to enter the precipitation depths from the HMR51 PMP (Probable Maximum Precipitation) data corresponding to different storm sizes and storm durations.

Frequency Storm precipitation panel - HMR51 Depth-Area-Duration PMP Estimates

Clicking the [Retrieve HMR51 PMP Data] button will cause the software to interpolate the values for the HMR51 Depth-Area-Duration PMP Estimates table.

Clicking the [View HMR51 PMP Data] button will display the HMR51 PMP Data dialog box that displays the graphical plots of the HMR51 PMP rainfall data.

HMR51 PMP Data dialog box
Meteorology & Precipitation › Precipitation Methods

Precipitation Type - Frequency Storm

The Frequency Storm precipitation type of the Meteorology Data dialog box is used to produce a synthetic storm from HYDRO35, TP40, and TP49 statistical data. This data is retrieved from the US National Weather Service (NWS). The objective of this precipitation type is to define an event for which the precipitation depths for various durations within the storm have a consistent exceedance probability.

When Frequency Storm is selected as the Precipitation type in the Meteorology Data dialog box, the following data panel will be displayed for the Precipitation Data selector.

Frequency Storm precipitation panel

The following sections describe how to interact with the Frequency Storm data panel of the Meteorology Data dialog box.

Storm Location

This section of the data panel includes the following options:

  • Centered on current view extents
    If the user selects this radio button, the software will pick the center of the current view extent of the Map View.
  • Centered on subbasins
    If the user selects this radio button, the software will calculate and pick the center of the current subbasins present in the scenario.
  • Storm center
    If the user selects this radio button, then clicking the [Pick] button allows the user to select the storm center on the Map View. The Latitude and Longitude for the selected location are automatically filled after the selection of the storm center. The coordinate values entered have the same coordinate reference system (CRS) as the project. Using the [Clear] button, the user can clear the selected storm location.

Frequency Storm Specifications

This section of the data panel includes the following input parameters:

Frequency Storm precipitation panel - Frequency Storm Specifications section
  • Annual-partial conversion
    This dropdown combo box entry is used to select the annual to partial conversion factor to be applied. It is used to convert annual duration to partial duration precipitation frequency data.
  • Annual-partial ratio
    This read-only entry displays the corresponding ratio for the selected Annual-partial conversion entry value.
  • Precipitation data source
    This dropdown combo box entry is used to select a precipitation data source which can be used to retrieve the rainfall data for the selected storm frequency and storm duration. The dropdown entry provides the option to choose the precipitation data source for the USA, Austria, Ontario, and Germany.
  • Storm frequency
    This dropdown combo box entry is used to define the frequency of the storm in years.
  • Storm duration
    This dropdown combo box entry is used to define the duration of the storm in hours or days.
  • Intensity duration
    This dropdown combo box entry is used to define the shortest period of the storm. Usually, the Intensity duration should be set equal to the time step of the simulation. This entry must be less than the Storm duration entry.
  • Intensity position
    This dropdown combo box entry is used to specify where in the storm the period of peak intensity will occur. Changing the position does not change the total precipitation depth of the storm but does change how the total depth is distributed over time during the storm.
  • Apply TP40 reduced storm area
    This optional checkbox data entry is used to define the area that the storm occupies over the watershed for purposes of applying the TP40 reduction in the computations.
    Storm area reductions can be applied to storm events when modeling very large watersheds. For example, when modeling a 100-year storm over a 350 square mile watershed, it is unreasonable to assume that the storm occurs simultaneously over the entire watershed. In reality, storms are much smaller, and only cover a small area of a large watershed. Therefore, a storm area reduction can be defined in these situations to compute a more accurate runoff amount.

Rainfall Depth Data

The table under this section allows the user to enter the rainfall data from the US National Weather Service (NWS). Clicking the [Retrieve] button retrieves the rainfall data from the selected precipitation data source. The cells contained within the Rainfall Depth column get enabled/disabled depending upon the values selected in the Storm duration and Intensity duration dropdown combo box entries.

Frequency Storm precipitation panel - Rainfall Depth Data section

For example, if the user selects 24 Hours as the Storm duration, then all the Rainfall Depth column cells after the 24 Hours storm duration will be disabled. Similarly, if the user selects 15 Minutes as the Intensity duration, then all the Rainfall Depth entries before 15 Minutes will be disabled.

Meteorology & Precipitation › Rainfall Lookup & Critical Storm

Compute Critical Storm Command

A critical duration analysis must be conducted to determine the proper storm duration for computing design flows. In a critical duration analysis, a range of storm durations is evaluated to identify the storm duration that produces the greatest peak flow or volume.

The critical duration will vary by watershed, depending on the size, drainage characteristics, and water management infrastructure. It is determined by comparing various durations of the specified storm frequency and calculating the peak rate and/or runoff volume for each. For example, a 30-minute event might be the critical storm duration for sizing catch basin inlets and storm sewers from small watersheds. However, longer duration events such as the 3-hour, 12-hour, or 10-day runoff events might be the event durations that result in the most severe flood levels for lakes.

Critical Duration Analysis for Flood Control

The accurate assessment of flood risk and flood damages and the sizing and design of flood control projects in any watershed relies on the peak flood discharges, the peak flood stages, and the maximum runoff volumes generated for that watershed. Peak discharges, stages, and runoff volumes can be determined through the application of rainfall runoff and hydraulic methodologies that utilize "critical" design rainfall events (volume, duration, and temporal distribution) to generate runoff hydrographs from designed rainfall events.

FEMA guidance states that the critical storm is a design storm, which provides the highest flood discharges/water surface elevations for the flooding source. In practice, it is often assumed that the 100-year, 24-hour duration storm produces the critical or highest flood discharges, stages, and runoff volumes throughout the watershed. However, the actual critical duration design storm may be something other than the 24-hour design event, and there may be more than one critical duration storm that produces critical flood discharges, stages, and storage volumes across the watershed.

A critical duration analysis is required to estimate representative peak discharges and flood stages and to properly size flood control projects. A critical duration analysis can be performed to determine the critical duration storm specific to each watershed, and each study reach across the watershed. Typically, flood discharges and stages for the 1-, 3-, 6-, 12-, 24- and 48-hour storm durations for the 100-year frequency event are generated to identify the critical duration which produces the highest peak flows and stages for all study locations within the watershed. Performing this analysis and using the resulting critical duration events helps to ensure that the hydrologic/hydraulic models produce the highest flood discharges and stages across the watershed.

Detention Pond Critical Duration Storm

The critical duration analysis allows the user to quickly go through several iterations in sizing a detention pond and the corresponding outfall structure to accommodate the required design storms.

The storm duration that produces the greatest volume of storage and highest ponded depth within a detention pond is considered the critical duration storm. Reservoir routing computations for the detention pond will require incorporating several different duration storms to determine the critical duration and the highest pond level for each frequency storm required. The operation of any basin is dependent on the interaction of:

  • Inflow (hydrograph)
  • Storage characteristics of the basin
  • Performance of the outlet control structure

Therefore, each detention pond will respond to different duration storms in dissimilar patterns. The approximate critical storm can be estimated, but the actual critical duration storm can only be determined by performing reservoir routing computations for several different duration storms.

Critical Duration Storm

In GeoHECHMS, the Compute Critical Storm command allows the user to perform an analysis to determine the critical duration storm that corresponds to a particular storm duration and frequency.

Follow the steps below to use the Compute Critical Storm command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, select the Compute Critical Storm command.
    Compute Critical Storm ribbon menu command
  2. The Compute Critical Storm dialog box will be displayed.
    Compute Critical Storm dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Compute Critical Storm command and interact with the above dialog box.

Defining Storms

The Define Storms panel is used to define the storms to be analyzed to determine the critical storm.

The following entries are provided in this panel:

Storm Duration

The dropdown combo boxes under the Storm Duration column list the storm durations to be analyzed. The defined durations are then applied to the defined Rainfall Distribution. The Storm Duration dropdown combo box lists the following entries:

Storm Duration dropdown combo box

When the user selects a storm duration for a different row, then the current row's dropdown combo box entry has the previously selected storm duration removed. In that way, the user only sees those storm durations that have not yet been defined. The user can also drag and drop the defined rows to change their top to bottom order.

Rainfall Distribution

This column entry allows the user to select the rainfall distribution to be applied to the defined storm duration. The user can click the […] lookup button to display the Rainfall Distribution dialog box.

[…] lookup button

The Rainfall Distribution dialog box allows the user to select the rainfall distribution. Note that only percentile-based rainfall distribution will be available for selection.

Rainfall distribution dialog box

After selecting a rainfall distribution, click the [Assign] button. The name of the rainfall distribution is then displayed in the Rainfall Distribution entry.

Note that if the user selects a rainfall distribution that does not match the selected storm duration, the software will scale the selected rainfall distribution with the selected storm duration.

To learn more about the Rainfall Distribution dialog box, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Storm Frequency

The dropdown combo boxes in the first row of the Storm Frequency & Precipitation (in) section list the storm frequency to be analyzed. This value is used to look up the corresponding rainfall precipitation amount. The dropdown combo box lists the following entries:

Storm Frequency dropdown combo box

When the user selects a storm frequency for a different column, then the current column's dropdown combo box entry has the previously selected storm frequency removed. In that way, the user only sees those storm frequencies that have not yet been defined. The only exception to this is the Custom option, which allows the user to define a custom storm frequency. Multiple custom storm frequencies can be defined. The user can also drag and drop the defined columns to change their left to right order.

Custom Storm Frequency

The Custom option allows the user to define a custom storm frequency.

Custom button

On selecting the Custom option, the Custom Storm Frequency dialog box will be displayed, allowing the user to define the custom storm frequency.

Custom Storm Frequency dialog box

The following entries are provided in the above dialog box:

  • Storm frequency label
    This entry field allows the user to define the label for the custom storm frequency.
  • Storm frequency
    This entry field allows the user to enter the storm frequency value in years. The field accepts only positive, non-zero integers.

After providing values for the above entries, the user can click the [OK] button and the custom storm frequency will be defined.

After the custom storm frequency is defined, the user can click on the pencil icon to edit the storm frequency.

pencil icon to edit the storm frequency

Note that if the user names the column the same as one of the pre-defined columns, then the NOAA rainfall retrieval ignores the column.

Storm Precipitation

The empty fields contained in the data grid of the Storm Frequency & Precipitation (in) section are used to store the storm precipitation data. The user can either manually enter the values or have the software automatically fill in the data grid. Clicking on the [Retrieve from NOAA] button will retrieve corresponding precipitation data and populate the data grid for the defined Storm Durations and Storm Frequencies from NOAA Atlas 14.

Populating precipitation data using [Retrieve from NOAA] button

Note that the software will ignore the corresponding data fields of the columns that have been populated with custom storm frequencies. The user is required to manually enter the precipitation values for these storm frequencies.

Additionally, the user can right-click anywhere on the data grid to display the context menu commands.

right-click context menu

The following commands are provided in the context menu:

  • The Cut, Copy, and Paste commands allow the user to cut, copy and paste the data into the data grid.
  • The Insert Row command allows the user to insert a row just above the row where the cursor is located.
  • The Delete Row(s) command allows the user to delete the row where the cursor is located.
  • The Insert Column command allows the user to insert a column to the left of the column where the cursor is located.
  • The Delete Column command allows the user to delete the column where the cursor is located.
  • The Copy Table to Clipboard command allows the user to send the data to the Windows clipboard.
  • The Export Table to Excel command allows the user to export table data into an Excel document.
  • The Export Table to PDF command allows the user to export table data into a PDF document.
  • The Delete command allows the user to delete the desired cell(s)/column(s) value shown in the table data.

Clearing Data from the Table

The [Clear Data] button allows the user to clear the entire contents of the data grid, including the storm duration, rainfall distribution, storm frequency, and NOAA retrieved precipitation data.

[Clear Data] button

Sorting Storm Durations

The [Sort Durations] button allows the user to sort the storm duration rows in ascending order. The custom storm durations will be placed last and in ascending order.

Sorting Storm Frequencies

The [Sort Frequencies] button allows the user to sort the storm frequency columns in ascending order. The custom storm frequencies will be placed last and in ascending order.

Performing Analysis

The Perform Analysis panel is used to define general information relating to the detention pond to be designed and analyzed.

Perform Analysis panel

Note that the [Compute] button will be grayed out until the user has selected a basin model.

The following sections are provided in this panel.

Selecting Basin Models (Scenarios) to Analyze

The Select Basin Models (Scenarios) to Analyze section lists all the defined basin models (geometry data). The user can select which basin models to be analyzed. The Compute Scenario checkbox in the topmost row allows the user to select and deselect all rows. The software lists the basin models in alphabetical order. In addition, the user can use the Up and Down arrow buttons on the right side of each row to move the listed basin models.

Defining Analysis Options

The Define Analysis Options section allows the user to define the path and file name where the analysis results are to be saved. Click the […] browse button, and the software will display the Save HEC-HMS Critical Analysis Project dialog box. From the displayed dialog box, browse to the location to save the file, enter the file name, and then click the [Save] button.

Save HEC-HMS Critical Analysis Project dialog box

The user will be returned to the Compute Critical Storm dialog box, and the complete directory path and the file name will be shown in the HEC-HMS project file entry.

Note that the software creates a single project file that contains references to the Basin Geometry, Meteorology, and Run files that need to be computed.

Simulation Progress

This section displays progress in computing the different storm analyses to determine the critical storm duration. The progress bar at the bottom shows which model run is currently being performed.

Computing Analysis

When all the options have been properly defined, click the [Compute] button to initiate the simulation. While the simulation is running, the button changes to [Cancel] so that the user can cancel the simulation if desired.

Clicking on the [Copy to Clipboard] button allows the user to copy the contents of the simulation section to the Windows clipboard.

Peak Flows

This panel is used to review the simulation results. It lists all the computed peak flows for all storms and all defined elements in the model.

Peak Flows panel

The following entries are defined in this panel:

Scenario

This column represents the basin models (i.e., scenario) that were analyzed. Clicking on the Filter icon will display the dropdown filter listing all the basin models.

Scenario dropdown combo box

The user can select the checkboxes corresponding to the basin models to be displayed in the Computed Peak Flows output data grid and click the [Apply] button. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.

Element

This column represents the model elements that were analyzed in each basin model. Clicking on the Filter icon will display the dropdown filter listing all the model elements (excluding subbasins) contained in the selected scenarios.

Element dropdown combo box

The user can select the checkboxes corresponding to the desired elements to be displayed in the Computed Peak Flows output data grid and click the [Apply] button. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.

The following entries are contained in the dropdown filter.

  • Basin geometry (scenario)
    This dropdown combo box entry only lists the scenarios that have been selected in the Scenario dropdown filter. The software lists the scenarios in alphabetical order.
  • Element type
    This dropdown combo box entry lists all the element types defined in the current scenario. The software lists the scenarios in alphabetical order. By default, the All option is selected.
  • Data grid
    The data grid shows the elements that can be selected and deselected. The software lists the elements in alphabetical order.

Storm

This column represents the storms that were analyzed. Clicking on the Filter icon will display the filter dropdown listing all the storm durations that were analyzed.

Storm dropdown combo box

The user can select the checkboxes corresponding to the desired storm durations to be displayed in the Computed Peak Flows output data grid and click the [Apply] button. The user can click the [Clear] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.

Note that the dropdown filter lists only those storm durations that were defined in the Define Storms panel.

Maximum Peak Flow

The maximum peak flow row labeled as Maximum is displayed at the third to bottom row of each element section. It contains the maximum peak flow that was computed for the storms listed for that element. If there was only one storm row listed, then this row is hidden.

Critical Storm

The critical storm row labeled as Critical Storm is displayed as the second to the bottom row of each element section. It contains the storm name that generated the maximum peak flow that was computed for the storms listed for that element. If there was only one storm row listed, then this row is hidden.

Time to Peak

The time to peak row labeled as Time to Peak is displayed as the bottom row of each element section. It corresponds to the time period in decimal hours from the start of a critical storm to its peak discharge.

Peak Flows Data Grid

The Peak Flows (cfs) data grid cells are colored to represent the minimum and maximum values for that column. The cell that holds the minimum value is colored green. The cell that holds the medium value is colored yellow, and the cell that holds the maximum value is colored red.

Peak Stages

This panel is used to review the simulation results. It lists the computed results only for the reservoir (i.e., storage areas) element type that contains a stage (i.e., depth) value.

Peak Stages panel

Note that the Peak Stages panel shows similar results to that of the Peak Flows panel—but shows results of the stage (i.e., depth) rather than flow. The Time to Peak is reported for inflow and outflow (i.e., discharge).

Exporting Data to HEC-HMS

After performing the analysis, the user can click the [Export to HEC-HMS] button to export the critical duration data to be used in a HEC-HMS model so that the user can run this analysis in HEC-HMS.

[Export to HEC-HMS] button

On clicking the [Export to HEC-HMS] button, the software will display the Export to HEC-HMS dialog box. The user can browse to the location to save the file, enter the file name, and click the [Save] button to save the data as a zip file.

Export to HEC-HMS dialog box

Note that the user can also export the data defined in the storm and precipitation grid under the Define Storms panel without running the analysis.

Meteorology & Precipitation › Rainfall Lookup & Critical Storm

Lookup Rainfall Command (GeoHECHMS)

In GeoHECHMS, the Lookup Rainfall command retrieves rainfall (depth or intensity) data for any location within Austria, Canada, Germany, and the United States. Note that once rainfall data are retrieved for a project, they are saved with the project. So, when the project is reopened and the Lookup Rainfall command is run again, the same data are displayed.

Follow the steps below to use the Lookup Rainfall command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Lookup Rainfall command.
    Lookup Rainfall Command
  2. The Lookup Rainfall Depth dialog box will be displayed.
    Lookup Rainfall Depth Dialog Box

The following sections describe how to use the Lookup Rainfall command and interact with the above dialog box.

Location Selection

This section allows the user to select the location from which the rainfall data are to be retrieved.

Location Selection Section
  • Centered on current view extents
    If this radio button option is selected, the software will pick the central location of the region displayed in the current Map View extents for retrieval of rainfall data.
  • Centered on subbasins
    If this radio button option is selected, the software will pick the central location of the subbasin model defined in the current scenario. If no subbasins are defined, this option will be disabled (i.e., grayed out).
  • Select location
    This radio button option allows the user to pick the desired location from the Map View interactively by using the [Pick] button. The address of the selected location will be displayed in the read-only field next to this option. The latitude and longitude values for the selected location will be displayed in the Latitude & longitude fields. The user can click the [Clear] button to clear the defined location and redo the entire process.
    Select Location Radio Button

Note that if the user selects either the Centered on current view extents or the Centered on subbasins options, the software will display the information of the selected location after successfully retrieving the rainfall data.

Perform Rainfall Lookup

Once the project location for which the rainfall data are to be retrieved is selected, the user can select the precipitation data type and precipitation data sources available for the selected project location.

Perform Rainfall Depth Location

The following entries are available in this section:

  • Precipitation data type
    This dropdown combo box entry lists the precipitation data types to be used for retrieving rainfall data. The following entries are available:
    • Rainfall Depth
    • Rainfall Intensity
      Precipitation Data Type Dropdown Combo Box

Note that the section header name changes based on the precipitation data type selected by the user.

Change in the Perform Rainfall Lookup Section Header Name
  • Precipitation data source
    This dropdown combo box entry lists the precipitation data sources available for the selected location. The following precipitation data sources are available:
    • Austria – Bundesministerium Wasserwirtschaft eHYD Data Service
    • Canada – Environment Canada & Ontario Ministry of Transportation
    • Canada – Ontario Ministry of Transportation
    • Germany – Deutscher Wetterdienst – Klima und Umwelt
    • USA – ISWS (Illinois) Bulletin 75 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
    • USA – NOAA Atlas 14 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
    • USA – NOAA Atlas 2 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
    • USA – NRCC (Northeast Regional Climate Center) PFDS
    • USA – SUDAS (lowa) Bulletin 71 (PFDS) Precipitation Frequency Data Server
      Precipitation Data Source Dropdown Combo Box

Note that the specific precipitation data source entry will be displayed based on the selected project location.

Retrieving Rainfall Data

Once the precipitation data source is selected, click the [Retrieve] button to retrieve the rainfall data for the selected location.

[Retrieve] Button

Note that the coverage area shown below is current as of April 2023. However, this coverage area will continue to increase as more states are processed.

Coverage Area - April 2023

If the selected location is not within the coverage area available, the software will display the following informational dialog box.

Lookup Rainfall Informational Dialog Box

After successfully retrieving the rainfall data, the software populates the data in the table provided under the Frequency (Years) subsection. This table displays the rainfall depth/intensity values for various storm durations for 1, 2, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200, 500, and 1000-year storm events.

Frequency (Years) Table

In addition, the user can right-click anywhere in the data table to display a context menu with commands for copying rainfall data to the Windows clipboard or exporting the data in different file formats.

Copying and Exporting Rainfall Data
Meteorology & Precipitation › Meteorology Data

Meteorology Data Command

The meteorologic model is responsible for preparing the boundary conditions that act on the watershed during a simulation. Consequently, a meteorologic model is prepared for use with one or more basin models. If the basin model contains subbasin elements, then the meteorologic model must specify how precipitation will be generated for each subbasin. Evapotranspiration should be included in the model if it is configured for continuous simulation. This would include both evaporation of free water from the vegetation surface as well as the land surface. Evapotranspiration is the combination of evaporation from the ground surface and transpiration by vegetation. Transpiration involves the process of vegetation extracting water from the soil through the plant root system. Whether by evaporation or transpiration, water is returned from the land surface or subsurface to the atmosphere. Even though evaporation and transpiration are taken together, transpiration is responsible for the movement of much more water than evaporation.

In GeoHECHMS, meteorologic boundary conditions, such as storm events, are defined using the Meteorology Data command. This command supports meteorological data such as precipitation and evapotranspiration. Evapotranspiration is only factored in for long-term continuous simulations.

unknown node

Follow the steps below to use the Meteorology Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Meteorology Data command.
    Meteorology Data command
  2. The Meteorology Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Meteorology Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Meteorology Data command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Meteorology

In the Select Meteorology section, the Meteorology ID entry denotes the selected meteorology. The default Meteorology ID is Default Met. The user can create a new meteorology, copy existing meteorology data to a new meteorology, and delete a meteorology. In addition, the user can navigate between meteorologies with use of the Meteorology ID dropdown entry. The user can also enter a description detailing the defined meteorology in the field adjacent to the Meteorology ID dropdown entry.

Select Meteorology section

Meteorology Specifications

In this section, the available dropdown entries are:

  • General Specifications
  • Evapotranspiration Data
  • Precipitation Data
Meteorology Specifications dropdown entry

General Specifications

If the user selects this dropdown entry, the General Specifications panel will be displayed where the user can select the precipitation and evapotranspiration types from the Precipitation type and Evapotranspiration type dropdown combo boxes as shown below.

General Specifications section

After selecting the precipitation and evapotranspiration types, the user can view the corresponding data panels using the Precipitation Data and Evapotranspiration Data panel selector.

Evapotranspiration and Precipitation entries

Note that selecting None from the Precipitation type or Evapotranspiration type dropdown combo boxes disables the Precipitation Data and Evapotranspiration Data panel selectors.

None - Evapotranspiration and Precipitation Types

Precipitation Types

The Precipitation type dropdown menu contains the following entries:

  • None
  • Frequency Storm
  • HMR52 Storm
  • Inverse Distance Weighted
  • Rain Gage
  • Rainfall Distribution
  • SCS Storm
  • Specified Hyetograph
  • Standard Project Storm
Precipitation Types

After selecting the Precipitation type, the user can define the data for the selected precipitation type from the Precipitation Data panel.

The following sections describe the Precipitation Data panel for each precipitation type.

Precipitation Type: Frequency Storm

This precipitation type is used to produce a synthetic storm from HYDRO35, TP40, and TP49 statistical data. Refer to this article to learn more about the Frequency Storm precipitation type.

Precipitation Type: HMR52 Storm

This precipitation type can be used to compute the probable maximum precipitation (PMP) for a watershed. The HMR52 storm precipitation type includes several parameters to describe the location, orientation, and temporal distribution of the storm. Refer to this article to learn more about the HMR52 Storm precipitation type.

Precipitation Type: Inverse Distance Weighted

This precipitation type was originally designed for application in real-time forecasting systems. This precipitation type uses recording gages that are reported at regular intervals such as 15 minutes or 1 hour. Refer to this article to learn more about the Inverse Distance Weighted precipitation type.

Precipitation Type: Rain Gage

This precipitation type is designed to work with time series recording and single value recording precipitation gages. Refer to this article to learn more about the Rain Gage precipitation type.

Precipitation Type: Rainfall Distribution

This precipitation type is a region-based temporal rainfall distribution of different areas. The data used in this precipitation type is created by historical storm events and the statistical analysis for each climate region and then grouped by different durations (6-hr, 12-hr, 24-hr, etc.), quartiles (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th), and percent of occurrence (10%, 20%, 30%, etc.). Refer to this article to learn more about the Rainfall Distribution precipitation type.

Precipitation Type: SCS Storm

Drainage planning in the United States is often performed using hypothetical storms developed by the Soil Conservation Service (SCS), now known as the Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS). These storms were developed by the SCS as averages of rainfall patterns; they are represented in a dimensionless form. The SCS designed this storm method for a small drainage area. This precipitation type intends to estimate both peak flow rate and runoff volume from precipitation of a "critical" duration. Refer to this article to learn more about the SCS Storm precipitation type.

Precipitation Type: Specified Hyetograph

This precipitation type allows the user to specify the exact rain gage time series to use for the hyetograph at each subbasin. This precipitation type is useful when precipitation data is processed externally and imported without modification. Refer to this article to learn more about the Specified Hyetograph precipitation type.

Precipitation Type: Standard Project Storm

This precipitation type provides precipitation versus time relationship that is designed to be reasonably representative of major storms that have occurred or might occur in the area of concern. Refer to this article to learn more about the Standard Project Storm precipitation type.

Evapotranspiration Types

The Evapotranspiration type dropdown menu contains the following entries:

  • None
  • Annual Evapotranspiration
  • Monthly Average
  • User-Defined
Evapotranspiration Types

After selecting the Evapotranspiration type, the user can define the data for the selected evapotranspiration type from the Evapotranspiration Data panel.

The following sections describe the Evapotranspiration Data panel for each evapotranspiration type.

Evapotranspiration Type: Annual Evapotranspiration

This evapotranspiration type is designed to work with a maximum daily rate combined with an optional pattern of variation throughout the year. Each basin has its evaporation rate information.

Specifying only a daily rate can produce good results for simulations lasting a few days to weeks. The optional pattern can be used to adjust the applied evapotranspiration rate during simulations lasting weeks to years. The evapotranspiration for each day of the simulation is computed by multiplying the evapotranspiration rate by the percentage interpolated from the defined percent pattern.

When Annual Evapotranspiration is selected as the Evapotranspiration type, the following data panel will be displayed for the Evapotranspiration Data selector.

Annual Evapotranspiration panel

The above data panel contains the following sections:

Annual Evapotranspiration Specifications

The following data columns are provided in the data grid of this section.

  • Subbasin ID
    This read-only column lists all the subbasins contained within the project.
  • Daily Evapotranspiration Rate
    This column is used to define the daily evapotranspiration rate for subbasins.
  • Percent Weighting Pattern (Optional) ID
    This column contains a dropdown combo box for each subbasin that allows the user to select an already defined weighting pattern to be applied to the defined Daily Evapotranspiration Rate for the subbasin. Clicking the […] button will display the Evapotranspiration Weighting Pattern Data dialog box that allows the user to define the paired data values for the evapotranspiration weighting pattern as shown below.
    Annual Evapotranspiration panel - Evapotranspiration Weighting Pattern Data dialog box

Evapotranspiration Type: Monthly Average

This evapotranspiration type is designed to work with measured pan evaporation data. However, it can also be used with the data collected by the eddy correlation technique or other modern methods. Regardless of how the evapotranspiration data is collected, it is typically presented as the average depth of evaporated water each month.

When the Monthly Average is selected as the Evapotranspiration type, the following data panel will be displayed for the Evapotranspiration Data selector.

Monthly Average evapotranspiration panel

The above data panel contains the following sections:

Monthly Average Evapotranspiration Specifications
  • Apply to all subbasins
    This radio button option is used to apply the defined evapotranspiration rate data to all subbasins.
  • Apply different rates to each subbasin
    This radio button option is used to define a separate evapotranspiration rate for each subbasin.
Monthly Average Evapotranspiration Rate Data

In the Select subbasin dropdown combo box, all the subbasins within the model are listed. This allows the user to select a specific subbasin and define unique evapotranspiration data for that subbasin. If the Apply to all subbasins radio button is selected, the Select subbasin dropdown combo box lists will be disabled.

The following data columns are provided in the data grid of this section.

  • Evapotranspiration Rate
    This data column represents the evapotranspiration rate to be applied monthly.
  • Pan Coefficient
    This data column represents the pan coefficient to be applied monthly. The evapotranspiration rate is multiplied by the pan coefficient to determine the final potential rate for each month.

Evapotranspiration Type: User-Defined

This evapotranspiration type allows the user to specify an exact time series to use for the potential evapotranspiration. It is also useful when a single evapotranspiration observation measurement is used over a subbasin.

When User-Defined is selected as the Evapotranspiration type, the following data panel will be displayed for the Evapotranspiration Data selector.

User Defined evapotranspiration panel

The above data panel contains the following sections:

User-Defined Evapotranspiration Specifications
  • Apply to all subbasins
    This radio button option is used to apply the defined evapotranspiration rate data to all subbasins.
  • Apply different rates to each subbasin
    This radio button option is used to define a specific evapotranspiration rate for each subbasin.
Evapotranspiration Assignment to All Subbasins

Note that this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the Apply different rates to each subbasin radio button entry is selected. Otherwise, if this section is enabled, all subbasins are assigned the same evapotranspiration time series gage.

The Evapotranspiration gage ID dropdown combo box lists all the evapotranspiration time series gages contained within the model. This allows the user to select a specific gage to define unique evapotranspiration data to all the subbasins within the scenario. Clicking the […] button will display the Evapotranspiration Time Series Gages Data dialog box that allows the user to define evapotranspiration time series gage data as shown below.

User-Defined evapotranspiration panel - Evapotranspiration Time Series Gage Data dialog box
Individual Evapotranspiration Subbasin Assignment

This section is disabled (i.e., grayed out) if the Apply to all subbasins radio button is selected. Otherwise, if this section is enabled, each subbasin is assigned its own evapotranspiration time series gage.

The following data columns are provided in the data grid of this section.

  • Subbasin ID
    This read-only column lists all the subbasins contained within the project.
  • Evapotranspiration gage ID
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select a specific gage to define and assign unique evapotranspiration data to all subbasins contained within the project.

After specifying all of the necessary precipitation and evapotranspiration data for the specified scenario, the user should compute the analysis to incorporate the defined meteorology data into the project.

Meteorology & Precipitation › Meteorology Data

HEC-HMS Model Components

Model Components

Model components are used to simulate the hydrologic response in a watershed. The primary GeoHECHMS model components are basin models, meteorologic models, and control specifications. A simulation calculates the precipitation-runoff response in the basin model given input from the meteorologic model. The control specifications define the time and time step of the simulation run.

In basin and meteorologic models, the input data components such as time-series data, paired data, and gridded data are often required as parameters or boundary conditions.

Basin Model Component

Basin models are one of the major components of a project. Their main purpose is to convert atmospheric conditions into streamflow at a specific location in the watershed. The hydrologic elements of a basin model such as subbasin, reach, junction, etc., are used to break the watershed into manageable entities. These elements are connected in a dendritic network to form a representation of the stream system. A background map can also be used to help place the elements in a spatial context.

Contributing Elements

Hydrologic contributing elements are the basic building blocks of a basin model. An element represents a physical process such as a watershed catchment, stream reach, or confluence. Each element contributes to the total response of the watershed to atmospheric forcing.

The different contributing elements available in GeoHECHMS are as follows:

  • Subbasin: The subbasin element is used to represent the physical watershed. Given precipitation, outflow from the subbasin element is calculated by subtracting precipitation losses, transforming excess precipitation to stream flow at the subbasin outlet, and adding baseflow.
  • Reach: The reach element is used to convey stream flow downstream in the basin model. Inflow into the reach element can come from one or many upstream hydrologic elements. Outflow from the reach is calculated by accounting for translation and attenuation of the inflow hydrograph.
  • Junction: The junction element is used to combine stream flow from hydrologic elements located upstream of the junction element. Inflow into the junction element can come from one or many upstream elements. Outflow is simply calculated by summing all the inflows and assuming no storage at the junction.
  • Source: The source element is used to introduce flow into the basin model. The source element has no inflow and its outflow is defined by the user.
  • Sink: The sink element is used to represent the outlet of the physical watershed. There is no outflow from the sink element. Inflow into the sink element can come from one or many upstream hydrologic elements.
  • Storage Areas: The storage area element is used to model the detention and attenuation of a hydrograph caused by a reservoir or detention pond. Inflow into the storage element can come from one or many upstream hydrologic elements. Outflow from the storage element can be calculated in three ways. In a first way, the user can enter the relationship among the storage outflow, elevation storage outflow, or elevation area outflow. In a second way, the user can enter the elevation storage or elevation area relationship and define one or more outlet structures. Finally, the user can specify a time-series of outflow.
  • Diversion: The diversion element is used for modeling stream flow leaving the main channel. Inflow into the diversion element can come from one or many upstream hydrologic elements. Outflow from the diversion element consists of diverted flow and non-diverted flow. Diverted flow is calculated using input from the user. Both diverted and non-diverted flows can be connected to hydrologic elements downstream of the diversion element.

In GeoHECHMS, the Contributing Subbasins and Contributing Reaches commands are present, where the user can right-click on any node or reach and ask the software to show the contributing drainage area or reaches.

Contributing Subbasins and Contributing Reaches

Network Connectivity

The flow network is the skeleton that connects hydrologic elements into a representation of the stream system in the watershed. Each link in the network is a one-way connector that takes outflow from an element and connects it as an inflow to a downstream element. The connection information of the flow network along with the drainage area at each element is used to sort the elements in hydrologic order.

Reach elements are often connected between two junctions or possibly between other element types. Reach elements must be connected to the upstream and downstream elements.

In GeoHECHMS, the Network Connectivity command allows the user to check the network connectivity in the model, which ensures that there are not any disconnected (i.e., disjointed) network segments present in the model. To use this command, select any node or reach from the Map View and then right-click and select the Network Connectivity command from the displayed context menu. Now all the subnetworks will get highlighted, which provides better visualization and helps to identify any discontinuity in the network.

Network Connectivity command

Routing Methods

In developing hydrologic models, there are two essential requirements - a runoff-generation component and a routing component. Routing is an essential component of any hydrology modeling project for the derivation of time series of flows into the oceans and studies of climate/land use change on water resources.

The different routing methods available in GeoHECHMS are as follows:

  • Kinematic Wave
  • Lag Time
  • Lag Time & Attenuation
  • Modified Puls
  • Muskingum
  • Muskingum Cunge
  • Normal Depth
  • Straddle Stagger

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about HEC-HMS routing methods.

Hydrology Methods

The hydrology methods work together to estimate the total runoff from a subbasin during the precipitation event. Total runoff from a subbasin is computed by subtracting losses, transforming excess precipitation, and adding baseflow.

The different hydrology methods available in GeoHECHMS are as follows:

  • Infiltration (loss)
  • Runoff (transform)
  • Baseflow
  • Surface storage
  • Canopy

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about HEC-HMS hydrology methods.

Meteorologic Model Component

The meteorologic model is responsible for preparing the boundary conditions that act on the watershed during a simulation. The meteorologic model is prepared to use with one or more basin models. If the basin model contains subbasin elements, then the meteorologic model must specify how precipitation will be generated for each subbasin. Evapotranspiration should be included in the meteorologic model when the basin model is configured for a continuous simulation.

The different precipitation and evapotranspiration types available in GeoHECHMS are as follows:

  1. Precipitation Types
    • Frequency Storm
    • HMR52 Storm
    • Inverse Distance Weighted
    • Rain Gage
    • Rainfall Distribution
    • SCS Storm
    • Specified Hyetograph
    • Standard Project Storm
  2. Evapotranspiration Types
    • Annual Evapotranspiration
    • Monthly Average
    • User-Defined

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about HEC-HMS hydrology methods.

Control Specifications Component

Control specifications are one of the main components of the hydrology project. Their major purpose is to control when simulations start and stop, and what time interval is to be used in the HEC-HMS hydrology simulation. The control specifications also include the time interval that will be used to perform computations during a simulation. The time interval defined in the control specification will also be used in displaying time-series results from the simulation. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about control specifications.

Meteorology & Precipitation › Meteorology Data

HEC-HMS Hydrology Methods

Hydrology is the science that encompasses the occurrence, distribution, movement, and properties of the earth's waters and their relationship with the environment within each phase of the hydrologic cycle. The hydrologic cycle is a continuous process by which water is purified by evaporation and transported from the earth's surface (including the oceans) to the atmosphere and back to the land and oceans.

Hydrologic Cycle Image 1

The hydrologic cycle is divided into logical phases or processes and is incorporated in the HEC-HMS software. These processes are simulated to varying levels of detail and work together to estimate the total runoff from a subbasin.

HEC-HMS calculates the total subbasin runoff by computing the volume of water that is intercepted, infiltrated, stored, evaporated, or transpired and subtracting it from the precipitation. This article describes various hydrology methods that are used within HEC-HMS to compute total runoff from a subbasin.

Computing Total Runoff with HEC-HMS

Total runoff from a subbasin is computed by subtracting precipitation loss, transforming excess precipitation (direct-runoff), and adding baseflow. In addition, a canopy component and a surface component can be included in the computations. The canopy component accounts for the precipitation loss due to interception by vegetation and evapotranspiration. The surface component accounts for water caught in surface depressional storage.

Computing Total Runoff with HEC-HMS Image 2

HEC-HMS includes multiple methods to model physical runoff processes where the user selects an appropriate method based on data availability and requirements. Different methodologies are available to estimate infiltration losses, canopy, and surface interception, transform excess precipitation into surface runoff, and calculate baseflow contributions to subbasin runoff.

Infiltration Methods

Infiltration represents the movement of water to areas beneath the land surface. Infiltration methods are used to calculate precipitation loss due to infiltration. It is impossible to precisely predict infiltration in heterogeneous soil over commonly used modeling scales, such as hundreds to thousands of square miles. Thus, many simplifications were made over time to calculate a near accurate rate of infiltration; Several infiltration methods are available to calculate infiltration losses.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about various infiltration methods and how to use them to compute surface runoff.

Runoff Methods

Runoff (Transform) methods are used to transform the excess precipitation (after the losses have been subtracted) into surface runoff (direct-runoff). HEC-HMS provides two types of transform methods:

  • Empirical methods: These are the traditional unit hydrograph (UH) methods. These methods attempt to establish a causal linkage between runoff and excess precipitation without detailed consideration of internal processes. The equations and associated parameters have limited physical significance. Instead, they have been developed through optimization of some goodness-of-fit criteria.
  • Conceptual methods: The conceptual methods include the kinematic-wave method of overland flow. To the extent possible, the Kinematic-wave method represents all physical mechanisms that govern the movement of excess precipitation through the watershed and in small collector channels in the watershed.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about various runoff methods and how to use them to compute surface runoff.

Baseflow Methods

Baseflow methods are used to represent contributions to subbasin runoff due to excess groundwater. Baseflow is comprised of runoff that infiltrates into the ground, flows down gradient or slope, and then reaches back on the land surface and flows back into small channels. The smaller channels merge in a larger channel, then into the stream and river and so on.

Baseflow comprises mainly two components: Interflow and Baseflow (saturated ground water). Interflow is the water that travels in the unsaturated portion of the soil down gradient and then at some point comes back onto the land surface to merge in small streams or channels. Baseflow is the water that percolates into the groundwater and then from the groundwater contributes to channel flow at some point.

Conceptual and process-based methods, also known as physically based methods, are available to model baseflow. HEC-HMS includes only conceptual methods, which means that the model in use should be calibrated accordingly when using any baseflow methods.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about various baseflow methods and how to use them to compute surface runoff.

Surface Storage Methods

Surface storage methods are used to compute precipitation losses due to local depressions in the ground surface, cracks and crevices in parking lots or roofs. The surface component is included to represent the ground surface where water may accumulate in surface depression storage.

Selecting a surface method is optional and generally only used for continuous simulation applications. If no surface storage method is selected, the subbasin will not compute losses due to depression storage, and all precipitation will be treated as direct runoff subject to canopy interception and soil infiltration.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about various surface storage methods and how to use them to compute surface runoff.

Canopy Methods

The canopy component represents the presence of plants in the landscape. Plants intercept precipitation, reducing the amount of precipitation that arrives at the ground surface. Intercepted water evaporates between storm events. Plants also extract water from the soil in a process called transpiration. Evaporation and transpiration are often combined as evapotranspiration. Canopy methods are used to account for precipitation loss due to evapotranspiration.

Selecting a canopy method is optional but should be used for continuous simulation applications. If no canopy method is selected, the subbasin will not compute any losses due to evapotranspiration and all precipitation will be treated as direct precipitation.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn about various canopy methods and how to use them to compute surface runoff.

Cross Sections (HEC-HMS context) › Creation & Drawing

Draw and Assign Cross Sections Command (HEC-HMS)

Cross sections are located at intervals along a stream to characterize the flow-carrying capability of the stream and the adjacent floodplain. They should extend across the entire floodplain and should be perpendicular to the anticipated flow lines. Sometimes it is necessary to layout cross sections in a curved or a dog-leg alignment to meet this requirement. They should not intersect each other and should remain perpendicular to the main channel.

In GeoHECHMS, cross sections can be defined by either drawing or assigning polylines on the Map View using the following commands:

  • Draw Cross Sections
  • Assign Cross Sections

Drawing/Assigning Cross Sections

The Draw/Assign Cross Sections command allows the user to manually draw/assign polylines on the Map View as cross sections one after another until completed as well as to extract the cross section geometry from the underlying ground terrain.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw/Assign Cross Sections command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Cross Sections dropdown menu and then choose the Draw/Assign Cross Sections command.
    Draw/Assign Cross Sections Input ribbon menu commands
  2. The following dialog boxes will be displayed.
    • Draw Cross Sections:
      Draw Cross Sections dialog box
    • Assign Cross Sections:
      Assign Cross Sections dialog box

Note that the user can press the shortcut key (Ctrl+D) to automatically start the Draw Cross Sections command.

The following sections describe how to use the Draw and Assign Cross Sections commands and interact with the above dialog boxes.

Drawing Cross Sections

Drawing Cross Sections Polylines

This section is used to interactively draw a polyline on the Map View to assign it as a cross section. It is highly recommended that the rest of the dialog box input parameters be defined before drawing the cross sections on the Map View. These parameters define information, such as how the cross section IDs should be numbered and where the cross section geometry will be extracted from.

To draw cross section polylines, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Draw Cross Section Polylines section, click the [Draw] button, and the Draw Cross Sections dialog box will temporarily disappear. Use the Draw curvilinear polyline checkbox option to draw the polyline using curvilinear segments.[Draw] button
  2. Draw cross section polylines across the river from one side to the other on the Map View. While drawing elements, the user can use the [Ctrl] key to switch between curvilinear and linear digitizing. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about drawing elements on the Map View.
    Note that the drawn polyline must cross an existing river reach. Otherwise, the software will report this as an issue.
  3. After completing the cross section drawing, the Draw Cross Sections dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Cross section polylines read-only field will be changed from Not Drawn to Drawn.
    Cross section polylines read-only field

Assigning Cross Sections

Selecting Cross Section Polylines

The Select Cross Section Polylines section can be used to manually assign polylines on the Map View as a cross section.

To assign polylines as a cross section, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Select Cross Section Polylines section, click the [Pick] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear.
    [Pick] button
  2. The status bar (shown under the Map View) will prompt you to select a polyline from the Map View to assign it as a cross section. Click on the previously drawn polyline on the Map View to select it.
  3. Following the selection of a cross section polyline, the Assign Cross Sections dialog box will be redisplayed, and the Cross sections polylines read-only field will be changed from Not Selected to Selected.
    Cross sections polylines read-only field
    Note that if a polyline has been preselected before running this command, the Cross section polylines read-only field will be shown selected on opening the Assign Cross Sections command.

Cross Section Specifications

This section is common to both the Draw Cross Sections and Assign Cross Sections dialog box and is used to specify the cross section ID for each drawn/assigned cross section. The user can assign these IDs either manually or automatically using some predefined formats.

Follow the steps below to assign cross section IDs:

  1. If a cross section was drawn/assigned while the Cross section ID radio button option was selected, the user can manually enter the cross section ID in the corresponding field as shown below.
    Cross section ID radio button option
  2. Alternatively, the user can enable the Auto-name cross section ID radio button option to automatically name every newly drawn/assigned cross section as per the user’s predefined naming formats as shown below.
    Auto-name cross section ID radio button option
    The different cross section naming formats present in the Auto-name cross section ID option are as follows:
    • Use corresponding reach numerical ID portion: This option extracts the numerical ID from the corresponding reach ID and applies it to the cross section ID. Selecting this option will disable (i.e., grayed out) the following options:
      1. Cross section ID digits
      2. Next available cross section ID
      3. Cross section ID increment
    • Cross section ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the start of the cross section ID.
    • Cross section ID digits: This option permits the specification of a set number of digits to use for the cross section ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the cross section ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
    • Next available cross section ID: This entry defines the next element ID number to be used.
    • Cross section ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering elements. The default value is 1.
    • Cross section ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the cross section ID.
    • Cross section ID preview: This entry provides a preview of the cross section naming specifications defined above.
  3. After providing the cross section ID, press the [Enter] key or click the [Apply] button.
    [Apply] button

Note that if the auto-name option is enabled and the user returns to the dialog box, the [Apply] button is disabled since the just drawn/assigned cross sections have already been named and created.

Other Specifications

This section is common to both the Draw Cross Sections and Assign Cross Sections dialog box and is used to define the geometry extraction specifications for each drawn/assigned cross section.

Other Specifications - Extraction Data panel

Extraction Data

This tabbed panel is used to define the data extraction specifications for the selected cross sections.

Extract Elevation Data

This optional section is used to define the elevation data source(s) to be used for extracting the cross section geometry. The user can use the Primary and Secondary Elevation Data panels to define the primary and secondary (if available in the project) elevation data sources for extracting the cross section geometry. Depending upon the elevation data source type that is selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base for information on the types of terrain elevation data that can be used for constructing cross sections.

When a secondary elevation data source is available, the software will form a concave hull around the primary elevation data source to identify its bounds. For locations where elevation data from the primary data source are unavailable, the software will use the elevation data from the secondary data source.

Note that the user cannot utilize the same data source to define both primary and secondary elevation data.

The user can click the [Swap Sources] button to swap the selected elevation source from primary elevation data to secondary elevation data and vice versa.

If this section checkbox is unchecked, then the subsequent section below it (Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control section) will be unavailable (i.e., grayed out).

Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control

This optional section is used to control the amount of cross section geometry to extract for the drawn cross section polylines. This assures that an adequately deep enough cross section is created on both sides of the river reach. The software will attempt to retrieve the cross section geometry data to the depth specified within the specified maximum cross section width.

If the drawn polyline does not extend outward far enough to get the cross section depth specified, the software will automatically extend the constructed cross section further outward. Similarly, if the drawn polyline extends too far outward for the depth specified, the software will automatically trim the constructed cross section.

Assigning Manning’s Roughness and Flow Lengths

During the extraction of the cross section geometry, the software will automatically assign a default Manning’s roughness for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank areas. However, the user can adjust these Manning’s roughness values in the Roughness tabbed panel.

Other Specifications - Roughness panel

Note that while defining Manning’s n values, the user can click the […] button to display the Manning’s Roughness dialog box. This dialog box provides a reference to Manning’s roughness coefficients for some commonly used surface materials.

unknown node

Cross Sections (HEC-HMS context) › Creation & Drawing

Automated Draw Cross Sections Command (HEC-HMS)

In GeoHECHMS, the Automated Draw Cross Sections command causes the software to automatically cut cross sections along a reach polyline. The software will attempt to uniformly space cross sections along the routing reach, creating cross sections that are perpendicular to the reach. In places where adjoining cross sections might cross each other, the software will intelligently bisect the cross section point of intersection and then run the adjoining cross sections parallel to each other.

Follow the steps below to use the Automated Draw Cross Sections command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Cross Sections dropdown menu and then choose the Automated Draw Cross Sections command.Automated Draw Cross Sections Input ribbon menu command
  2. The Automated Draw Cross Sections dialog box will be displayed.Automated Draw Cross Sections dialog box

The following sections describe the Automated Draw Cross Sections command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Reach Polyline

This section is used to select the reach alignment polyline(s) that will be used to automatically draw cross sections.

Select Reach Polyline section

Click the [Pick] button, and the dialog box will temporarily disappear. A prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the reach alignment polyline(s). The user can then select the reach alignment polyline(s) from the Map View.

Once finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Automated Draw Cross Sections dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected reach alignment polylines will be shown in the Reach polyline read-only entry.

Reach polyline read-only entry

Note that if a reach alignment polyline(s) has been preselected before running this command, the same number of selected polylines will be displayed in the Reach polyline read-only entry.

General Settings

This tabbed panel is used to define the general settings for the cross sections to be created.

General Settings panel

Cross Section River Stationing

This section is used to control the numbering of the cross section river stations. The cross section river stations need to be unique per river reach, and need to increase in value as they move up the river reach. Cross sections can be numbered using a fixed increment or by the river chainage along the river reach. The river chainage can be in miles or feet if working in US units, or kilometers or meters if working in metric (SI) units.

The following options are provided:

  • Numbering direction: This dropdown combo box defines the direction in which the cross section IDs are increasing. The following options are available:
    1. Increasing Downstream
    2. Increasing Upstream (HEC-RAS style) (default)
      Based on the option selected, the content of the Use Reach Distance subpanel and the Cross Section Placement section will be changed.
  • Cross section ID prefix: This option allows a prefix to be added to the start of the cross section ID. By default, the Cross section ID prefix checkbox is checked.
  • Cross section ID suffix: This option allows a suffix to be added to the end of the cross section ID. By default, the Cross section ID suffix checkbox is checked.
  • Cross section ID preview: This read-only entry provides a preview of the cross section naming specifications defined above.

Use Reach Distance

This subpanel is used to number the cross section by using the river chainage along the river reach. Select the Use Reach Distance radio button to enable this subpanel.

The following options are provided:

  • Downstream cross section ID: This entry field allows the user to define the downstream most cross section ID for each selected reach and is used to determine the starting point for numbering the cross sections along the reach.
    Note that if the Increasing Downstream option is selected in the Numbering direction dropdown combo box, then the Downstream cross section ID entry will be changed in the Upstream cross section ID. In addition, the numbering methodology is altered to account for the selected direction.Numbering direction dropdown entry
  • Upstream cross section ID: This entry field allows the user to define the upstream most cross section ID for each selected reach and is used to determine the starting point in order to number the cross sections along the reach.
  • Distance units: This dropdown combo box defines the unit for the reach length. Two available options are:
    1. Feet
    2. Miles
  • Decimal precision: This optional checkbox defines the decimal precision to be used in determining the cross section IDs. By default, this checkbox is disabled (i.e., grayed out). If enabled, then the user can enter a value ranging from 0 to 6.

Use Auto Increment

This subpanel is used to number the cross sections using a fixed increment. Select the Use Auto Increment radio button to enable this subpanel.

Use Auto Increment subpanel

The following options are provided:

  • Cross section ID digits: This option permits specification of a set number of digits to use for the cross section ID. For example, using 3 digits causes the cross section ID to be of the format 001, 002, etc.
  • Next available Cross section ID: This entry defines the next element ID number to be used.
  • Cross section ID increment: This entry defines the increment to use when numbering elements. The default value is 1.

Cross Section Placement

This section is used to define the placement of cross sections along the selected reach polyline(s).

Cross Section Placement section

The following options are provided:

  • Approximate (max) cross section spacing This field allows the user to define the maximum distance between cross sections when placing the cross sections. The software will attempt to uniformly space the cross sections along each river reach, up to this maximum spacing. This prevents the last cross sections created along a reach from being spaced too close together. By default, the software uses a value of 500 feet (when working in US units) or 150 meters (when working in metric SI units). Clicking on the […] button allows the user to measure the approximate (max) cross section spacing from the Map View.
  • Cross section width This field allows the user to define the cross section width to be used when extracting cross section geometry from the terrain data. However, the defined cross section width is a starting point; additional criteria are provided to control how much data is to be extracted when the user extracts the ground geometry from the terrain. By default, the software uses a value of 500 feet (when working in US units) or 150 meters (when working in metric SI units). Clicking on the […] button allows the user to measure the cross section width from the Map View.
    Note that the Cross section width field is ignored if the user has enabled the Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control section from the Extraction Data panel.
  • Offset from downstream reach end This entry field is used to define the distance from a downstream reach end where cross sections should be located. This prevents a cross section from being placed directly at a river reach. By default, the software uses a value of 500 feet (when working in US units) or 150 meters (when working in metric SI units). Clicking on the […] button allows the user to measure the offset from river reach end from the Map View.
    Note that if the Increasing Downstream option is selected in the Numbering direction dropdown combo box, then the Offset from downstream reach end entry will be changed in the Offset from upstream reach end.Offset from upstream reach end

Extraction Data

This tabbed panel is used to define the data extraction specifications based on the options selected for the cross sections.

Extraction Data panel

Extract Elevation Data

This optional section is used to define the elevation data source(s) to be used for extracting the cross section geometry. Depending upon the elevation data source type that is selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base for information on the types of terrain elevation data that can be used for constructing cross sections.

If the Extract Elevation Data checkbox is unchecked, then the subsequent sections below it will be unavailable (i.e., grayed out). In addition, no geometry will be created when the cross sections are created. The cross sections will be just flat horizontal lines at elevation 0.

The user can also apply the elevation offset by enabling the Apply elevation offset checkbox entry. On selecting this checkbox, the entry field next to it becomes available for entering an elevation offset value. For example, the user can define a negative offset value to lower the junction for specific circumstances, such as in the case of a manhole bottom elevation.

Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control

This checkbox optional section is used to provide additional control in terms of the cross section geometry data to be extracted from the terrain model for the automatically drawn cross section polylines. These controls provide additional intelligence on whether to extend or limit the cross section cutting, based upon whether specific criteria have been met. This assures that an adequately deep enough cross section is created on both sides of the river reach. The software will attempt to retrieve the cross section geometry data to the depth specified within the specified maximum cross section width.

If the drawn polyline does not extend outward far enough to get the cross section depth specified, the software will automatically extend the constructed cross section further outward. Similarly, if the drawn polyline extends too far outward for the depth specified, the software will automatically trim the constructed cross section.

Alignment Settings

This panel is primarily used to perform automated cross section creation along sinuous (meandering) river reaches and is not used for other conditions. By default, the content of this panel is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Select the Generalize Cross Section Alignment checkbox option to enable this panel.

Alignment Settings panel

To learn more about this panel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Roughness

This panel allows the user to adjust the Manning’s roughness values for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank areas during the construction of cross sections.

Roughness panel

To learn more about this panel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Cross Sections (HEC-HMS context) › Creation & Drawing

HEC-HMS Cross Sections

Cross sections are developed based on the location layout of cross section lines and properties from other layers such as the river reach, bank lines, and terrain layers. Cross sections should be drawn perpendicular to where water will flow in the channel and overbank areas. Cross sections are used to route the flow from one node to another in the basin model.

When selecting a routing method, multiple options are provided for specifying the cross-section shape: circular, 8-point, rectangle, tabular, trapezoid, and triangular. Depending upon the chosen shape, additional information must be entered to describe the size and shape of the cross-section. The user can select the cross section shape and define the additional information for the selected shape in the Routing Data panel of the Reach Data dialog box. However, for 8-point and tabular cross sections, this data can also be defined and modified in the Cross Section Data dialog box.

Note that the 8-Point cross section can be defined for both the Muskingum Cunge and Normal Depth routing methods. However, the tabular cross section can only be defined for the Muskingum Cunge routing method.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about HEC-HMS routing methods.

GeoHECHMS can automatically extract and simplify the cross section geometry into an 8-point cross section and store this data in the Cross Section Data dialog box. This dialog box contains the geometry data, bank station, Manning's roughness, and other related data.

unknown node

Follow the steps below to view or modify the cross section data:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Cross Sections Data command.
    Cross Sections Data command
    Alternatively, the user can either double-click on the cross section polyline from the Map View or choose the Cross Section Data command from the Cross Sections dropdown menu of the Input ribbon menu.
    Cross Section Data command from the Cross Sections dropdown menu
  2. The Cross Section Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Cross Section Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to define the cross section data and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Cross Section

This section allows the user to select the cross section for defining the cross section data.

The Cross section ID dropdown combo box lists the cross section IDs of the irregular cross section geometry already defined. This allows the user to select a cross section geometry that has already been defined. Click the pencil icon and select the cross section ID to edit the cross section data.

Note that this data field is mapped to the Cross section ID field defined for the Muskingum Cunge routing method of the Reach Data dialog box. Changing the value in either field will update the value in the other field.

The [Delete] button can be used to delete the current cross section geometry and corresponding cross section ID.

The corresponding reach for the selected cross section is displayed in the Reach ID read-only field. However, in HEC-HMS it is possible to create multiple reaches that reference the same irregular cross section geometry. In those situations, this field shows Not Available. If there is a one-to-one relationship so that the cross section is assigned to a single river reach, the pencil icon will be enabled. Clicking on the pencil icon will allow the user to edit the reach ID.

The user can navigate between previous and next cross sections using the up and down arrow buttons. Alternatively, the user can click the […] button to select the cross section from the Map View.

Note that the up and down arrow buttons will be disabled (i.e., grayed out) when the model contains only a single cross section.

Cross Section Geometry

This section contains the data for the 8-point cross section, tabular cross section, and original cross section geometry.

8-Point Cross Section

This panel defines the station-elevation data for the 8-point cross section shape. The cross section is usually configured to represent the main channel plus left and right overbank areas. A separate Manning's n value is entered for each overbank. The cross section should extend from the channel invert up to the maximum water surface elevation that will be encountered during a simulation.

8-Point Cross Section panel

The following parameters are provided in this panel:

  • Horizontal Station
    This data column represents the cross section stationing (x-coordinates) of the ground point.
  • Ground Elevation
    This data column represents the elevation (y-coordinates) of the ground points chosen from the horizontal station in cross section.
  • Set channel depth
    This entry defines the width of the channel in the cross section. This value is critical in determining the correct discharge value. The left overbank, channel, and right overbank flow values are computed separately and then summed together to get the total discharge value at the corresponding elevation.

Clicking the [Compute] button allows the user to recompute 8-point and tabular cross section geometry for the current reach. For recomputing the 8-point and tabular cross section geometry of all reaches at once, the user can click the [Compute All] button.

Tabular Cross Section

After extracting a cross section from the terrain surface, the software can compute an equivalent tabular representation of the cross section—similar to how an 8-point cross section is defined. This panel is used to store the data used by HEC-HMS for tabular cross sections.

The tabular shape cross section allows the use of user-defined elevation vs. discharge, elevation vs. flow area, and elevation vs. top width relationships. Tabular cross sections are typically used when relationships derived from hydraulic simulations are available. For tabular cross sections, no Manning's n roughness coefficients need to be entered.

Tabular Cross Section panel

The following parameters are provided in this panel:

  • Elevation
    This data column represents incremental elevations, starting at the bottom of the channel and increasing in elevation to where the maximum elevation is on both sides of the original cross section. These elevation values are incremental and automatically computed based on the cross section invert elevation and the set value for the Set tabular elevation increment.
  • Top Width
    This data column represents the corresponding top width at the defined elevation. These values are computed by determining the total width available at the corresponding elevation from the original cross section geometry.
  • Flow Area
    This data column represents the total area (i.e., flow area) at the specified elevation using the previously determined elevations and top widths.
  • Discharge
    This data column represents the computed discharge (i.e., flow) values using Manning's equation by computing the flow separately for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank regions using the defined Manning's values and reach longitudinal slope. Note that this value must be higher than the maximum expected inflow to the reach. Otherwise, the software will generate an error during the simulation.
  • Set tabular elevation increment
    This field represents the step size to be used in computing the elevation values in the above table. The default value is 0.5 ft (or 0.2 m).
  • Set reach longitudinal slope (V:H)
    This entry defines the river channel slope where the cross section was cut. This value is automatically computed by the software.
  • Set channel depth
    This entry is similar to what was provided in the 8-Point Cross Section panel.

Original Cross Section

This panel displays the original cross section geometry that was retrieved from the underlying terrain model. However, HEC-HMS does not use this data.

Original Cross Section panel

Manning's Roughness

This section allows the user to enter Manning's roughness values for the left overbank, main channel, and right overbank.

Manning's Roughness section

The following parameters are provided in this section:

  • Left overbank Manning's n
    This entry field defines Manning's roughness for the left overbank area. Note that previously defined Manning's n values from the previously defined cross section are carried over to the new cross section as they are created.
  • Channel Manning's n
    This entry field defines Manning's roughness for the main channel. Note that this data field is mapped to the Manning's roughness field defined for the Muskingum Cunge routing method of the Reach Data dialog box. Changing the value in either field will update the value in the other field.
  • Right overbank Manning's n
    This entry field defines Manning's roughness for the right overbank area.

Clicking on the […] button displays a Manning's Roughness lookup table dialog box.

Manning's Roughness dialog box

Cross Section Plot

This section displays the profile plot of the cross section geometry. It contains a tool palette that allows the user to zoom, pan, select, edit, navigate, and perform other functions on the cross section plot. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about toolbar commands.

Cross Section Plot

For an 8-point cross section, the plot will show both the 8-point cross section geometry and the original cross section geometry (if it exists) as two separate lines. The lines have different colors so that the user can distinguish between the two cross sections. The user can modify the 8-point cross section geometry using the tool palette to better match the actual cross section geometry.

For a tabular cross section, the plot will show both the tabular cross section geometry and the original cross section geometry (if it exists) as two separate lines. The user cannot modify the tabular cross section geometry.

Cross Sections (HEC-HMS context) › Editing & Extraction

Extract Cross Section Geometry Command (HEC-HMS)

In GeoHECHMS, the Extract Cross Section Geometry command allows the user to extract the cross section geometry from an underlying elevation grid where valid elevation data are present. The software will automatically recognize the limits of the elevation data and extract the cross section geometry for that data. It will not try to extract cross section geometry data where valid elevation data are not present.

For example, the underlying elevation grid might be of the river channel only. Previously, extracting the cross section geometry for this area required that the user define the channel bank stations at the limits of the elevation data and then extract the cross section geometry only for the cross section channel. If the user tried to extract the cross section geometry for the overbank areas, the overbank geometry would be flat.

Follow the steps given below to use the Extract Cross Section Geometry command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Cross Sections dropdown menu and then choose the Extract Cross Section Geometry command. Extract Cross Section Geometry input ribbon menu command
  2. The Extract Cross Section Geometry dialog box will be displayed. Extract Cross Section Geometry dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Extract Cross Section Geometry command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Cross Sections

The Select Cross Sections section is used to manually select cross sections in order to extract geometry. If a cross section is already selected on the Map View prior to running this command, the same cross section will be shown selected within the table.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to interactively select the cross sections from the Map View. The dialog box will temporarily disappear. Either select cross sections one by one, or click on the reach and all associated cross sections will be selected from the Map View. After selecting the cross sections, press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The Extract Cross Section Geometry dialog box will be redisplayed and the total number of selected cross sections will be shown in the Total selected read-only field.

Total selected read-only field

In addition, the user can select/deselect the desired cross section by checking/unchecking the checkboxes corresponding to each cross section in the table listing.

Extraction Data

This panel is used to define the data extraction specifications for the selected cross sections.

Extraction Data panel

Extracting Elevation Data

The Extract Elevation Data section is used to define the elevation data source(s) to be used for extracting the cross section geometry. Depending on the selected elevation data source type, the content of this panel changes to specify additional elevation data information.

Refer to this article in our knowledge base for information on the types of terrain elevation data that can be used for constructing cross sections.

Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control

This optional section is used to provide additional control in terms of the cross section geometry data to be extracted from the terrain model for the selected cross section polylines. These controls provide additional intelligence on whether to extend or limit the cross section cutting, based upon whether specific criteria have been met. This assures the user that adequately deep cross sections have been created on both sides of the river reach. The software will attempt to retrieve the cross section geometry data to the depth specified within the specified maximum cross section width.

If the selected polylines do not extend outward far enough to get the cross section depth specified, the software will automatically extend the cross sections further outward. Similarly, if the selected polylines extend too far outward for the cross section depth specified, the software will automatically trim the cross sections.

By default, this section is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Select the Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control checkbox to enable this section.

Cross Section Extraction Options

This section is used to control which portions of the cross section(s) are to be extracted.

Cross Section Extraction Options section

For example, the user may have survey data for the cross section channel and a LIDAR digital terrain surface for the overbank areas.

In this example, the user would only want to extract the cross section geometry for the overbank areas since the surveyed channel geometry is already accurate.

The Extract cross section geometry for dropdown combo box entry contains the following options:

  • Both Overbanks
  • Channel Only
  • Entire Cross Section (default)
  • Left Overbank Only
  • Right Overbank Only Extract cross section geometry for dropdown

The Retain existing cross section geometry checkbox option is used to retain the geometry of the cross sections that were extracted previously using the CAD file. By default, this checkbox is unchecked.

Assigning Manning’s Roughness and Flow Lengths

During the extraction of the cross section geometry, the software will automatically assign a default Manning’s roughness for the left overbank, channel, and right overbank areas. However, the user can adjust these Manning’s roughness values in the Roughness panel as shown below.

Roughness panel

Note that, while defining the Manning’s n values, the user can click the […] button to display the Manning’s Roughness dialog box. This dialog box provides a reference to Manning’s roughness coefficients for some commonly used surface materials.

Manning’s Roughness dialog box

When all the options have been defined, click the [OK] button and the software will extract the cross section geometry from the elevation terrain.

Cross Sections (HEC-HMS context) › Georeferencing & Renumbering

Georeference Cross Sections Command (HEC-HMS)

When the GeoHECHMS software imports a model, it automatically places the cross sections on the Map View. However, if the original model was not spatially georeferenced, the cross sections will not align with any loaded background base map. While the software can operate without any issues in this situation, it is preferable to have the cross sections georeferenced to the background base map. Therefore, it might become necessary to georeference the imported cross sections.

The Georeference Cross Sections command of the GeoHECHMS software can be used to manually georeference each of the cross sections to the background base map displayed in the Map View. The process of georeferencing a cross section to the Map View can be a trial and error process—especially when the exact location of the original cross section is not known. Using the Georeference Cross Sections command, this process is accelerated.

Note that a CRS should be assigned prior to running this command. Otherwise, the software will display the below informational dialog box.

Informational dialog box

Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to assign a coordinate reference system to a project.

Follow the steps below to georeference an existing cross section in GeoHECHMS:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Cross Sections dropdown menu and then select the Georeference Cross Sections command. Georeference Cross Sections command
  2. The Georeference Cross Sections dialog box will be displayed. Georeference-Cross-Sections-3.png

The following sections describe how to georeference an existing cross section and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Cross Section to Georeference

The Select Cross Section to Georeference section allows the user to interactively select the cross section to georeference on the Map View. The user can either select the cross section from the Cross section ID dropdown combo box or click the [Pick] button to select the cross section from the Map View. Once the cross section is selected, the reach associated with the selected cross section will be displayed in Reach ID read-only field.

Note that the user can click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.

Once the cross section has been selected, the user can choose between the following options to georeference the cross section:

  • Snap to Alignment Polyline
  • Slide Along Alignment Polyline
  • Draw on Map View

Snap to Alignment Polyline

If an existing alignment polyline for the cross section exists on the Map View, the Snap to Alignment Polyline option can be used to snap the cross section to the alignment polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Snap to Alignment Polyline option:

  1. Select the Snap to Alignment Polyline radio button option.
  2. Click the [Pick] button. Georeference-Cross-Sections-4.png
  3. The Georeference Cross Sections dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the alignment polyline.
  4. Select the alignment polyline on the Map View.
  5. The Georeference Cross Sections dialog box will be redisplayed and the status of the Select alignment polyline read-only field will change from Not Selected to Selected. Click the [Clear] button to cancel the previous selection and redo the entire process.
  6. Then, click the [Snap] button to snap the selected cross section to the alignment polyline. The user can turn on the Scale to fit checkbox option to scale the cross section to fit within the alignment polyline. Georeference-Cross-Sections-5.png

Note that if the selected cross section polyline does not overlay the previously defined reach, the following informational dialog box will be displayed.

Informational dialog box

Slide Along Alignment Polyline

This option allows the user to manually slide the cross section along the alignment polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Slide Along Alignment Polyline option:

  1. Select the Slide Along Alignment Polyline radio button option.
  2. Click the [Pick] button to select the alignment polyline from the Map View. [Pick] button
  3. Selecting the alignment polyline from the Map View displays the following informational dialog box. Click the [Yes] button to select the polyline or abort the selection by clicking the [No] button. Snap Entity confirmation dialog box
  4. Once the alignment polyline is selected, click the [Slide] button. Georeference-Cross-Sections-9.png
  5. The Georeference Cross Sections dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the cross section and drag it along the underlying alignment polyline.
    Note that if the cross section does not overlay an alignment polyline, the following informational dialog box will be displayed. Informational dialog box
  6. Click and drag the cross section on the Map View to revise its alignment.
  7. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu. The Georeference Cross Sections dialog box will be redisplayed.
  8. The user can also check the Recompute adjacent node element elevations checkbox option to recompute the elevation of the adjacent node type elements after georeferencing the cross section.

Note: For more precision, the user can use the Snap to Alignment Polyline option first and then use the Slide Along Alignment Polyline option.

Draw on Map View

This option allows the user to draw an alignment polyline and automatically snap the selected cross section to the drawn polyline.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw on Map View option:

  1. Select the Draw on Map View radio button option and click the [Draw] button. Draw on Map View option
  2. The Georeference Cross Sections dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to draw the alignment polyline on the Map View.
  3. Draw the alignment polyline on the Map View. When finished, press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu.
  4. The Georeference Cross Sections dialog box will be redisplayed, and the cross section will automatically snap to the drawn alignment polyline.

Extract Elevation Data

This optional section is used to define the elevation data source to be used for extracting the cross section geometry. Depending upon the elevation data source type that is selected, different options are provided to specify additional elevation data information.

Extract Elevation Data

Refer to this article in our knowledge base for information on the types of terrain elevation data that can be used for constructing cross sections.

Note that if the Extract Elevation Data checkbox is unchecked, then the options under the subsequent sections will be unavailable (i.e., grayed out).

Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control

This optional section is used to control the amount of cross section geometry to extract for the drawn cross section polylines. This assures that an adequately deep enough cross section is created on both sides of the reach. The software will attempt to retrieve the cross section geometry data to the depth specified within the specified maximum cross section width.

Cross Section Geometry Extraction Control section

If the drawn polyline does not extend outward far enough to get the cross section depth specified, the software will automatically extend the constructed cross section further outward. Similarly, if the drawn polyline extends too far outward for the depth specified, the software will automatically trim the constructed cross section.

Cross Section Extraction Options

This section is used to control which portions of the cross section(s) should be extracted.

Cross Section Extraction Options section

For example, the user may have survey data for the cross section channel and a LIDAR digital terrain surface for the overbank areas. In this example, the user would only want to extract the cross section geometry for the overbank areas since the surveyed channel geometry is already accurate.

The Extract cross section geometry for dropdown combo box contains the following entries:

  • Both Overbanks
  • Channel Only
  • Entire Cross Section (default)
  • Left Overbank Only
  • Right Overbank Only
Computational Analysis & Output › Computational Options

Computational Options Command

The Computational Options command of GeoHECHMS is used to define the computational options to be used during the HEC‑HMS analysis.

Follow the below steps to use the Computational Options command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, select the Computational Options command.Analysis ribbon menu
  2. The Computational Options dialog box will be displayed.Computational-Options-Command-Img-2.png

The following sections describe how to use the Computational Options command and interact with the above dialog box.

General Options

This section contains a number of general operational settings for the program. This includes details such as a display option for the decimal separator, formatting options for displaying dates, and an option for sorting elements.
This section covers the following parameters:

Decimal Separator

This dropdown combo box lets the user specify the decimal separator to be used in the data entry fields. By default, notation will be displayed that corresponds to the recognized standards of the user’s identified country of preference. However, the user can override this notation if desired. The software will remember this preference at the project level and use it as the default notation for all new projects.
The following options are provided:

  • Period
  • Comma

Date Display Format

This dropdown combo box allows the user to specify the date format to be used in the data entry fields. By default, this entry will be set based upon the standards used in the country identified under country culture. However, the user can override this value if desired. The software will remember this setting at the project level and will use it as the default setting for all new projects.

Element Sorting

This dropdown combo box allows the user to specify how the elements should be sorted in the output results. The following options are provided:

  • Alphabetical (default)
  • Hydrologic

Result Options

This section contains a number of settings for managing simulations and the results that are produced from these simulations. This section gives control to the user over supplemental results that give extra information. The user can also specify the number of decimal points to use when displaying different categories of results.
This section covers the following parameters:

Precipitation Display

This dropdown combo box allows the user to specify how the precipitation data should be displayed. The software will remember this setting at the project level and will use it as the default setting for all new projects. The following options are provided:

  • Cumulative
  • Incremental (default)

The Store supplemental time series results checkbox is enabled by default. It is used to store supplemental results that give extra information but are not critical to the simulation.

Output Decimal Precision

These spin controls define how many decimal points should be used in the output results display. The following data must be defined:

  • Loading
  • Concentration
  • Temperature

The [Reset to Defaults] button causes the software to set the default values in the Computational Options dialog box.

Computational Analysis & Output › Control Specifications

Control Specifications Command

The Control Specifications command allows the user to define when the HEC-HMS hydrology simulation starts and stops, and what computational time interval is to be used in the simulation. Each control specification establishes a time window over which a simulation will be performed. The window is specified using a separate start date, start time, end date, and end time. There is no limit on the length of a time window or the number of simulation time steps it can contain. The time interval defined in the control specification will also be used in displaying time-series results from the simulation.

unknown node

Follow the steps below to use the Control Specifications command:

  1. From the Analysis ribbon menu, select the Control Specifications command. Select Control Specifications Command
  2. The Control Specifications dialog box will be displayed. Control Specifications dialog box will be displayed

The following sections describe how to define the control specifications and interact with the above dialog box.

Select Control Specifications

The Select Control Specifications section is used to define the HEC-HMS control specifications ID. This allows multiple control specifications to be defined for different conditions. The section can be used to create a new control specification, copy existing control specifications data to a new control specification, as well as delete a control specification. In addition, the user can navigate between previously defined control specifications and enter a description detailing the current control specification.

Simulation Time Window

The Simulation Time Window section defines the starting date and time and ending date and time of the HEC-HMS hydrology simulation. The user can click on the [Date] button, which displays a calendar date selector from which the user can select a specific date. Similarly, the user can click on the [Time] button, at which point the software displays a 24-hour time selector from which the user can select a specific time.

Simulation Time Setting

The Simulation Time Setting section defines the computational time step to be used in the HEC-HMS hydrology simulation.

Computational Analysis & Output › Plot Hydrographs

Plot Hydrographs Command

The Plot Hydrographs command allows the user to plot time series data such as rainfall data, runoff hydrographs, and other stormwater analysis output results for any location in the drainage network. In addition, the hydrographs can be copied to the Windows clipboard and printed for later use.

unknown node

Follow the steps below to use the Plot Hydrographs command:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, select the Plot Hydrographs command.
    Plot Hydrographs command
  2. The Plot Hydrographs dialog box will be displayed.
    Plot Hydrographs dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Plot Hydrographs command and interact with the above dialog box.

Displaying Hydrograph Plot for Subbasins

The Subbasins panel displays the output results for subbasins present in the project.

The Scenarios dropdown combo box of the Select Items section allows the user to select the preferred scenario associated with an element type.

Select Items section - Scenarios dropdown combo box

The Variables dropdown combo box of the Select Items section allows the user to select the desired output variables associated with subbasins whose results are to be displayed. For subbasins, the output results of variables such as baseflow, runoff, direct runoff, cumulative excess precipitation, cumulative precipitation, cumulative precipitation loss, excess precipitation, precipitation, precipitation loss, soil infiltration, etc. can be plotted.

Select Items section - Variables dropdown combo box

All elements (corresponding to the element type) present in the selected scenario will be displayed under the Elements section. The user can check the checkboxes corresponding to the preferred element(s) to see output results associated with them.

The Select same elements while selecting scenarios checkbox option in the Elements section allows the software to retain selected elements when adding or switching scenarios. This eliminates the need to manually reselect elements each time a new scenario is selected. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.

The Remember selected elements and scenarios checkbox option in the Elements section allows the software to retain selected elements and scenarios when reopening the Plot Hydrographs dialog box. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick Elements] button to select element(s) from the Map View. Clicking the [Pick Elements] button will cause the Plot Hydrographs dialog box to temporarily disappear, allowing the user to select elements from the Map View. Upon returning to the Plot Hydrographs dialog box, the output results related to the selected element(s) will be displayed under the Plots, Data Tables, and Data Summary panels. By default, the dialog box opens in the plotting view.

Plots panel

The user can click the [Clear Elements] button to deselect the currently selected elements and redo the entire process.

Displaying Hydrograph Plot for Storage Areas

The Storage Areas panel displays the output results for the storage areas present in the project. Similar to the display of hydrograph plots for subbasins, the user can select the preferred scenario from the Scenarios dropdown combo box and output variables such as inflow, outflow, storage, stage, pool elevation, and reservoir area from the Variables dropdown combo box of the Select Items section. The software will then display the output results for the element(s) selected in the Elements section under the Plots, Data Tables, and Data Summary panels.

Storage Areas panel

Displaying Hydrograph Plot for Junctions

The Junctions panel displays the output results for the junctions present in the project. Similar to the display of hydrograph plots for subbasins, the user can select the preferred scenario from the Scenarios dropdown combo box and output variables such as inflow and outflow from the Variables dropdown combo box of the Select Items section. The software will then display the output results for the element(s) selected in the Elements section under the Plots, Data Tables, and Data Summary panels.

Junctions panel

Displaying Hydrograph Plot for Reaches

The Reaches panel displays the output results for the reaches present in the project. Similar to the display of hydrograph plots for subbasins, the user can select the preferred scenario from the Scenarios dropdown combo box and output variables such as combined inflow and outflow from the Variables dropdown combo box of the Select Items section. The software will then display the output results for the element(s) selected in the Elements section under the Plots, Data Tables, and Data Summary panels.

Reaches panel

Displaying Hydrograph Plot for Diversions

The Diversions panel displays the output results for the diversions present in the project. Similar to the display of hydrograph plots for subbasins, the user can select the preferred scenario from the Scenarios dropdown combo box and output variables such as diverted flow, inflow, and outflow from the Variables dropdown combo box of the Select Items section. The software will then display the output results for the element(s) selected in the Elements section under the Plots, Data Tables, and Data Summary panels.

Diversions panel

Displaying Hydrograph Plot for Sources

The Sources panel displays the output results for the sources present in the project. Similar to the display of hydrograph plots for subbasins, the user can select the preferred scenario in the Scenarios dropdown combo box and output variables such as outflow from the Variables dropdown combo box of the Select Items section. The software will then display the output results for the element(s) selected in the Elements section under the Plots, Data Tables, and Data Summary panels.

Sources panel

Displaying Hydrograph Plot for Sinks

The Sinks panel displays the output results for the sinks present in the project. Similar to the display of hydrograph plots for subbasins, the user can select the preferred scenario from the Scenarios dropdown combo box and output variables such as flow from the Variables dropdown combo box of the Select Items section. The software will then display the output results for the element(s) selected in the Elements section under the Plots, Data Tables, and Data Summary panels.

Sinks panel

Displaying Multiple Hydrograph Plots

The Plot Hydrographs command also allows the user to display multiple hydrograph plots to easily compare analysis results for different elements and output variables. Hydrograph plots of the same variable but for different elements of the same element type are superimposed on the same axis. Hydrograph plots of different variables or element types are plotted on different axes as shown below.

Multiple Hydrograph Plots

To view multiple hydrograph plots, the user can check the checkboxes corresponding to the preferred elements from the Elements section. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick Elements] button and select multiple elements from the Map View.

Note that the user can select multiple elements on the Map View before selecting the Plot Hydrographs command from the Results ribbon menu.

After selecting the elements, the corresponding output results will be displayed under the Plots, Data Tables, and Data Summary panels.

Data Tables

The Data Tables panel lists the time series data values for the currently selected element in a tabular format. The user can “drag and drop” the columns to the left or right to reorder the column listings so that they are in a specific order. Based upon the selected element and variable, the contents of this panel may change.

Data Tables panel

Right-clicking within the table displays context menu commands that allow users to cut, copy, and paste the data of the selected cells, as well as delete rows from the table. In addition, the user can copy the table data to the Windows clipboard or export it to Microsoft Excel or as a PDF format using these context menu commands.

Right - click context menu commands within table

Similarly, right-clicking within the Plot displays context menu commands such as zoom, pan, copy, save as image, etc. for the graphical plot.

Right - click context menu commands within plot

Data Summary

The Data Summary panel displays results of the parameters associated with the currently selected element(s). The user can “drag and drop” the columns to the left or right to reorder the column listings so that they are in a specific order. Based on the selected element, the contents of this panel may change.

Data Summary panel

The DSS Data section includes an external DSS (Digital Storage System) file for referencing the computational results. The DSS file name field displays the external DSS file to be used for reading the data. The Data path field displays the data path within the DSS file from which the data are to be read.

Similar to the Data Tables panel, the software also allows the user to export data shown within the Data Summary panel to Microsoft Excel or PDF documents and send data to the Windows clipboard.

Results Summary

This panel displays the summary of the current analysis results for each element (Subbasins, Storage Areas, Junctions, Reaches, Diversions, Sources, and Sinks) in tabular format.

Results Summary

Note that the Results Summary panel can also be displayed by selecting the Result Summary command from the Results ribbon menu. To learn more about the Results Summary panel, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Computational Analysis & Output › DSS Data

Data Storage Descriptors in HEC-DSS

HEC-DSS (Hydrologic Engineering Center - Data Storage System) is a standardized data format used to store, manage, and exchange hydrologic time-series data. DSS files are widely used in hydrologic modeling workflows to maintain consistent, accessible datasets. Data in a DSS file is organized using a structured pathname system, where each part of the pathname conveys specific information about the dataset. Understanding these pathnames is essential for accessing, analyzing, and interpreting time-series data in hydrologic models.

In CivilGEO’s software, the DSS Data File & Path dialog box allows the user to select the DSS file and the time series data records stored within it. To learn more about the DSS Data File & Path dialog box, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

DSS Data File & Path dialog box

HEC-DSS Pathnames

A DSS file organizes its datasets into pathnames, which may contain up to 391 characters. Each pathname is conventionally divided into six parts, with each part allowing up to 64 characters. The standard naming convention for pathname parts is listed below:

unknown node

Each part of the pathname has a specific purpose, such as identifying the project, location, data type, time interval, or scenario. Among these, Part C is important because it defines the type of data stored in the DSS file, such as streamflow, precipitation, losses, canopy storage, soil moisture, routing flows, and more.

What is Part C?

  • Part C is also known as the Descriptor.
  • Part C identifies the variable, parameter, or data type for both regular and irregular interval time series data. This allows the software to recognize, retrieve, process, and plot the correct data from a DSS file.
  • Standard Part C descriptors are predefined to maintain consistency across projects.

Note: The availability of descriptors is project-specific and depends on which hydrologic methods (such as loss, transform, routing, or reservoir) are being used.

List of HEC-DSS Part C Descriptors

HEC-DSS provides a wide range of standard Part C descriptors for different hydrologic modeling purposes. These descriptors can represent either computed data or manually entered values. The following table lists the commonly used standard HEC-DSS Part C descriptors:

unknown node
Computational Analysis & Output › DSS Data

DSS Data File & Path

DSS stands for HEC Data Storage System, which is primarily designed to store data for water resources applications. The HEC-DSS system can store almost any type of data, but it is most efficient at storing large blocks of data (e.g., time-series data for regular and irregular intervals).

In CivilGEO, the DSS Data File & Path dialog box is used to select the DSS file and the time series data records contained within the DSS file. GeoHECRAS can read data from a DSS file, whereas GeoHECHMS is capable of writing data in a DSS file format. Thus, a DSS file can be used to transfer data between both software, allowing the user to export flow data from a HEC-HMS model and use it in HEC-RAS modeling. Because a DSS file can be used to share information between GeoHECHMS and GeoHECRAS software, it is often necessary to be able to view data contained within a DSS file. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to export the flow data from a HEC-HMS model and use it for HEC-RAS modeling.

DSS Data File & Path dialog box

The following sections describe how to view data contained in an HEC-DSS file.

DSS Data File

This section allows the user to select the DSS file. Click the [Select] button to specify the directory and the file name for the DSS data file to be selected. On selecting a DSS data file, a list of the available pathnames within that file will be shown in the table next to this section.

Available Data Paths

This section contains a table that lists all the DSS pathnames by their different parts. Note that the table can display the pathnames only when the DSS data file is selected in the DSS Data File section.

A pathname may consist of up to 391 characters and is, by convention, separated into six parts, which may be up to sixty-four characters each.

unknown node

The dropdown combo box adjacent to the Available Data Paths section allows the user to select one of the following options to list the DSS pathnames in the table: Pathname Parts and Condensed Catalog.

Available Data Paths section

Select the Pathname Parts option to see a list of pathnames where the dates of time series data show a date part for each record in the Part D column of the table. By default, this option is shown selected when the dialog box is displayed.

Select the Condensed Catalog option to see a list of pathnames where the dates of time series data are grouped together and show a date span instead of a date part for each record. On selecting this option, the software abridges time series data sets so that the date span for the entire data set will be displayed in the Part D column of the table.

Part D column of Available Data Paths section

In addition, the data in the Available Data Paths table can be copied to the clipboard or exported as a Microsoft Excel or PDF document by using the Copy Table to Clipboard, Export Table to Excel, or Export Table to PDF commands from the right-click context menu.

right-click context menu commands

Selecting Pathnames

The user can select one or more DSS pathnames from the table to be plotted and/or tabulated.

To select a pathname, double-click on a pathname in the Available Data Paths table, and the selected pathname will appear in the Selected Data Paths section. Alternatively, click on a desired pathname in the table, and then click the [Add to Selected Data Paths] button.

[Add to Selected Data Paths] button

To select multiple pathnames in the table, click on a pathname and the pathname will be highlighted. The user can use the Control Key plus left mouse click to select additional pathnames. Additionally, the Shift key can also be used to select a range of pathnames. The user can also click and drag across the pathnames, release the mouse button and the block of pathnames will be highlighted.

Once a pathname(s) is selected, click the [Add to Selected Data Paths] button. The selected data path (s) will be added in the Selected Data Paths section. The dialog box also displays the graphical plot for the selected data path in the DSS Data Plot panel.

Selected Data Paths

This section contains a table that lists all of the selected pathnames from the Available Data Paths section. The user can select the desired pathname (s) and the corresponding graphical plot will be displayed in the DSS Data Plot panel.

Selected Data Paths section

The dropdown combo box adjacent to the Selected Data Paths section allows the user to select one of the following options to be plotted in the graphical plot: Plot Selected Data Path and Plot All Data Paths.

Selected Data Paths section dropdown

Select the Plot Selected Data Path option to see the graphical plot for the individual pathname. By default, this option is shown selected when the dialog box is displayed.

Select the Plot All Data Paths option to see the graphical plot for all pathnames.

DSS Data Plot panel

DSS Data Path

This panel displays the graphical plot of the selected pathname(s). The parameters for the plots are labeled and color-coded, date ranges are specified along one axis, and the units of measure are specified along the other axis. Areas of the graphical plot can also be zoomed in and out.

DSS Data Table

This panel contains a data grid that displays the DSS data table for the selected pathname(s). Note that the displayed table will have the same columns as the axes displayed in the corresponding DSS Data Plot.

DSS Data Table Panel
Computational Analysis & Output › Result Summary

Result Summary Command

The Result Summary command allows the user to display the summary of the HEC-HMS analysis results for each element (Subbasins, Storage Areas, Junctions, Reaches, Diversions, Sources, and Sinks) in tabular form. The user can see the summary of analysis results either of the individual element or of all elements in the table.

Follow the steps below to use the Result Summary command:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, select the Result Summary command.
    Result Summary command from the Results ribbon menu
  2. The Plot Hydrographs dialog box will be displayed with the Results Summary data panel.
    Plot Hydrographs dialog box with the Results Summary panel

To learn about the Plot Hydrographs command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

The following sections describe the Result Summary command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Items

The Select Items section allows the user to select the scenario for which the summary of the analysis results will be displayed. The user can select the preferred scenario from the Scenarios dropdown combo box.

Scenarios dropdown combo box from Select Items section

Scenario Specifications

This section tracks all scenario specification data such as the start and end of the simulation run, the computed time, the selected basin model, the selected meteorologic model, and the selected control specifications.

Scenario Specifications section

Data Summary

This section contains a table showing the summary of the HEC-HMS analysis results for the selected element. The table includes one row for each element in the model and includes columns for the hydrologic element name, drainage area, maximum outflow, time of peak flow, and total outflow volume.

Note that the data in the results summary table will be automatically updated each time the simulation run is computed.

Computational Analysis & Output › Reports

Generate Report Command

An important aspect of performing an engineering study is documenting the study findings in an engineering report. The Generate Report command allows users to create engineering reports detailing the hydrology study. Most aspects of the report are automatically generated by the software so that users do not have to worry about adding different figures, graphs, tables, and more into a report document.

Once the report is created, it can then be saved as a template to be used in other engineering projects. In addition, users can simply adopt a previous engineering report for use as a template by modifying the report to fit the current engineering study.

unknown node

To use the Generate Report command, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, select the Generate Report command.
    Generate Report command
  2. The Generate Report dialog box will be displayed.
    Generate Report dialog box

The below sections describe how to generate a report for a project and interact with the above dialog box.

Report Specifications

The Report Specifications section contains the following panels:

  • Report Settings
  • Project Map
  • Contents
  • Routing Diagram
  • Time Series Plots
  • Default Settings

Report Settings

The Report Settings panel is used to specify general format settings for the report pages.

Report Settings panel

The following sections are available in the Report Settings panel:

Title Page Contents

This section allows the user to define content for the project. Note that if the checkbox at the Title Page Contents section header is checked, then the following entries are enabled:

  • Project title
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to enter the text that will be shown as the title of the project.
  • Project subtitle
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to enter the text that will be shown as the subtitle of the project.
  • Prepared for
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to enter the text that defines the purpose of the project.
  • Report date
    This checkbox entry field allows the user to include a date on the report’s title page. By default, this entry displays the current date. The user can click the [Date] button to open a calendar date selector and select a specific date. Note that the format of the listed date will be based on the computer’s location settings. For example, dates in the USA are formatted differently than in Europe. In addition, the user can manually type in the date—”July 2021″, for example— where it is just a month and year, with no date listed. If this entry is unchecked, no date will be listed on the title page.
  • Watermark
    This editable dropdown combo box lists watermarks that can be included in the page background. This entry is saved at the project level. The user can click the [Add New Watermark] button to add new watermarks. In addition, the user can rename the existing watermarks by clicking the pencil icon adjacent to this dropdown combo box.
    Watermark editable dropdown combo box

Report Template

This section allows the user to choose either the default or custom template for generating the report.

Report Template section

The following options are available in this section:

  • Use default template
    This radio button option allows the user to select the default template. Selecting this radio button option enables the Include Report Sections section in the Contents panel, along with the Paper Settings, Additional Title Page Content, and the Page Header and Footer sections in the Default Settings panel.
  • Use custom template
    This radio button option allows the user to select a custom template. Selecting this radio button option enables the corresponding […], [Edit], and [Restore] buttons.
    1. Clicking the […] button allows the user to select a template file to use.
    2. Clicking the [Edit] button opens the custom template file to edit the cover page template.
    3. Clicking the [Restore] button allows the user to restore the custom template to its default version.

Project Map

The Project Map panel is used to define the project map to be displayed in the generated report. If the checkbox at the Project Map section header is unchecked, then the project map will not be included in the report. Note that this panel is disabled if the user has not defined a base map layer for the project. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to add a base map layer to your project.

The following subpanels are available in the Project Map panel:

Project Area

The Project Area subpanel displays an independent base map view of the main Map View. Initially, the subpanel shows the current Map View extents, but the user can zoom and pan this view using the mouse cursor. It is used to determine the extents of the project area map to be shown in the report.

Project Area subpanel


The user can select the project base map from several high-quality base maps available in the Project base map provider dropdown combo box. The Use grayscale base map checkbox option allows the user to toggle the color scheme of the base map from color to grayscale. By default, this checkbox option is unchecked.

Region Area

The Region Area subpanel displays an independent base map view of the main Map View. Initially, it shows the current Map View extents four times, but the user can zoom and pan this view using the mouse cursor. It is used to determine the extents of the region area map to be shown in the report. The Map View window defines the final project area map.

Region Area subpanel

The user can select the region base map from several high-quality base maps available in the Region base map provider dropdown combo box. The Include project area border, color checkbox option is used to include a border around the region area. The user can select the color for the bordering lines from the dropdown palette. By default, this checkbox option is checked.

Map Preview

The Map Preview subpanel displays the project map constructed using the project area map and the region area map. This subpanel shows the project map that will be included in the generated report.

Map Preview subpanel

The user cannot adjust the project area map and the region area map from this subpanel. The user will need to return to the other two subpanels to make those adjustments. However, the user can draw basic elements on top of the project map, such as lines, shaded polygons, arrows, and text using the [Edit] button. Clicking the [Edit] button displays the Edit Project Map dialog box. This dialog box contains a diagram editor that allows the user to edit the Map Preview. To learn how to use the Edit Project Map diagram editor, refer to this article in our knowledge base.

Edit Project Map diagram editor

Contents

The Contents panel is used to define the entire contents of the generated report.

Contents panel

The following sections are available in the Contents panel:

Include Scenarios

This section provides a table that allows the user to define which scenarios should be included in the report. The following columns are available in the table:

  • Scenario
    This column lists the available scenarios that are contained in the project. The user can toggle on and off the checkboxes to include or exclude scenarios from the generated report. Note that the current scenario is shown as selected if the analysis results are available. The other scenarios are shown as not selected.

Not all scenarios need to be defined for an output report. However, at least one scenario needs to be defined to generate a report for the project.

  • Custom Title
    This column allows the user to change the scenario name to be listed in the engineering report. It allows the user to place a more meaningful name for the scenario being reported.
  • Computed
    This column shows whether the analysis results are available to be included in the report. If the analysis results are available, this read-only entry states 'Computed.' If the analysis results are not available, the entry states, 'Not Computed' and the row is disabled.
  • Order
    By default, the scenarios are listed in alphabetical order. However, this column can be used to change the order in which the scenarios are reported in the file.

Include Report Sections

This section provides a table that allows the user to define which sections of the report should be included in the generated report. The following columns are available in the table:

  • Report Section
    This column lists all the available report sections. The user can toggle on and off the checkboxes to include or exclude report sections from the generated report.
  • Custom Title/Options
    This column allows the user to change the report section name to be listed in the engineering report. It allows the user to place a more meaningful name in the report section. For example, the user may want to translate the report section title into a different language (i.e., German).

Routing Diagram

The Routing Diagram panel is used to edit the HEC-HMS routing elements in the routing diagram. The user can grab the elements and move them around on the Routing Diagram panel to make the routing diagram more understandable. Note that the elements will stay linked together during these modifications.

Routing Diagram panel

The following sections are available in the Routing Diagram panel:

Routing Diagram

The following options are available in this section:

  • Select scenario
    The user can select the scenario for editing using the Select Scenario dropdown combo box. This combo box lists all the scenarios that were selected in the Contents panel. As the user switches between scenarios in the dropdown combo box, the diagram preview window is updated to represent the selected scenario.
  • Reset Diagram
    On clicking the [Reset Diagram] button, the current diagram resets to show the routing elements as represented on the Map View.
  • Zoom and Pan Tools
    In the upper-left corner of the diagram preview window, several zoom and pan tools provide the user more control in viewing the elements and routing symbols. To learn how to use these tools, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Edit
    On clicking the [Edit] button, the software will display the Edit Schematic Diagram dialog box. This dialog box contains a diagram editor that allows the user to edit the routing diagram and copy the edits from one scenario to another. To learn how to use this diagram editor, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
    Edit Schematic Diagram dialog box

Display Options

This section provides various display options to the user as described below:

  • Display grid
    The Display grid checkbox displays a background grid on the canvas. This checkbox is checked by default.
  • Snap to grid
    The Snap to grid checkbox causes the elements to snap to the background grid. This checkbox is unchecked by default. If the Display grid checkbox is unchecked, the Snap to grid checkbox option is disabled.
  • Display element labels
    The Display element labels checkbox controls the display of the element labels next to the elements on the canvas. This checkbox is checked by default.
  • Display routing arrows
    The Display routing arrows checkbox controls the display of the arrowheads on the ends of the routing arrows on the canvas. This checkbox is checked by default.
  • Element size
    The Element size spin control allows the user to adjust the size of the elements on the canvas.
  • Element label size
    The Element label size spin control allows the user to adjust the size of the element labels.
  • Leader thickness
    The Leader thickness spin control allows the user to adjust the thickness of the routing arrows connecting the HEC-HMS elements on the canvas.

Time Series Plots

The Time Series Plots panel is used to define custom time series plots to be included in the generated report. This is helpful when the user wants to compare different hydrographs from various scenarios and elements.

Time Series Plots panel

The following sections are available in the Time Series Plots panel:

Define Time Series Plots

This section provides a table that allows the user to define multiple time series plots to be included in the generated report. The order of the time series plot in the table defines the sequence in which multiple plots will be placed on a single page. From the Number of time series plots per page dropdown combo box, the user can specify the number of time series plots to place on each report page. The time series plots are then scaled to fit on the page accordingly.

The following columns are available in the table:

  • Time Series Plot Title
    This editable column allows the user to define what title should be placed at the top of the time series plot. If the user defines a plot element and does not define a plot title, a default title of Time Series Plot ## is used, where ## represents a unique number.
  • Number Plot Elements Defined
    This read-only column represents the number of HEC-HMS elements defined for the time series plot.
  • Order
    By default, the time series plots are listed in the order that the user defines them. However, this column can be used to change the order in which the time series plots are placed in the report.

Define Time Series Plot Elements

This section provides a table that allows the user to define the HEC-HMS elements that are included in the time series plot being defined. The previously defined time series plot title is included in the section header. Note that a maximum of 16 rows of elements can be defined in the table, corresponding to the 16 unique colors available for the plot.

The following columns are available in the table:

  • Scenario
    This column contains a dropdown combo box that lists the scenarios selected in the Include Scenarios section of the Contents panel. The scenarios are listed in the order that they are defined in the Include Scenarios section.
  • Element Type
    This column contains a dropdown combo box that lists all the elements that can be defined in an HEC-HMS model. The following entries are available in the dropdown combo box:
    1. Diversions
    2. Junctions
    3. Reaches
    4. Sinks
    5. Sources
    6. Storage Areas
    7. Subbasins
  • Element ID
    This column contains a dropdown combo box that is disabled until the user has selected a scenario and an element type. Once the dropdown combo box is enabled, it lists all the element IDs corresponding to the scenario and element type selected. The user can select the element directly from the dropdown combo box entry or by clicking the corresponding […] button to select the element from the Map View.
  • Output Variable
    This column contains a dropdown combo box that lists all the output variables for the selected HEC-HMS element. The content of the dropdown combo box changes based upon what element type is selected, as described below:

    Diversion Output Variables

    Junction Output Variables

    Sink Output Variables

    Source Output Variables

    Storage Area Output Variables

    Subbasin Output Variables

    Diverted Flow [cfs] [cms]

    Flow [cfs] [cms]

    Flow [cfs] [cms]

    Flow [cfs] [cms]

    Elevation [ft] [m]

    Runoff [cfs] [cms]

    Inflow [cfs] [cms]

    Reach Output Variables



    Inflow [cfs] [cms] (default)


    Outflow [cfs] [cms] (default)

    Inflow [cfs] [cms]



    Stage [ft] [m]



    Outflow [cfs] [cms] (default)



    Storage [acre-ft] [m³]


  • Order
    By default, the time series plot elements are listed in the order that the user defines them. However, this column can be used to change the order in which the time series plot elements are placed in the report.

Default Settings

The General Settings panel is used to specify general format settings for the report pages.

General Settings panel

The following sections are available in the Default Settings panel:

Paper Settings

This section is used to define the page size, page numbering format, and date formats of the report. The following options are available in this section:

  • Paper size
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the paper size from the available standard paper sizes. The selected size is stored at the application level and recalled for future applications. Note that the content of the dropdown combo box changes based on project units.
  • Image output quality
    This dropdown combo box allows the user to select the image output quality format. The following formats are available:
    1. Draft
    2. Publication
  • Page numbering
    This dropdown combo box lists different page numbering formats. The following formats are available:
    1. Page # (default)
    2. Page # of ##

Note that page numbering is not available for the Cover Page or the Table of Contents section.

  • Title page date format
    This dropdown entry allows the user to select the date format for the title page from the listed formats. The following formats are available:
    1. DD-MM-YYYY
    2. DD Month, YYYY
    3. DD Mon, YYYY
    4. Month DD, YYYY

Additional Title Page Content

This section defines the company logo and the Prepared by content to be placed at the top of the page. Note that this section is stored at the application level so that the next report already includes the company logo and Prepared by information. Clicking the […] button will display the Select Company Logo dialog box that allows the user to select the company logo file.

Select Company Logo dialog box

Numerical Formatting

This section contains a Use delimiters for large number formatting checkbox option. By default, this checkbox option is checked. It causes the software to format large numbers using a delimiter.

Page Header and Footer

The section allows the user to include header and footer sections in the report pages. By default, this section is enabled. The user can define the header and footer text for odd and even pages in the respective entry fields of this section. Note that only two lines of text are allowed. If the checkbox at the Page Header and Footer section header is unchecked, then this section will be disabled, and the header and footer will not be included in the report pages.

Report Output Options

In the Report Output Options section, the user can define where to save the generated report, whether to overwrite an existing file, and open the report automatically for viewing and editing.

Report Output Options section

The following options are available in this section:

  • Report file
    This entry allows the user to specify the file path and name where the generated report will be saved. The user can either use the default location or click the […] browse button to choose a different file path and name.
  • Overwrite existing report file
    This checkbox option causes the software to overwrite the existing content of the report file with the updated content. By default, this checkbox option is checked. If unchecked, the existing content of the report file will not be replaced, and the updated content will be saved separately.
  • Open report file for viewing and editing
    This checkbox option allows the user to view the just created report file and make changes to it. By default, this checkbox option is checked. If unchecked, the report file will not open automatically.

Generating Report

Once the report specifications are defined, click the [Generate] button to generate the report at the specified location. The report will be generated either as a PDF or a Word document.

Computational Analysis & Output › Reports

Generate Report - Editing Project Map

The Edit Project Map diagram editor allows the user to perform edits on the project map that will be reflected in the generated project report. The user can draw basic elements, edit font and line properties, and arrange elements using the diagram editor.

Follow the steps below to use the Edit Project Map diagram editor:

  1. From the Results ribbon menu, select the Generate Report command.
    Generate Report Command
  2. The Generate Report dialog box will be displayed.
    Generate Report dialog box
  3. Select the Project Map panel under the Report Specifications section.
    Project Map panel
  4. Click the [Edit] button available in the Map Preview subpanel under the Project Map subsection.
    Map Preview subpanel - [Edit] button
  5. The Edit Project Map diagram editor will be displayed, as shown below.
    Edit Project Map diagram editor

The following sections describe the functionality of various ribbon menu commands provided in the diagram editor.

Home Ribbon Menu

The Home ribbon menu contains the following commands:

  • Save Edits
    This command saves the user’s work in the Diagram Editor and returns the user to the previous dialog box.
  • Discard Edits
    This command discards the user’s work in the Diagram Editor and returns the user to the previous dialog box with the original diagram (before any changes were made).
  • Copy to Scenarios
    This command can be used to select the drawn entities to copy to other scenario diagrams. Note that this command is only functional in the Edit Schematic Diagram dialog box.
  • Undo
    This command implements the undo stack and allows the user to undo the changes.
  • Redo
    This command implements the redo stack and allows the user to restore any previously undone actions using the Undo command.
  • Restore
    This command restores the Diagram Editor to the original state (before any changes were made).
  • Paste
    This command pastes the objects copied to the Windows clipboard onto the drawing canvas.
  • Delete
    This command deletes the selected objects from the drawing canvas.
  • Cut
    This command removes the selected objects from the drawing canvas and copies them to the Windows clipboard.
  • Copy
    This command copies the selected objects from the drawing canvas to the Windows clipboard.
  • Format Painter
    This command allows the user to quickly apply the same formatting, such as color, font style and size, and border style, to multiple objects on the drawing canvas. To learn how to use this command, refer to this article in our knowledge base.
  • Font Formatting Section
    This section provides various commands to format the text on the drawing canvas. The user can select the font type, size, and color, use text highlighter, bold, italicize, and underline text. In addition, the user can also clear all the text formatting with a single click, if required.
  • Line Color
    This menu item defines the color of polylines and the outer boundaries of the shapes (i.e., circles, polygons, and rectangles). Selecting this item will display a color palette to choose the desired color.
  • Fill Color
    This menu item defines the color fill for the shapes (i.e., circles, polygons, and rectangles). Selecting this item will display a color palette to choose the desired color.
  • Line Weight
    This menu item defines the line weight of the polylines and the outer boundaries of the shapes (i.e., circles, polygons, and rectangles). Selecting this item will display a line weight selection dialog box to choose the line weight.
  • Line Style
    This menu item defines the line styling of the drawn polyline (i.e., dashed, or solid lines).
  • Line Ends
    This menu item displays a submenu allowing the user to define arrowheads on drawn polylines. The following commands are provided in the submenu:
    1. No Arrowhead: This command removes the arrowhead from the polyline.
    2. Arrowhead Front: This command places an arrowhead at the front of the polyline (endpoint). Note that the arrowhead is automatically sized based upon the line weight.
    3. Arrowhead Rear: This command places an arrowhead at the rear of the polyline (start point). Note that the arrowhead is automatically sized based upon the line weight.
    4. Arrowhead Both Ends: This command places arrowheads at both ends of the polyline.
    5. Swap Arrowhead Ends: This command is only enabled if the user has selected a single polyline with a single arrowhead. It swaps the arrowhead from the front to the end of the polyline (and vice versa).
  • Group Elements
    This menu item displays a submenu that allows the user to group and ungroup selected elements. At least two elements need to be selected on the drawing canvas to enable this menu item.
  • Lock Elements
    This menu item displays a submenu that allows the user to lock and unlock selected elements from moving. At least one element needs to be selected on the drawing canvas to enable this menu item.
  • Bring to Front
    This menu item displays a submenu that allows the user to change the draw order of selected elements. At least one element needs to be selected on the drawing canvas to enable this menu item. The submenu contains the following commands:
    1. Bring to Front: Moves selected elements above all elements.
    2. Bring Forward: Moves selected elements forward.
    3. Send Backwards: Moves selected elements backward.
    4. Send to Back: Moves selected elements below all other elements.
  • Align Left
    This menu item displays a submenu that allows the user to change the alignment of selected elements. At least two elements need to be selected on the drawing canvas to enable this menu item. The submenu contains the following commands:
    1. Align Left: Aligns the selected elements to the left.
    2. Align Center: Aligns the selected elements to the center.
    3. Align Right: Aligns the selected elements to the right.
    4. Align Top: Aligns the selected elements to the top.
    5. Align Middle: Aligns the selected elements to the middle.
    6. Align Bottom: Aligns the selected elements to the bottom.
  • Draw Text
    This command allows the user to click on the drawing canvas and insert a resizing word wrap text frame. The user can grab the corners and sides of the text frame to resize it. Clicking in the middle of the text frame allows the user to move the text frame to a different location. The user can type the text inside the frame. Once the user adds text, it will be displayed at the top of the frame, aligned based upon the text justification selected (i.e., left, center or right).
  • Draw Polyline
    This command allows the user to draw linear and curvilinear polylines on the drawing canvas.
  • Draw Shape
    This command allows the user to draw various basic geometrical shapes, block arrows, flow chart symbols, and containers on the drawing canvas.
  • Draw Callout
    This command allows the user to place a note with an arrow pointing to a feature of interest. After selecting this command, the user can click on a point on the drawing canvas to place the callout note and draw the callout polyline bend points or arrowhead. Note that holding down the [Shift] key while drawing arrowheads creates orthogonal lines. Once finished, the user can press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu.

The user can drag parts of the callout object and move them independently of other parts. Clicking and dragging the corner and mid-point grips of the note text block allows the user to resize the block. While resizing, the text will reflow within the text block (i.e., word wrap) if there are no hard carriage returns.

  • North Arrow
    This command displays the North Arrow dialog box listing all the North Arrow symbols supported by the software.
    North Arrow Dialog Box
    Once the user selects the North Arrow symbol to display and clicks the [OK] button, the software remembers that symbol for the next project.
  • Scale Bar
    This command allows the user to insert a scale bar on the project map. Scale bars visually indicate distance and feature size on the map. Note that this command works only to edit the Map Preview’s project map.

This command displays the Scale Bar dialog box that provides different scale bar styles.

Scale Bar Dialog Box


The user can select the scale bar style and click the [OK] button. The software will then prompt the user to click at a location in the Diagram Workspace to place the selected scale bar. Once the user has added a scale bar to the layout, it can be modified. The user can select and drag the scale bar to adjust its position and resize it horizontally to use different gradations. The user can also change the appearance of the scale bar by adjusting the properties for the scale bar using commands in the Properties group of the Home ribbon menu.

Settings Ribbon Menu

The Settings ribbon menu provides commands for adjusting the properties of the drawing canvas grid.

Settings ribbon menu

The following commands are provided in this ribbon menu:

  • Page Color
    This command displays a color palette that allows the user to set the diagram canvas page color.
  • Show Grid
    This command shows and hides the background grid.
  • Grid Color
    This command displays a color palette that allows the user to set the background color of the grid.
  • Snap to Elements
    This command snaps the elements together using the connection points.
  • Snap to Grid
    This command snaps the elements to the background of the grid.
  • Export Image
    This command displays the Windows Save As dialog box, allowing the user to export the diagram contents to a graphic file.
  • Print
    This command displays the Print Preview dialog box, allowing the user to print the diagram contents.
    Print Preview dialog box

Resizing a Picture, Shape, Text Box, or Other Object

After selecting an object, whether a picture or a text box, the user has several options for resizing the object as described below:

Resize by Dragging

Select the object, move the mouse pointer over one of the handles, and then click and drag the mouse.

Dragging While Keeping the Center in the Same Place

  1. Select the Object.
  2. Hold down the Ctrl key.
  3. Move the mouse pointer over one of the handles and then click and drag the mouse.
  4. Release the mouse button before you release the Ctrl key.

Dragging While Maintaining the Object’s Proportions

  1. Select the object.
  2. Hold down the Shift key.
  3. Move the mouse pointer over one of the corner handles and then click and drag the mouse.
  4. Release the mouse button before you release the Shift key.

Dragging While Maintaining the Proportions and Keeping the Center in the Same Place

  1. Hold down the Ctrl+Shift keys.
  2. Move the mouse pointer over one of the handles and then click and drag the mouse.
  3. Release the mouse before you release the Ctrl+Shift keys.
Integration & Imports › Linking to HEC-RAS

Linking Flow Data from HEC-HMS to RAS

Output data from the HEC-HMS model are stored in files with a *.dss extension. DSS stands for HEC Data Storage System which is specifically designed to store data for applications in water resources. The HEC-DSS system can store almost any type of data, but it is most efficient at storing large blocks of data (e.g., time-series data). GeoHECRAS can read data from a DSS file, whereas GeoHECHMS is capable of writing data in a DSS file format. Thus, a DSS file can be used to transfer data between both software, allowing the user to export flow data from a HEC-HMS model and use it in HEC-RAS modeling. As a result, HEC-DSS makes it easier to use observed data and communicate information between software. Click here to download the HEC-DSS software.

The following sections of the article describe how to export the flow data from a HEC-HMS model and use it for HEC-RAS modeling.

Locating a DSS File in File Explorer

Flow data from a HEC-HMS model is automatically stored in a DSS file associated with the project’s scenario once the HEC-HMS analysis is complete.

Follow the steps given below to locate the DSS file:

  1. After running the analysis, right-click on the current project tab and select Open Folder Containing Project from the displayed context menu, as shown below.
    Project tab context menu
  2. The file explorer will be displayed. Double-click on the project folder to open. The project folder will be named as Project Name_HMS.
    Project folder is named as Project Name_HMS
  3. Now, locate the DSS file associated with the project’s scenario. The content of this file can be viewed using the HEC-DSS software, as explained in the next section of the article.
    Locate the DSS file associated with the project’s scenario

Viewing a DSS File in HEC-DSS

Follow the steps given below to open the *.dss file using HEC-DSS software:

  1. Run the HEC-DSS application. From the File menu, select the Open command. The Open HEC-DSS File dialog box will be displayed.
    Open HEC-DSS File
  2. Browse to the folder containing the DSS file associated with the project’s scenario.
    Open HEC-DSS File dialog box
  3. After selecting the DSS file, the flow output of the HEC-HMS model will be displayed in tabular form, as shown below.
    HEC-DSSVue dialog box
  4. To see the plot for a particular pathname, select the desired row, right-click, and select Plot from the displayed context menu. The plot window will be displayed in a new window.
    Plot window
  5. To see the tabulated results for a particular pathname, select the desired row, right-click and select Tabulate from the displayed context menu. The tabulated results will be displayed in a new window.
    Tabulated results window

Importing Data from a DSS File to a HEC-RAS model

Follow the steps below to import a DSS file in GeoHECRAS:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Unsteady Flow Data command.
    Unsteady Flow Data Command
  2. The Unsteady Flow Data dialog box will be displayed. Select the desired boundary condition type using the dropdown combo boxes provided under the Boundary Condition column. After selecting the boundary condition type, click on the [Define] button to define the boundary condition. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about boundary conditions.
    Unsteady Flow Data dialog box - [Define] button
  3. Enable the DSS Hydrograph Data (Incremental) section and then click the [Select...] button to select a DSS file.
    Flow Hydrograph dialog box
  4. The DSS Data File & Path dialog box will be displayed. Click the [Select...] button and browse the folder containing the DSS file associated with the HEC-HMS scenario.
    DSS Data File & Path dialog box
  5. Once a DSS file is selected, a list of all the DSS pathnames within that file will show up in the table. The user can select the desired data path from the table and then click the [Add to Selected Data Paths] button to add the selected data path in the Selected Data Paths list. The dialog box also displays the graphical plot for the selected data path in the DSS data path plot section as shown below.
    Add to Selected Data Paths button
    Refer to this article in our knowledge base to view data contained in an DSS Data File and Path dialog box.
  6. Now, click the [OK] button
  7. The Flow Hydrograph dialog box will be redisplayed. Click the [OK] button.
    Flow Hydrographs dialog box
  8. The Unsteady Flow Data dialog box will be redisplayed. The user can define more boundary conditions as required. Click the [OK] button and then run the analysis.
    Unsteady Flow Data dialog box [OK] button
Integration & Imports › Flow Paths

Upstream Flow Paths Command

The Upstream Flow Paths command can be used to compute and trace the upstream overland flow path from a user-defined terminus point(s) to a point of intersection with the current subbasin upstream boundary.

This command is also useful in determining the longest flow path from anywhere within the subbasin, which can then be used to define the TOC (Time of Concentration) or Lag Time flow path for the subbasin. However, the true TOC flow path may not be obvious for various reasons and using this command alone may be insufficient to represent the situation on the ground. There may be roadways, bridges, culverts, buildings, and other manmade and natural obstructions that may alter the actual TOC flow path of a subbasin, but which may not be immediately apparent from the elevation grid. However, the user can piece together a true representative TOC flow path by using parts of the upstream flow paths created using this command, raindrop flow paths, and manually-digitized flow lines where obstructions exist. Refer to this article to learn more about the Automated Flow Paths command.

To use the Upstream Flow Paths command, follow these steps:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Upstream Flow Paths command.Select the Upstream Flow Paths command
  2. The Upstream Flow Paths dialog box will be displayed.Upstream Flow Paths dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Upstream Flow Paths command and interact with the above dialog box.

Terrain Elevation Source

In this section, the user can select the elevation terrain surface from the Terrain surface dropdown combo box, which lists the terrain surface(s) present in the project. By default, the terrain surface selected in the Scenario Manager dialog box will be selected in the Terrain Surface dropdown combo box.

Selecting HEC-HMS Subbasins to Compute Flow Paths

The Select HEC-HMS Subbasins to Compute Flow Paths section controls which subbasins should have the longest flow paths computed. The section contains both All subbasins and Select subbasins options.

Select HEC-HMS Subbasins to Compute Flow Paths section

All Subbasins

The All subbasins entry causes the software to compute the longest flow paths for all subbasins within the HEC-HMS layer.

Selecting Subbasins

The Select subbasins entry allows the user to interactively select subbasin polygons from the HEC-HMS layer on the Map View. Clicking the [Pick] button will cause the dialog box to temporarily disappear and will allow the user to select HEC-HMS subbasin polygons from the Map View. The total number of selected subbasin polygons will be displayed in the adjacent read-only entry upon return to the dialog box.

Note that the Upstream Flow Paths command confirms that the selected subbasins overlay the selected elevation grid terrain surface. If not, the software will display the following messages.

If one subbasin was selected:

Upstream Flow Paths dialog box 1


If more than one subbasin was selected:

Upstream Flow Paths dialog box 2

Terrain Surface Processing Limits

This section is used to select the limits of the terrain surface over which the upstream flow paths will be computed.

Terrain Surface Processing Limits


The following options are available to define the extents of the terrain surface processing limits:

  • Elevation source extents: Selecting this option will compute upstream flow paths over the same extents as the original terrain surface data. By default, this option is enabled.
  • User-defined limits: After selecting this option, click the adjacent [Pick] button to draw the rectangular extents on the Map View, which will define terrain processing limits.
  • Assign clipping polygons: After selecting this option, click the adjacent [Pick] button to select polygon shape regions from the Map View, which will define terrain processing limits.

General Specifications

In this section, the user can define the name for the layer group in the Layer group name input field.

General Specifications section


This name identifies the layer group that will be created in the Map Data Layers panel and will contain the upstream overland flow paths. The Delete previously computed overland flow paths checkbox can be used to delete any previously computed upstream flow paths. By default, this checkbox is checked.

Drawing Terminus Points

The Draw Terminus Points section allows the user to draw terminus points. Click the [Draw] button and the dialog box will temporarily disappear, allowing the user to place the terminus point(s) on the Map View.

Drawing Terminius Points on Map View

After drawing the terminus points, the dialog box will be redisplayed, and the number of terminus point(s) drawn will be displayed in the Terminus points read-only field.

Terminus points read-only field

After defining all the required fields, click the [Compute] button. The Upstream Flow Paths confirmation dialog box will be displayed. Click the [Yes] button to compute the flow direction grid. To cancel the process, click the [No] button.

Upstream Flow Paths confirmation dialog box

The terminus point(s) and the computed upstream overland flow path will be displayed on the Map View as shown below.

Computed flow paths

Note that while the computation is running, the [Close] button changes to [Cancel] so that the user can abort the computation process if desired.

Once the upstream flow paths are computed, the Overland Flow Paths layer will be created in the Map Data Layers panel, which contains the Upstream Flow Paths and Terminus layers that reference the computed upstream flow path and selected downstream terminus point.

Map Data Layers panel
Integration & Imports › Flow Paths

Draw and Assign Flow Paths Command

CivilGEO's software allows the user to draw or assign a polyline for each subbasin to function as the overland flow path for computing the SCS TR-55 Time of Concentration / Lag Time.

Lag Time and Time of Concentration (TOC) are two different but related terms that are used in hydrology computations. They represent the time required for runoff to travel from the hydraulically most distant point in the watershed to the outlet. The hydraulically most distant point is the point with the longest travel time to the watershed outlet, but it is not necessarily the point with the longest flow distance to the outlet. It is a function of the topography, hydrologic soil type, and land use within the subbasin. There are many different methods for computing Lag Time and Time of Concentration, but generally the computations are dependent upon slope and character of the subbasin and flow path.
The flow paths can be defined by either drawing or assigning the polyline using the following commands:

  • Draw Flow Paths
  • Assign Flow Paths

Drawing Flow Paths

The Draw Flow Paths command allows the user to draw a polyline on the Map View to be used as a subbasin flow path line for computing the TOC / Lag Time.

Follow the steps below to use the Draw Flow Paths command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Draw Flow Paths command.
    Draw Flow Paths Command
  2. The Draw Flow Paths dialog box will be displayed.
    Draw Flow Paths dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the above dialog box.

Drawing a Subbasin Flow Path Polyline

The Flow path polyline entry specifies whether a flow path line has been drawn. Clicking the [Draw] button causes the dialog box to disappear, at which point the user is then prompted to draw a corresponding subbasin flow path line for computing the TOC.

After drawing the flow path line, the user is immediately returned to the dialog box. The software then determines which subbasin the flow path line corresponds to and displays the subbasin ID in the dialog box.

The user can turn on the Draw curvilinear polyline check box to add the curvilinear segments or can press the [Ctrl] key to enable the straight segments while drawing flow paths.

Note that the Draw Flow Paths command will check whether the drawn polyline is at least 90% contained within a subbasin polygon. If not, then the following informational message is displayed.

Invalid Flow Path

Extracting Elevation Data

The Extract Elevation Data optional section is used to extract elevation from the defined terrain surface.

This option is enabled by default but recalls the user selection at the project level (when the file is saved).
The Terrain surface dropdown combo box only lists elevation grids (i.e., DEMs). By default, it will show the following:

  • Elevation grid if there is only one elevation grid available in the project.
  • Elevation grid associated with the delineation of the subbasins.

Creating SCS TOC Flow Segments

The Create SCS TOC Flow Segments optional section is used to subdivide the assigned flow path into flow segments for assigning SCS TOC. It is enabled by default but recalls the user selection at the project level (when the file is saved).

Create Sheet Flow Segment

The Create sheet flow segment checkbox option will specify that there is a sheet flow segment at the upstream end of the selected TOC flow path. This option provides different ways of computing the sheet flow segment, as detailed below.

  • Fixed distance: This entry allows the user to specify the length to use for the sheet flow segment. By default, the software uses a segment length of 20 ft (or 6 meters). The user can enter a different value or click the […] Measure button to measure sheet flow length from the Map View.
  • Use McCuen-Spiess equation, Manning’s n: This entry allows the user to specify the Manning’s n roughness value and the software will automatically compute the sheet flow length. The default value of this entry is 0.1500. Alternatively, click the adjacent […] button to measure Manning’s n roughness value from Manning’s Roughness table. This equation is used for post-construction conditions. The sheet flow length is computed using the following equation.
    Equation

Create Channel Flow Segment

The Create channel flow segment checkbox option will specify that there is a channel flow segment at the downstream end of the selected TOC flow. This option provides different ways of computing the channel flow segment, as detailed below.

  • Fixed distance: This entry allows the user to specify the length to use for the channel flow segment. By default, the software uses a segment length of 100 ft (or 30 meters). The user can enter a different value or click the […] Measure button to measure channel flow length from the Map View.
  • Maximum shallow concentrated flow distance: This entry allows the user to enter the maximum shallow concentrated flow distance. The default value of this entry is 1000 ft (or 300 meters). The user can also manually enter a value or click the adjacent […] button to measure the maximum shallow concentrated flow distance from the Map View.
  • Percentage of total length: This spin control is used to compute the length of the channel flow segment, based upon a percentage of the total flow path length. This spin control ranges from 1 to 100%, with a default value of 50%.
  • Intersection with routing reach: This option causes the software to compute the channel flow length when the flow path polyline intersects the routing reach polyline.

Note that the flow path default flow type is shallow concentrated flow.

Once all the data has been defined in the Draw Flow Paths dialog box, click the [Apply] button. The software will then create a corresponding subbasin flow path line for computing the TOC / Lag Time.

Assigning Flow Paths

The Assign Flow Paths command allows the user to assign a polyline as subbasin flow path line for computing the TOC / Lag Time.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Flow Paths command:

  1. From the Watershed ribbon menu, select the Assign Flow Paths command.
    Assign Flow Paths Command
  2. The Assign Flow Paths dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign Flow Paths dialog box

The following sections describe how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting a Subbasin Flow Path Polyline

The Flow path polyline entry specifies whether a flow path line has been selected. Clicking the [Pick] button causes the dialog box to disappear, at which point the user is then prompted to select a corresponding subbasin flow path line for computing the TOC.

After selecting the flow path line, the user is immediately returned to the dialog box. The software then determines which subbasin the flow path line corresponds to and displays the subbasin ID in the dialog box.

Note that the Assign Flow Path command will check whether the drawn polyline is at least 90% contained within a subbasin polygon. If more than 10% of the line resides outside of the subbasin, the following informational dialog box is displayed, and the selected polyline is not assigned as a flow path polyline.

Invalid Flow Path


Note that the Extract Elevation Data and Create SCS TOC Flow Segments sections of the Assign Flow Paths command are similar to the Draw Flow Paths command, both of which have been explained in the previous sections of this article.

Once all the data has been defined in the Assign Flow Paths dialog box, click the [Apply] button. The software will then assign the selected polyline as a corresponding subbasin flow path line for computing the TOC / Lag Time.

Manning's Data & Roughness › Manning's Editing

Assign Manning's Data (HEC-HMS)

The Assign Manning’s Data command of GeoHECHMS software is used to extract and assign the Manning’s roughness values to the cross sections.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Manning's Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Cross Sections dropdown menu, and then select the Assign Manning's Data command.
    Assign Manning's Data command
  2. The Assign Manning's Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Assign Manning's Data dialog box

The following sections describe how to use the Assign Manning’s Data command and interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Reaches

The Select Reaches section allows the user to select single or multiple reaches defined in the project for assigning manning's roughness. The user can use the checkbox contained within the column header to select and deselect all the reaches.

If a reach is already selected on the Map View before running this command, the same reach will be shown selected within the table. The user can also select/deselect the desired reach by checking/unchecking the checkboxes corresponding to each reach.

Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select reach(s) from the Map View. On clicking the [Pick] button, the dialog box will temporarily disappear, and a prompt will be displayed on the status bar instructing the user to select the reach on the Map View. After selecting the desired reach(s), press the [Enter] key or right-click and choose Done from the displayed context menu. The dialog box will be redisplayed, and the total number of selected reach(s) will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.

Selecting reaches

Notes:

  • The user can select multiple reaches from the Map View before running the Assign Manning’s Data command by holding the [Ctrl] key while selecting the desired reaches.
  • Only reaches with irregular cross sections are listed.
  • Multiple reaches that reference the same irregular cross section geometry are not listed.

NLCD Layer

The NLCD Layer displays both natural and man-made land cover using the most recent national land cover developed by the Multi-Resolution Land Characteristics (MRLC) Consortium. The NLCD Layer panel contains the NLCD Land Cover Database (USA) checkbox option. By default, this checkbox is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Select the NLCD Land Cover Database (USA) checkbox to enable the content of this panel. This optional section allows the user to assign Manning’s roughness values to the selected reach(s) based on the land use information downloaded from the NLCD map service.

NLCD Layer panel

The Layer cover data source dropdown combo box allows the user to select which land use data source to utilize for the newly created layer. By default, the software selects the most recent land use data. The following options are available in the dropdown combo box:

  • NLCD Land Cover 2021
  • NLCD Land Cover 2019
  • NLCD Land Cover 2016
  • NLCD Land Cover 2013
  • NLCD Land Cover 2011
  • NLCD Land Cover 2008
  • NLCD Land Cover 2006
  • NLCD Land Cover 2004
  • NLCD Land Cover 2001
    Layer cover data source dropdown combo box

Note that for countries other than the USA, the software provides similar land cover databases. The content of this data panel will change to represent the one that is available for the project area. Currently, our software supports Africa, Australia, Canada, Europe, India, New Zealand, and the USA land cover database.

The Apply Manning’s coverage data to overbank areas only checkbox option is used to tell the software to not assign channel roughness values (between the bank stations) from the Manning’s area layer. Generally, the channel roughness is uniform along a river or stream, and not defined by coverage area.

The user can click the [Edit] button to display the NLCD Land Cover dialog box that provides an editable data grid, allowing the user to change the Manning’s roughness values of different hydrologic soil groups.

NLCD Land Cover dialog box

After editing the required cell values, the user can click the following buttons:

  • [Default] - This button will restore the default Manning’s roughness values and close the dialog box.
  • [Save] - This button will save the user changes and close the dialog box.
  • [Cancel] - This button will discard any user changes and close the dialog box.

Polygon Layer

The Polygon Layer panel allows the user to map polygon shapefile data as Manning’s roughness data. This panel contains the Polygon Coverage Data (Optional) checkbox option. By default, this checkbox is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Select the Polygon Coverage Data (Optional) checkbox to enable the content of this panel.

Polygon Layer panel

The Manning’s area layer dropdown combo box allows the user to select the layers that contain Manning’s roughness value. This dropdown combo box lists only those shapefile layers that are polygon shapefiles. If no layer is selected, the user can still complete the assignment of Manning’s roughness using the default values.

The Attribute field dropdown combo box allows the user to select the corresponding Manning’s roughness attribute fields contained within the selected shapefile. Note that this dropdown entry can only be available when the polygon shapefiles is selected in the Manning’s area layer dropdown entry.

The Minimum value and Maximum value read-only fields show the minimum and maximum float values contained in the selected attribute layer in the Attribute field dropdown entry. This allows the user to determine if the selected attribute layer is correct. If the selected attribute layer does not contain float values, then these fields show Not Available.

Note that the Apply Manning’s coverage data to overbank areas only checkbox option works similarly to the Apply Manning’s coverage data to overbank areas only checkbox option provided in the NLCD Layer panel.

Channel Values

The Channel Values panel allows the user to control manning’s values for the channel. This panel contains the Channel Manning’s (Optional) checkbox option. By default, this checkbox is disabled (i.e., grayed out). Select the Channel Manning’s (Optional) checkbox to enable the content of this panel.

There are two options for assigning Manning’s roughness. The user can either choose the Set Manning’s to channel center value or the Assign Manning’s value option.

Channel Values panel

The Set Manning’s to channel center value option will set the Manning's n value to a center value for all selected reaches that have more than one n value inside of the channel.

The Assign Manning’s value option allows the user to change any individual Manning’s values for the selected reach(s). By default, the software uses a value of 0.032. The user can also enter a different value or click the […] browse button to display the information table for Manning’s roughness values that can be assigned.

Roughness

The Roughness panel is used to define the default values when a new reach is created on the Map View using the assign or draw commands.

Roughness panel

This panel provides the following fields to define default Manning’s roughness values:

  • The Left overbank Manning’s entry field allows the user to define the default Manning’s roughness to be applied to the left overbank areas (looking in a downstream direction) that do not have Manning’s roughness data defined. By default, the software uses a value of 0.045. The user can also enter a different value or click the […] browse button to display the information table for Manning’s roughness values that can be assigned. A blank entry is not allowed.
  • The Channel Manning’s entry field allows the user to define the default Manning’s roughness to be applied to the channel areas that do not have Manning’s roughness data defined. By default, the software uses a value of 0.032. The user can also enter a different value or click the […] browse button to display the information table for Manning’s roughness values that can be assigned. A blank entry is not allowed.
  • The Right overbank Manning’s entry field allows the user to define the default Manning’s roughness to be applied to the right overbank areas (looking in a downstream direction) that do not have Manning’s roughness data defined. By default, the software uses a value of 0.045. The user can also enter a different value or click the […] browse button to display the information table for Manning’s roughness values that can be assigned. A blank entry is not allowed.

Assigning Manning’s Data

Once the data have been defined in the Assign Manning’s Data dialog box, click the [Assign] button. The software will then extract and assign manning's roughness to each selected reach.

Manning's Data & Roughness › Manning's Editing

Editing Manning’s Data

In GeoHECRAS, the Edit Manning’s Data command is used to manually edit Manning’s roughness so that the computed water surface elevations correspond to observed values.

In GeoHECHMS, the Edit Manning’s Data command is used to edit Manning’s roughness for:

  • Reaches that contain irregular cross sections.
  • Multiple reaches that reference the irregular cross section geometry.
  • Left overbank, channel, and right overbank.

Editing Manning’s Data (HEC-RAS)

Follow the steps below to use the Edit Manning’s Data command in GeoHECRAS:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Manning’s Roughness dropdown menu and select the Edit Manning’s Data command.
    Edit Manning’s Data command (GeoHECRAS)
  2. The Edit Manning’s Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Edit Manning’s Data dialog box (GeoHECRAS)

The following sections describe Edit Manning’s Data command in GeoHECRAS and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Manning’s Roughness Data

This section is used to select the river and the corresponding reach for editing Manning’s data for the associated cross sections. The user can select the river and the reach from the River and Reach dropdown combo boxes, respectively. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to select the river reach from the Map View.

The table under this section displays Manning’s roughness (n) of cross sections associated with each River Station.

The structures such as culverts, lateral structures, and roadway crossings falling within the reach are identified and displayed in the Type column. For identified structures, the corresponding rows for Manning’s values will be disabled.

The dropdown combo box present on the Manning’s Roughness Data section header allows the user to filter Manning’s roughness displayed in the table for different regions. The following dropdown entries are available:

Manning’s roughness for different regions
  • All Subareas
  • Left Overbank
  • Channel
  • Right Overbank
  • Both Overbanks

Note that while drawing a cross section using the Draw Cross Sections command, the table will only display Manning’s n value for left overbank, channel, and right overbank. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about Draw Cross Sections command.

The table will also display Manning’s roughness for additional subareas if different land covers fall over the entire cross section length. The Assign Manning’s Data command gives the option to assign Manning’s roughness based on the NLCD land cover data. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn more about Assign Manning’s Data command.

Color Legend

The color codes for different Manning regions displayed in the Manning’s Roughness Data table are listed in this section.

Color Legend section

Selected Cells Group Editing

This section provides different options for the user to edit Manning’s data. The user can manually edit a single Manning’s cell value, drag and select multiple cells from a table column, and use the following editing options:

Selected Cells Group Editing section
  • No change
    This is the default option. No changes will be made in Manning’s values when this radio button option is selected.
  • Add constant
    Select this radio button option to add a constant value to a group of Manning’s values. The value entered in the adjacent entry field will be added to all the cells that are selected.
  • Multiply by factor
    Select this radio button option to multiply a group of Manning’s values by a factor. The value entered in the adjacent entry field will be multiplied by each of the selected cells’ values.
  • Apply value
    Select this radio button option to set a group of Manning’s values to the same number. The value entered in the adjacent entry field will replace all of the selected values.
    The user can click the […] lookup button to display the Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box, which can be used for reference.
    Manning’s Roughness lookup dialog box

After selecting the desired option and entering the required value, click the [Apply Change] button to accept the changes in the data table.

Once all the editing is done, click the [OK] button to save the changes.

Editing Manning’s Data (HEC-HMS)

Follow the steps below to use the Edit Manning’s Data command in GeoHECHMS:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Cross Sections dropdown menu and select the Edit Manning’s Data command.
    Edit Manning’s Data command (GeoHECHMS)
  2. The Edit Manning’s Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Edit Manning’s Data dialog box (GeoHECHMS)

The following sections describe Edit Manning’s Data command in GeoHECHMS and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Manning’s Roughness Data

The data table in this section displays Manning’s roughness of Left Overbank, Channel, and Right Overbank for every cross section associated with a Reach. In addition, the data table also displays the Element Shape of every cross section.

Selected Cells Group Editing

The options and functionality of this section are similar to the Selected Cell Group Editing section as described above for HEC-RAS.

Once all the editing is done, click the [Assign] button to assign the changes.

Troubleshooting & Editing › Restricted Web Services

Troubleshooting Restricted Web Services

CivilGEO software utilizes various web services to provide high-quality geospatial data such as base maps, digital elevation models (DEMs), floodplain data, etc. to enhance data visualization and analysis for engineering projects.

This article describes a scenario in which the CivilGEO software displays the following error message due to inaccessible web services:

Aerial Map Nokia dialog box

If the software is unable to connect to web services and you are receiving the above error message, one of the following may be the cause:

  1. There is a network connectivity issue.
  2. The web services used by CivilGEO software are not operational and are facing downtime/outage.
  3. Antivirus/Firewall settings are blocking CivilGEO software from accessing the web service.

Prerequisite

Checking the Network Status

Make certain that your computer has a valid internet connection.

You can use the built-in tools in Windows to see if the computer is connected to a network, and if the network has internet access. You can also ping a website or an IP address from the command prompt or the terminal to test the connection speed and reliability. If network status is fine, you should check if there are any issues that may affect internet connectivity, such as proxy, firewall, or VPN settings. You may need to adjust or disable these settings to allow the application to connect successfully.

Checking for Web Service Downtime/Outage

To check the operational status of web services, select the Web Data Services Health command from the Help ribbon menu.

Web Data Services Health command

Clicking on the Web Data Services Health command displays the webpage that shows the real-time status of online web services used by CivilGEO software.

If web services are experiencing outage, as shown below, then the user should wait for the web services to become operational.

Web services status

If all web services are operational and the user continues to receive error messages, then try the solutions listed below or contact your network administrator.

Temporarily Disabling Windows Firewall

The user can temporarily disable the Windows firewall to ensure that it is not interfering with the connection to web services.

Follow the steps below to temporarily disable the Windows firewall:

  1. Open the Start menu and search “Firewall & network protection”. Then, either press the [Enter] key or click on [Open], as shown below.
    Start menu
  2. From the displayed Windows Security settings page, click on the Public network option.
    Windows Security settings page
  3. In the Public network settings page, turn off the Microsoft Defender Firewall toggle button to disable the Windows firewall. Note that this option may be disabled if the user does not have administrator rights to turn off/on the Windows firewall.
    Public network settings page

Temporarily Disabling Antivirus

Sometimes web service connectivity issues may occur due to antivirus software. To resolve this issue, the user can temporarily disable the antivirus software.

The following reference links provide instructions on how to disable some of the popular antivirus software:

  • Avast
  • AVG Antivirus
  • Bit Defender
  • McAfee
  • Norton

Whitelisting Map Service URLs

You should also make sure that your security software is not blocking or quarantining the map services that you want to use. You may need to add an exception or whitelist these services in your security software settings.

Contact your network administrator to whitelist the below URLs:

unknown node

This article should troubleshoot any web services-related issues you may encounter. If you are still having issues, contact CivilGEO technical support. Our engineers will be glad to assist you further.

Troubleshooting & Editing › Global Editing

Global Edit Command

The Global Edit command allows the user to perform bulk editing of model elements contained within the project based upon specific criteria.

To edit multiple elements, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Global Editing dropdown menu and select the Global Edit command.
    Global Edit command
  2. The Global Edit dialog box will be displayed.
    Global Edit dialog box
    Note that the Edit panel is disabled if there are no elements preselected on the Map View. However, the user can switch to the Find panel to select elements to be edited and then switch back to the Edit panel. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Find panel to select elements.
  3. From the Property dropdown combo box, select the property to be edited.
    Property dropdown combo box
  4. From the Change by dropdown combo box, select the operation function. The dropdown combo box provides an option to add, divide, multiply, replace, or subtract the existing value of the property.
    Change by dropdown combo box
  5. Enter the value that should be added, divided, multiplied, replaced, or subtracted to the existing value for the selected element in With field.
  6. Alternatively, a second editing section can be used to make additional edits to the element set. Check the Edit action #2 checkbox to enable this section.
    Edit action #2 checkbox
  7. Select the property and operation function and then specify the value(s) that should be added, divided, multiplied, replaced, or subtracted as shown in steps 3–5.
  8. Click the [Preview] button to see the preview of the element’s properties that will be modified.
    [Preview] button
  9. The Elements updated section will display the preview of the properties with the old value and the new value. In addition, the Status panel will display the number of selected elements that will be modified.
    Status pane
  10. Click the [Apply] button.
    [Apply] button
  11. The Status pane will display the number of modified elements.
    Status pane
Troubleshooting & Editing › Global Editing

Global Find Command

The Global Find command is used to find the stormwater elements contained within the project based on input or output properties. This command saves time by filtering model elements that meet specific criteria and allows the user to zoom to selected elements in the Map View.

To find the elements, follow the steps below:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Global Editing dropdown menu and select the Global Find command.
    Global Editing Dropdown menu - Find Command
  2. The Global Find dialog box will be displayed.Global Find dialog box
  3. From the For all dropdown combo box, check the checkboxes corresponding to the element types to be searched. Note that the listed element types will be those that are present in the current project.
    For all dropdown combo box options
  4. From the Property dropdown combo box, select the input or output property of the selected element type(s).Property dropdown combo box optionsNote that if the simulation results are not available, then the output properties will not be listed.
  5. From the Current value dropdown combo box, select one of the available comparison filter operators:
    • Between
    • Not Between
    • Equal To
    • Is Empty
    • Not Equal To
    • Greater Than
    • Less Than
    • Less Than or Equal To
    • Greater Than or Equal To

    Note that the list of comparison filter operators’ changes based on the selected property.

    Current value dropdown - list of comparison operators

    If the ‘is empty’ filter option is selected, then the adjacent input field will be hidden.

    Current value dropdown - is empty filter option

    The second input field is available only when the ‘between’ or ‘not between’ comparison filter operators are selected.

    Current value dropdown - ‘between’ or ‘not between’ filter option
  6. In the value field(s), enter the value(s) to compare against.
  7. Optionally, the second condition section can be used to further narrow down the search results by including additional search criteria. Check the Condition #2 checkbox to enable this section.Condition #2 checkbox
  8. Select the logical connective (and / or) to define the join condition of the search results from Condition #1 and Condition #2 sections.Condition #2 checkbox dropdown options
  9. Select the property and comparison filter operator and then provide value(s) to compare against as shown in steps 4–6.
  10. Click the [Find] button.[Find] button
  11. The Elements found section will display the list of found elements.Elements found section
  12. After finding the preferred element(s), the user can then select any of the listed elements and click the [Zoom To] button to zoom to the extent of selected element in the Map View. This is especially useful when the model contains numerous subbasins, reaches, and junctions.[Zoom To] button

Note that the user can also preselect elements from the Map View and then apply the Global Find command to the selected subset of elements.

Troubleshooting & Editing › Global Editing

Global Editing Command

The Global Editing command allows users to find elements, edit them in bulk, and copy them from one scenario (plan) to other existing scenarios. This command can be used for all available HEC-HMS element types—subbasins, reaches, nodes, junctions, storage areas, diversions, sources, and sinks.

The Global Editing command is particularly useful for engineers who want to study and visualize the effects of modifications made to a model. This command enables engineers to make more timely and accurate design decisions.

The Global Editing dropdown combo box is comprised of three commands: Global Find, Global Edit, and Global Copy.

Global Editing dropdown menu

The Global Find, Global Edit, and Global Copy commands work alongside each other, allowing the user to quickly find elements that meet specific criteria and then make edits and/or copy them to other existing scenarios.

Preselecting Elements from Map View

The user can choose a collection of elements from the Map View for global editing using polygon select or click and drag commands. The user can then define the search, edit, and copy criteria, which will then only be applied to the selected subset of elements.

To preselect elements using the polygon select command, hold down the [CTRL] key and click on the elements to select them. The selected elements will be highlighted.

To preselect the elements using the click and drag command, follow the steps below:

  1. Click on a point on the Map View, hold down the mouse button, and drag the cursor to another location.Selecting Map View elements
  2. On releasing the mouse button, everything from the start to the end of the drag will be selected (Highlighted).Elements selected on Map View

Global Find

The Global Find command allows the user to search elements based upon an input or output property. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Global Find command.

Global Edit

The Global Edit command allows the user to edit elements based upon specific criteria. Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Global Edit command.

Global Copy

The Global Copy command allows the user to copy project elements from one scenario to other existing scenarios of the same project or between two separate (loaded) projects as long as the two projects have the same coordinate reference system (CRS). Refer to this article in our knowledge base to learn how to use the Global Copy command.

Troubleshooting & Editing › Elevation Assignment

Assign Elevations Command

In GeoHECHMS, the user can assign elevations to the junctions, diversions, sources, and sinks elements by using the following commands:

  • Assign Junction Elevations
  • Assign Diversion Elevations
  • Assign Source Elevations
  • Assign Sink Elevations

The following sections describe how to assign elevations to the junctions, diversions, sources, and sinks.

Assigning Junction Elevations

The Assign Junction Elevations command is used to assign invert elevations to the selected junction(s). This command uses the elevation terrain surface to compute the invert elevation of an individual junction(s) with respect to the terrain surface present in the model.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Junction Elevations command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Routing Junctions dropdown menu and then select the Assign Junction Elevations command.Assign-Elevations-Imge-1.png
  2. The Assign Junction Elevations dialog box will be displayed.Assign Junction Elevations dialog box
  3. The Select Junctions section lists the available junction(s) in the project. To select the desired junction(s), check the adjacent checkbox entry. Alternatively, the user can click the [Pick] button to manually select the junction from the Map View and then press the [Enter] key or right-click and select Done from the displayed context menu to complete the selection. The number of selected junction(s) will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field as shown below.Total selected read-only field
  4. From the Extract Elevation Data section, select the desired Terrain elevation source from the list of supported surface types as shown below.
    Terrain elevation source dropdown
    Note that if LandXML Data or TIN Surface is selected as the surface type, different options will be provided to specify additional elevation data information. In addition, if the selected terrain elevation source (e.g., LandXML Data) is not available in the model, the [Assign] button will get disabled (i.e., grayed out) as shown below.
    Terrain elevation source dropdown LandXML Data option
  5. From the Elevation grid layer dropdown menu, select an elevation layer contained within the project.
    Elevation grid layer dropdown
  6. The user may also check the Apply elevation offset option before assigning the junction elevations. For example, the user can define a negative offset value to lower the junction for specific circumstances, such as in the case of a manhole bottom elevation.
  7. After defining all the options, click the [Assign] button, and the software will compute and display the invert elevation for the selected junction(s).[Assign] button

Similarly, the user can also assign elevations to the selected diversion(s), source(s), and sink(s) using the Assign Diversion Elevations command, Assign Source Elevations command, and Assign Sink Elevations command.

Assigning Diversion Elevations

The Assign Diversion Elevations command is used to assign elevations to the selected diversion structure(s). This command uses the elevation terrain surface to compute the elevation of an individual diversion(s) with respect to the terrain surface present in the model.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Diversion Elevations command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Diversions dropdown menu and then select the Assign Diversion Elevations command.Assign Diversion Elevations command
  2. The Assign Diversion Elevations dialog box will be displayed.Assign Diversion Elevations dialog box

Selecting Diversions

The Select Diversions section lists the available diversion structure(s) in the project. Select the desired diversion structure(s) either by checking the adjacent checkbox entry with each diversion structure or manually from the Map View using the [Pick] button. Once finished, the number of selected diversion structure(s) will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.

Extracting Elevation Data

The Extract Elevation Data section allows the user to extract the elevation profile from the selected elevation data source. By default, this section is enabled. If disabled, the options contained within this section will be unavailable (i.e., grayed out).

After defining all the options, click the [Assign] button, and the software will compute and display the elevation for the selected diversion structure(s).

Assigning Source Elevations

The Assign Source Elevations command is used to assign source elevations to the selected source(s). This command uses the elevation terrain surface to compute the elevation of an individual source(s) with respect to the terrain surface present in the model.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Source Elevations command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Sources dropdown menu and then select the Assign Source Elevations command.Assign Source Elevations command
  2. The Assign Source Elevations dialog box will be displayed.Assign Source Elevations dialog box

Selecting Sources

The Select Sources section lists the available source(s) in the project. Select the desired source(s) either by checking the adjacent checkbox entry with each source or manually from the Map View using the [Pick] button. Once finished, the number of selected diversion(s) will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.

Extracting Elevation Data

The Extract Elevation Data section allows the user to extract the elevation profile from the selected elevation data source. By default, this section is enabled. If disabled, the options contained within this section will be unavailable (i.e., grayed out).

After defining all the options, click the [Assign] button, and the software will compute and display the elevation for the selected source(s).

Assigning Sink Elevations

The Assign Sink Elevations command is used to assign sink elevations to the selected sink(s). This command uses the elevation terrain surface to compute the elevation of an individual sink(s) with respect to the terrain surface present in the model.

Follow the steps below to use the Assign Sink Elevations command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click on the Sinks dropdown menu and then select the Assign Sink Elevations command.Assign Sink Elevations command
  2. The Assign Sink Elevations dialog box will be displayed.Assign Sink Elevations dialog box

Selecting Sinks

The Select Sinks section lists the available sink(s) in the project. Select the desired sink(s) either by checking the adjacent checkbox entry with each sink or manually from the Map View using the [Pick] button. Once finished, the number of selected sink(s) will be displayed in the Total selected read-only field.

Extracting Elevation Data

The Extract Elevation Data section allows the user to extract the elevation profile from the selected elevation data source. By default, this section is enabled. If disabled, the options contained within this section will be unavailable (i.e., grayed out).

After defining all the options, click the [Assign] button, and the software will compute and display the elevation for the selected sink(s).

Other › Pipe Network

Export Pipe Network Command

A pipe network is used to manage a collection of pipes and structures that are associated with each other to represent a pipe system. In GeoHECHMS, the user can use the Export Pipe Network command to export the pipe network data. This command exports a pipe and manhole network to a LandXML file format. Saving the pipe network data in a LandXML file allows the user to use it with other applications effortlessly.

The following list details the conversions that will occur when exporting a pipe network to a LandXML file.

unknown node

Notes:

  • If a reach element does not have a circular shape, the reach will not be exported.
  • If a junction is not attached to a reach, the junction will not be exported.

Follow the steps below to use the Export Pipe Network command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Export Data dropdown menu and then select the Export Pipe Network command.
    Export Pipe Network input ribbon menu command
  2. The Export Pipe Network file open dialog box will be displayed.
  3. From the displayed dialog box, browse to the location to export the pipe network data, enter the file name (it should have a file extension of .xml), and then click the [Save] button.
    Export Pipe Network file open dialog box
  4. The software will then export the pipe and manhole network to a LandXML file.

Note that when this command is selected, the software first checks to see if there is any HEC-HMS data already loaded. If the software does not find any HEC-HMS model data in the current project, the following informational dialog box will be displayed.

Export Pipe Network informational dialog box
Other › Pipe Network

Import Pipe Network Command

The pipe network in AutoCAD Civil 3D consists of varying sizes of pipes, structures, or both pipes and structures. A pipe network is used to manage a collection of pipes and structures that are associated with each other to represent a pipe system.

The pipe network comprises the following components:

  • Pipe: Pipes are structures or links that convey water from one point in the network to another. It is used in utility networks, such as sewer and irrigation systems. In a drawing, the pipe is defined by the shape (circular, elliptical, egg-shaped, or rectangular) and a path (linear or curved).
  • Structure: A structure is a drawing shape that represents manholes, catch basins, and headwalls. Its shape is inherently more complex than pipe shape.
  • Null Structure: It is a special type of structure that is inserted automatically when a pipe is directly connected to another pipe without any structure shape between the two pipes.

The drawing of a pipe network also contains parcels used to describe a property or a spatial area that is defined by boundary edges.

In GeoHECHMS, the user can import the pipe and manhole network created in AutoCAD Civil 3D using the Import Pipe Network command. This command imports pipe and manhole networks using a LandXML file.

The following list details the conversions that will occur when importing a pipe network model:

  • The pipes are imported as reaches with the same lengths, diameters, and slopes. Note that the pipe (linear or curved) represented in a reach will always be a straight line. The length and slope of the pipe will become the reach length and slope.
  • The shape of the reach is always circular, and the flow direction is higher elevation to lower elevation. The pipe end with the lower elevation will be the downstream end of the reach.
  • The pipe diameter and roughness will become the reach diameter and roughness.
  • The manholes are imported as junctions. The junction will be placed at the end point of each pipe. Each junction will have an invert elevation.
  • If the LandXML file does not contain any junction data, a dummy junction (null structure) is inserted automatically. The dummy junction will have an invert elevation equal to the next downstream pipe’s upstream end invert elevation.
  • The parcels (drainage areas) are imported as subbasins. These subbasins will not inherit any attributes from AutoCAD Civil 3D. The software just uses the parcels' geometry and specifies the default values.

Follow the steps below to use the Import Pipe Network command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, click the Import Data dropdown menu and then select the Import Pipe Network command.Import Pipe Network Command
  2. The Import Pipe Network file open dialog box will be displayed. This dialog box allows the user to browse to the location where the LandXML file is located.
  3. Select the LandXML file (it will have a file extension of .xml) and click the [Open] button.Import pipe network file open dialog box
  4. The software will then import the LandXML data and create a network model from this data, as shown below.
    Pipe Networks in the Map View
  5. After importing the pipe network, the user can make changes to the network model such as pipe sizes, inverts elevations, etc. to get a working model.

Note that when this command is selected, the software first checks to see if there is any HEC-HMS data already loaded. If the software finds any HEC-HMS model data in the current project, the following informational dialog box will be displayed.

Import pipe network informational dialog box
Other › Conflate Point Data

Conflate Point Data Command (HEC-HMS)

In GeoHECHMS software, the Conflate Point Data command is used to map elevation point data to adjacent cross sections that are within a buffer region. This is especially helpful in projects where there is no cross section bathymetry data available for the cutting of cross sections. This command works with XYZ point files, AutoCAD drawings, and GIS point shapefiles.

Follow the steps below to use the Conflate Point Data command:

  1. From the Input ribbon menu, select the Cross Sections dropdown menu and then select the Conflate Point Data command.
    Conflate Point Data command
  2. The Conflate Point Data dialog box will be displayed.
    Conflate Point Data dialog box

The following sections describe the Conflate Point Data command and how to interact with the above dialog box.

Selecting Cross Sections

This section is used to manually select the cross sections for mapping elevation point data. If a cross section is already selected on the Map View prior to running this command, the same cross section will be shown selected within the table.

Alternatively, click the [Pick] button to interactively select the cross sections from the Map View. Clicking the [Select All] button causes all the cross sections to be selected. The Total selected read-only field will show the number of selected cross sections.

Note: The user can click the [Clear All] button to cancel all the previous selections and redo the entire process.

Point Data Source

This section is used to define the survey cross section point data source to be used for mapping elevation point data. Depending upon the point data source type that is selected, different options are provided to specify additional point data information.

Point Data Source

The user can select from the following survey cross section point data available in the Point source dropdown combo box:

  • CAD Drawing
  • GIS Points
  • Point Elevation Data

Filter Point Data

This optional section allows the user to sort survey cross section point data based upon attribute type. The user can select from the following attribute types available in the Point code attribute dropdown combo box:

  • Desc
  • Link
  • Name

Clicking the [Select All] button causes all the survey cross section point codes to be selected. Clicking the [Clear All] button causes all the survey cross section point codes to be deselected.

Cross Section Conflation Parameters

This section allows the user to define the buffer distance for the selected cross sections, which identifies where the surveyed cross section data should be snapped to the cross sections in the Cross section buffer distance entry field.

Cross Section Conflation Parameters

Snapping of survey data can be either perpendicular to the cross section or parallel to the river reach polyline. The assignment of the surveyed cross section data can be assigned based upon the following methods listed under the Point assignment to cross section dropdown combo box:

  • Parallel to Reach
  • Perpendicular to Cross Section

Cross Section Region Conflation Control

This section allows the user to control the extent of the surveyed cross section data to be assigned as geometry data to the selected cross sections.

Cross Section Region Conflation Control

The user can choose from the following options available in the Conflate cross section geometry for dropdown combo box:

  • Both Overbanks
  • Channel Only
  • Entire Cross Section
  • Left Overbank Only
  • Right Overbank Only

The Replace existing overlapping geometry data checkbox option allows the user to replace the existing cross section geometry data with the surveyed cross section data.

After defining all the required data, click the [OK] button and the software will map elevation point data to adjacent cross sections that are within a buffer region.

Products

  • Free Trial
  • GeoSTORM
  • GeoHECRAS
  • GeoHECHMS

Customers

  • Customer Portal Login
  • Customer Reviews
  • Customer Stories
  • Customer Videos
  • Case Studies
  • Wall of Love

Training

  • Training Classes
  • Training Webinars
  • Product Tutorials
  • Engineering Resources

Company

  • About Us
  • Contact
  • Privacy Center
  • Terms of Use
  • Brand Assets

Support

  • Knowledge Base
  • Contact Support
  • Feature Requests
  • General Feedback

Contact Us

  • info@civilgeo.com
  • +1 608-729-5100
CivilGEO United States
708 Heartland TrailSuite 3000Madison, WI 53717-2174Tel: 608-729-5100 or 800-488-4110
G2 Best Software 2026 — Top 50 CAD PLM ProductsAutodesk Authorized DeveloperFind us on Ariba Network
Copyright © 2026 CivilGEO, Inc. All rights reserved. The CivilGEO logo, “GeoSTORM”, “GeoHECHMS”, “GeoHECRAS”, and “Ready To Engineer” are registered trademarks of CivilGEO, Inc. All other brands, company names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.